UPGRADE AND REPLACE BUILDING 123 STEAM LINE PIPING …

UPGRADE AND REPLACE BUILDING 123

STEAM LINE PIPING AND INSULATION Project No. 695-17-103

For the

Department of Veterans Affairs

Clement J. Zablocki Veterans Medical Center 5000 West National Avenue

Milwaukee, WI. 53295

PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS Bid Documents

February 15, 2017

GUIDON DESIGN, INC.

PROJECT CONTACTS:

OWNER: CLEMENT J. ZABLOCKI VA MEDICAL CENTER Attn: Kevin Matthews 5000 West National Avenue Attn: Facility Management Division Building 70, Room 250E Milwaukee, WI 53295 Phone: (414) 384-2000 x45723 email: [email protected]

CIVIL ENGINEER: GUIDON DESIGN, INC. Attn: Kyle Cyr 905 North Capitol Avenue Suite 100 Indianapolis, IN 46204 Phone: (317) 800-6388 x110 email: [email protected]

MECHANICAL ENGINEER: RING & DUCHATEAU, LLP Attn: Josh Nickols 17400 West Capitol Drive Brookfield, WI 53405 Phone: (414) 778-7421 email: [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]



Milwaukee VAMC February 15, 2017 Upgrade and Replace Building 123 Bid Set Submission Steam Line Piping and Insulation Project No. 695-17-103

00 01 10-1

DEPARTMENT OF VETERANS AFFAIRSVHA MASTER SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 00 01 10

DIVISION 00 - SPECIAL SECTIONS DATE

00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets 07-1500 31 00 Summary Report VA Hospital Utility Line Openings

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 00 00 General Requirements 11-1501 01 10 1HR 1 Hour Construction Smoke Barrier 03-1601 01 10 FSS Fire Safety and Control 11-1501 01 10 IC Infection Control 03-1601 01 10 SN Special Notes 07-1601 12 16 Work Schedule 11/1501 32 16.15 Project Schedules (Small Projects – Design/Bid/Build 11/1501 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 07-1501 35 26 Safety Requirements 04-15

01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services 06-1601 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls 01-1101 74 19 Construction Waste Management 09-1301 74 19 A Construction Waste Management Appendix

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 Demolition 02-1502 42 00 Cutting, Removal, Demolition, Restoration and Patching 11-15

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 12-15

DIVISION 05 – METALS

05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 07-14

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 13 52 Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing 08-16

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 06 00 Schedule for Finishes 04-15

Milwaukee VAMC February 15, 2017 Upgrade and Replace Building 123 Bid Set Submission Steam Line Piping and Insulation Project No. 695-17-103

00 01 10-2

09 91 00 Painting 01-16 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 11 Requirements for Electrical Installations 01-16 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 07-13 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 12-12 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 05-14 26 05 41 Underground Electrical Construction 12-12 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 01-16 26 29 21 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 12-12 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting 11-14 DIVISION 31 – EEARTHWORK 31 20 00 Earthwork 07-16 31 23 19 Dewatering 10-12 31 23 23.33 Flowable Fill 10-12 DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 05 23 Cement and Concrete for Exterior Improvements 08-16 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 09-15 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 08-16 32 90 00 Planting 08-16 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 10 00 Water Utilities 01-14 33 63 00 Steam Energy Distribution 06-13

Milwaukee VAMC February 15, 2017

Upgrade and Replace Building 123 Bid Set Submission

Steam Line Piping and Insulation Project No. 695-17-103

00 01 15 - 1

SECTION 00 01 15

LIST OF DRAWINGS

The drawings listed below accompanying this specification form a part of the

contract.

Drawing No. Title

GI100 Cover Sheet

GI101 General Notes

GI102 Maintenance of Traffic

VF101 Topographic Survey

CS100 Demolition and Restoration Plan

CS500 Site Restoration Details

CU100 Overall Site Map

CU101 Plan and Profile Sta 0+00 to 2+00



CU250 Existing Steam Pit S6 Demolition Plan and

Sections

CU251 Existing Steam Pit S6 New Construction Plan and

Sections

CU252 New Steam Pit S7 New Construction Plan Sections

CU253 Building 123 Mechanical Room Demolition Plan and

Sections

CU254 Building 123 Mechanical Room New Construction Plan

and Sections

CU500 Steam Details

CU501 Steam Details

MU000 Overall Site Utility Plan

MU250 Existing Steam Pit S6 Demolition Plan and Sections

MU251 Existing Steam Pit S6 New Construction Plan and

Sections

MU252 New Steam Pit S7 New Construction Plan and Sections

MU253 Building 123 Mechanical Room Demolition Plan and

Sections

MU254 Building 123 Mechanical Room Demolition Plan and

Sections

Milwaukee VAMC February 15, 2017

Upgrade and Replace Building 123 Bid Set Submission

Steam Line Piping and Insulation Project No. 695-17-103

00 01 15 - 2

MU255 Building 123 Mechanical Room New Construction Plan

and Sections

MU500 Steam Details

EU001 Symbols, Abbreviations, Schedules, Details, and Sheet

Index

EU100 Overall Electrical Site Plan

EU250 Steam Pit – New/Existing/Demo Construction Plan –

Electrical

CJ101 Erosion & Sediment Control Plan

CJ501 Erosion & Sediment Control Details

- - - E N D - - -

kcyr

Typewritten Text

kcyr

Typewritten Text

kcyr

Typewritten Text

Section 00 31 00

kcyr

Text Box

Milwaukee VAMC Upgrade and Replace Building 123 Steam Line Piping and Insulation

kcyr

Text Box

February 15, 2017 Bid Set Submission Project No. 695-17-103

© 2017 Microsoft Corporation

kcyr

Oval

kcyr

Oval

kcyr

Oval

kcyr

Oval

kcyr

Oval

kcyr

Oval

kcyr

Oval

kcyr

Oval

kcyr

Oval

kcyr

Oval

kcyr

Text Box

1

kcyr

Text Box

2

kcyr

Text Box

3

kcyr

Text Box

4

kcyr

Text Box

5

kcyr

Text Box

6

kcyr

Text Box

7

kcyr

Text Box

8

kcyr

Text Box

9

kcyr

Text Box

10


February 15, 2017 Bid Set Submission

Project No. 695-17-103

SECTION 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS .............................. .............. 1

1.2 GENERAL INTENTION..................................................................................................................... 1

1.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONTRACTOR ......................................................... 2

1.4 CONSTRUCTION SECURITY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 2

1.5 OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS .......................................................................................... 4

1.6 ALTERATIONS ................................................................................................................................... 9

1.7 DISPOSAL AND RETENTION ..................................................................................................... 10

1.8 PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUI PMENT,

UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS ......................................................................................... 10

1.9 RESTORATION ............................................................................................................................... 11

1.10 PROFESSIONAL SURVEYING SERVICES ............................................................................. 12

1.11 LAYOUT OF WORK ..................................................................................................................... 12

1.12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS .............................................................................................................. 14

1.13 USE OF ROADWAYS ................................................................................................................... 14

1.14 TEMPORARY TOILETS ................................................................... ……………………………………………. 14

1.15 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES ........................................................ 14

1.16 TESTS ........................................................................................................................................... 16

1.17 INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................................................................... 17

1.18 RELOCATED EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................... 18

1.19 CONSTRUCTION SIGN .............................................................................................................. 19

1.20 SAFETY SIGN ............................................................................................................................ 19

1.21 TEMPORARY INTERIOR SIGNAGE ......................................................................................... 19

1.22 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ......................................................................................... 20

1.23 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION DRAWINGS ...................................................................... 24

i




SECTION 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 00 00 - 1

1.1 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Refer to section 01 35 26, SAFETY REQUIREMENTS for safety and infection

control requirements.

1.2 GENERAL INTENTION

A. Contractor shall completely prepare site for building operations,

including demolition and removal of existing structures, and furnish

labor and materials and perform work for UPGRADE AND REPLACE BUILDING

123 STEAM LINE PIPING AND INSULATION as required by drawings and

specifications.

B. Visits to the site by Bidders may be made only as indicated in the

solicitation.

C. Routine Inspections and Maintenance During Construction:

a. Provide routine inspections and maintenance services as

prescribed in Operations & Maintenance manuals required under

this contract.

b. Provide services during construction and until items below are

complete:

i. VA Inspection complete.

ii. Successful commissioning

iii. Training of VA Maintenance staff

iv. Acceptance of VA of each system described in other

specifications related to this contract

01 00 00 - 2




v. O&M Manual submittals received, reviewed, and appro ved

by VA.

D. SUBMIT with O&M Manuals one spreadsheet based compr ehensive summary

schedule of routine inspection and maintenance for systems.

E. All employees of general contractor and subcontract ors shall comply

with VA security management program and obtain perm ission of the VA

police, be identified by project and employer, and restricted from

unauthorized access.

1.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONTRACTOR

All drawings and specifications (contract documents ) may be obtained from

the FedBizOps website where the solicitation is pos ted and they will

also be posted on VAMC Milwaukee’s file sharing sit e “Buzzsaw” for

contractor use. Additional copies will be the respo nsibility and

expense of the contractor(s).

A. In the case of conflicts or discrepanciesw within o r among the Contract

Drawings, the better quality, more stringent requir ements or greater

quantity of work, as determined by the Government, shall be provided.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Security Plan:

1. The security plan defines both physical and adminis trative security

procedures that will remain effective for the entir e duration of the

project.

2. The General Contractor is responsible for assuring that all sub-

contractors working on the project and their employ ees also comply

with these regulations.

B. Security Procedures:

1. General Contractor’s employees shall not enter the project site

without appropriate badge. They may also be subject to inspection

of their personal effects when entering or leaving the project site.

2. Before starting work the General Contractor shall g ive one week’s

notice to the Contracting Officer so that security can be provided

01 00 00 - 3




for the employees. This notice is separate from any notices

required for utility shutdown described later in th is section.

3. No photography of VA premises is allowed without wr itten permission

of the Contracting Officer.

4. VA reserves the right to close down or shut down th e project site

and order General Contractor’s employees off the pr emises in the

event of a national emergency. The General Contract or may return to

the site only with the written approval of the Cont racting Officer.

C. Guards:

1. The General Contractor shall provide unarmed guards at the project

site after construction hours.

2. The Contractor shall provide the guards and VA poli ce with

communication devices as directed.

3. The general Contractor shall install equipment for recording guard

rounds to ensure systematic checking of the premise s.

D. Key Control:

1. The General Contractor shall provide duplicate keys and lock

combinations to the Contracting officers representa tive (COR)for the

purpose of security inspections of every area of pr oject including

tool boxes and parked machines and take any emergen cy action.

2. The General Contractor shall turn over all permanen t lock cylinders

to the VA locksmith for permanent installation. See Section 08 71

00, DOOR HARDWARE and coordinate.

E. Document Control:

1. The General Contractor is responsible for safekeepi ng of all

drawings, project manual and other project informat ion. This

information shall be shared only with those with a specific need to

accomplish the project.

2. All paper waste or electronic media such as CD’s an d diskettes shall

be shredded and destroyed in a manner acceptable to the VA.

01 00 00 - 4




3. All electronic information shall be stored in speci fied location

following VA standards and procedures using an Engi neering Document

Management Software (EDMS).

a. Security, access and maintenance of all project dra wings, both

scanned and electronic shall be performed and track ed through the

EDMS system.

F. Motor Vehicle Restrictions

1. Vehicle authorization request shall be required for any vehicle

entering the site and such request shall be submitt ed 24 hours

before the date and time of access. Access shall be restricted to

picking up and dropping off materials and supplies.

2. A limited number of (2 to 5) permits shall be issue d for General

Contractor and its employees for parking in designa ted areas only.

1.5 OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS

A. The Contractor shall confine all operations (includ ing storage of

materials) on Government premises to areas authoriz ed or approved by

the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall hold and save the

Government, its officers and agents, free and harml ess from liability

of any nature occasioned by the Contractor's perfor mance.

B. Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, of fices) and utilities

may be erected by the Contractor only with the appr oval of the

Contracting Officer and shall be built with labor a nd materials

furnished by the Contractor without expense to the Government. The

temporary buildings and utilities shall remain the property of the

Contractor and shall be removed by the Contractor a t its expense upon

completion of the work. With the written consent of the Contracting

Officer, the buildings and utilities may be abandon ed and need not be

removed.

C. The Contractor shall, under regulations prescribed by the Contracting

Officer, use only established roadways, or use temp orary roadways

constructed by the Contractor when and as authorize d by the Contracting

Officer. When materials are transported in prosecut ing the work,

vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading cap acity recommended by

the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by an y Federal, State, or

01 00 00 - 5




local law or regulation. When it is necessary to cr oss curbs or

sidewalks, the Contractor shall protect them from d amage. The

Contractor shall repair or pay for the repair of an y damaged curbs,

sidewalks, or roads.

D. Working space and space available for storing mater ials shall be as

shown on the drawings.

E. Workmen are subject to rules of Medical Center appl icable to their

conduct.

F. Execute work so as to interfere as little as possib le with normal

functioning of Medical Center as a whole, including operations of

utility services, fire protection systems and any e xisting equipment,

and with work being done by others. Use of equipmen t and tools that

transmit vibrations and noises through the building structure, are not

permitted in buildings that are occupied, during co nstruction, jointly

by patients or medical personnel, and Contractor's personnel, except as

permitted by COR where required by limited working space.

1. Do not store materials and equipment in other than assigned areas.

2. Where access by Medical Center personnel to vacated portions of

buildings is not required, storage of Contractor's materials and

equipment will be permitted subject to fire and saf ety requirements.

G. Utilities Services: Where necessary to cut existing pipes, electrical

wires, conduits, cables, etc., of utility services, or of fire

protection systems or communications systems (excep t telephone), they

shall be cut and capped at suitable places where sh own; or, in absence

of such indication, where directed by COR. All such actions shall be

coordinated with the COR or Utility Company involve d:

1. Whenever it is required that a connection fee be paid to a public

utility provider for new permanent service to the c onstruction

project, for such items as water, sewer, electricit y, gas or steam,

payment of such fee shall be the responsibility of the Government

and not the Contractor.

H. Phasing:

01 00 00 - 6




The Medical Center must maintain its operation 24 h ours a day 7 days a

week. Therefore, any interruption in service must b e scheduled and

coordinated with the COR to ensure that no lapses i n operation occur.

It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to develop a work plan and

schedule detailing, at a minimum, the procedures to be employed, the

equipment and materials to be used, the interim lif e safety measure to

be used during the work, and a schedule defining th e duration of the

work with milestone subtasks. The work to be outlin ed shall include,

but not be limited to:

To insure such executions, Contractor shall furnish the COR with a

schedule of approximate phasing dates on which the Contractor intends

to accomplish work in each specific area of site, b uilding or portion

thereof. In addition, Contractor shall notify the C OR two weeks in

advance of the proposed date of starting work in ea ch specific area of

site, building or portion thereof. Arrange such pha sing dates to insure

accomplishment of this work in successive phases mu tually agreeable to

COR and Contractor.

I. Building No. 123 will be occupied during performanc e of work but

immediate areas of alterations will be vacated.

1. Contractor shall take all measures and provide all material

necessary for protecting existing equipment and pro perty in

affected areas of construction against dust and deb ris, so that

equipment and affected areas to be used in the Medi cal Centers

operations will not be hindered. Contractor shall p ermit access

to Department of Veterans Affairs personnel and pat ients through

other construction areas which serve as routes of a ccess to such

affected areas and equipment. These routes whether access or

egress shall be isolated from the construction area by temporary

partitions and have walking surfaces, lighting etc to facilitate

patient and staff access. Coordinate alteration wor k in areas

occupied by Department of Veterans Affairs so that Medical Center

operations will continue during the construction pe riod.

2. Immediate areas of alterations not mentioned in pre ceding

Subparagraph 1 will be temporarily vacated while al terations are

performed.

01 00 00 - 7




J. Construction Fence: Before construction operations begin, Contractor

shall provide a chain link construction fence, 2.1m (seven feet)

minimum height, around the construction area indica ted on the

drawings. Provide gates as required for access with necessary

hardware, including hasps and padlocks. Fasten fenc e fabric to

terminal posts with tension bands and to line posts and top and

bottom rails with tie wires spaced at maximum 375mm (15 inches).

Bottom of fences shall extend to 25mm (one inch) ab ove grade.

Remove the fence when directed by COR.

K. Utilities Services: Maintain existing utility servi ces for Medical

Center at all times. Provide temporary facilities, labor, materials,

equipment, connections, and utilities to assure uni nterrupted

services. Where necessary to cut existing water, st eam, gases, sewer

or air pipes, or conduits, wires, cables, etc. of u tility services

or of fire protection systems and communications sy stems (including

telephone), they shall be cut and capped at suitabl e places where

shown; or, in absence of such indication, where dir ected by COR.

1. No utility service such as water, gas, steam, sewer s or electricity,

or fire protection systems and communications syste ms may be

interrupted without prior approval of COR . Electri cal work shall

be accomplished with all affected circuits or equip ment de-

energized. When an electrical outage cannot be acco mplished, work

on any energized circuits or equipment shall not co mmence without

a detailed work plan, the Medical Center Director’s prior

knowledge and written approval. Refer to specificat ion Sections

26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS , 27 05 11

REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS and 28 05 00,

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY for

additional requirements.

2. Contractor shall submit a request to interrupt any such services to

COR, in writing, 7 days in advance of proposed inte rruption.

Request shall state reason, date, exact time of, an d approximate

duration of such interruption.

01 00 00 - 8




3. Contractor will be advised (in writing) of approval of request, or

of which other date and/or time such interruption w ill cause

least inconvenience to operations of Medical Center . Interruption

time approved by Medical Center may occur at other than

Contractor's normal working hours.

4. Major interruptions of any system must be requested , in writing, at

least 15 calendar days prior to the desired time an d shall be

performed as directed by the COR.

5. In case of a contract construction emergency, servi ce will be

interrupted on approval of COR. Such approval will be confirmed

in writing as soon as practical.

6. Whenever it is required that a connection fee be pa id to a public

utility provider for new permanent service to the c onstruction

project, for such items as water, sewer, electricit y, gas or

steam, payment of such fee shall be the responsibil ity of the

Government and not the Contractor.

L. Abandoned Lines: All service lines such as wires, c ables,

conduits,ducts, pipes and the like, and their hange rs or supports,

which are to be abandoned but are not required to b e entirely

removed, shall be sealed, capped or plugged at the main, branch or

panel they originate from. The lines shall not be c apped in finished

areas, but shall be removed and sealed, capped or p lugged in

ceilings, within furred spaces, in unfinished areas , or within walls

or partitions; so that they are completely behind t he finished

surfaces.

M. To minimize interference of construction activities with flow of

Medical Center traffic, comply with the following:

1. Keep roads, walks and entrances to grounds, to park ing and to

occupied areas of buildings clear of construction m aterials,

debris and standing construction equipment and vehi cles. Wherever

excavation for new utility lines cross existing roa ds, at least

one lane must be open to traffic at all times with approval.

2. Method and scheduling of required cutting, altering and removal of

existing roads, walks and entrances must be approve d by the COR.

01 00 00 - 9




N. Coordinate the work for this contract with other co nstruction

operations as directed by COR. This includes the sc heduling of traffic

and the use of roadways, as specified in Article, U SE OF ROADWAYS.

1.6 ALTERATIONS

A. Survey: Before any work is started, the Contractor shall make a

thorough survey with the COR and a representative o f VA Supply Service,

of areas of buildings in which alterations occur an d areas which are

anticipated routes of access, and furnish a report, signed by all

three, to the Contracting Officer. This report shal l list by rooms and

spaces:

1. Existing condition and types of resilient flooring, doors, windows,

walls and other surfaces not required to be altered throughout

affected areas of buildings.

2. Existence and conditions of items such as plumbing fixtures and

accessories, electrical fixtures, equipment, etc., required by

drawings to be either reused or relocated, or both.

3. Shall note any discrepancies between drawings and e xisting

conditions at site.

4. Shall designate areas for working space, materials storage and

routes of access to areas within buildings where al terations occur

and which have been agreed upon by Contractor and C OR.

B. Any items required by drawings to be either reused or relocated or

both, found during this survey to be nonexistent, o r in opinion of

COR, to be in such condition that their use is impo ssible or

impractical, shall be furnished and/or replaced by Contractor with new

items in accordance with specifications which will be furnished by

Government. Provided the contract work is changed b y reason of this

subparagraph B, the contract will be modified accor dingly, under

provisions of clause entitled "DIFFERING SITE CONDI TIONS" (FAR 52.236-

2) and "CHANGES" (FAR 52.243-4 and VAAR 852.236-88) .

C. Re-Survey: Thirty days before expected partial or f inal inspection

date, the Contractor and COR together shall make a thorough re-survey

of the areas of buildings involved. They shall furn ish a report on

conditions then existing, of resilient flooring, wa lls and other

01 00 00 - 10




surfaces as compared with conditions of same as not ed in first

condition survey report:

1. Re-survey report shall also list any damage caus ed by Contractor to

such flooring and other surfaces, despite protectio n measures; and,

will form basis for determining extent of repair wo rk required of

Contractor to restore damage caused by Contractor's workmen in

executing work of this contract.

D. Protection: Provide the following protective measur es:

1. Temporary protection against damage for portions of existing

structures and grounds where work is to be done, ma terials handled

and equipment moved and/or relocated.

3. Protection of interior of existing structures at all times, from

damage, dust and weather inclemency. Wherever work is performed,

floor surfaces that are to remain in place shall be adequately

protected prior to starting work, and this protecti on shall be

maintained intact until all work in the area is com pleted.

1.7 DISPOSAL AND RETENTION

A. Materials and equipment accruing from work removed and from demolition

of buildings or structures, or parts thereof, shall be disposed of as

follows:

1. Reserved items which are to remain property of the Government are

noted on drawings or in specifications as items to be stored. Items

that remain property of the Government shall be rem oved or dislodged

from present locations in such a manner as to preve nt damage which

would be detrimental to re-installation and reuse. Store such items

where directed by COR.

2. Items not reserved shall become property of the Con tractor and be

removed by Contractor from Medical Center Campus.

1.8 PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUI PMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS

A. The Contractor shall preserve and protect all struc tures, equipment,

and vegetation (such as trees, shrubs, and grass) o n or adjacent to the

01 00 00 - 11




work site which are not to be removed and do not un reasonably interfere

with the work required under this contract. The Con tractor shall only

remove trees when specifically authorized to do so, and shall avoid

damaging vegetation that will remain in place. If a ny limbs or branches

of trees are broken during contract performance, or by the careless

operation of equipment, or by workmen, the Contract or shall trim those

limbs or branches with a clean cut and paint the cu t with a tree-

pruning compound as directed by the Contracting Off icer.

B. The Contractor shall protect from damage all existi ng improvements and

utilities at or near the work site and on adjacent property of a third

party, the locations of which are made known to or should be known by

the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair any dam age to those

facilities, including those that are the property o f a third party,

resulting from failure to comply with the requireme nts of this contract

or failure to exercise reasonable care in performin g the work. If the

Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage pr omptly, the

Contracting Officer may have the necessary work per formed and charge

the cost to the Contractor.

(FAR 52.236-9)

C. Refer to Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS, for

additional requirements on protecting vegetation, s oils and the

environment. Refer to Articles, "Alterations", "Res toration", and

"Operations and Storage Areas" for additional instr uctions concerning

repair of damage to structures and site improvement s.

1.9 RESTORATION

A. Remove, cut, alter, replace, patch and repair exist ing work as

necessary to install new work. Except as otherwise shown or specified,

do not cut, alter or remove any structural work, an d do not disturb any

ducts, plumbing, steam, gas, or electric work witho ut approval of the

COR. Existing work to be altered or extended and th at is found to be

defective in any way, shall be reported to the COR before it is

disturbed. Materials and workmanship used in restor ing work, shall

conform in type and quality to that of original exi sting construction,

except as otherwise shown or specified.

01 00 00 - 12




B. Upon completion of contract, deliver work complete and undamaged.

Existing work (walls, ceilings, partitions, floors, mechanical and

electrical work, lawns, paving, roads, walks, etc.) disturbed or

removed as a result of performing required new work , shall be patched,

repaired, reinstalled, or replaced with new work, a nd refinished and

left in as good condition as existed before commenc ing work.

C. At Contractor's own expense, Contractor shall immed iately restore to

service and repair any damage caused by Contractor' s workmen to

existing piping and conduits, wires, cables, etc., of utility services

or of fire protection systems and communications sy stems (including

telephone) which are not scheduled for discontinuan ce or abandonment.

D. Expense of repairs to such utilities and systems no t shown on drawings

or locations of which are unknown will be covered b y adjustment to

contract time and price in accordance with clause e ntitled "CHANGES"

(FAR 52.243-4 and VAAR 852.236-88) and "DIFFERING S ITE CONDITIONS" (FAR

52.236-2).

1.10 PROFESSIONAL SURVEYING SERVICES

A registered professional land surveyor or register ed civil engineer

whose services are retained and paid for by the Con tractor shall

perform services specified herein and in other spec ification sections.

The Contractor shall certify that the land surveyor or civil engineer

is not one who is a regular employee of the Contrac tor, and that the

land surveyor or civil engineer has no financial in terest in this

contract.

1.11 LAYOUT OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall lay out the work from Governme nt established base

lines and bench marks, indicated on the drawings, a nd shall be

responsible for all measurements in connection with the layout. The

Contractor shall furnish, at Contractor's own expen se, all stakes,

templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials, and labor required

to lay out any part of the work. The Contractor sha ll be responsible

for executing the work to the lines and grades that may be established

or indicated by the Contracting Officer. The Contra ctor shall also be

responsible for maintaining and preserving all stak es and other marks

established by the Contracting Officer until author ized to remove them.

01 00 00 - 13




If such marks are destroyed by the Contractor or th rough Contractor's

negligence before their removal is authorized, the Contracting Officer

may replace them and deduct the expense of the repl acement from any

amounts due or to become due to the Contractor.

(FAR 52.236-17)

C. Following completion of general mass excavation and before any other

permanent work is performed, establish and plainly mark (through use of

appropriate batter boards or other means) sufficien t additional survey

control points or system of points as may be necess ary to assure proper

alignment, orientation, and grade of all major feat ures of work. Survey

shall include, but not be limited to, location of l ines and grades of

footings, exterior walls, center lines of columns i n both directions,

major utilities and elevations of floor slabs:

1. Such additional survey control points or system of points thus

established shall be checked and certified by a reg istered land

surveyor or registered civil engineer. Furnish such certification to

the COR before any work (such as footings, floor sl abs, columns,

walls, utilities and other major controlling featur es) is placed.

2. Elevations of bottoms of footings and tops of slabs of each

structure.

3. Lines and elevations of sewers and of all outside d istribution

systems.

E. Whenever changes from contract drawings are made in line or grading

requiring certificates, record such changes on a re producible drawing

bearing the registered land surveyor or registered civil engineer seal,

and forward these drawings upon completion of work to COR.

F. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall f urnish the COR one

electronic copy and reproducible drawings at the sc ale of the contract

drawings, showing the finished grade on the grid de veloped for

constructing the work. These drawings shall bear th e seal of the

registered land surveyor or registered civil engine er. The Contractor

shall perform the surveying and layout work of this and other articles

and specifications in accordance with the provision s of Article

"Professional Surveying Services".

01 00 00 - 14




1.12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. The contractor shall maintain two full size sets of as-built drawings

which will be kept current during construction of t he project, to

include all contract changes, modifications and cla rifications.

B. All variations shall be shown in the same general d etail as used in the

contract drawings. To insure compliance, as-built d rawings shall be

made available for the COR review, as often as requ ested.

C. Contractor shall deliver two approved completed set s of as-built

drawings in the electronic version (scanned PDF) to the COR within 15

calendar days after each completed phase and after the acceptance of

the project by the COR.

D. Paragraphs A, B, & C shall also apply to all shop d rawings.

E. Contractors shall update (as work is completed) the VA electrical,

medical gas, domestic plumbing, and mechanical pipi ng master schematic

books. These books are located in the FM office.

1.13 USE OF ROADWAYS

A. For hauling, use only established public roads and roads on Medical

Center property and, when authorized by the COR, su ch temporary roads

which are necessary in the performance of contract work. Temporary

roads shall be constructed and restoration performe d by the Contractor

at Contractor's expense. When necessary to cross cu rbing, sidewalks, or

similar construction, they must be protected by wel l-constructed

bridges.

1.14 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES

A. The Government shall make all reasonably required a mounts of utilities

available to the Contractor from existing outlets a nd supplies, as

specified in the contract. The amount to be paid by the Contractor for

chargeable electrical services shall be the prevail ing rates charged to

the Government. The Contractor shall carefully cons erve any utilities

furnished without charge.

B. The Contractor, at Contractor's expense and in a wo rkmanlike manner, in

compliance with code and as satisfactory to the Con tracting Officer,

shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and

distribution lines, and all meters required to meas ure the amount of

01 00 00 - 15




electricity used for the purpose of determining cha rges. Before final

acceptance of the work by the Government, the Contr actor shall remove

all the temporary connections, distribution lines, meters, and

associated paraphernalia and repair restore the inf rastructure as

required.

C. Contractor shall install meters at Contractor's exp ense and furnish the

Medical Centera monthly record of the Contractor's usage of electricity

as hereinafter specified.

D. Heat: Furnish temporary heat necessary to prevent i njury to work and

materials through dampness and cold. Use of open sa lamanders or any

temporary heating devices which may be fire hazards or may smoke and

damage finished work, will not be permitted. Mainta in minimum

temperatures as specified for various materials:

1. Obtain heat by connecting to Medical Center heat ing distribution

system.

E. Electricity (for Construction and Testing): Furnish all temporary

electric services.

1. Obtain electricity by connecting to the Medical Center electrical

distribution system. The Contractor shall meter and pay for

electricity required for electric cranes and hoisti ng devices,

electrical welding devices and any electrical heati ng devices

providing temporary heat. Electricity for all other uses is

available at no cost to the Contractor.

F. Water (for Construction and Testing): Furnish tempo rary water service.

1. Obtain water by connecting to the Medical Center wa ter distribution

system. Provide reduced pressure backflow preventer at each

connection as per code. Water is available at no co st to the

Contractor.

2. Maintain connections, pipe, fittings and fixtures a nd conserve

water-use so none is wasted. Failure to stop leakag e or other wastes

will be cause for revocation (at COR’s discretion) of use of water

from Medical Center's system.

01 00 00 - 16




G. Fuel: Natural and LP gas and burner fuel oil requir ed for boiler

cleaning, normal initial boiler-burner setup and ad justing, and for

performing the specified boiler tests will be furni shed by the

Government. Fuel required for prolonged boiler-burn er setup,

adjustments, or modifications due to improper desig n or operation of

boiler, burner, or control devices shall be furnish ed and paid by the

Contractor at Contractor's expense.

1.15 TESTS

A. As per specification section 23 05 93 the contracto r shall provide a

written testing and commissioning plan complete wit h component level,

equipment level, sub-system level and system level breakdowns. The

plan will provide a schedule and a written sequence of what will be

tested, how and what the expected outcome will be. This document will

be submitted for approval prior to commencing work. The contractor

shall document the results of the approved plan and submit for approval

with the as built documentation.

B. Pre-test mechanical and electrical equipment and sy stems and make

corrections required for proper operation of such s ystems before

requesting final tests. Final test will not be cond ucted unless

pre-tested.

C. Conduct final tests required in various sections of specifications in

presence of an authorized representative of the Con tracting Officer.

Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equi pment, instruments,

and forms, to conduct and record such tests.

D. Mechanical and electrical systems shall be balanced , controlled and

coordinated. A system is defined as the entire syst em which must be

coordinated to work together during normal operatio n to produce results

for which the system is designed. For example, air conditioning supply

air is only one part of entire system which provide s comfort conditions

for a building. Other related components are return air, exhaust air,

steam, chilled water, refrigerant, hot water, contr ols and electricity,

etc. Another example of a system which involves sev eral components of

different disciplines is a boiler installation. Eff icient and

acceptable boiler operation depends upon the coordi nation and proper

01 00 00 - 17




operation of fuel, combustion air, controls, steam, feedwater,

condensate and other related components.

E. All related components as defined above shall be fu nctioning when any

system component is tested. Tests shall be complete d within a

reasonably period of time during which operating an d environmental

conditions remain reasonably constant and are typic al of the design

conditions.

F. Individual test result of any component, where requ ired, will only be

accepted when submitted with the test results of re lated components and

of the entire system.

1.16 INSTRUCTIONS

A. Contractor shall furnish Maintenance and Operating manuals (hard copies

and electronic) and verbal instructions when requir ed by the various

sections of the specifications and as hereinafter s pecified.

B. Manuals: Maintenance and operating manuals and one compact disc (four

hard copies and one electronic copy each) for each separate piece of

equipment shall be delivered to the CORcoincidental with the delivery

of the equipment to the job site. Manuals shall be complete, detailed

guides for the maintenance and operation of equipme nt. They shall

include complete information necessary for starting , adjusting,

maintaining in continuous operation for long period s of time and

dismantling and reassembling of the complete units and sub-assembly

components. Manuals shall include an index covering all component parts

clearly cross-referenced to diagrams and illustrati ons. Illustrations

shall include "exploded" views showing and identify ing each separate

item. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of specia l tools and

instruments. The function of each piece of equipmen t, component,

accessory and control shall be clearly and thorough ly explained. All

necessary precautions for the operation of the equi pment and the reason

for each precaution shall be clearly set forth. Man uals must reference

the exact model, style and size of the piece of equ ipment and system

being furnished. Manuals referencing equipment simi lar to but of a

different model, style, and size than that furnishe d will not be

accepted.

01 00 00 - 18




C. Instructions: Contractor shall provide qualified, f actory-trained

manufacturers' representatives to give detailed tra ining to assigned

Department of Veterans Affairs personnel in the ope ration and complete

maintenance for each piece of equipment. All such t raining will be at

the job site. These requirements are more specifica lly detailed in the

various technical sections. Instructions for differ ent items of

equipment that are component parts of a complete sy stem, shall be given

in an integrated, progressive manner. All instructo rs for every piece

of component equipment in a system shall be availab le until

instructions for all items included in the system h ave been completed.

This is to assure proper instruction in the operati on of inter-related

systems. All instruction periods shall be at such t imes as scheduled by

the COR and shall be considered concluded only when the COR is

satisfied in regard to complete and thorough covera ge. The contractor

shall submit a course outline with associated mater ial to the COR for

review and approval prior to scheduling training to ensure the subject

matter covers the expectations of the VA and the co ntractual

requirements. The Department of Veterans Affairs re serves the right to

request the removal of, and substitution for, any i nstructor who, in

the opinion of the COR, does not demonstrate suffic ient qualifications

in accordance with requirements for instructors abo ve.

1.17 RELOCATED EQUIPMENT AND ITEMS

A. Contractor shall disconnect, dismantle as necessary , remove and

reinstall in new location, all existing equipment a nd items indicated

by symbol "R" or otherwise shown to be relocated by the Contractor.

B. Perform relocation of such equipment or items at su ch times and in such

a manner as directed by the COR.

C. Suitably cap existing service lines, such as steam, condensate return,

water, drain, gas, air, vacuum and/or electrical, a t the main whenever

such lines are disconnected from equipment to be re located. Remove

abandoned lines in finished areas and cap as specif ied herein before

under paragraph "Abandoned Lines".

D. Provide all mechanical and electrical service conne ctions, fittings,

fastenings and any other materials necessary for as sembly and

01 00 00 - 19




installation of relocated equipment; and leave such equipment in proper

operating condition.

E. Contractor shall employ services of an installation engineer, who is an

authorized representative of the manufacturer of th is equipment to

supervise assembly and installation of existing equ ipment, required to

be relocated.

F. All service lines such as noted above for relocated equipment shall be

in place at point of relocation ready for use befor e any existing

equipment is disconnected. Make relocated existing equipment ready for

operation or use immediately after reinstallation.

1.18 CONSTRUCTION SIGN

A. Provide a Construction Sign where directed by the C OR. All wood members

shall be of framing lumber. Cover sign frame with 0 .7 mm (24 gage)

galvanized sheet steel nailed securely around edges and on all

bearings. Provide three 100 by 100 mm (4 inch by 4 inch) posts (or

equivalent round posts) set 1200 mm (four feet) int o ground. Set bottom

of sign level at 900 mm (three feet) above ground a nd secure to posts

with through bolts. Make posts full height of sign. Brace posts with 50

x 100 mm (two by four inch) material as directed.

B. Paint all surfaces of sign and posts two coats of w hite gloss paint.

Border and letters shall be of black gloss paint, e xcept project title

which shall be blue gloss paint.

C. Maintain sign and remove it when directed by the CO R.

D. Detail Drawing of construction sign showing require d legend and other

characteristics of sign is shown on the drawings.

1.19 SAFETY SIGN

A. Provide a Safety Sign where directed by COR. Face o f sign shall be 19

mm (3/4 inch) thick exterior grade plywood. Provide two 100 mm by 100

mm (four by four inch) posts extending full height of sign and 900 mm

(three feet) into ground. Set bottom of sign level at 1200 mm (four

feet) above ground.

01 00 00 - 20




B. Paint all surfaces of Safety Sign and posts with on e prime coat and two

coats of white gloss paint. Letters and design shal l be painted with

gloss paint of colors noted.

C. Maintain sign and remove it when directed by COR.

D. Standard Detail Drawing Number SD10000-02(Found on VA TIL) of safety

sign showing required legend and other characterist ics of sign isshown

on the drawings.

E. Post the number of accident free days on a daily ba sis.

1.21 TEMPORARY INTERIOR SIGNAGE

A. When the contractor’s work blocks doors and/or exit s, changes paths,

etc., the General Contractor is to provide all temp orary signage to

reroute personnel and block the doors or exits. Loc ations to be

determined based on the ILSM.

1.21 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

A. During the construction period through completion, provide photographic

documentation of construction progress and at selec ted milestones

including electronic indexing, navigation, storage and remote access to

the documentation, as per these specifications.

B. Photographic documentation elements:

1. Each digital image shall be taken with a profession al grade camera

with minimum size of 6 megapixels (MP) capable of p roducing

200x250mm (8 x 10 inch) prints with a minimum of 22 72 x 1704 pixels

and 400x500mm (16 x 20 inch) prints with a minimum 2592 x 1944

pixels.

2. Indexing and navigation system shall utilize actual AUTOCAD

construction drawings, making such drawings interac tive on an on-

line interface. For all documentation referenced he rein, indexing

and navigation must be organized by both time (date -stamped) and

location throughout the project.

3. Documentation shall combine indexing and navigation system with

inspection-grade digital photography designed to ca pture actual

conditions throughout construction and at critical milestones.

01 00 00 - 21




Documentation shall be accessible on-line through u se of an internet

connection. Documentation shall allow for secure mu ltiple-user

access, simultaneously, on-line.

4. Before construction, the building pad, adjacent str eets, roadways,

parkways, driveways, curbs, sidewalks, landscaping, adjacent

utilities and adjacent structures surrounding the b uilding pad and

site shall be documented. Overlapping photographic techniques shall

be used to insure maximum coverage. Indexing and na vigation

accomplished through interactive architectural draw ings. If site

work or pad preparation is extensive, this document ation may be

required immediately before construction and at sev eral pre-

determined intervals before building work commences .

5. Construction progress for all trades shall be track ed at pre-

determined intervals, but not less than once every thirty (30)

calendar days (“Progressions”). Progression documen tation shall

track both the exterior and interior construction o f the building.

Exterior Progressions shall track 360 degrees aroun d the site and

each building. Interior Progressions shall track in terior

improvements beginning when stud work commences and continuing until

Project completion.

6. As-built condition of pre-foundation utilities and site utilities

shall be documented prior to pouring footers, placi ng concrete

and/or backfilling. This process shall include all underground and

in-slab utilities and utility runs in the immediate vicinity of

buildings envelope(s). Overlapping photographic tec hniques shall be

used to insure maximum coverage. Indexing and navig ation

accomplished through interactive site utility plans .

7. As-built conditions of mechanical, electrical, plum bing and all

other systems shall be documented post-inspection a nd pre-

insulation, sheet rock or dry wall installation. Th is process shall

include all finished systems located in the walls a nd ceilings of

all buildings at the Project. Overlapping photograp hic techniques

shall be used to insure maximum coverage. Indexing and navigation

accomplished through interactive architectural draw ings.

01 00 00 - 22




8. Miscellaneous events that occur during any Contract or site visit, or

events captured by the Department of Veterans Affai rs independently,

shall be dated, labeled and inserted into a Section in the

navigation structure entitled “Slideshows,” allowin g this

information to be stored in the same “place” as the formal scope.

9. Customizable project-specific digital photographic documentation of

other details or milestones.

10. Weekly (21 Max) Site Progressions - Photographic do cumentation

capturing the project at different stages of constr uction. These

progressions shall capture underground utilities, e xcavation,

grading, backfill, landscaping and road constructio n throughout the

duration of the project.

11. Detailed Exact-Built of all Slabs for all project s lab pours just

prior to placing concrete or as directed by the COR

12. In event a greater or lesser number of images than specified above

are required by the COR, adjustment in contract pri ce will be made

in accordance with clause entitled "CHANGES" (FAR 5 2.243-4 and VAAR

852.236-88).

C. Images shall show distinctly, at as large a scale a s possible, all

parts of work embraced in the picture.

D. Contractor shall provide all on-line domain/web hos ting, security

measures, and redundant server back-up of the docum entation.

E. Contractor shall provide technical support related to using the system

or service.

F. Upon completion of the project, final copies of the documentation (the

“Permanent Record”) with the indexing and navigatio n system embedded

(and active) shall be provided in an electronic med ia format, typically

a DVD or external hard-drive. On-line access termin ates upon delivery

of the Permanent Record.

1.22 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare and provide coordination drawings showing t he location of

openings through slabs, the pipe sleeves and hanger inserts, as well as

the location and elevation of utility lines, includ ing, but not limited

01 00 00 - 23




to, conveyor systems, pneumatic tubes, ducts, all e xisting utilities,

and conduits and pipes 50 mm (2 inches) and larger in diameter.

Drawings required for all areas being remodeled or new and ancillary

areas required by such utility runs. Ancillary area drawings to include

equal space on each side of main runs from main sou rce to final

location.

B. These drawings, including plans, elevations, and se ctions as

appropriate shall clearly show the manner in which the utilities fit

into the available space and how they relate to eac h other and to

existing building elements and controls for mainten ance operations.

Drawings shall be of appropriate scale to satisfy t he previously stated

purposes, but not smaller than 9 mm (3/8 inch) scal e. Drawings must be

composite (with distinctive colors for the various trades) including

but not limited to HVAC equipment, HVAC ductwork, m echanical piping,

plumbing, fire protection, electrical, medical gas es,

telecommunications, etc..

C. The submitted drawings for a given area of the proj ect shall show the

work of all trades which will be involved in that p articular area. A

complete composite drawing set or complete sets of separate

reproducible drawings and AutoCAD files shall be re ceived by the

Government not less than 20 days prior to the sched uled start of the

work in the area illustrated by the drawings, for t he purpose of

showing the contractor's planned method of installa tion. The objectives

of such drawings are to promote carefully planned w ork sequence and

proper trade coordination, in order to assure the e xpeditious solutions

of problems and the installation of lines and equip ment as contemplated

by the contract documents while avoiding or minimiz ing additional costs

to the contractor and to the Government.

D. In the event the contractor, in coordinating the va rious installations

and in planning the method of installation, finds a conflict in

location or elevation of any of the utilities with themselves, with

structural items or with other construction items, the contractor shall

bring this conflict to the attention of the contrac ting officer

immediately. In doing so, the contractor shall expl ain the proposed

method of solving the problem or shall request inst ructions as to how

to proceed if adjustments beyond those of usual tra des coordination are

01 00 00 - 24




necessary. Contractor to include initial and two re visions as part of

original contract.

E. Utilities installation work will not proceed in any area prior to the

submission and completion of the Government review of the coordinated

drawings for that area, nor in any area in which co nflicts are

disclosed by the coordination drawings until the co nflicts have been

corrected to the satisfaction of the contracting of ficer.

F. It is the responsibility of the contractor to submi t the required

drawings in a timely manner consistent with the req uirements to

complete the work covered by this contract within t he prescribed

contract time.

- - - E N D - - -




00 01 10 (1HR)-1

SECTION 01 01 10 (1-HR)

1 HOUR CONSTRUCTION SMOKE BARRIER

03/2016

1. DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the control of the construction barrier surrounding the construction area that

the General Contractor must consider for construction & renovation projects in the medical facility

and surrounding buildings on the VAMC campus.

B. The construction barrier consists of both existing walls and new construction (typically the ante-

room) walls. The intent of the barrier is to provide a fire-rated and smoke tight 1-hour construction

partition around the construction area. Contractor must coordinate the erection of any new walls

for construction barriers with the Milwaukee Specification 01 01 10-IC and any additional infection

control requirements.

C. This Milwaukee specification includes the precautionary management of various types of

construction activities, including “Inspections and Non-Invasive”, “Small-Scale or Short-Duration”,

“Moderate” and “Major” demolition/construction activities as detailed in the below TABLE.

D. Type “A” and “B” activities are those in which the fire/smoke hazard risks are MINIMAL. Type “C”

and “D” activities are those in which the fire/smoke hazard risks are HIGH. The General Contractor

is obligated to consider the specified containment measures with the costs included within the

various contract items of work. A Construction Barrier and Fire Risk Assessment Matrix of

Precautions for construction and renovation for activities follows.

00 01 10 (1HR)-2




TYPE A

Minimal

Fire Risk

TYPE B

Limited

Fire Risk

TYPE C

Moderate

Fire Risk

TYPE D

Significant

Fire Risk

Inspection and Non-Invasive Activities.

Includes, but is not limited to:

� removal of ceiling tiles for visual inspection limited to 1 tile per 50 square feet

� painting (but not sanding)

� wall covering, electrical trim work, minor plumbing, and activities which do not

generate dust or require cutting of walls or access to ceilings other than for

visual inspection.

� Removal of floor tile less than 25 square feet, non-ACM and no grinding or dust

generating activities

Small scale, short duration activities that can be completed within 3 calendar days.

Work that requires a moderate level of demolition and does not pose a potential

fire hazard. Cutting/burning operations that require a burn permit are prohibited.

No electrical corded power tools permitted.


� installation of telephone and computer cabling

� access to chase spaces

� asbestos abatement of flooring tile/mastic removal, glove bag operations,

Transite panel removals

� duct work , electrical, plumbing, piping work above ceiling within a 50 square

foot area.

� cutting of walls or ceiling where fire hazard is minimal.

� sanding of walls for painting or wall covering

� removal of floor coverings, ceiling tiles and casework

Work that requires a moderate to high level of demolition, cutting/burning

operations or requires demolition or removal of any fixed building components or

assemblies. Power corded tools and work that provides a potential fire hazard.


� Removal of building components or elements requiring use of open flame or

power chisel

� new construction or renovations over 3 days duration

� major duct work, plumbing, piping, or electrical work

� soldering or brazing operations

� ANY activity that requires a burn permit

Major demolition and construction projects involving cutting/burning operations

or requires demolition or removal of any fixed building components or assemblies.

Power corded tools and work that provides a potential fire hazard.


� activities which require consecutive work shifts

� requires heavy demolition or removal of a complete building system


00 01 10 (1HR)-3




2. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION PARTITIONS (ANTE-ROOM CONSTRUCTION)

A. Type A: Provide authority to proceed with work in area, includes a ceiling permit as required,

when working above ceilings.

B. Type B:

i. Coordinate temporary construction partition installation with Section 01 01 10-IC.

ii. Provide plastic from floor to ceiling above and seal joints and penetrations. All plastic

will be labeled with the VA ILSM TEMPORARY BARRIER orange tag once installed

indicating the start of the three days. At openings, install z-wall overlapping plastic flap

barriers or equivalent.

ILSM TEMPORARY BARRIER TAG

PROJECT:

PRIME CONTRACTOR:

SUB CONTRACTOR:

EMERGENCY CONTACT NO.

BARRIER INSTALLATION DATE:

BARRIER EXPIRATION DATE:

(MAX 3 DAYS)

C. Type C:

i. Coordinate temporary construction partition installation with Section 01 01 10-IC.

ii. Ante-room construction (as part of 1-hour construction barrier):

a) Ante-room shall be a 1-hour fire-rated smoke-tight temporary construction partition

and shall be full height, extending through suspended ceilings to the floor slab or

roof deck above.

b) Ante-room shall be constructed from one-hour fire-rated 5/8-in type “X” gypsum

board both sides of metal stud wall, mudded and taped in accordance with ASTM

C840.

1. “Double” gypsum board installation on one side (exterior) of the ante-room

is authorized to achieve the 1-hour fire-rated smoke-tight temporary

construction partition requirement with prior COR approval.

c) In this case, the ante-room 1-hour fire-rated smoke-tight temporary construction

partition walls will also function as infection control barriers. Contractor shall add

00 01 10 (1HR)-4




appropriate infection control measures (e.g., plastic sheeting between metal studs

and gypsum board). Refer to 01 01 10-IC for more information.

d) Ante-room gypsum board walls shall be taped to the existing floors utilizing 2-in

wide glass foil tape: 7.3 mil aluminum foil laminated glass cloth silver tape with

silicone adhesive backing. Where the ante-room walls meet the existing deck or a 1-

hour rated existing wall, the seams shall be firecaulked.

e) The ante-room must also have a dedicated heat detector installed. See paragraph

(iv.) below for heat detector requirements.

f) Ante-room outer construction door opening requires a Class C, 45-minute fire rated

door with self-closing and self-latching devices.

g) Ante-room inner door must at least be plastic Z-Type door.

iii. Ante-room construction (for infection control purposes only):

a) Ante-room need not be a 1-hour fire-rated smoke-tight temporary construction

partition. Its walls do not need to go to the concrete deck above, nor is a hard

ceiling required. At a minimum, the contractor must tape the top of the ante-room

walls to the underside of the existing acoustical tile ceiling to achieve the smoke

tight and infection control requirements.

b) Ante-room shall be constructed from one-hour fire-rated 5/8-in type “X” gypsum

board one side of metal stud wall, mudded and taped in accordance with ASTM

C840.

c) Contractor shall add appropriate infection control measures (e.g., plastic sheeting

between metal studs and gypsum board). Refer to 01 01 10-IC for more

information.

d) Ante-room gypsum board walls shall be taped to the existing floors, walls or ceilings

utilizing 2-in wide glass foil tape: 7.3 mil aluminum foil laminated glass cloth silver

tape with silicone adhesive backing. Where the ante-room walls meet the existing

deck or a 1-hour rated existing wall, the seams shall be firecaulked.

e) The ante-room does not require a dedicated heat detector.

f) Ante-room outer construction door opening requires a Class C, 45-minute fire rated


g) Ante-room inner construction door opening requires a Class C, 45-minute fire rated


iv. Provide heat detectors and notification devices (i.e., audio-visual devices) tied into the

Building Siemens Pyrotronics System at the rate of one (1) detector per 1000 square foot of

clear construction area. Heat detectors to be FTP-11 Addressable, Tri-Color LED, 135°F,

Combination Fixed or Rate of Rise. The Contractor shall provide certification documentation

once the heat detectors and notification devices (i.e., audio-visual devices) are installed

and/or moved and tested prior to any construction work taking place in the space. Inside

the construction space, existing units can be used if they are moved to the floor deck above.

v. Other than ante-room, all other temporary construction partitions shall be full height,

extending through suspended ceilings to the floor slab or roof deck above and shall be

one-hour fire rated 5/8-in type “X” gypsum board both sides of metal stud wall, mudded

00 01 10 (1HR)-5




and taped in accordance with ASTM C840. If sprinklers are installed per a hydraulically

calculated stamped and certified system and sprinklers are operational on both sides of

the temporary partition and ceilings are fully intact and complete, then the partition

indicated above may be permitted to terminate at the ceiling in accordance with NFPA

241.

vi. Coordinate with Section 01 01 10-SN Section 1.10 for Card Reader and Physical Access

Control System (PACS) requirements at ante-room outer construction door.

D. Type D:

i. All requirements for Type C construction activities above are required for Type D

construction activities.

ii. When required by the project, install one-hour fire-rated temporary construction

partitions to maintain integrity of existing exit stair enclosures, exit passageways, fire-

rated enclosures of hazardous areas, horizontal exits, smoke barriers, vertical shafts and

openings and other enclosures as required by the current Life Safety Code NFPA 101.

This may include new horizontal egress tunnels, exit stairs, etc. Coordinate these

activities with the COR.

3. EXISTING WALLS TO BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION PARTITIONS AND PHASING

A. The construction site must be completely surrounded by a 1-hour fire-rated gypsum board,

smoke-tight, and fire-stopped construction partitions. Infection control procedures (as

required) shall be initiated prior to any other construction activities.

B. All existing walls surrounding the construction area are to be inspected, repaired, patched, and

fire-stopped as required to bring them up to current smoke barrier construction requirements.

C. Construction cores made through the construction barriers or any other rated assembly need to

have an ILSM firestop (mineral wool filling) and an “ILSM FIRESTOP” orange tag label as

indicated below. All penetrations are to be made temporarily smoke resistant (mineral wool

filling) by the end of the construction day, and all penetrations are to be permanently fire

caulked/sealed within 30 days of being made.

00 01 10 (1HR)-6

M U

15, 2017 bmission 5-17-103

ilwaukee VAMC February pgrade and Replace Building 123 Bid Set Su team Line Piping and Insulation Project No. 69

01 01 10 (FSS)-1

Milwaukee VAMC February 15, 2017 Upgrade and Replace Building 123 Bid Set Submission Steam Line Piping and Insulation Project No. 695-17 -103

SECTION 01 01 10 (FSS)

FIRE SAFETY AND CONTROL

11/2015

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION: This section covers safety precautions required by all contractor personnel to

safeguard patients, visitors, and Department of Veterans Affairs employees.

1.2 RELATED SECTION

A. Section 01 00 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. NFPA standard No. 241 - Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.

B.NFPA Standard No. 51B - Fire Protection in use of cutting and welding Processes.

C.NFPA Standard No. 101 - Life Safety Code (Current Edition)

D. OSHA Regulations 29CFR1926 - Construction Industry Standards. 1.Sub-

part P- Fire Protection and Prevention

2.Sub-part J- welding and Cutting

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS:

01 01 10 (FSS)-2


A. Table F-1 indicates which fire extinguishers are required for various combustible materials.

Table F-1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DATA

TYPE OF AGENT

Each class of fire calls for the right

kind of extinguisher. Using the

wrong extinguisher is dangerous

and may do more harm than good.

For your own protection, you

should know the classes of fire,

the different types of

extinguishers, how to use them

and why.

Fires in ordinary combustible

materials - paper, wood, and many

plastics. Quenching by water or

insulating by Multi-Purpose

(ABC),dry chemical is effective.

Fires in flammable liquids such as

gasoline, oils, grease, tars, paints,

lacquers and flammable gases.

Multi-Purpose (ABC). Regular Dry

Chemical, Halon 1211, and Carbon

Dioxide agents smother these

fires.

Fires in electrical equipment..

Motors, generators, switches and

appliances.. where a non

conducting extinguishing agent

Multi-Purpose (ABC), Regular Dry

Chemical, Halon 1211 or Carbon

Dioxide is required.

RANGE --------------------

Discharge Time ----------

Multi-Purpose Dry

Chemical

Monoammonium

Phosphate

Yes-excellent Adheres to

burning materials amd

forms a coating which

will smother the fire and

minimize reflash.

Yes-excellent Dry

chemical agent smothers

fire. Screen of agent

shields user from heat.

Yes-excellent Dry

chemical agent is non-

conductive. Screen of

agent shields user from

heat.

5 to 20 feet

10 to 25 seconds

Regular

Dry Chemical Sodium

Phosphate

No

Yes-excellent Dry chemical

agent smothers fire. Screen

of agent shields user from

heat.

Yes-excellent Dry chemical

agent is non-conductive.

Screen of agent shields user

from heat.

5 to 20 feet

10 to 25 seconds

Halon 1211

Bromoclorodi-fluoromethane

Yes-excellent

Halon 1211 leaves no

residue. May not normally

affect equipment.

Yes-excellent

Halon 1211 leaves no

residue. May not normally

affect equipment.

Yes-excellent

Halon 1211 is a non-

conductor, leaves no residue,

may not normally affect or

damage electrical

equipment.

8 to 18 feet

8 to 18 seconds

Depending on size

Carbon Dioxide

(CO2)

No

Yes-excellent

Carbon Dioxide leaves no

residue, may not normally

affect or damage

equipment.

Yes-excellent

Carbon Dioxide is a non-

conductor, leaves no

residue, may not normally

affect or damage electrical

equipment.

3 to 8 feet

8 to 30 seconds

Water

Yes

Water saturates

materials and prevents

rekindling.

No

Water will spread

flammable liquids and

not put it out.

No

Wate, a conductor,

should never be used on

live electrical fires.

Up to 40 feet

Up to 60 seconds

B.C over Plates

1. Receptacles - Manufactured by H. B. Enterprises or equal. Catalog No. 007

2.Switches - Manufactured by N. 13. Enterprises. Catalog No. 003

01 01 10 (FSS)-3


PART III - EXECUTION

3.1 Construction offices and trailers used as storage are required to a located minimum distance from

permanent structures. Veterans Administration approval of location does not relieve the contractor at this

ultimate responsibility of meeting OSHA and NFPA Regulation.

3.2 Contractor is required to obtain a permit from the office of the Chief Engineer prior to start of each

welding/cutting operation. The Chief Engineer reserves the right to delegate the Project Manager as

approving official. The following form is acceptable for obtaining approval and may be reproduced at

contractor's expense. Other form must be submitted for approval by the Project Engineer prior to use.

3.3 The following checklist is provided to the contractor as a quick reference only. NFPA 513 should be

consulted for official requirements for protection of the area.

01 01 10 (FSS)-4




01 01 10 (FSS)-5







01 01 10 IC-1

SECTION 01 01 10 - IC

INFECTION CONTROL

DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the control of environmental infection control and risk assessment that the Contractor

must consider for construction & renovation projects in the medical facility. It includes Precautionary

management of, Inspections and Non invasive activities, small scale, short duration activities, that create

minimal dust. Major demolition and construction projects that generate a moderate to high levels of dust.

Movement of materials and equipment, and resources that are encountered or generated by the Contractor. The

Contractor is obligated to consider the specified control measures with the costs included within the various

contract items of work. An Infection Control Risk Assessment Matrix of Precautions for construction and

renovation for activities follows.

Step 1. Identify Construction Activity – see specification section 01 01 10 1-HR

TYPE A Minimal Fire Risk

Consult IC if

construction activity

occurs in highest patient

risk group

Inspection and Non-Invasive Activities. Includes, but is not limited to:

� removal of ceiling tiles for visual inspection limited to 1 tile per 50 square feet

� painting (but not sanding)

� wall covering, electrical trim work, minor plumbing, and activities which do not

generate dust or require cutting of walls or access to ceilings other than for

visual inspection.

� removal of floor tile less than 25 square feet, non-ACM and no grinding or dust generating activities

TYPE B

Limited Fire Risk

Consult IC if


occurs in highest patient

risk group

Small scale, short duration activities which create minimal dust. Includes, but is

not limited to:

� installation of telephone and computer cabling

� access to chase spaces

� Cutting of walls or ceiling where dust migration can be controlled.

TYPE C

Moderate Fire Risk

Consult IC if


occurs in any and all

patient risk group

Work that generates a moderate to high level of dust or requires demolition or

removal of any fixed building components or assemblies. Includes, but is not limited to:

� sanding of walls for painting or wall covering

� removal of floor coverings, ceiling tiles and casework


� major duct work, cabling activity, plumbing, piping, or electrical work

� soldering or brazing operations

� ANY activity that requires a burn permit

� Any activity that cannot be completed within a single workshift

TYPE D Significant Fire Risk

Consult IC if


occurs in any and all

patient risk group

Major demolition and construction projects. Includes, but is not limited to:

� activities which require consecutive work shifts

� requires heavy demolition or removal of a complete building/cabling system

� New construction or renovations over 3 days duration

APIC Infection Prevention Manual for Construction Renovation 2015




01 01 10 IC-2

B. Infection Control Risk and damage is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements

or agents which:

1. Adversely effect human health or welfare,

2. Unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life.

Using the following table, identify the Patient Risk Groups that will be affected.

If more than one risk group will be affected, select the higher risk group:

Step 2. Identify Patient Risk Group

Low Risk Medium Risk High Risk Highest Risk

� Office areas

� Warehouse

� Cardiology

� Echocardiography

� Endoscopy

� Physical Therapy

� Respiratory Therapy

� Outpatient Mental

Health

� Outpatient Clinics

� Simulation Lab

� Comp and Pen

� Emergency Room

� Laboratories (specimen)

� Linen

� Kitchen & Canteen

� Radiology/MRI

� Nuclear medicine

� Physical Therapy Tank

Area

� Any area caring for

immunocompromised

patients

� Pharmacy

� Cardiac Cath Lab / EP Lab

� Logistics Supply

� Central Sterile Supply

� Intensive Care Units

� Medical / Mental Health

Unit

� Negative pressure isolation rooms

� Oncology / Radiation

Oncology

� Inpatient and outpatient

operating rooms

� Dialysis

� Surgical Units

� Post Anesthesia Care Unit

� APC Unit

� Sterile Processing Services

C. Match the Patient Risk Group with Construction Project Type on the following matrix to find the level of

infection control activities required.

Patient Risk Group (Low, Medium, High, Highest) with the planned …

Construction Project Type (A, B, C, D) on the following matrix, to find the …

Class of Precautions (I, II, III or IV) or level of infection control activities required.

1) Infection Control approval will be required when the Construction Activity and Risk Level

indicate that CCllaassss IIIIII or CCllaassss IIVV control procedures are necessary. Contact the VA Project

engineer and the infection control officer before proceeding.

01 01 10 IC-3




TTYYPPEE AA TTYYPPEE BB TTYYPPEE CC TTYYPPEE DD

LLOOWW Risk Group II IIII IIII IIIIII//IIVV

MMEEDDIIUUMM Risk Group II IIII IIIIII IIVV

HHIIGGHH Risk Group II IIII IIIIII//IIVV IIVV

HHIIGGHHEESSTT Risk Group IIII IIIIII//IIVV IIIIII//IIVV IIVV

Step 3. Identify Level of Infection Control Activities Required

IC Matrix - Class of Precautions: Construction Project by Patient Risk

Patient Risk Group

Construction Project Type

D. Description of Required Infection Control Precautions by Class

During Construction Project Upon Completion of Project

1. Execute work by methods to minimize raising

dust from construction operations.

2. Immediately replace a ceiling tile displaced for

visual inspection

1. Terminal cleaning upon project completion.

CL

AS

S I

1. Provide active means to prevent airborne dust

from dispersing into atmosphere.

2. Water mist work surfaces to control dust while cutting.

3. Seal unused doors with duct tape.

4. Block off and seal air vents.

5. Place dust mat at entrance and exit of work area

6. *Remove or isolate HVAC system in areas

where work is being performed.

1. Wipe work surfaces with disinfectant.

2. Contain construction waste before transport in

tightly covered containers.

3. Wet mop and/or vacuum with HEPA filtered

vacuum before leaving work area.

4. Remove isolation of HVAC system in areas


5. Terminal cleaning as needed and/or upon project

completion.

CL

AS

S I

I

CL

AS

S I

II

1. *Remove or Isolate HVAC system in area where

work is being done to prevent contamination of

duct system.

2. Complete all critical barriers i.e. sheetrock,

plywood, plastic, to seal area from non-work area

or implement control cube method (cart with

plastic covering and sealed connection to work

site with HEPA vacuum for vacuuming prior to

exit) before construction begins.

3. Maintain negative air pressure within work site

utilizing HEPA equipped air filtration units.



5. Cover transport receptacles or carts. Tape

covering unless solid lid.

* Use window for negative HEPA air exhaust when

accessible. Obtain V.A, resident engineer approval

for exhausting in existing exhaust ductwork.

1. Do not remove barriers from work area until

completed project is inspected by the owner’s

Safety Department and/or Infection Control

Department and thoroughly cleaned by the

owner’s Environmental Services Department.

2. Remove barrier materials carefully to minimize

spreading of dirt and debris associated with

construction.

3. Vacuum work area with HEPA filtered vacuums.

4. Wet mop area with disinfectant.



6. Terminal cleaning as needed and/or upon project

completion.

01 01 10 IC-4




1. Isolate HVAC system in area where work is

being done to prevent contamination of duct

system.

2. Complete all critical barriers i.e. sheetrock,

plywood, plastic, to seal area from non-work

area or implement control cube method (cart

with plastic covering and sealed connection to

work site with HEPA vacuum for vacuuming

prior to exit) before construction begins.

3. Maintain negative air pressure within work site

utilizing HEPA equipped air filtration units.

4. Seal holes, pipes, conduits, and punctures

appropriately.

5. Construct anteroom and require all personnel to

pass through this room so they can be vacuumed

using a HEPA vacuum cleaner before leaving

work site or they can wear cloth or paper

coveralls that are removed each time they leave

the work site.

6. All personnel entering work site are required to

wear shoe covers. Shoe covers must be changed

each time the worker exits the work area.

7. Do not remove barriers from work area until

completed project is inspected by the owner’s

Safety Department and Infection Control

Department and thoroughly cleaned by the

owner’s Environmental Services Department.

1. Remove barrier material carefully to minimize

spreading of dirt and debris associated with

construction.



3. Cover transport receptacles or carts. Tape

covering unless solid lid

4. Vacuum work area with HEPA filtered vacuums.

5. Wet mop area with disinfectant.



CL

AS

S I

V

Step 4. Identify the areas surrounding the project area, assessing potential impact

Unit Below Unit Above Lateral Lateral Behind Front

Risk Group Risk Group Risk Group Risk Group Risk Group Risk Group

Appendix: Identify and communicate the responsibility for project monitoring that includes infection control

concerns and risks. The ICRA may be modified throughout the project Revisions must be communicated to the

Project Manager.

(Note: Renovation/construction area shall be isolated from the occupied areas during construction and shall

be negative with respect to surrounding areas)

Step 5. Identify specific site of activity eg, patient rooms, medication room, etc.

Step 6. Identify issues related to: ventilation, plumbing, electrical in terms of the occurrence

of probable outages.

Step 7. Identify containment measures, using prior assessment. What types of barriers?

(Eg, solids wall barriers); Will HEPA filtration be required?

01 01 10 IC-5




Step 8. Consider potential risk of water damage. Is there a risk due to compromising

structural integrity? (eg, wall, ceiling, roof)

Step 9. Work hours: Can or will the work be done during non-patient care hours?

Step 10. Do plans allow for adequate number of isolation/negative airflow rooms?

Step 11. Do the plans allow for the required number & type of handwashing sinks?

Step 12. Does the infection control staff agree with the minimum number of sinks for this

project? (Verify against AIA Guidelines for types and area)

Step 13. Does the infection control staff agree with the plans relative to clean and soiled

utility rooms?

Step 14. Plan to discuss the following containment issues with the project team. Eg, traffic

flow, housekeeping, debris removal (how and when)

01 01 10 IC-6

Milwaukee VAMC Upgrade and Replace Building 123


Steam Line Piping anIdnf

Iencstuiloanti

Coonntrol Construction Perm

Pirtoject No. 695-17-1

Permit No: Location of Construction: Project Start Date:

Project Coordinator: Estimated Duration:

Contractor Performing Work Permit Expiration Date:

Supervisor: Telphone:

YES NO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY YE NO INFECTION CONTROL, RISK GROUP

TYPE A: Inspection, non-invasive activity GROUP 1: Low Risk

TYPE B: Small scale, short duration,

moderate to high levels GROUP 2: Medium Risk

TYPE C: Activity generates moderate to high levels of

dust, re Lures eater 1 work shift for completion GROUP 3: Medium/high Risk

TYPE. D: Major duration arid construction activities

Requiring consecutive work shifts GROUP 4: Highest Risk

CLASS I 1. Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from 3. Minor Demolition for Remodeling

construction operations.

2. Immediately replace any ceiling tile displaced for visual inspection.

CLASS 11 1, Provides active means to prevent air-bone dust from 6. Contain construction waste before transport in tightly

dispersing into atmosphere covered containers.

2. Water mist work surfaces to control dust while cutting. 7. Wet mop and/or vacuum with HEPA filtered vacuum 3. Seal unused doors with duct tape. before leaving work area. 4. Block off and seal air vents. S. Place dust mat at entrance and exit of work area. S. Wipe surfaces with disinfectant. 9. Remove or isolate HVAC system in areas where work

is being performed.

CLASS 111

Date

Initial

1. Obtain infection control permit before construction begins. 6. Vacuum work with HEPA filtered vacuums.

2. Isolate HVAC system in area where work is being done to 7. Wet mop with disinfectant

prevent contamination of the duct system. S. Remove barrier materials carefully to minimize 3. Complete all critical barriers or implement control cube spreading of dirt and debris associated with

method before construction begins. construction. 9. Contain construction waste before transport in

4. Maintain negative air pressure within work site utilizing tightly covered containers.

HEPA equipped air filtration units. 10. Cover transport receptacles or carts. Tape covering.

S. Do not remove barriers from work area until complete 11. Remove or isolate HVAC system in areas where work project is thoroughly cleaned by Env. Services Dept. is being performed/

Class IV

Date

Initial

l. Obtain infection control permit before construction begins. 7. All personnel entering work site are required to wear

2. Isolate HVAC= system in area where work is being done to shoe covers prevent contamination of duct system. S. Do not remove barriers from work area until completed

3. Complete all critical barriers or implement control cube project is thoroughly cleaned by the Environmental method before construction begins. Service Dept.

4. Maintain negative air pressure within work site utilizing 9. Vacuum work area with HEPA filtered vacuums.

HEPA equipped air filtration units. 10. Wet mop with disinfectant. 5. Seal holes, pipes, conduits, and punctures appropriately. 11. Remove barrier materials carefully to minimize

6. Construct anteroom and require all personnel to pass spreading of dirt and debris associated with

through this room so they can be vacuumed using a HEPA construction. vacuum cleaner before leaving work site or they can wear 12. Contain construction waste before transport in tightly cloth or paper coveralls that are removed each time they covered containers.

leave the work site. 13. Cover transport receptacles or carts. Tape covering. 14. Remove or isolate HVAC system in areas where is

being done.

Additional Requirements:

Exceptions/Additions to this permit Date

Date Initials Initials are noted b attached memoranda

Permit Request By: Permit Authorized By:

Date: Date:

03

01 01 10 IC-7




E. Apply Life Safety and standards (APIC) and the following criteria would need to be assured in order

to maintain the supply air side open during Class 4 construction activity:

• The air supply is 100% fresh air and the site and adjacent areas can be kept under negative pressure at

all times.

• There is no re circulated air in this section

• There is no duct work involved in this section of the demolition

• The site can never be positive to the adjacent areas (i.e. keep the negative air machines on at all times

or for 1-2 hours post site work until the negative action can be maintained.

• A log is maintained to document that the negative pressure is checked and has been maintained during

those hours when the negative air machines are turned off. (An alarmed device is recommended for

this purpose and should be maintained and monitored by the construction personnel).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All materials shall be delivered in their original package, container or bundle bearing the name of the

manufacturer and the brand name (where applicable). When transporting new materials & equipment

though the hospital use 4 mil Poly sheeting encasing materials, tools and equipment or use a totally

enclosed cart.

B. Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp surfaces and under cover

sufficient enough to prevent damage or contamination. Flammable materials cannot be stored inside

buildings. Replacement materials shall be stored outside of the regulated/work area until construction

is completed.

C. The Contractor shall not block or hinder use of buildings by patients, staff, and visitors to the VA in

partially occupied buildings by placing materials/equipment in any unauthorized place.

D. The Competent Person shall inspect for damaged, deteriorating or previously used materials. Such

materials shall not be used and shall be removed from the worksite and disposed of properly.

E. Demolition materials must be transported in totally enclosed containers.

1) Demolition on above ground floors may use a window debris chute to convey materials to an

enclosed dumpster that provides dust and noise control. The contractor is responsible to maintain

the original appearance of the building fascia.

2.1.2 NEGATIVE PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEM

A. The Contractor shall provide enough negative air machines to completely exchange the regulated area

air volume 4 actual times per hour. The Competent Person shall determine the number of units needed

for each regulated area by dividing the cubic feet in the regulated area by 15 and then dividing that

result by the actual cubic feet per minute (cfm) for each unit to determine the number of units needed

to effect 4 air changes per hour. Provide a standby unit in the event of machine failure and/or

emergency in an adjacent area.

2.1.3 DESIGN AND LAYOUT

A. Before start of work for each phase of the project, the contractor is to submit for approval, an

infection control plan which will include the design and layout of the regulated area to include the type

and location of infection control construction barriers to be used, access points, ante room location, etc.

The submittal shall indicate the number of, location of and size of negative air machines and exhaust

route & location of the windows to be used. The point(s) of exhaust, air flow within the regulated area,

anticipated negative pressure differential, and supporting calculations for sizing shall be provided. In

addition, submit the following:




01 01 10 IC-8

B. Manufacturer's information on the negative air machine(s).

C. Method of supplying power to the units and designation/location of the panels.

D. Description of testing method(s) for correct air volume and pressure differential. Provide

manufacturer's product data on the pressure differential measuring device used.

E. If auxiliary power supply is to be provided for the negative air machines, provide a schematic diagram

of the power supply and manufacturer's data on the generator and switch.

F. Location of isolation negative air pressure monitor.

G. The following is a SAMPLE plan:

SAMPLE INFECTION CONTROL PLAN

2.1.4 NEGATIVE AIR MACHINES

A. Negative Air Machine Cabinet: The cabinet shall be constructed of steel or other durable material

capable of withstanding potential damage from rough handling and transportation. The width of the

cabinet shall be less than 30" in order to fit in standard doorways. The cabinet must be factory sealed

to prevent dust from being released during use, transport, or maintenance. Any access to and

replacement of filters shall be from the inlet end. The unit must be on casters or wheels.

B. Negative Air Machine Fan: The rating capacity of the fan must the air moving capacity under actual

operating conditions. Manufacturer's typically use "free-air" (no resistance) conditions when rating

fans. The fan must be a centrifugal type fan.




01 01 10 IC-9

C. Negative Air Machine Final Filter:

1) When exhausting directly to the outside from a window or penetration the filter shall be a

minimum MERV 8 pleated filter media completely sealed on all edges within a structurally rigid

frame.

2) When exhausting to a exhaust duct: the final filter shall be a HEPA filter. The filter media must be

completely sealed on all edges within a structurally rigid frame. The filter shall align with a

continuous flexible gasket material in the negative air machine housing to form an air tight seal.

Each HEPA filter shall be individually tested and certified by the manufacturer to have an

Testing shall have been done in accordance with Military Standard MIL- STD-282 and Army

Instruction Manual 136-300-175A. Each filter must bear a UL586 label to indicate ability to

perform under specified conditions. Each filter shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer,

serial number, air flow rating, efficiency and resistance, and the direction of test air flow.

D. Negative Air Machine Pre-filters: The pre-filters, which protect the final HEPA filter by removing

larger particles, are required to prolong the operating life of the HEPA filter. Two stages of pre-

filtration are required. A first stage pre-filter shall be a low efficien

larger. A second stage pre-

or larger. Pre-filters shall be installed either on or in the intake grid of the unit and held in place with a

special housing or clamps.

F. Negative Air Machine Safety and Warning Devices: An electrical/ mechanical lockout must be provide

to prevent the fan from being operated without a HEPA filter. Units must be equipped with an

automatic shutdown device to stop the fan in the event of a rupture in the HEPA filter or blockage in

the discharge of the fan. Warning lights are required to indicate normal operation; too high a pressure

drop across filters; or too low of a pressure drop across filters.

G. Negative Air Machine Electrical: All electrical components shall be approved by the National

Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) and Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). Each unit must

be provided with overload protection and the motor, fan, fan housing, and cabinet must be grounded.

2.1.5 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL

A. The fully operational negative air system within the regulated area shall continuously maintain a

pressure differential of -0.02" water column. Before any disturbance of any material or building

system, this shall be demonstrated to the VA by use of a pressure differential meter/manometer as

required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(e)(5)(i). The Competent Person shall be responsible for

providing and maintaining the negative pressure and air changes as required by OSHA and this

specification.

2.1.6 TESTING THE SYSTEM

A. The negative pressure system must be tested before any disturbedance. After the regulated area has

been completely prepared, the decontamination units set up, and the negative air machines installed,

start the units up one at a time. Demonstrate and document the operation and testing of the negative

pressure system to the VA using smoke tubes and a negative pressure gauge. Testing must also be done

at the start of each work shift.

2.1.7 DEMONSTRATION OF THE NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE SYSTEM

A. The demonstration of the operation of the negative pressure system to the VA shall include, but not be

limited to, the following:

1) Contractor to install Triatek (Web site www.Ttk.com) negative air isolation monitoring stations

at the sites access doors or at opposite sides of the construction area check with COTR for number

of units and location.




01 01 10 IC-10

2) Curtains of the decontamination units move in toward regulated area.

3) Use smoke tubes to demonstrate air is moving air across all areas in which work is to be done.

4) Plastic barriers and sheeting move lightly in toward the regulated area.

2.1.8 USE OF SYSTEM DURING CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS

A. Start units before beginning any disturbance occurs. After work begins, the units shall run

continuously, maintaining 4 actual air changes per hour at a negative pressure differential of 5.0 Pa (-

0.02") water column, for the duration of the work until a final visual clearance and final air clearance

has been completed.

B. The negative air machines shall not be shut down for the duration of the project unless authorized by

the VA, in writing.

C. Construction work shall begin at a location closest from the units and proceed away from them. If an

electric failure occurs, the Competent Person shall stop all work and not resume until power is restored

and all units necessary are operating properly again.

D. The negative air machines shall continue to run after all work is completed and until a final visual

clearance and a final air, clearance has been completed for that regulated area.

2.2 CONTAINMENT BARRIERS AND COVERINGS IN THE REGULATED AREA

2.2.1 GENERAL

A. Seal off the perimeter to the regulated area to completely isolate the regulated area from adjacent

spaces. All surfaces in the regulated area must be covered to prevent contamination and to facilitate

clean-up. Should adjacent areas become contaminated, immediately stop work and clean up the

contamination at no additional cost to the Government.

2.2.3 CONTROLLING ACCESS TO THE REGULATED AREA

A. Access to the regulated area is allowed only through the personnel decontamination facility (PDF). All

other means of access shall be eliminated and OSHA warning signs posted as required by OSHA. If

the regulated area is adjacent to or within view of an occupied area, provide a visual barrier of opaque

fire retardant poly sheeting at least 4 mils thick to prevent building occupant observation. If the

adjacent area is accessible to the public, the barrier must be solid and capable of withstanding the

negative pressure.

2.2.4 CRITICAL BARRIERS

A. Completely separate the regulated area from adjacent areas using fire retardant poly at least 6 mils

thick and duct tape. Individually seal with two layers of 6 mil poly and duct tape all HVAC openings,

cap off exhaust into the regulated area. Individually seal all lighting fixtures, clocks, doors, windows,

convectors, speakers, or any other objects in the regulated area. Use care with hot/warm surfaces see

fig 1.

2.2.5 PRIMARY BARRIERS

A. Temporary Construction Partitions:

1. Install and maintain temporary construction partitions to provide separations between construction

areas and adjoining areas. Construct partitions of gypsum board or treated plywood (flame spread

rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84) on one side of wood or metal steel studs. Seal

with one layers of 6 mil poly for a vapor barrier under gypsum or plywood. Extend the Poly

through suspended ceilings to floor slab or roof. Seal penetrations at door openings, install tight-

fitting yellow construction doors with self-closing devices see fig. 2 for barrier construction.

Contractor to provide the construction(s) door for the project.

2.2.6 CONTRACTOR SPILL RESPONSE KIT

A. The kit should include the following:

01 01 10 IC-11




1. Shop Vacuum.

2. Multi-Purpose Spill Control Sorbents to absorb nonaggesive liquids up to 30 gallons.

3. Sorbents pillows.

4. Pipe leak clamps for copper & steel pipe in sufficient size range and quantity base on project

piping scope.

5. Bucket & mop and water resistant duct tape.

Figure 1

01 01 10 IC-12




Figure 2

Figure 3




01 01 10–1 (SN)

SECTION 01 01 10 (SN)

SPECIAL NOTES

7/2016

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 Not Used.

1.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM:

FIRE/SECURITY ALARM SYSTEMS: Contractor shall advise the Graphic Control Center and/or the Police Desk at

extension 41010/42222 respectively, prior to any work which might result in the Fire Alarm System or Security

System (this includes but is no limited to: Smoke Detectors, Water Flow Switches, Pull Stations, Sprinkler

Heads, Motion Detectors, Door Contacts, Security Door Controls, etc.) being activated, in addition to having an

approved outage form from the Facility Management Department. Notification to Graphics and/or the Police

Desk and having an outage form, does not absolve the contractor from following the proper procedures to

prevent the system from activating, i.e. covering the smoke heads with paper bags, closing valves, containing

dust, monitoring and controlling security devices, etc.). If any system activates due to the contractor's failure to

notify the Graphic Control Center, the Contractor’s failure to follow proper procedures, or the Contractor’s

failure to obtain an outage form, a Modification/Settlement by Determination deduction of $2,500.00 per

alarm/event or notice from the Police that a construction area was left unsecured will be issued to the

contractor.

1.3 SCHEDULING OF WORK:

A. Contractor shall verbally schedule work areas with COR not less than fifteen (15) calendar days in advance

of commencement of work. Verbal notification shall be backed up and verified in writing.

B. Contractor shall verbally schedule outages or service interruptions with COR not less than fifteen (15)

calendar days in advance of intended commencement of work. Notification does not guarantee the date

of scheduled outage or service interruption however COR will schedule such dates and inform the

contractor. Date will be scheduled with medical center personnel when service interruption will minimize

affect to hospital patients and operations. Contractor to submit VA System Outage Request form to COR

not less than fifteen (15) calendar days in advance of intended commencement of outage work.

Contractor to attend (2) weekly pre-outage meetings with Engineering and staff to coordinate actual date

of outage, duration, time of outage, phasing, and affected services. In addition, contractor to attend the

pre-outage meeting one hour prior to outage to coordinate communications, readiness, pre-outage

checklist, document requirements, temporary measures, lock out tag out and other outage requirements

and procedures.

C. Contractor to attend weekly construction meetings.

1.4 PROTECTION OF WORK AREAS:

Contractor to provide drop cloths when working in occupied areas to avoid staining or damaging existing

carpets or vinyl tile floors.

1.5 HOURS OF WORK:

A. The hours of contract work shall be from 7:00 a.m. until 4:30 p.m. the normal work shift for hospital

employees, the contractor shall verify shift or shifts required for construction areas. Other than normal,

after (off) hours, including federal holidays shall be scheduled two days prior to starting with the Project

Manager. These off hours will be required to complete the project in the time allotted for the contract at no

additional cost to the Department of Veterans Affairs. Upon approval of the Department of Veterans

Affairs, the contractor will propose the scope or extent of off hour work due to individual contractor

resources available to accomplish this project in the time allotted. In addition, these off hours will be




01 01 10–2 (SN)

required for utility/service interruptions, and any/other work that may interrupt the operation of the

occupied space, i.e., some road construction, demolition, work in occupied areas, work affecting occupied

areas, etc. Some noise producing demolition operations will be required to be scheduled for off work hours

as directed by COR and described on drawings.

B. Certain work items, which require off-hour work, have been identified. These items are indicated on the

drawings. Refer, in particular, to Phasing Notes on Drawings. All drawings shall be reviewed for off-hour

work requirements and items creating disturbance to the hospital staff or patient care must be performed

during off-hour working periods as established and approved by the VA Engineer.

C. Building will be occupied during performance of work, but areas of alterations will be vacated. Contractor

shall take all measures and provide all material necessary for protecting existing equipment and property

in affected areas of construction against dust and debris, so that equipment and affected areas to be used

in the Medical Centers operations will not be hindered. Contractor shall permit access to Department of

Veterans Affairs personnel and patients through other construction areas, which serve as routes of access

to such affected areas and equipment. Coordinate alteration work in areas occupied by the VA so that

Medical Center operations will continue during the construction period. Contractor to construct 7 feet tall

by 5 feet wide metal stud and drywall tunnels through occupied space as deemed necessary by the VA for

access by Medical Center personnel and maintaining construction operations.

1.6 SUBMITTALS:

A. Start of Construction: The contractor submittals must be forwarded in sufficient time to permit proper

consideration and approval by the government and be timed to permit adequate lead time for procurement of

contract required items. Delivery of submittals to the COR or verbal acknowledgement of receipt by the Project

Manager does not constitute approval.

B. Sole Source Items: There will be no substitutions for the products and services listed below. Sole source

items to be in accordance with VAAR 852.236-90 Restriction on submission and use of equal products.

This clause applies to the following items:

System / Equipment Manufacturer and Model In Contract

(Yes or No)

Fire Alarm System

Siemens Cerberus Pyrotronics System

No

Security System & Code Blue

Johnson Controls Pegasys/P2000 System

No

Pneumatic Tube System

Swiss Translogic

No

Medical Gas Alarms

Puritan Bennett Medical Gas alarms

No

Nurse Call

Jeron Health Care Call System Provider 790 Nurse

Call System

No

Isolation Room Controls

Employ Critical Room Control

No




01 01 10–3 (SN)

Doors, Hardware, Locks and Keying

Employ Best Patented cylindrical and mortise sets

with Medeco 7-pin interchangeable cylindrical cores,

LCN Closers (Mechanical, Electronic Hold-Open,

Electromagnetic),Von Duprin Exit Devices, Hager

Hinges

--

Automatic Door Operator

Tormax 1301 Super HD Automatic Door Operator

(Low Energy)

No

Building Automation and HVAC

Controls

Johnson Controls Metasys control system

No

Refrigerator Temperature Controls

Cooper Atkins Temp Trak Refrigeration Temperature

Control System

No

Wander Guard

Accutech ES2200 Patient Wandering Prevention

System

No

Modular Furniture

Herman Miller Products

No

Patient Ceiling Lifts

Guldmann GH3+ Ceiling

No

Modular Brick

Belden Brick (County Materials) Seal Brown Velour A,

Modular Brick

No

Automatic Transfer Switches

Eaton Magnum Transfer Switches

No

Electrical Metering

Eaton/Cutler Hammer PowerXpert system

No

Interiors

Reference Interior Schedule

No

Tile Grout Sealant

Microguard Inorganic Protective Barrier

No

Firestop Systems

HILTI Firestop Systems

No

Prefabricated Modular

Wall/Partition Systems and

DIRTT Environmental Solutions

No




01 01 10–4 (SN)

Enclosures

Stone Flex Aggregate Panels

CEP Panels, Inc., Bermuda White SN 100, Fine Grade

Aggregate Finish

No

Curtain Track Rail Support System

(CTRSS)

Barrier Free Lift RX-6001/Architex Speed Fabric

No

Interior Signage

2/90 Sign Systems

No

1.7 EMERGENCY SERVICE:

All offerors, if successful, must be able to respond to all contract and contractor created emergency services

resulting from contractor actions and installations, as determined by the Department of Veterans Affairs COR,

with qualified staff personnel within one (1) hour of verbal notification during construction stages and warranty

period. Bidders must be prepared to show proof, in writing, that they can satisfy this requirement prior to

award.

1.8 KEYS:

Keys for access to construction/work areas may be issued to the contractor at the discretion of the Project

Manager. Up to three sets of keys will be provided at no cost. All keys will be assigned through the SAMS box

and the contractor will be given access based on their VA ID Card. Upon completion of the work, failure to

return all issued keys to the Project Manager will result in the issuance of a Settlement by Determination in the

amount of $100.00 for each outstanding key. In addition, a $50.00 fee will be paid to VA for each outstanding

key. Keys will be provided through the FM SAM Box. Keys are to be picked up and returned daily. If keys are

not returned by the end of the day, a modification of $50.00/key per day will be assessed against the

contractor.

1.9 SAFETY ITEMS:

A. Training:

• All employees of contractor and subcontractor shall be aware of the egress routes from the

construction areas. It is the contractor's responsibility to ensure all employees are aware of the

fire alarm codes for the building they are working in and participate in fire alarm drills and actual

fire alarms.

• Project Site Superintendent shall have the 30-hour OSHA certified Construction Safety course.

• All employees of general contractor or subcontractors shall have the 10-hour OSHA certified

Construction Safety course.

• Submit training records of all such employees for approval before the start of any work onsite.

B. Barricades: The contractor is responsible to erect barricades, construction and safety signs, and new

egress routes. The barricades will be erected to restrict areas where hazardous operations are

performed. The construction and safety signs shall consist of caution signs as determined and approved

by VA; egress signs, where egress has been altered for construction; and any applicable hazardous

warning signs. If the egress is changed due to construction, the contractor shall provide temporary

directional signs for changes as determined by VA and for construction of any walkways, steps, or

overhead protection scaffolding or the like as required providing a new means of egress. Emergency




01 01 10–5 (SN)

egress plan shall be developed by the contractor and submitted for approval by the designated VA

safety manager before egress routes are altered.

C Fire Extinguisher: The contractor and subcontractors shall provide fully charged and fully operational fire

extinguishers as required and in accordance with section FSS on the job site(s) at all times. Reference

section 01 01 10 FSS. NFPA 10 requires the bottom of the extinguisher to be at least 4-inches above

finished floor and the top of the extinguisher shall be no higher than 60-inches above finished floor.

D. Debris: Combustible storage and debris shall be kept to the lowest level necessary for required daily

operations. The construction area shall be kept clean as indicated in general requirements and conditions

E. Gasoline Powered Equipment: Gasoline powered equipment shall not be used within the confines of any

building on the Medical Center without specific written permission from the Chief, Engineering Service.

F. Fire/Smoke Doors: Fire and/or smoke doors shall not be propped open or prevented from closing and

latching. This includes mechanical equipment rooms and utility closet doors.

G. Construction Site Phone: Contractor to run wiring from telephone closet to the construction space for the

installation of a VA phone in the constitution space. Installation of the phone is required prior to

construction can begin. The VA will provide the phone.

H. Construction Hard Hats: General Contractor to provide (4) sets of hard hats and safety glasses for each

worksite for VA staff use.

I. Exit Signs:

a. Inside Construction Space: Contractor to provide luminescent Exit Signs throughout the

construction space such that while standing in any place within the construction space, an Exit

sign is visible and the path of egress can be followed.

b. Outside Construction Space: Contractor will cover, relocate, etc. Exit signs impacted due to their

construction operations as directed by the ILSM and the VA Safety Officer.

1.10 SECURITY OF CONSTRUCTION SITES – Contractor Regulations

A. All construction sites must be secured to prevent inappropriate access by patients, visitors, and employees.

While such security fences, doors, and barricades are temporary, they must be substantially installed to

control access to the site. The existing security (Pegasys by Johnson Controls and Ingersoll Rand) system

must be extended to each construction access door. Each construction door must be provided with an

Ingersoll Rand Integrated Reader Lock programmed to the existing VA security system. Construction sites

and all security measures must be monitored daily to ensure that security is maintained. Local VA Police

must be alerted about the construction project. At the close of activity daily, before securing the site or

portions of the site, the contractor must ensure that there are no patients, visitors, or staff in the area. If

construction site problems arise, the Contracting Officer and COR will take appropriate action to correct

any and all safety and security conditions.

B. VA engineering, safety/fire department, and police staff must have the right to access the construction site

as needed to perform their assigned responsibilities.

C. Lock up the worksite at all times to prevent patients and other unauthorized people from entering the site.

D. The need for job site security is much greater when work is being conducted in psychiatric areas to protect

the safety of the patients. All job boxes, tools, etc., must be locked up even when workers are on site

unless there’s enough activity to assure that patients cannot access tools or site. Verify that no one is in the

construction area upon locking up the site for the evening.

E. Two evacuation routes from the worksite must be maintained at all times.

F. Contractors may lock up their tools etc., with personal locks.




01 01 10–6 (SN)

1.11 PENETRATIONS:

A. WALL:

a. All wall and/or floor penetrations created by work on this contract, whether by demolition or new

construction, shall be patched by the general contractor or as assigned by the general contractor. All

patching materials shall be of like kind or a suitable substitute approved by NFPA or UL.

b. If the permit is for other than inspection, a Follow-Up Inspection page will need to be filled out by the

person performing the installation/removal work, which then needs to be signed and returned to

whoever originally issued the permit. The permit initiator is then responsible for checking the areas

listed on the permit to ensure firestopping was completed according to Facility standards and

penetrations sealed with an approved fire/smoke sealant compound so as to maintain fire and smoke

separation integrity. Documentation of the sealant or system used in the penetration must be made

available at the affected penetration by the permit requestor at the time of permit completion

inspection. The program or person completing the follow up inspection must validate that the sealant

compound or system is properly rated and installed for maintaining the rating of the affected smoke or

firewall. Photo-documentation in lieu of interim inspections can be performed to validate work.

c. ONLY (1) one type of fire sealant is permissible per hole.

d. The permit will be in this person’s possession while all inspections and/or work are being performed.

B. CEILINGS:

a. To ensure that proper ceiling penetrations are sealed, all internal departments and contractors doing

any cabling, wiring, plumbing, etc., must obtain a ceiling access permit from Facilities Services prior to

installation.

b. All wall penetrations must be located, marked, and sealed by contractor responsible for penetration.

As penetrations are sealed, Facilities Service must be contacted to inspect penetrations for proper

sealing.

c. If the permit is for other than inspection, a Follow-Up Inspection page will need to be filled out by the

person performing the installation/removal work, which then needs to be signed and returned to

whoever originally issued the permit. The permit initiator is then responsible for checking the areas

listed on the permit to ensure firestopping was completed according to Facility standards and

penetrations sealed with an approved fire/smoke sealant compound so as to maintain fire and smoke

separation integrity. Documentation of the sealant or system used in the penetration must be made

available at the affected penetration by the permit requestor at the time of permit completion

inspection. The program or person completing the follow up inspection must validate that the sealant

compound or system is properly rated and installed for maintaining the rating of the affected smoke or

firewall. Photo-documentation in lieu of interim inspections can be performed to validate work.

d. The permit will be in this person’s possession while all inspections and/or work are being performed.

e. At the end of each work day and prior to leaving work site, the contractor shall replace all ceiling tiles

temporarily removed to do work above finished ceilings in corridors.

f. If it is not practical to replace all ceiling tiles on a daily basis the contractor is to construct 7 feet tall by 5

feet wide metal stud and drywall tunnels through occupied spaces as deemed necessary by the VA for

access by Medical Center personnel and maintaining construction operations. Upon the first incident of

the contractor not replacing the ceiling tiles, this tunnel construction will have to commence

immediately prior to any further construction on the project.

C. Reference section 01 01 10 – 1HR for additional information.

1.12 PHASING AND UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER CONDITIONS:




01 01 10–7 (SN)

Phasing on this contract is critical as portions of the area to be remodeled shall remain occupied throughout the

construction work. Contractor will be working in an operational hospital and not be provided designated

elevators or entrances. The contractor will share the corridors, the B-Bank elevators, loading dock, etc. with

staff, patients and other contractors. Each phase shall be as described on the drawings and/or specifications

shall be completed in the sequence described. Also refer to Section 01 00 00, Article 1.6.G. Phasing.

Unusually Severe Weather Conditions: The contractor is expected to understand the seasonal conditions

affecting the work and to take into account normal weather variations at the site location during the planned

period of performance. Before a determination that the contractor is entitled to additional time extension

(excused delay) for unusually severe weather, the contractor must demonstrate (1) that the weather was

unforeseeable and unusually severe and (2) that critical path work was actually delayed by the weather. Risk

allocation for unusually severe weather conditions is the responsibility of the contractor and is not

compensable.

1.13 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

The contractor is required to preserve and protect all structures, equipment, and vegetation on or adjacent to the

work site, which are not to be removed and which do not unreasonably interfere with the work required under the

contract. The contractor will be required to repair any damage to facilities resulting from failure to exercise

reasonable care in performing the work.

1.14 SCAFFOLDING:

All scaffolds and other work platforms construction activities shall comply with 29 CFR 1926. Contractor is to

provide copies of daily scaffolding inspections with daily logs.

1.15 ENERGY EFFICIENCY REQUIREMENTS:

A. Federal Executive Order #13423/#13514 requires all energy efficiency materials, equipment, and systems to

be evaluated and if feasible incorporated into VA Projects. The A/E, prime contractor, and all subcontractors

shall cooperate with the Federal Government in specifying, evaluating, documenting, purchasing, and

installing energy efficient equipment that meet basic energy efficiency criteria established by the VA.

B. All design and installation will be in accordance with current VAMC, HVAC design guides, NEC, NFPA,

ASHRAE 90.1, state, local and all VA and federal codes.

C. The VA intends to provide energy savings equipment and design modifications for current energy usage to

the most efficient and economical level possible.

1.16 INSPECTIONS:

All mechanical and electrical work shall be inspected by Engineering Service (Shop & COR) personnel prior to

being put into operation or closing up if work will be hidden by walls, ceilings, drop ceilings, cover plates, access

panels, etc. Contractor shall notify the VA RE a minimum of two days prior to the inspection date, times and

dates shall be scheduled and agreed upon by VA. Installations will be inspected by these VA personnel for work

in compliance with State, Federal, Local, Dept. of Veterans Affairs Codes, regulations and contract

specifications. If corrections, alterations, adjustments, new construction etc. is required, the VA will be notified

within 48 hours of completion of such items. These inspections and corrections, alterations, etc. will be made

at no additional time or cost to VA.

1.17 CONTRACTOR’S AGREEMENT - RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR ALL CONTRACTORS

The following is the contractor’s agreement required to be signed at the pre-construction meeting and updated

monthly when new subcontractors start working on the job site. The agreement is the general contractor’s

responsibility to ensure all subcontractor personnel are trained and acknowledge (sign) the agreement.

A. STANDARD POLICY:




01 01 10–8 (SN)

All outside General contractors and Sub-contractors will coordinate all work within the hospital with

Facilities Management before beginning work.

B. PURPOSE:

General Contractor will ensure that each individual General Contractor and Sub-Contractor employee is

responsible for complying with established hospital standards, applicable OSHA Safety Requirements,

federal, state and local environmental regulations, wearing prescribed safety equipment, and preventing

avoidable accidents.

C. PROCEDURE

The contractor will ensure that each individual contractor and sub-contractor employee review,

understand and acknowledge (sign) the following information prior to the commencement of work

scheduled at this facility. General Contractor will forward copies of signed acknowledgements to

Project Engineer of all new employees on a monthly basis.

The following building rules and regulations affect all contractor personnel, suppliers, and vendors:

D. Access to Construction Areas

• Access is limited to areas such as critical care and surgical units, as well as mechanical/electrical

rooms, etc. Access can be obtained through Facilities Service.

• Access to any floors of the facility after normally scheduled work hours (Monday-Friday, 7:00 a.m.-

5:00 p.m.) must be scheduled in advance with the Project section of Facilities Service. Police and

Security reserves the right to refuse access to anyone without prior authorization and identification.

• Ready access for the Engineering, Safety, Police and (the Fire Department) shall be maintained to all

areas under construction at all times.

• Areas under construction shall be locked during off-hours. Keys and cylinders for this purpose are

obtained through Facilities Service. Contractors will not put their locks on any doors without VA

approval.

E. Accidents and Injuries

• First Aid/Medical Aid/Emergency Treatment for workers: The contractor must post emergency phone

numbers and treatment facilities if any contractor employees are injured on the job, or need medical

treatment

• Work site injuries must be reported to the VA. The VA has an accident reporting form (form number

2162). The COTS/ Safety/ or Security and Police Service will initiate the 2162. Once the VA has

completed the supervisor’s portion the injured individual will be required to complete the narrative

portion of the report. The service chief responsible for the contract is also required to sign the report

and forward the original report to the Safety Section.

F. Asbestos

• There are both friable and non-friable asbestos-containing materials located within the hospital

complex. Inspection reports are located in the Facilities Service Department. Contractors are required

to be aware of the asbestos materials located in the vicinity of their work. Further, all contractors are

expressly forbidden to disturb any asbestos-containing materials unless specifically authorized in

writing by VA. Under no circumstances are any materials supplied or installed by the contractor to

contain asbestos in any form or quantity.




01 01 10–9 (SN)

• Asbestos removal contractors will be trained and licensed, and will follow all OSHA rules, VA

specifications, state and local regulations from notification to disposal.

• A VA representative will verify the adequacy of the barriers and ventilation before any asbestos

removal work is conducted.

• The contractor is responsible for monitoring his own employees’ exposure to asbestos.

• Additional specific asbestos removal specifications will apply.

• Contractor to provide a Fiscal Year breakdown of Asbestos Costs on the project.

G. ACM TRACE WORK OPERATIONS:

• ACM TRACE RESULTS - Should renovation activities deem the material friable due to cutting, grinding

or other mechanical means of removal, an employer is bound by OSHA 29 CFR regulations 1926.1200

(d) (5) (iv) to protect their employees. This may determine that removal of the materials be

performed by asbestos abatement workers trained in 29 CFR 1926.1101.

*OSHA regulation 1910.1200 HAZARDOUS COMMUNICATION Section (d)(5) Hazard determination

“…employer shall determine the hazards of mixture of chemicals as follows: (iv) “If the…employer has

evidence to indicate that a component present in the mixture in concentrations of less than one

percent…could be released in concentrations which would exceed an established OSHA permissible

exposure limit…or could present a health risk to employees in those concentrations, the mixture shall

be assumed to present the same hazard.”

• General Summary:

1. Employees, contractors, etc. must be warned about the presence of asbestos.

2. The contractor must have a competent person on site during work. (At a minimum, it should be

a trained, certified asbestos supervisor).

3. Personal exposure assessments (negative exposure assessment) are required (PCM analysis) and

workers should begin work with PPE.

4. Wet methods and daily clean up and sealing waste in leak tight containers are required. The

following is a list of references from OSHA guides. Note: The reference to the word “sheet rock”

is based on trace (<1%) of asbestos being present in the “sheet rock.”

• The contractor will be responsible for proper work practices and prohibitions for all construction

activities involving material that contains any amount of asbestos regardless of the exposure levels.

And the standard has exposure-based requirements, consisting of a 0.1 fiber/cc 8-hour TWA PEL and

a 1 fiber/cc 30-minute excursion limit, and other requirements that apply whenever worker

exposures exceed either or both of the limits, regardless of the amount of asbestos contained in the

materials involved.

• If some of the items associated with the installed sheetrock contain some asbestos but none of them

contain >1% asbestos, then removal of the sheetrock is considered unclassified asbestos work. This

means that only certain ones of the standard's work practice and engineering control obligations, and

prohibitions pertain. Some of the general ones do not pertain because they apply to installed

building materials containing >1% asbestos (ACM). How many of the eligible general work practice

and engineering control obligations, and prohibitions are applicable depends on whether the

employee levels of exposure to airborne asbestos exceed either of the asbestos PELs. In further

explanation: These OSHA references are specific to this issue.




01 01 10–10 (SN)

• If the employees' asbestos exposures exceed neither asbestos PEL, then only two of standard's

general work practice control procedures and three of the standard's general prohibitions pertain to

the sheetrock removal operation; none of the standard's engineering control methods pertain to the

sheetrock removal operation. Those general work practice procedures and general prohibitions the

employer must observe under such a condition are those presented at:

• 29 CFR 1926.1101(g)(1)(ii), which requires: wet methods, or wetting agents, to control employee

exposures during asbestos handling, ... removal, cutting, ... and cleanup, except where employers

demonstrate that the use of wet methods is infeasible due to for example, the creation of electrical

hazards ... [and] equipment malfunction...; 29 CFR 1926.1101(g)(1)(iii), which requires: prompt

clean-up and disposal of wastes and debris contaminated with asbestos in leak-tight containers...;

29 CFR 1926.1101(g)(3)(i), which prohibits: high-speed abrasive disc saws that are not equipped

with point of cut ventilator or enclosures with HEPA filtered exhaust air; 29 CFR 1926.1101(g)(3)(ii),

which prohibits: compressed air used to remove asbestos, or materials containing asbestos, unless

the compressed air is used in conjunction with an enclosed ventilation system designed to capture

the dust cloud created by the compressed air; and 29 CFR 1926.1101(g)(3)(iv), which prohibits:

employee rotation as a means of reducing employee exposure to asbestos.

H. Clean-Up

• All work activity within occupied portions of the facility shall be immediately cleaned and restored to

its original finished condition upon completion of the activity. If the activity continues into the next

workday, the area shall be left safe, clean, and presentable.

• Public restrooms are not to be used for the cleaning of tools or equipment, i.e., paintbrushes, rollers,

finishing tools, etc. Janitor’s slop sinks are available for this purpose. If janitor’s closets are used, they

must be cleaned.

• Trash, combustible waste, and excess construction materials must be removed daily to prevent

accumulation. Contractors must arrange for the removal of their debris and waste.

• All work for an area must be confined within that space. Public corridors, stairwells, equipment

rooms, and vacant floors are not to be used for the storage of materials or as a workshop. Tracking of

construction dirt into the public corridors or stairwells must be prevented. The contractor will provide

dampened walk-off mats at all entrances and exits from the construction area.

• If smoke detectors are covered during dust-producing activities, they must be uncovered daily.

I. Compressed Gas Cylinders:

• Compressed gas cylinders are very dangerous if not treated properly.

• Employees who work with compressed gas cylinders must have specific training.

• Make sure that they are secured properly when in use or in storage.

• Always keep the caps on the cylinders when they are not in use.

• See also Hot Work section.

J. Confined Space:

• Confined Space Entries. All Confined Spaces are clearly marked on campus. NO ENTRY is allowed in

the areas without prior approval by the Project Engineer. NO ONE will be allowed to enter these

areas without the proper qualifications, equipment and training as required by the OSHA Standards

(29 CFR 1910.147)




01 01 10–11 (SN)

• Identify storm sewers, underground electrical vaults, and all other areas that require confined space

permits. (e.g., a map showing the locations of all the confined spaces located in the Facilities Service

Department).

• All hospital personnel that would require entry into these spaces must abide by the Confined Space

Program Procedure.

• It is the sole responsibility of any outside contractor doing work on a VA Medical Center campus to

coordinate entry into any of these spaces or any other marked permit required confined spaces with

the medical center.

• Anyone entering a permit-required confined space must follow Occupational Safety and Health

Administration (OSHA) Regulations, 29 CFR 1910.120.

• Contractor to submit as a formal submittal the Confined Space Entry program (and CSE Permit if

needed).

K. Contractor Room/Space Guidelines:

• Materials will be kept on the job site, in the contractor’s room or in storage space provided by the

Contractor via trailer located in the VA corporation yard on the North East section of the VA grounds.

• Any shared space within storage room(s) must be accessible to Facilities Service. Do not block access

to electric panels or fire protection equipment.

• Hallways are not to be used for storage.

• Contractors will manage the area and assure the site is kept clean and safe. (OSHA standards apply.)

• Any disputes or concerns will be directed to the Facilities Service Manager.

L. Damage by Contractors:

• Any damage caused by the contractor’s employees is to be reported to the COR or Facilities Service

Project Section immediately.

M. Deliveries:

• All material deliveries at the loading dock must be coordinated with the Receiving Department in

advance.

N. Dress Code:

• All personnel must be appropriately dressed for their work. T-shirts or garments with obscene or

suggestive messages are not permitted. Personnel found improperly dressed will be asked to leave

the facility. No construction staff is allowed to remove shirts or other clothing. No articles may

include offensive statements/graphics.

O. Dust Barriers and Ventilation Requirements:

• Reference section 01 01 10 IC.

• Dust barriers are needed to protect occupied areas on any portion of the job that has potential to

create dust.

P. Elevator Usage:

• Contractors shall not hold or block from use any public elevators in any building unless authorized by

the COR.




01 01 10–12 (SN)

• Contractors shall use “B“ bank freight elevators only for the delivery and transportation of materials

and demolition materials. Contractors shall not hold or block public elevators from use in any

building. .

Q. Emergencies:

Fire Plan - There is no difference between a fire drill and an actual fire.

General Contractor will ensure that each employee on the worksite knows where the pull stations are

in the areas you are working.

If you are in the area of the fire:

R Rescue anyone from the area if necessary

A Pull the nearest Pull Station

C. Contain the fire by closing all doors in the area

E Extinguish if possible or Evacuate the area immediately

If you are NOT in the area of the fire:

Construction Workers are to cease activities, stay in place, and wait for further instructions or

cancellation of the fire drill.

DO NOT move through the hospital. DO NOT use the elevators or stairwells.

• Medical Emergencies - Any contractor who witnesses a medical emergency is to pick up a nearest

phone and dial “911” or the operator and describe the condition of the emergency.

• Accidents/Injuries - The contractor must post emergency phone numbers and treatment facilities for

any injured employee.

• Worksite injuries must be reported to the VA immediately using the VA accident reporting form

(Number 2162). The COR/Safety/or Security and Police Service will initiate the 2162.

• Patients and visitors may be anxious or irritated because of their situation. If you are faced with any

patient or visitor that gets aggressive with you, simply call Ext. 42222 and say “Code Green” and

describe the situation. Security will respond immediately.

R. Equipment Safety:

• Ladders are not to be left unattended in public areas during breaks and lunch hours. Ladders shall be

laid down and placed out of traffic areas during these periods.

• No tools, carts, ladders or other equipment are to be left unattended outside a secure area.

• Yellow safety barricades must be used when working in public areas.

• Use of hospital equipment is permitted only if the contractor receives permission from Facilities

Service and is properly trained on the USC of the equipment.

S. Equipment and Supplies:

• Caution must be used with all flammable materials, i.e., adhesives, thinners, varnishes, etc.

• All paints shall be low odor latex paint. The contractor will use odor reducing agents in all paints and

solvents. Ventilation will be required if toxic or foul-smelling materials have to be applied.

• Only a one-day supply of paints, oils, and gas cylinders is permitted within the facility, unless it’s

properly stored in a flammable liquid storage cabinet.




01 01 10–13 (SN)

T. Fire Alarm System:

• Care must be exercised to prevent the accidental tripping of smoke detectors or fire alarms.

• Notify Facilities Service of your activities and location.

• Cover and protect the smoke alarms with paper bags when raising dust or creating smoke in short

duration(less than 3 days) ancillary work areas. All other construction areas to follow section 01 01

10 – 1HR. (You must inform Facilities Service Fire Department when bagging smoke alarms.)

• Remove the paper bag upon completion of your work and at the end of each workday.

• If you accidentally trip an alarm, notify Facilities Service (Fire Department) immediately.

U. Hazardous Materials and Waste:

• A listing of all hazardous materials that will be used on the job and their material safety data sheets

(MSDS) will be provided to the VA before the chemicals are used.

• Any excess or used chemicals will be removed from the hospital promptly and properly disposed of

by the contractor in accordance with federal, state and local regulations.

• Any hazardous waste generated at the facility must be properly contained and labeled and stored in

accordance with local, state, federal and hospital regulations.

• Do not store flammable materials in the facility unless stored in an approved non-combustible

storage cabinet or prior approval by the Project Engineer and Safety Office.

V. Heavy Lifting:

• Hoisting heavy materials/items require prior review by the Project Engineer.

W. Housekeeping:

• Housekeeping in public areas of the hospital will be maintained at the highest level, even while work

is on going.

• In secured areas, housekeeping will be performed as needed, but at a minimum at the end of each

job task, and at the end of the workday.

• Debris and waste will not be allowed to accumulate on the work site and disposal must be arranged

to keep the amounts low.

X. Hot Work Permits:

• Hot work permits are required before cutting, soldering, welding operations begin. Before any

cutting, soldering or welding is conducted, the contractor or sub-contractor shall obtain permission

through a hot work permit. The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the hot work permits

from the Project Engineer.

• Gas and oxygen canisters shall be properly chained and protected and two 10-pound fire

extinguishers shall be present.

• A fire watch shall be maintained on the worksite during the hot work operations, and for 30 minutes

after the hot work is completed.

• All burn permits will be completed, signed and scanned within 48 hrs and posted to Buzzsaw.

Y. Identification Badges:

• ID Badges are required for all contractor employees working at the V.A.




01 01 10–14 (SN)

• Before beginning work on any project, all outside contractors shall obtain a VA contractor badge from

the Police / Security Desk and obtain a contractor’s I.D. badge. The Contractor will complete the

badge application and email it to the COR, who will forward to the Police. The contractor will stop at

the Police Desk 1-2 days later to complete the badge process. The outside contractor will supply the

following information: location of work site, authorization, duration, and any pertinent information

that is required.

• All contractors working at the Milwaukee VA will be finger printed and the finger prints processed

prior to obtaining a VA badge. There is an approximate 5 day wait once finger prints are given to

when processed and the contractor can return to obtain the photo ID badge. Badges will be active

for only 90 days at a time.

• General Contractor will be required to request, thru the COR, for reactivation/continued activation of

all contractor badges every 90 days.

Z. Infection Control:

• Reference section 01 01 10 IC.

• Sensitive/High Risk areas of the hospital require extra precautions to assure patient safety. These

areas include but are not limited to the operating rooms, intensive care units, chemotherapy and

transplant units. Contact infection control for other areas that may require special precautions.

• When working in patient care areas, please be sure to read and follow the directions listed on any

Infection Control Precaution sheets posted outside of a patient’s room. Generally this means

permission must be obtained from Nursing staff before entry.

• Temporary walls or dust barriers are required to enclose areas under construction.

• Under some circumstances it may be necessary to block return and supply ducts, and install special

HEPA exhaust ventilation from the worksite. There should be no re-circulation of air from

construction area to rest of hospital.

• Dampened walk-off mats must be located outside of construction area.

• Dust mops/wet mops must be available to remove any dust tracked outside barriers.

• Standard Precautions assumes that any person may carry a contagious disease. In order to protect

you from these diseases always assume blood, non-intact skin, mucous membranes and all other

body fluids and excretions are infectious. Do not touch any such materials but contact a VA employee

immediately. Needle container boxes are provided for the disposal of syringes and other sharps used

in the medical center. These must be properly disposed of and should be moved only by VA

personnel. The VA Medical Center provides written guidelines, education, and personal protective

equipment (PPE) for anyone working at VA Medical Center campus to prevent their exposure to

bloodborne pathogens.

AA. Interim Life Safety:

• The hospital will document whether and to what extent Interim Life Safety Measures will be

implemented for each project.

• VA Safety will ensure what interim life safety measures (ILSM) are required by the General Contractor

to temporarily compensate for the hazards posted by existing Life Safety Code (LSC) deficiencies or

construction activities in areas of the Medical Center.

• Implementation of ILSM will be required in or adjacent to all construction areas and throughout

buildings with existing LSC deficiencies, ILSM applies to both construction workers and affected

hospital employees, and will be implemented upon construction development and continuously

enforced through construction completion.




01 01 10–15 (SN)

• Almost always, Interim Life Safety Measures will require walkthrough inspections by the job foreman,

the project manager, and safety staff at varying intervals.

• Training of workers and any affected staff will always be a significant part of the

• Interim Life Safety Measures procedures.

BB. Life Safety:

• Any life safety code violations incurred during construction or renovation must be resolved and will

result in close coordination with Project Engineer and Safety Section to implement the hospital’s

Interim Life Safety Measures. These measures are required by JCAHO and NFPA.

CC. Lock Out/Tag Out:

• Lock Out/Tag Out - No contract worker is allowed to change the status/position of ANY switch, valve

or any other energy source without prior approval from the Project Engineer. All Lock out/Tag Out

activities need approval prior to being implemented. Any activity requiring a Lockout/Tagout process

must comply with the hospital policy.

• Per OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.147, all contractors must comply with OSHA’s Safety

Lockout/Tagout procedures.

• Coordinate all shut downs with Hospital Personnel.

• Only VA staff is authorized to shut down utilities unless permission is specifically granted.

• Contractor to submit as a formal submittal the Lock Out / Tag Out Program policies and

procedures.

DD. Safety Data Sheets (SDS):

• Formerly called Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)

• SDS must be provided for any hazardous materials that you will be shipping or delivering to the VA

Medical Center.

• SDS are available for all materials used in the medical center. Contact the COR if you need an SDS for

a VA owned material.

• See also Hazardous Materials and Wastes.

EE. Noise:

• All core drilling, chipping, and hole drilling shall be done at a time and day determined by occupants

on that floor and the floors above and below. The COR shall coordinate and approve it.

• The patients, visitors, and staff deserve consideration and the quiet enjoyment of their premises.

Anyone found being loud, rude, or otherwise annoying to the patients, their guests, or staff will be

asked to leave the facility. Use of vulgar language will not be tolerated.

• All work activity within occupied portions of the facility shall be accomplished with minimal

disruption to the patients, physicians, visitors, and staff.

• The playing of radios, tapes, and CD players is not permitted in any occupied area. “Walk-man”

radios/tapes/CD players are not permitted anywhere.

• The playing of radios, tapes, and CD players is permitted in vacant areas but shall not be heard

outside the vacant area.

• In inpatient areas, coordinate construction activities and debris removal with the Nurse Manager or

Charge Nurse to minimize disruption.




01 01 10–16 (SN)

FF. OSHA Compliance:

• All contractors are subject to Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations,

these standards and are expected to enforce these standards in the performance of their work, OSHA

regulations can be found in chapter 29 of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). Failure on the part of

any contractor employee to comply with these standards and/or conduct their work in a safe fashion

will result in an interruption in the work schedule for which the contractor will be solely responsible,

Any contractor found deviating from regulatory standards and/or policy and SOPS will immediately

be issued a stop work order and will be responsible for contractual conflicts related to the work

stoppage.

GG. Parking:

• Facilities Service Project Section will designate parking. Contractors my not block fire lanes or other

roadways. Violators will be ticketed. During large construction projects, a staging site may be

available for parking to contractors.

• All Contractors who need parking must contact Facilities Service for a parking permit.

• If special parking is required, permission shall be granted and coordinated through Facilities

Management. Contractors should park in the designated Visitor parking areas. Limited loading and

unloading will be permitted at the loading dock area, afterwards contractor employees will be

required to park in designated areas.

II. Patient/Visitor Privacy:

• Patient/Visitor Privacy. No construction staff is allowed to review, acknowledge or move any patient

information or records.

• No construction staff may acknowledge any patient or visitor unless spoken to - even if the individual

is known on a personal basis.

• Radios are NOT allowed on campus.

• Cell phones are to be used only in designated areas.

JJ. Personal Protective Equipment:

• There are many situations that require specific personal protective equipment for worker safety

according to OSHA. It is the responsibility of the individual contractor to know when it is to be used

and is responsible to wear them.

KK. Restroom Usage:

• Contractors are to use public restroom unless otherwise instructed to specific restrooms or portable

facilities.

LL. Requests for Information:

• All contractor requests for assistance and information shall be addressed to the Facilities Service

Project Section or Facilities Service Department.

MM. Safety Regulations:

• Contractors are expected to comply with all Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

regulations, 29 CFR 1926 and 19 10.

• Work that is performed within a corridor or occupied space must be confined by dust barriers or non-

combustible partitions.




01 01 10–17 (SN)

• Appropriate job signs and barricades are to be placed in the area of construction to prevent

occupants from straying into the job site.

• Stairwell doors shall not be propped open or blocked at any time. Equipment cannot be stored in the

stairwells.

• All contractors are encouraged to frequently review these guidelines with their employees and/or

subcontractors on site (e.g., during weekly Tool Box Safety Meetings).

• All contractors and their subcontractors are responsible for complying with these guidelines and all

other conditions, OSHA requirements, and safety regulations.

NN. Scaffolding:

• All scaffolds and other work platforms construction activities shall comply with 29 CFR 1926.

Contractor is to provide copies of daily scaffolding inspections with daily logs.

OO. Smoking:

• The Smoking policy of the hospital is no smoking in any building nor within 50 feet of any the building

entrance and only in areas designated for smoking. All construction employees must comply with

this policy. A copy of the hospital smoking policy will be supplied at the pre-construction conference.

• Violation of the smoking policy will result in the worker being removed from the worksite for the

duration of the project.

• The designated smoking areas are: Smoking Shelter located outside the East entrance

• Job site supervisors will enforce this smoking policy.

PP. Stop Work:

• The hospital safety officer and COR have the Director’s permission and authority to stop work

whenever conditions pose an imminent threat to life and health or threaten damage to equipment or

buildings.

QQ. Subcontractors:

• The general contractor has the responsibility to assure that all the subcontractors and their workers

are properly trained and follow these safety guidelines. Assistance from VA staff will be providing on

a case by case basis on technical issues.

• The VA reserves the right to approve of any subcontractor being used to complete a project.

• A worker on-site must be designated “in charge” at all times during the project.

RR. Traffic Control:

• Contractors shall provide trained personnel and/or equipment, signage, barricades etc., to regulate

traffic whenever construction operations affect traffic patterns.

SS. Trenching:

• OSHA regulations must be followed during trenching operations.

TT. Waste Management:

• Reference section 01 74 19.

• Trash, combustible waste, and excess construction materials must be removed daily to prevent

accumulation. Contractors must arrange for the removal of their debris and waste. The building’s

dumpster shall not be used unless appropriate arrangements are made with Facilities Service.




01 01 10–18 (SN)

• The contractor is encouraged to contact utilize our recycling program for the disposal of recyclables.

• The contractor is expected to comply with all environmental regulations.

• Contractor to provide a Fiscal Year breakdown of Waste Management/Recycling Costs on the project.

UU. Work Site Requirements:

• Contractor to provide a list of emergency contacts at the entrance to construction site.

• All contractors are to maintain their work area as clean as possible while working and cleanup

thoroughly every day.

• Prior to any utilities or critical systems being interrupted, a two weeks written notification to Facilities

Management Project Engineer is mandatory. Only Facilities Management personnel will shut off a

utility.

• All contractors are expected to use courtesy. Loud, vulgar, abusive language, sexual harassment and

aggressive behavior will not be tolerated.

• All contractors working above the ceiling are required to replace all disturbed ceiling tile by the end of

each day.

• Prior to making any penetrations in walls, floors or ceilings, it is the contractor’s responsibility to

identify rated systems and be verified through review of as builts, line diagrams, etc.

• All repaired penetrations on rated systems must be completed using a fire rated material matching

the rating of the system and must inspected by the Project Engineer before ceiling tiles are replaced

or area is concealed.

• Temporary construction partitions of non-combustible materials shall be installed as required to

provide a smoke tight separation between the areas undergoing renovation and/or construction and

adjoining areas that are occupied by the facility.

• Exits for occupied areas of the building including rooms, suites, corridors and floors shall not be

blocked by the construction or by construction materials. Exit may be blocked temporarily if it is

unavoidable and adequate alternative measures are provided, such as signage, instructions to

occupants and approved in advance by the Project Engineer.

• Existing fire protection systems including fire alarm systems, smoke detection systems, and sprinkler

systems shall not be altered except as required for the alteration and/or renovation project. Any

alteration to the system shall be coordinated with Project Engineer. When sprinkler or fire and smoke

detector systems are out of service for more than eight hours general contractor shall be responsible

to institute a Fire Watch till systems are operational.

• At the end of each workday, combustible packaging and crating materials for building products and

equipment to be installed shall be removed from the occupied building.

• It is the responsibility of each contractor to know exactly where the fire extinguishers and pull

stations are in the areas they are working.

• Fire hazard inspections shall be conducted daily by the contractor once construction starts and until

the work is turned back over to the facility.

• All temporary electrical wiring and equipment used for construction shall be installed and used in

accordance with pertinent provisions of NFPA 70 and National Electrical Code.

• Contractor shall maintain construction site to permit access by the fire department as necessary.

Clear building construction areas of obstructions so that all portions are accessible for fire

department apparatus and permit emergency egress of patients and other personnel.




01 01 10–19 (SN)

• All necessary precautions shall be taken by the contractor to prevent accidental operation of any

existing smoke detectors by minimizing the amount of dust generated in the vicinity of any smoke

detectors. Any activity that may generate dust or smoke shall be reviewed with the Project Engineer

and the infectious control nurse.

X. Apprentices Working on Project:

Apprentices are authorized to work on all projects disciplines providing the following requirements are

met:

• Completion of OHSA-10 training and certification turned in as required for all other workers

• Apprenticeship documentation turned in to contracting and continued direct supervision by a

journeyman.

• Apprentices are not allowed to work at the Clement J Zablocki VA Medical Center on their own

nor without continuous direct supervision.

1.18. IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING

A. Identify devices located above ceiling.

a. Provide markers on all removable ceiling and ceiling access panels to indicate locations of valves,

dampers, smoke detectors, etc and other mechanical items that may need servicing or

adjustment.

b. Use access panel markers (metal tack style) for acoustical tile ceilings, or engraved plastic style,

3/4in square, for mounting on panel door or equipment nameplates.

c. Color code and annotate markers as follows:

Color Notation

Red D – Fire Damper

V – Valve (sprinkler shutoff)

S – Smoke Detector

H- Heat Detector

Yellow V- Valve (steam, radiation,

reheat and chilled water)

Gold V- Valve (HVAC)

D- Damper (HVAC)




01 01 10–20 (SN)

Blue (valves only) O- Oxygen

V- Vacumn

A - Medical Air

N – Nitrogen

NO – Nitrous Oxide

EV – Anesthesia Evacuation

T – Temperature control air

d. Where fire protection devices are located inside ductwork, provide an additional tag on the duct

access door identifying device inside with letter size equal to or greater than 1-1/2 inches high.

1.19. STANDARD REQUIRED FORMS

A. The following forms are required as noted below:

a. Con tra cto r’ s Ch eckl ist – Completed and signed by General Contractor prior to start of construction.

b. Con tra cto r’ s I mp act St at e men t – Completed and signed by every contractor / subcontractor

working on the project prior to start of construction.

c. Daily Log of Construction – Completed daily by General Contractor and scanned in and posted to Buzzsaw

weekly by Wednesday of the following week.

d. Daily Intermediate Life Safety Measures (ILSM) Inspection Form – Completed daily by General Contractor

and scanned in and posted to Buzzsaw weekly by Wednesday of the following week.




01 01 10–21 (SN)

CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST

This agreement is between and

Project Name (ref. #)

Project Start Date

Ending Date

Work Allowed Between Hours AM/PM and AM/PM

Before performing any work on facility premises, outside contractors must read this checklist and comply with all local,

state, federal and facility safety policies.

1.1 Life Safety Will the contractor compromise any part during the Life Safety System of this facility (ceiling tiles,

penetrations in smoke or fire walls, blocking exits, shutting down fire/smoke detection or fire suppression, etc.) Y N

Describe.

1.2 Is Interim Life Safe necessary? Y N, if yes, attach and follow interim plan.

2.1 Services Will there be any compromises to patient services during the work performed? Y N

2.2 What adjustments need to be implemented to minimize impact to residents, visitors and staff? Y N

3.1 Chemical Will hazardous chemicals (liquids or gases) be used on-site? Y N

If yes, what risks do they create for facility staff? Is there any chance of exposure?

3.2 Are there any facility chemicals being used, stored or handled where the contractor will be working? Y N

If yes, has the contractor been informed by issuing MSDS’s? Y N

4.1 “ Ho t Wor k”: Will the contractor use equipment which will generate open flames, sparks or other ignition sources Y N

4.2 Will flammable chemicals be in the area? Y N

4.3 Will a Fire Watch be necessary to be posted during all Hot Work activities? Y N

5.0 Confined Spaces: Does the work involve entry into a confined space? Y N

If yes, retain a copy of contractor’s Confined Space Entry program (and CSE Permit if needed).

6.1 Lockout/Tagout : Does the work involve maintenance on energized equipment or systems? Y N (If yes, retain a copy of

the contractor’s LOCKOUT/TAGOUT program)

6.2 Is there any impact to residents, visitors, or staff during this procedure? Y N




01 01 10–22 (SN)

If so, describe the impact, ways to minimize the impact and who has been notified.

7.0 Unsafe Conditions/ Impact to Residents, Visitors and Staff Are there any unusual or unsafe conditions which need to

be addressed and/or communicated to facility staff, visitors or residents? ? Y N

Describe.

8.1 Description of Work Area The departments/areas you will be working are

List:

8.2 The potential hazards to you/your workers in the areas you are working in

List

8.3 The specific problems that can be caused by the wrong actions in the areas you are working

List

9.0 C o n tr ac to r ’s Em p lo ye e s

Safety Officer Contact

Facility Project Manager

First Aid Plan

Fire Plan

Disaster Plan

Restricted Areas

10.0 Restricted Areas

The following are the areas of the hospital where construction workers are allowed to go in the hospital.

List

(Contractor Representative) (Facility Project Manager)

Date: Date:




01 01 10–23 (SN)

Contractor’s Impact

System Possible Interruption Possible Effect to Patients

Electrical - Changing position of switches and

breakers

- Cutting or splicing into wires

- Disconnecting wires or terminals

- Disturbing Junction Boxes/Electrical

Panels

- Core Drilling

- Demolition of walls

- Excavation

Electrical Systems provides LIFE

SUPPORT (Directly and Indirectly)

- Can cause DEATH to critical patients

Water Lines - Turning valves

- Cutting into lines

- Demolition & Excavation

Dialysis, OR, HVAC, ICU, X Ray, etc

Can cause DEATH to critical patients

Infection Control issues

Major Cleanup issues

Medical Gases:

Oxygen

Air

Vacuum

Nitrous Oxide

Nitrogen

- Cutting or disturbing into lines (labeled,

unlabeled)

- Changing valve positions

- Deactivating alarms


Oxygen, vacuum, air, etc.

ICU, OR, Med/Surg.

Can cause DEATH to critical patients

HVAC - Shutting down

- Modifying

- Changing controls

- Cutting into the roof

- Producing foul odors near intakes

- Cutting into chilled water lines

- Obstruct fresh air intake

Temperature is critical in OR, ICU, etc.

Infection Control issues

Major Air Quality Issues

Fire Alarm and

Sprinklers

- ANY modifications

- covering or removing smoke heads

- Demolition & Excavation utilities

- Damage or set off sprinkler heads

- Duct work modifications

- Compromising Fire Safety

- False Alarms

- Floods

- Major disruptions and distractions

ALL THE ABOVE CAN RESULT IN DEATH

Code Alarms

Nurse Call

Wander Guards


- Unplugging

- Changing position of switches/breakers

Lack of communicating system can

result in patient death or injury

IF THERE IS ANY QUESTION REGARDING ANY OF THE INFORMATION ON THIS DOCUMENT, IMMEDIATELY

CONTACT FACILITY MANAGEMENT OR SAFETY OFFICE TO RESOLVE ISSUES PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT.

Contract Company:

Receipt

Acknowledged:

Signature:

Date:




01 01 10–24 (SN)

DAILY LOG OF CONSTRUCTION M T W Th F Pkg. No.

PROJECT:

BUILDING CONTRACT NO.

V69DC-

DATE

CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATIVE ON JOB

WEATHER (Rain, Snow, Cloudy, Windy, etc., OR NA if all indoors) TEMP. SITE CONDITIONS (CLEAN, DEBRIS, DUST, ETC.)

High Low

NO. CONTRACTOR'S MEN BY JOB CATEGORIES NO. SUBCONTRACTOR’S MEN BY JOB CATEGORIES

EQUIPMENT ON JOB

Brief description of size

No.

Units

Working

Yes No

MATERIALS DELIVERED

OFFICIAL VISITORS TO JOB SITE

ITEM

NO.

STATUS OF WORK

Brief description of work in progress, questionable performance, unforeseen developments on job etc. Include tests made and samples taken.

STATUS OF INFECTIOUS CONTROL MEASURES (NEGATIVE AIR FLOW, CLEAN WALK OFF MAT, ANTE-ROOM SECURE,…)

NEGATIVE AIR FLOW PRESSURE READING:

SAFETY COMMENTS

DIFFICULTIES WITH CONTRACTOR OR REPRESENTATIVE

UNFORESEEN DEVELOPMENTS ON JOB CONTINUED (Describe conditions, action taken; person contacted, recommended actions)

SIGNATURE TITLE

PROJECT SUPERINTENDENT




01 01 10–25 (SN)

Daily Intermediate Life Safety Measures (ILSM) Inspection Form

FORM QCA-01A

INSTRUCTIONS: This form is to be utilized when significant hazards posed by existing NFPA 101 deficiencies or

construction activities are in progress. ILSM must be implemented upon project start and continuously enforced

through project completion to provide a level of life safety comparable to that described in Chapter 1-7, 31 and

applicable occupancy chapters of the Life Safety Code. WHERE APPLICABLE NOTE EXCEPTIONS ONLY OF AREA

IDENTIFIED AS BEING DEFICIENT DURING INSPECTION AND EXPLAIN IN SUFFICIENT DETAIL IN THE COMMENTS

SECTION OF THIS FORM. TURN COMPLETED FORMS INTO THE LHS SAFETY OFFICER.

PROJECT: DATE MON TUE WED THR FRI SAT SUN

1. Are exits readily accessible and provide unobstructed

egress?

2. If required, due to inaccessibility of existing, have

alternate exits been established?

3. If alternate exists have been established, are

personnel in the area informed and aware of their

relocation and existence?

4. Are the existing and relocation exits clearly identified

and able to be seen in the event of an emergency or

fire?

5. Are fire evacuation routes posted and do they reflect

up-to-date changes and alternate escape routes due

to construction deficiencies?

6. Are written procedures and guidelines posted in the

immediate and adjacent areas for what to do and who

to call in the event of fire or emergency?

7. Are personnel in the immediate and adjacent areas

aware and informed as to the procedures and

guidelines to follow in the event of fire or emergency?

8. Do fire alarms, detection, and suppression equipment

and systems appear to be operational?

9. If the fire alarm or suppression systems are impaired

or temporarily made nonfunctional has a fire watch, as

required or necessary, of the area been established?

10. If the existing fire alarm or suppression

systems/equipment are impaired, have measures

been taken to provide equivalent equipment/systems

for adequate protection? Note date of installation for

equivalent measures to the right.

11. If the fire alarm or suppression systems are impaired,

are the temporary equipment/systems being

inspected and tested at least monthly?

12. If temporary fire alarm or suppression systems are

installed, are personnel in the area aware and

informed on how to operate or utilize in the event of

fire or emergency?

13. Has the LHS “No Smoking” policy been posted,

implemented and enforced in the construction area?




01 01 10–26 (SN)

14. Are construction/remodel area storage, waste and

debris being maintained to minimize potential for fire

or safety hazards during daily operations?

Daily Intermediate Life Safety Measures (ILSM) Inspection Form (Continued)

PROJECT: DATE MON TUE WED THR FRI SAT SUN

15. Are temporary partitions built to be smoke tight and

of noncombustible/fire retardant materials to

minimize spread of smoke or fire within the building?

16 Do electrical panels, temporary wiring, extension

cords, tools and equipment appear to be installed,

utilized, and functioning in a safe manner?

17. In general, are the exterior construction site, buildings,

and ground free of hazard and potential safety

violations?

18. If there is any gas/arc welding or cutting being

performed within the building or on site, have

additional fire safety precautions been taken and the

necessary equipment provided and utilized?

19. If there is any gas/arc welding or cutting being

performed within the building or on site, has the Plant

Operations department been notified?

20. If there are hand and safety rails required, are they in

place and maintained in good condition?

21. Are extension cords that are being used a 3 wire

grounded type?

22. If there are temporary electrical outlets provided, do

they have ground fault protection at the receptacle or

at the panel?

23. I f hazardous chemicals are present and/or being used,

are they being limited to the amount needed and used

daily?

24. Are MSDS sheets readily available for any hazardous

chemicals that are present or being used?

25. Do ladders and scaffolds appear to be in satisfactory

condition and being utilized in a safe manner?

26. Is personnel protective equipment, such as safety

glasses, hard hats and etc. needed or required and

being used?

27. If infection control is required, are the appropriate

policies and procedures known and being followed?

28. If electrical equipment needs to be de-energized, are

applicable “Lockout/Tagout” procedures being

followed?

PLACE INITIALS OF PERSON PERFORMING DAILY INSPECTION

TO THE RIGHT.

INSPECTION COMMENTS/FINDINGS:




01 01 10–27 (SN)

DATE PROJECT STARTED DATE PROJECT COMPLETED_

PROJECT CE #: GENERAL CONTRACTOR

AREAS(S) OF PROJECT/JOB INSPECTED




01 12 16-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

SECTION 01 12 16 WORK SCHEDULE

Work Sequence requirements for 695-15-122L 111 TJC and Safety Corrections FY2015 .

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor is responsible to prepare and maintain a construction schedule describing the sequencing, means-and-metho ds of construction, installation and removal of temporary facilities an d protections and their impact and coordination with the Owner’s cont inued occupation and operations.

1. Master Production Schedule shall be in the form of a bar graph (Gantt chart) using Critical Path Method (CPM), see Section 01 32 16.15 Project Schedules .

2. Schedule shall be submitted to the Resident Enginee r / COR for review not later than 10 days after issuance of NTP.

3. For each Construction Progress Meeting, submit a 3- Week Short- Interval Production Schedule (SIPS) or Construction Activity Plan (CAP) to show current work in process. Schedule is to reflect trades on sight, days for each trade on site during the pe riod, and list any and all issues/concerns/delays. Milestone dates sha ll be in agreement with the Master Production Schedule.

B. Sequencing, means-and-methods of construction, safe ty, and all temporary items remain the responsibility of the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

- - - END - - -




01 32 16.15 - 1

SECTION 01 32 16.15 PROJECT SCHEDULES

(SMALL PROJECTS – DESIGN/BID/BUILD)

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. The Contractor shall develop a Critical Path Method (CPM) plan and schedule demonstrating fulfillment of the contract requirements (Project Schedule), and shall keep the Project Sche dule up-to-date in accordance with the requirements of this section an d shall utilize the plan for scheduling, coordinating and monitoring wo rk under this contract (including all activities of subcontractor s, equipment vendors and suppliers). Conventional Critical Path Method ( CPM) technique shall be utilized to satisfy both time and cost applicati ons. The contractor’s CPM shall be submitted within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor’s representative shall enga ge the services of an outside consultant to complete the CPM.

1.2 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE:

A. The Contractor shall designate an authorized repres entative responsible for the Project Schedule including preparation, rev iew and progress reporting with and to the Contracting Officer's Rep resentative (COR).

B. The Contractor's representative shall have direct p roject control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contract or in fulfilling the requirements of this specification section.

C. The Contractor’s representative shall have the opti on of developing the project schedule within their organization or to en gage the services of an outside consultant. If an outside scheduling con sultant is utilized, Section 1.3 of this specification will ap ply.

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSULTANT:

A. The Contractor shall submit a qualification proposa l to the COR, within 10 days of bid acceptance. The qualification propos al shall include:

1. The name and address of the proposed consultant.

2. Information to show that the proposed consultant ha s the qualifications to meet the requirements specified i n the preceding paragraph.

3. A representative sample of prior construction proje cts, which the proposed consultant has performed complete project scheduling services. These representative samples shall be of similar size and scope.

B. The Contracting Officer has the right to approve or disapprove the proposed consultant, and will notify the Contractor of the VA decision




01 32 16.15 - 2

within seven calendar days from receipt of the qual ification proposal. In case of disapproval, the Contractor shall resubm it another consultant within 10 calendar days for renewed cons ideration. The Contractor shall have their scheduling consultant a pproved prior to submitting any schedule for approval.

1.4 COMPUTER PRODUCED SCHEDULES

A. The contractor shall provide monthly, to the Depart ment of Veterans Affairs (VA), all computer-produced time/cost sched ules and reports generated from monthly project updates. This monthl y computer service will include: three copies of up to five different reports (inclusive of all pages) available within the user defined rep orts of the scheduling software approved by the Contracting Off icer; a hard copy listing of all project schedule changes, and associ ated data, made at the update and an electronic file of this data; and the resulting monthly updated schedule in PDM format. These must be submitted with and substantively support the contractor’s monthly payment request and the signed look ahead report. The COR shall identif y the five different report formats that the contractor shall provide.

B. The contractor shall be responsible for the correct ness and timeliness of the computer-produced reports. The Contractor sh all also responsible for the accurate and timely submittal of the update d project schedule and all CPM data necessary to produce the computer reports and payment request that is specified.

C. The VA will report errors in computer-produced repo rts to the Contractor’s representative within ten calendar day s from receipt of reports. The Contractor shall reprocess the compute r-produced reports and associated diskette(s), when requested by the C ontracting Officer’s representative, to correct errors which affect the payment and schedule for the project.

1.5 THE COMPLETE PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL

A. Within 45 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit for the Contracting Officer 's review; digital PDF file, three blue line copies of the interim sch edule on sheets of paper 765 x 1070 mm (30 x 42 inches) and an electro nic file in the previously approved CPM schedule program. The submi ttal shall also include three copies of a computer-produced activit y/event ID schedule showing project duration; phase completion dates; a nd other data, including event cost. Each activity/event on the co mputer-produced schedule shall contain as a minimum, but not limite d to, activity/event ID, activity/event description, duration, budget am ount, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late fini sh date and total float. Work activity/event relationships shall be r estricted to finish- to-start or start-to-start without lead or lag cons traints. Activity/event date constraints, not required by th e contract, will not be accepted unless submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer. The contractor shall make a separate writt en detailed request




01 32 16.15 - 3

to the Contracting Officer identifying these date c onstraints and secure the Contracting Officer’s written approval b efore incorporating them into the network diagram. The Contracting Offi cer’s separate approval of the Project Schedule shall not excuse t he contractor of this requirement. Logic events (non-work) will be p ermitted where necessary to reflect proper logic among work events , but must have zero duration. The complete working schedule shall refle ct the Contractor's approach to scheduling the complete project. The final Project Schedule in its original form shall contain no contract chan ges or delays which may have been incurred during the final network dia gram development period and shall reflect the entire contract durati on as defined in the bid documents. These changes/delays shall be entered at the first

update after the final Project Schedule has been ap proved. The Contractor should provide their requests for time a nd supporting time extension analysis for contract time as a result of contract changes/delays, after this update, and in accordanc e with Article, ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT COMPLETION.

D. Within 30 calendar days after receipt of the comple te project interim Project Schedule and the complete final Project Sch edule, the Contracting Officer or his representative, will do one or both of the following:

1. Notify the Contractor concerning his actions, opini ons, and objections.

2. A meeting with the Contractor at or near the job si te for joint review, correction or adjustment of the proposed pl an will be scheduled if required. Within 14 calendar days afte r the joint review, the Contractor shall revise and shall submi t three blue line copies of the revised Project Schedule, three copie s of the revised computer-produced activity/event ID schedule and a revised electronic file as specified by the Contracting Off icer. The revised submission will be reviewed by the Contracting Offi cer and, if found to be as previously agreed upon, will be approved.

E. The approved baseline schedule and the computer-pro duced schedule(s) generated there from shall constitute the approved baseline schedule until subsequently revised in accordance with the r equirements of this section.

1.6 WORK ACTIVITY/EVENT COST DATA

A. The Contractor shall cost load all work activities/ events except procurement activities. The cumulative amount of al l cost loaded work activities/events (including alternates) shall equa l the total contract price. Prorate overhead, profit and general conditi ons on all work activities/events for the entire project length. Th e contractor shall generate from this information cash flow curves ind icating graphically the total percentage of work activity/event dollar value scheduled to be in place on early finish, late finish. These cas h flow curves will be used by the Contracting Officer to assist him in determining




01 32 16.15 - 4

approval or disapproval of the cost loading. Negative work activity/event cost data will not be acceptable, except on VA issued contract changes.

B. The Contractor shall cost load work activities/events for guarantee period services, test, balance and adjust various systems in accordance with the provisions in Article, FAR 52.232 – 5 (PAYMENT UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS) and VAAR 852.236 – 83 (PAYMENT UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS).

C. (BLANK)

D. The Contractor shall cost load work activities/events for all BID ITEMS including ASBESTOS ABATEMENT. The sum of each BID ITEM work shall equal the value of the bid item in the Contractors' bid.

1.7 PROJECT SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS

A. Show on the project schedule the sequence of work activities/events required for complete performance of all items of work. The Contractor Shall:

1. Show activities/events as:

a. Contractor's time required for submittal of shop drawings,templates, fabrication, delivery and similar pre-constructionwork.

b. Contracting Officer's and Architect-Engineer's review andapproval of shop drawings, equipment schedules, samples,template, or similar items.

c. Interruption of VA Facilities utilities, delivery of Governmentfurnished equipment, and rough-in drawings, project phasing andany other specification requirements.

d. Test, balance and adjust various systems and pieces of equipment,maintenance and operation manuals, instructions and preventivemaintenance tasks.

e. VA inspection and acceptance activity/event with a minimumduration of five work days at the end of each phase andimmediately preceding any VA move activity/event required by thecontract phasing for that phase.

2. Show not only the activities/events for actual construction work foreach trade category of the project, but also trade relationships toindicate the movement of trades from one area, floor, or building,to another area, floor, or building, for at least five trades whoare performing major work under this contract.




01 32 16.15 - 5

3. Break up the work into activities/events of a durat ion no longer than 20 work days each or one reporting period, exc ept as to non-construction activities/events (i.e., procureme nt of materials, delivery of equipment, concrete and asphalt curing) and any other activities/events for which the COR may approve the showing of a longer duration. The duration for VA approval of an y required submittal, shop drawing, or other submittals will n ot be less than 20 work days.

4. Describe work activities/events clearly, so the wor k is readily identifiable for assessment of completion. Activiti es/events labeled "start," "continue," or "completion," are not speci fic and will not be allowed. Lead and lag time activities will not b e acceptable.

5. The schedule shall be generally numbered in such a way to reflect either discipline, phase or location of the work.

B. The Contractor shall submit the following supportin g data in addition to the project schedule:

1. The appropriate project calendar including working days and holidays.

2. The planned number of shifts per day.

3. The number of hours per shift.

Failure of the Contractor to include this data shal l delay the review of the submittal until the Contracting Officer is i n receipt of the missing data.

C. To the extent that the Project Schedule or any revi sed Project Schedule shows anything not jointly agreed upon, it shall no t be deemed to have been approved by the COR. Failure to include any el ement of work required for the performance of this contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all work required within any applicable completion date of each phase regardless of the COR ’s approval of the Project Schedule.

D. Compact Disk Requirements and CPM Activity/Event Re cord Specifications: Submit to the VA an electronic file(s) containing o ne file of the data required to produce a schedule, reflecting all the activities/events of the complete project schedule being submitted.

E. Required Inspections: The follow are a list of required inspections to

be included in the project schedule. These inspecti ons are to be included if the relevant trades are present in the project scope. See attached schedule at end of section.

# Inspections

1 Pre-site inspection of existing conditions

2 ACM containment




01 32 16.15 - 6

3 Demo completion

4 After ACM clearance (prior to tear down)

5 Chalk line

7 MEP outlet box 8 MEP & Backing in-trench 9 MEP insulation

16 Hardware 18 Commissioning/Equipment Testing 19 Pre-Final Inspection (Punchlist) 20 Final Inspection (Punchlist

Verification)

1.8 PAYMENT TO THE CONTRACTOR:

A. Monthly, the contractor shall submit the application and certificate for payment documents reflecting updated schedule activities and cost data in accordance with the provisions of the following Article, PAYMENT AND PROGRESS REPORTING, as the basis upon which progress payments will be made pursuant to Article, FAR 52.232 – 5 (PAYMENT UNDER FIXED PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS). The Contractor shall be entitled to a monthly progress payment upon approval of estimates as determined from the currently approved updated project schedule. Monthly payment requests shall include: a listing of all agreed upon project schedule changes and associated data; and an electronic file (s) of the resulting monthly updated schedule.

B. Approval of the Contractor’s monthly Application for Payment shall be contingent, among other factors, on the submittal of a satisfactory monthly update of the project schedule.

1.9 PAYMENT AND PROGRESS REPORTING

A. Monthly schedule update meetings will be held on dates mutually agreed to by the COR and the Contractor. Contractor and their CPM consultant (if applicable) shall attend all monthly schedule update meetings. The Contractor shall accurately update the Project Schedule and all other data required and provide this information to the COR three work days in advance of the schedule update meeting. Job progress will be reviewed to verify:

1. Actual start and/or finish dates for updated/completedactivities/events.

2. Remaining duration for each activity/event started, or scheduled tostart, but not completed.

3. Logic, time and cost data for change orders, and supplementalagreements that are to be incorporated into the Project Schedule.




01 32 16.15 - 7

4. Changes in activity/event sequence and/or duration which have been made, pursuant to the provisions of following Artic le, ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT COMPLETION.

5. Completion percentage for all completed and partial ly completed activities/events.

6. Logic and duration revisions required by this secti on of the specifications.

7. Activity/event duration and percent complete shall be updated independently.

B. After completion of the joint review, the contracto r shall generate an updated computer-produced calendar-dated schedule a nd supply the Contracting Officer’s representative with reports i n accordance with the Article, COMPUTER PRODUCED SCHEDULES, specified .

C. After completing the monthly schedule update, the c ontractor’s representative or scheduling consultant shall rerun all current period contract change(s) against the prior approved month ly project schedule. The analysis shall only include original workday du rations and schedule logic agreed upon by the contractor and Contracting Officer’s Representative for the contract change(s). When the re is a disagreement on logic and/or durations, the Contractor shall use the schedule logic and/or durations provided and approved by the Contr acting Officer’s Representative. After each rerun update, the result ing electronic project schedule data file shall be appropriately i dentified and submitted to the VA in accordance to the requiremen ts listed in articles 1.4 and 1.7. This electronic submission is separate from the regular monthly project schedule update requirement s and shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer’s Representati ve within fourteen

(14) calendar days of completing the regular schedu le update. Before inserting the contract changes durations, care must be taken to ensure that only the original durations will be used for t he analysis, not the reported durations after progress. In addition, onc e the final network diagram is approved, the contractor must recreate a ll manual progress payment updates on this approved network diagram an d associated reruns for contract changes in each of these update period s as outlined above for regular update periods. This will require detai led record keeping for each of the manual progress payment updates.

D. Following approval of the CPM schedule, the VA, the General Contractor, its approved CPM Consultant, RE office representati ves, and all subcontractors needed, as determined by the SRE, sh all meet to discuss the monthly updated schedule. The main emphasis sha ll be to address work activities to avoid slippage of project schedu le and to identify any necessary actions required to maintain project schedule during the reporting period. The Government representatives an d the Contractor should conclude the meeting with a clear understand ing of those work and administrative actions necessary to maintain pr oject schedule status during the reporting period. This schedule c oordination meeting




01 32 16.15 - 8

will occur after each monthly project schedule upda te meeting utilizing the resulting schedule reports from that schedule u pdate. If the project is behind schedule, discussions should incl ude ways to prevent further slippage as well as ways to improve the pro ject schedule status, when appropriate.

1.10 RESPONSIBILITY FOR COMPLETION

A. If it becomes apparent from the current revised mon thly progress schedule that phasing or contract completion dates will not be met, the Contractor shall execute some or all of the followi ng remedial actions:

1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities a nd crafts as necessary to eliminate the backlog of work.

2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shi fts per working day, working days per week, the amount of construct ion equipment, or any combination of the foregoing to eliminate the b acklog of work.

3. Reschedule the work in conformance with the specifi cation requirements.

B. Prior to proceeding with any of the above actions, the Contractor shall notify and obtain approval from the COR for the pro posed schedule changes. If such actions are approved, the represen tative schedule revisions shall be incorporated by the Contractor i nto the Project Schedule before the next update, at no additional c ost to the Government.

1.11 CHANGES TO THE SCHEDULE

A. Within 30 calendar days after VA acceptance and app roval of any updated project schedule, the Contractor shall submit a rev ised electronic file (s) and a list of any activity/event changes includ ing predecessors and successors for any of the following reasons:

1. Delay in completion of any activity/event or group of activities/events, which may be involved with contr act changes, strikes, unusual weather, and other delays will not relieve the Contractor from the requirements specified unless t he conditions are shown on the CPM as the direct cause for delaying t he project beyond the acceptable limits.

2. Delays in submittals, or deliveries, or work stoppa ge are encountered which make rescheduling of the work nec essary.

3. The schedule does not represent the actual prosecut ion and progress of the project.

4. When there is, or has been, a substantial revision to the activity/event costs regardless of the cause for th ese revisions.

B. CPM revisions made under this paragraph which affec t the previously approved computer-produced schedules for Government furnished equipment, vacating of areas by the VA Facility, co ntract phase(s) and sub phase(s), utilities furnished by the Government to the Contractor,




01 32 16.15 - 9

or any other previously contracted item, shall be f urnished in writing to the Contracting Officer for approval.

C. Contracting Officer's approval for the revised proj ect schedule and all relevant data is contingent upon compliance with al l other paragraphs of this section and any other previous agreements b y the Contracting Officer or the VA representative.

D. The cost of revisions to the project schedule resul ting from contract changes will be included in the proposal for change s in work as specified in FAR 52.243 – 4 (Changes) and VAAR 852. 236 – 88 (Changes – Supplemental), and will be based on the complexity of the revision or contract change, man hours expended in analyzing th e change, and the total cost of the change.

E. The cost of revisions to the Project Schedule not r esulting from contract changes is the responsibility of the Contr actor.

1.12 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT COMPLETION

A. The contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this contract. Request for an extension of the c ontract completion date by the Contractor shall be supported with a ju stification, CPM data and supporting evidence as the COR may deem ne cessary for determination as to whether or not the Contractor i s entitled to an extension of time under the provisions of the contr act. Submission of proof based on revised activity/event logic, durati ons (in work days) and costs is obligatory to any approvals. The sched ule must clearly display that the Contractor has used, in full, all the float time available for the work involved in this request. Th e Contracting Officer's determination as to the total number of d ays of contract extension will be based upon the current computer-p roduced

calendar-dated schedule for the time period in ques tion and all other relevant information.

B. Actual delays in activities/events which, according to the computer- produced calendar-dated schedule, do not affect the extended and predicted contract completion dates shown by th e critical path in the network, will not be the basis for a change to the contract completion date. The Contracting Officer will withi n a reasonable time after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence, review the facts and advise the Contractor in writing of the C ontracting Officer's decision.

C. The Contractor shall submit each request for a chan ge in the contract completion date to the Contracting Officer in accor dance with the provisions specified under FAR 52.243 – 4 (Changes) and VAAR 852.236 – 88 (Changes – Supplemental). The Contractor shall i nclude, as a part of each change order proposal, a sketch showing all CP M logic revisions, duration (in work days) changes, and cost changes, for work in question and its relationship to other activities on the app roved network diagram.




01 32 16.15 - 10

D. All delays due to non-work activities/events such a s RFI’s, WEATHER, STRIKES, and similar non-work activities/events sha ll be analyzed on a month by month basis.

- - - E N D - - -




01 33 23 - 1

SECTION 01 33 23 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES

1-1. Refer to Articles titled SPECIFICATIONS AND DR AWINGS FOR

CONSTRUCTION (FAR 52.236-21) and, SPECIAL NOTES (VA AR 852.236-

91), in GENERAL CONDITIONS.

1-2. For the purposes of this contract, samples, te st reports,

certificates, and manufacturers' literature and dat a shall also

be subject to the previously referenced requirement s. The

following text refers to all items collectively as SUBMITTALS.

1-3. Submit for approval one electronic Submittal R egister, in

Microsoft Excel format. VA can furnish Excel file e xample to

successful bidder. Submit an RFI to request file.

1-4. Submit for approval, all of the items specific ally mentioned

under the separate sections of the specification, w ith

information sufficient to evidence full compliance with contract

requirements. Materials, fabricated articles and th e like to be

installed in permanent work shall equal those of ap proved

submittals. After an item has been approved, no cha nge in brand

or make will be permitted unless:

A. Satisfactory written evidence is presented to, and approved by

Contracting Officer, that manufacturer cannot make scheduled

delivery of approved item or;

B. Item delivered has been rejected and substitution o f a suitable

item is an urgent necessity or;

C. Other conditions become apparent which indicates ap proval of such

substitute item to be in best interest of the Gover nment.

1-5. Forward submittals in sufficient time to permi t proper

consideration and approval action by Government. Ti me submission

to assure adequate lead time for procurement of

contract - required items. Delays attributable to u ntimely and

rejected will not serve as a basis for extending co ntract time

for completion.




01 33 23 - 2

1-6. Submittals will be reviewed for compliance wit h contract

requirements by Architect-Engineer, and action ther eon will be

taken by Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR) on behalf of

the Contracting Officer.

1-7. Upon receipt of submittals, Architect-Engineer will assign a file

number thereto. Contractor, in any subsequent corre spondence,

shall refer to this file and identification number to expedite

replies relative to previously approved or disappro ved

submittals.

1-8. The Government reserves the right to require a dditional

submittals, whether or not particularly mentioned i n this

contract. If additional submittals beyond those req uired by the

contract are furnished pursuant to request therefor by

Contracting Officer, adjustment in contract price a nd time will

be made in accordance with Articles titled CHANGES (FAR 52.243-4)

and CHANGES - SUPPLEMENT (VAAR 852.236-88) of the G ENERAL

CONDITIONS.

1-9. Schedules called for in specifications and sho wn on shop drawings

shall be submitted for use and information of Depar tment of

Veterans Affairs and Architect-Engineer. However, t he Contractor

shall assume responsibility for coordinating and ve rifying

schedules. The Contracting Officer, COR, and Archit ect- Engineer

assumes no responsibility for checking schedules or layout

drawings for exact sizes, exact numbers and detaile d positioning

of items.

1-10. Submittals must be submitted by Contractor on ly and shipped

prepaid. Contracting Officer assumes no responsibil ity for

checking quantities or exact numbers included in su ch submittals.

A. Submittals will receive consideration only when cov ered by a

transmittal letter signed by Contractor. Letter sha ll be sent via

first class mail and shall contain the list of item s, name of

Medical Center, name of Contractor, contract number , applicable




01 33 23 - 3

specification paragraph numbers, applicable drawing numbers (and

other information required for exact identification of location

for each item), manufacturer and brand, ASTM or Fed eral

Specification Number (if any) and such additional i nformation as

may be required by specifications for particular it em being

furnished. In addition, catalogs shall be marked to indicate

specific items submitted for approval.

1. A copy of letter must be enclosed with items, and a ny items

received without identification letter will be cons idered

"unclaimed goods" and held for a limited time only.

2. Each certificate, manufacturers' literature, and da ta shall be

labeled to indicate the name and location of the Me dical

Center , name of Contractor, manufacturer, brand, c ontract

number and ASTM or Federal Specification Number as applicable

and location(s) on project.

3. Required certificates shall be signed by an authori zed

representative of manufacturer or supplier of mater ial, and by

Contractor.

D. If submittal samples have been disapproved, resubmi t new

samples as soon as possible after notification of d isapproval.

Such new samples shall be marked "Resubmitted Sampl e" in

addition to containing other previously specified i nformation

required on label and in transmittal letter.

E. Approved samples will be kept on file by the Reside nt Engineer at

the site until completion of contract, at which tim e such samples

will be delivered to Contractor as Contractor's pro perty. Where

noted in technical sections of specifications, appr oved samples

in good condition may be used in their proper locat ions in

contract work. At completion of contract, samples t hat are not

approved will be returned to Contractor only upon r equest and at

Contractor's expense. Such request should be made p rior to

completion of the contract. Disapproved samples tha t are not

requested for return by Contractor will be discarde d after

completion of contract.




01 33 23 - 4

F. Submittal drawings (shop, erection or setting drawi ngs) and

schedules, required for work of various trades, sha ll be checked

before submission by technically qualified employee s of

Contractor for accuracy, completeness and complianc e with

contract requirements. These drawings and schedules shall be

stamped and signed by Contractor certifying to such check.

1. For each drawing required, submit one legible photo graphic

paper or vellum reproducible.

2. Reproducible shall be full size.

3. Each drawing shall have marked thereon, proper desc riptive

title, including Medical Center location, project n umber,

manufacturer's number, reference to contract drawin g number,

detail Section Number, and Specification Section Nu mber.

4. A space 120 mm by 125 mm (4-3/4 by 5 inches) shall be reserved

on each drawing to accommodate approval or disappro val stamp.

5. Submit drawings, ROLLED WITHIN A MAILING TUBE, full y protected

for shipment.

6. One reproducible print of approved or disapproved s hop

drawings will be forwarded to Contractor.

7. When work is directly related and involves more tha n one

trade, shop drawings shall be submitted to Architec t-Engineer

under one cover.

1-11. Samples, shop drawings, test reports, certifi cates and

manufacturers' literature and data, shall be submit ted for

approval to:

Guidon Design, Inc.

905 N. Capitol Ave. Suite 100

Indianapolis, IN 46204

1-12. At the time of transmittal to the Architect-E ngineer, the

Contractor shall also send a copy of the complete s ubmittal

directly to the COR.

- - - E N D - - -




01 35 26-1

SECTION 01 35 26 Safety REQUIREMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ........................... .................... 2

1.2 DEFINITIONS ....................................... .................... 3

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ........................... .................... 3

1.4 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP) .................... .................... 4

1.5 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSES (AHAs) ................... .................... 7

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................ .................... 8

1.7 “SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH OFFICER” (SSHO) and “COMPET ENT PERSON” (CP) .... 9

1.8 TRAINING .......................................... .................... 9

1.9 INSPECTIONS .................................................. ....... 10

1.10 ACCIDENTS, OSHA 300 LOGS, AND MAN-HOURS ........................... 10

1.11 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) ................................ 11

1.12 INFECTION CONTROL ................................................. 11

1.13 TUBERCULOSIS SCREENING ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.

1.14 FIRE SAFETY .................................................. ..... 12

1.15 ELECTRICAL .................................................. ...... 13

1.16 FALL PROTECTION .................................................. . 14

1.17 SCAFFOLDS AND OTHER WORK PLATFORMS ................................ 15

1.18 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHES ........................................... 15

1.19 CRANES .................................................. .......... 16

1.20 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT) ....................... 16

1.21 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY .............................................. 17

1.22 WELDING AND CUTTING ............................................... 17

1.23 LADDERS .................................................. ......... 17

1.24 FLOOR & WALL OPENINGS ............................................. 17




01 35 26-2

SECTION 01 35 26 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

4/2015

1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:

A. Latest publications listed below form part of this Article to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designations only.

B. American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE):

A10.1-2011...........Pre-Project & Pre-Task Safety and Health Planning

A10.34-2012..........Protection of the Public on or Adjacent to Construction Sites

A10.38-2013..........Basic Elements of an Employer’ s Program to Provide a Safe and Healthful Work Environment American National Standard Construction and Demolition Operations

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

E84-2013.............Surface Burning Characteristic s of Building Materials

D. The Facilities Guidelines Institute (FGI):

FGI Guidelines-2010Guidelines for Design and Constr uction of Healthcare Facilities

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

10-2013..............Standard for Portable Fire Ext inguishers

30-2012..............Flammable and Combustible Liqu ids Code

51B-2014.............Standard for Fire Prevention D uring Welding, Cutting and Other Hot Work 70-

2014..............National Electrical Code

70B-2013.............Recommended Practice for Elect rical Equipment Maintenance

70E-2012 ............Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

99-2012..............Health Care Facilities Code

241-2013.............Standard for Safeguarding Cons truction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations

F. The Joint Commission (TJC)

TJC Manual ..........Comprehensive Accreditation an d Certification Manual

G. U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission

10 CFR 20 ...........Standards for Protection Again st Radiation




01 35 26-3

H. U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

29 CFR 1904 .........Reporting and Recording Injuries & Illness es

29 CFR 1910 .........Safety and Health Regulations for General Industry

29 CFR 1926 .........Safety and Health Regulations for Construc tion Industry

CPL 2-0.124 ..........Multi-Employer Citation Policy

I. VHA Directive 2005-007

1.2 DEFINITIONS:

A. OSHA “Competent Person” (CP). One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings and wor king conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to employees , and who has the authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them (see 29 CFR 1926.32(f) ).

B. "Qualified Person" means one who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who by ex tensive knowledge, training and experience, has successfully demonstra ted his ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject m atter, the work, or the project.

C. High Visibility Accident is any mishap which may ge nerate publicity or high visibility.

D. Medical Treatment. Treatment administered by a phys ician or by registered professional personnel under the standin g orders of a physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered perso nnel.

E. Recordable Injuries or Illnesses. Any work-related injury or illness that results in:

1. Death, regardless of the time between the injury an d death, or the length of the illness;

2. Days away from work (any time lost after day of inj ury/illness onset);

3. Restricted work;

4. Transfer to another job;

5. Medical treatment beyond first aid;

6. Loss of consciousness; or,

7. A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a phys ician or other licensed health care professional, even if it did n ot result in (1) through (6) above.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:

A. In addition to the detailed requirements included i n the provisions of this contract, comply with 29 CFR 1926 , comply with 29 CFR 1910 as incorporated by reference within 29 CFR 1926 , comply with ASSE A10.34, and all applicable federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations . Submit matters of interpretation of standards for resolution before starting work. Wher e the requirements




01 35 26-4

of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, o rdinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the mos t stringent requirements govern except with specific approval a nd acceptance by the Contracting Officer Representative.

1.4 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP):

A. The APP (aka Construction Safety & Health Plan) sha ll interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program. Include any portions of the Contractor's overall safety and hea lth program referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element and ensure it is site-specific. The Government considers the Prime C ontractor to be the "controlling authority" for all worksite safety and health of each subcontractor(s). Contractors are responsible for i nforming their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the t erms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating t he work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardo us working conditions for other crafts, and inspecting subcont ractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities ar e being carried out.

B. The APP shall be prepared as follows:

1. Written in English by a qualified person who is emp loyed by the Prime Contractor articulating the specific work and hazards pertaining to the contract (model language can be f ound in ASSE A10.33). Specifically articulating the safety requi rements found within these VA contract safety specifications.

2. Address both the Prime Contractors and the subcontr actors work operations.

3. State measures to be taken to control hazards assoc iated with materials, services, or equipment provided by suppl iers.

4. Address all the elements/sub-elements and in order as follows:

a. SIGNATURE SHEET. Title, signature, and phone number of the following:

(1) Plan preparer (Qualified Person such as corporate s afety staff person or contracted Certified Safety Professional with construction safety experience);

(2) Plan approver (company/corporate officers authorize d to obligate the company);

(3) Plan concurrence (e.g., Chief of Operations, Corpor ate Chief of Safety, Corporate Industrial Hygienist, project man ager or superintendent, project safety professional). Provi de concurrence of other applicable corporate and proje ct personnel (Contractor).

b. BACKGROUND INFORMATION. List the following:

(1) Contractor;

(2) Contract number;

(3) Project name;




01 35 26-5

(4) Brief project description, description of work to b e performed, and location; phases of work anticipated (these wil l require an AHA).

c. STATEMENT OF SAFETY AND HEALTH POLICY. Provide a copy of current corporate/company Safety and Health Policy Statemen t, detailing commitment to providing a safe and healthful workpl ace for all employees. The Contractor’s written safety program goals, objectives, and accident experience goals for this contract should be provided.

d. RESPONSIBILITIES AND LINES OF AUTHORITIES . Provide the following:

(1) A statement of the employer’s ultimate responsibili ty for the implementation of his SOH program;

(2) Identification and accountability of personnel resp onsible for safety at both corporate and project level. Contrac ts specifically requiring safety or industrial hygiene personnel shall include a copy of their resumes.

(3) The names of Competent and/or Qualified Person(s) a nd proof of competency/qualification to meet specific OSHA Competent/Qualified Person(s) requirements must be attached;

(4) Requirements that no work shall be performed unless a designated competent person is present on the job s ite;

(5) Requirements for pre-task Activity Hazard Analysis (AHAs);

(6) Lines of authority;

(7) Policies and procedures regarding noncompliance wit h safety requirements (to include disciplinary actions for v iolation of safety requirements) should be identified;

e. SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS. If applicable, provide procedures for coordinating SOH activities with other employer s on the job site:

(1) Identification of subcontractors and suppliers (if known);

(2) Safety responsibilities of subcontractors and suppl iers.

f. TRAINING.

(1) Site-specific SOH orientation training at the time of initial hire or assignment to the project for every employe e before working on the project site is required.

(2) Mandatory training and certifications that are appl icable to this project (e.g., explosive actuated tools, crane operator, rigger, crane signal person, fall protection, elect rical lockout/NFPA 70E, machine/equipment lockout, confin ed space, etc…) and any requirements for periodic retraining/recertification are required.

(3) Procedures for ongoing safety and health training f or supervisors and employees shall be established to a ddress changes in site hazards/conditions.




01 35 26-6

(4) OSHA 10-hour training is required for all workers o n site and the OSHA 30-hour training is required for Competent Persons (CPs).

g. SAFETY AND HEALTH INSPECTIONS.

(1) Specific assignment of responsibilities for a minim um daily job site safety and health inspection during periods of work activity: Who will conduct (e.g., “Site Safety and Health CP”), proof of inspector’s training/qualifications, when inspections will be conducted, procedures for documentation, de ficiency tracking system, and follow-up procedures.

(2) Any external inspections/certifications that may be required (e.g., contracted CSP or CSHT)

h. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION & REPORTING. The Contractor shall conduct mishap investigations of all OSHA Recordable Incide nts. The APP shall include accident/incident investigation proce dure & identify person(s) responsible to provide the follo wing to the Contracting Officer Representative :

(1) Exposure data (man-hours worked);

(2) Accident investigations, reports, and logs.

i. PLANS (PROGRAMS, PROCEDURES) REQUIRED. Based on a risk assessment of contracted activities and on mandator y OSHA compliance programs, the Contractor shall address a ll applicable occupational risks in site-specific compliance and accident prevention plans. These Plans shall include but are not be limited to procedures for addressing the risks asso ciates with the following:

(1) Emergency response ;

(2) Contingency for severe weather;

(3) Fire Prevention;

(4) Medical Support;

(5) Posting of emergency telephone numbers;

(6) Prevention of alcohol and drug abuse;

(7) Site sanitation (housekeeping, drinking water, toil ets);

(8) Night operations and lighting;

(9) Hazard communication program;

(10) Welding/Cutting “Hot” work;

(11) Electrical Safe Work Practices (Electrical LOTO/NFP A 70E);

(12) General Electrical Safety;

(13) Hazardous energy control (Machine LOTO);

(14) Site-Specific Fall Protection & Prevention;

(15) Excavation/trenching (AHA review & approval require d, see checklist in appendix)




01 35 26-7

(16) Asbestos abatement;

(17) Lead abatement;

(18) Crane Permits (see appendix);

(19) Respiratory protection;

(20) Health hazard control program;

(21) Radiation Safety Program;

(22) Abrasive blasting;

(23) Heat/Cold Stress Monitoring;

(24) Crystalline Silica Monitoring (Assessment);

(25) Demolition plan (to include engineering survey);

(26) Formwork and shoring erection and removal;

(27) PreCast Concrete.

C. Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer Represent ative for review for compliance with contract requirements in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 15 calendar days prior to the date of the preconstruction conference for acce ptance. Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP.

D. Once accepted by the Contracting Officer Representa tive, the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contrac t. Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP wil l be cause for stopping of work, at the discretion of the Contract ing Officer, until the matter has been rectified.

E. Once work begins, changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Office r Representative. Should any severe hazard exposure, i.e. imminent da nger, become evident, stop work in the area, secure the area, an d develop a plan to remove the exposure and control the hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery. Eliminate/rem ove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary action to restore a nd maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite per sonnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ASSE/SAFE A10.34) and the environment.

1.5 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSES (AHAS):

A. AHAs are also known as Job Hazard Analyses, Job Saf ety Analyses, and Activity Safety Analyses. Before beginning each wor k activity involving a type of work presenting hazards not exp erienced in previous project operations or where a new work crew or subcontractor is to perform the work, the Contractor(s) performing that work activity shall prepare an AHA (Example electronic AHA forms can be found on the US Army Corps of Engineers web site).

B. AHAs shall define the activities being performed an d identify the work sequences, the specific anticipated hazards, site c onditions, equipment, materials, and the control measures to b e implemented to eliminate or reduce each hazard to an acceptable le vel of risk.

C. Work shall not begin until the AHA for the work act ivity has been accepted by the Contracting Officer Representative and discussed with




01 35 26-8

all engaged in the activity, including the Contract or, subcontractor(s), and Government on-site representa tives at preparatory and initial control phase meetings.

1. The names of the Competent/Qualified Person(s) shal l be identified and included in the AHA. Certification of their competency/qualification shall be submitted to the Government Designated Authority (GDA) for acceptance prior to the start of that work activity.

2. The AHA shall be reviewed and modified as necessary to address changing site conditions, operations, or change of competent/qualified person(s).

a. If more than one Competent/Qualified Person is used on the AHA activity, a list of names shall be submitted as an attachment to the AHA. Those listed must be Competent/Qualified f or the type of work involved in the AHA and familiar with current site safety issues.

b. If a new Competent/Qualified Person (not on the ori ginal list) is added, the list shall be updated (an administrative action not requiring an updated AHA). The new person shall ack nowledge in writing that he or she has reviewed the AHA and is familiar with current site safety issues.

3. Submit AHAs to the Contracting Officer Representati ve for review for compliance with contract requirements in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES for review at least 15 calendar days prior to the start of each phase. Subsequent AHAs as shall be formatted as amendments to the APP. The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the impl ementation and effectiveness of the activity's safety and health c ontrols.

4. The AHA list will be reviewed periodically (at leas t monthly) at the Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated a s necessary when procedures, scheduling, or hazards change.

5. Develop the activity hazard analyses using the proj ect schedule as the basis for the activities performed. All activit ies listed on the project schedule will require an AHA. The AHAs will be developed by the contractor, supplier, or subcontractor and prov ided to the prime contractor for review and approval and then submitt ed to the Contracting Officer Representative .

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE:

A. Contractor representatives who have a responsibilit y or significant role in implementation of the accident prevention p rogram, as required by 29 CFR 1926.20(b)(1) , on the project shall attend the preconstruction conference to gain a mutual underst anding of its implementation. This includes the project superinte ndent, subcontractor superintendents, and any other assigned safety and health professionals.

B. Discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans, programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated A HAs that will be developed and implemented during the performance of the contract. This list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the confe rence and an agreement will be reached between the Contractor an d the Contracting




01 35 26-9

Officer's representative as to which phases will re quire an analysis. In addition, establish a schedule for the preparati on, submittal, review, and acceptance of AHAs to preclude project delays.

C. Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought t o the attention of the Contractor within 14 days of submittal, and the Contractor shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re-subm it it for acceptance. Do not begin work until there is an acc epted APP.

1.7 “SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH OFFICER” (SSHO) AND “COMPET ENT PERSON” (CP):

A. The Prime Contractor shall designate a minimum of o ne SSHO at each project site that will be identified as the SSHO to administer the Contractor's safety program and government-accepted Accident Prevention Plan. The Prime Contractor shall designate a minimu m of one CP in compliance with 29 CFR 1926.20 (b)(2 ) that will be identified as a CP to administer their safety program.

B. These Competent Persons can have collateral duties as the subcontractor’s superintendent and/or work crew lea d persons.

C. The SSHO or an equally-qualified Designated Represe ntative/alternate will maintain a presence on the site during constru ction operations in accordance with FAR Clause 52.236-6: Superintendence by the Contractor . CPs will maintain presence during their constructio n activities in accordance with above mentioned clause. A listing o f the designated SSHO and all the CPs shall be submitted prior to th e start of work as part of the APP with the training documentation and /or AHA as listed in Section 1.8 below.

D. The repeated presence of uncontrolled hazards durin g a contractor’s work operations will result in the designated CP as being deemed incompetent and result in the required removal of t he employee in accordance with FAR Clause 52.236-5: Material and W orkmanship, Paragraph (c).

1.8 TRAINING:

A. The designated Prime Contractor SSHO must meet the requirements of all applicable OSHA standards and be capable (through t raining, experience, and qualifications) of ensuring that the requiremen ts of 29 CFR 1926.16 and other appropriate Federal, State and local requ irements are met for the project. As a minimum the SSHO must have comple ted the OSHA 30-hour Construction Safety class and have five (5) years o f construction industry safety experience or three (3) years if he /she possesses a Certified Safety Professional (CSP) or certified Co nstruction Safety and Health Technician (CSHT) certification or have a safety and health degree from an accredited university or college.

B. All designated CPs shall have completed the OSHA 30 -hour Construction Safety course within the past 5 years.

C. All other construction workers shall have the OSHA 10-hour Construction Safety Outreach course and any necessary safety tra ining to be able to identify hazards within their work environment.

D. Submit training records associated with the above t raining requirements to the Contracting Officer Representative /for revi ew for compliance with contract requirements in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 15 calendar days prior to the date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance.




01 35 26-10

E. Prior to any worker for the contractor or subcontra ctors beginning work, they shall undergo a safety briefing provided by the SSHO or his/her designated representative. As a minimum, th is briefing shall include information on the site-specific hazards, c onstruction limits, VAMC safety guidelines, means of egress, break area s, work hours, locations of restrooms, use of VAMC equipment, emer gency procedures, accident reporting etc... Documentation shall be pr ovided to the Resident Engineer that individuals have undergone c ontractor’s safety briefing.

F. Ongoing safety training will be accomplished in the form of weekly documented safety meeting.

1.9 INSPECTIONS:

A. The SSHO shall conduct frequent and regular safety inspections (daily) of the site and each of the subcontractors CPs shal l conduct frequent and regular safety inspections (daily) of the their work operations as required by 29 CFR 1926.20(b)(2) . Each week, the SSHO shall conduct a formal documented inspection of the entire construc tion areas with the subcontractors’ present in their work areas. Coordi nate with, and report findings and corrective actions weekly to Co ntracting Officer Representative.

B. A Certified Safety Professional (CSP) with speciali zed knowledge in construction safety or a certified Construction Saf ety and Health Technician (CSHT) shall randomly conduct a monthly site safety inspection. The CSP or CSHT can be a corporate safe ty professional or independently contracted. The CSP or CSHT will prov ide their certificate number on the required report for verif ication as necessary.

1. Results of the inspection will be documented with t racking of the identified hazards to abatement.

2. The Contracting Officer Representative will be noti fied immediately prior to start of the inspection and invited to acc ompany the inspection.

3. Identified hazard and controls will be discussed to come to a mutual understanding to ensure abatement and prevent futur e reoccurrence.

4. A report of the inspection findings with status of abatement will be provided to the Contracting Officer Representative within one week of the onsite inspection.

1.10 ACCIDENTS, OSHA 300 LOGS, AND MAN-HOURS:

A. Notify the Contracting Officer Representative as so on as practical, but no more than four hours after any accident meeting the definition of OSHA Recordable Injuries or Illnesses or High Visib ility Accidents, property damage equal to or greater than $5,000, or any weight handling equipment accident. Within notification include con tractor name; contract title; type of contract; name of activity, installation or location where accident occurred; date and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of property damage, if an y; extent of injury, if known, and brief description of accident (to inc lude type of construction equipment used, PPE used, etc.). Prese rve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the Contrac ting Officer




01 35 26-11

Representative determine whether a government inves tigation will be conducted.

B. Conduct an accident investigation for recordable in juries and illnesses, for Medical Treatment defined in paragra ph DEFINITIONS, and property damage accidents resulting in at least $20 ,000 in damages, to establish the root cause(s) of the accident. Comple te the VA Form 2162, and provide the report to the Contracting Officer R epresentative within 5 calendar days of the accident. The Contracting Of ficer Representative will provide copies of any required or special forms.

C. A summation of all man-hours worked by the contract or and associated sub-contractors for each month will be reported to the Contracting Officer Representative monthly.

D. A summation of all OSHA recordable accidents experi enced on site by the contractor and associated sub-contractors for each month will be provided to the Contracting Officer Representative monthly. The contractor and associated sub-contractors’ OSHA 300 logs will be made available to the Contracting Officer Representative as requested.

1.11 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE):

A. PPE is governed in all areas by the nature of the w ork the employee is performing. For example, specific PPE required for performing work on electrical equipment is identified in NFPA 70E, Sta ndard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.

B. Mandatory PPE includes:

1. Hard Hats – unless written authorization is given b y the Contracting Officer Representative in circumstances of work ope rations that have limited potential for falling object hazards s uch as during finishing work or minor remodeling. With authorizat ion to relax the requirement of hard hats, if a worker becomes expos ed to an overhead falling object hazard, then hard hats would be requ ired in accordance with the OSHA regulations.

2. Safety glasses – unless written authorization is gi ven by the Contracting Officer Representative, appropriate saf ety glasses meeting the ANSI Z.87.1 standard must be worn by ea ch person on site.

3. Appropriate Safety Shoes – based on the hazards pre sent, safety shoes meeting the requirements of ASTM F2413-11 sha ll be worn by each person on site unless written authorization is given by the Contracting Officer Representative.

4. Hearing protection – Use personal hearing protectio n at all times in designated noise hazardous areas or when performing noise hazardous tasks.

1.12 INFECTION CONTROL

A. Infection Control is critical in all medical center facilities. Interior construction activities causing disturbanc e of existing dust, or creating new dust, must be conducted within vent ilation-controlled areas that minimize the flow of airborne particles into patient areas. Exterior construction activities causing disturbanc e of soil or creates dust in some other manner must be controlled. Refer to Specification




01 35 26-12

Section 01 01 10 IC for more detailed information r egarding Infection Control .

1.13 FIRE SAFETY

A. Fire Safety Plan: Establish and maintain a site-spe cific fire protection program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926 . Prior to start of work, prepare a plan detailing project-specific fir e safety measures, including periodic status reports, and submit to Co ntracting Officer Representative for review for compliance with contr act requirements in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. This plan may be an element of the Accident Prevent ion Plan. Refer to Specification Section 01 01 10 FSS for mor e detailed information regarding Fire Safety .

B. Site and Building Access: Maintain free and unobstr ucted access to facility emergency services and for fire, police an d other emergency response forces in accordance with NFPA 241.

C. Separate temporary facilities, such as trailers, st orage sheds, and dumpsters, from existing buildings and new construc tion by distances in accordance with NFPA 241. For small facilities with less than 6 m (20 feet) exposing overall length, separate by 3m (10 f eet).

D. Temporary Construction Partitions:

1. Install and maintain temporary construction partiti ons to provide smoke-tight separations between construction areas, the areas that are described in phasing requirements, and adjoinin g areas. Construct partitions of gypsum board or treated ply wood (flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84) on both sides of fire retardant treated wood or metal steel studs. Extend the partitions through suspended ceilings to floor slab deck or roof. Seal joints and penetrations. At door opening s, install Class C, ¾ hour fire/smoke rated doors with self-closing devices.

2. Install one-hour, two-hour fire-rated temporary con struction partitions as shown on drawings to maintain integri ty of existing exit stair enclosures, exit passageways, fire-rated enclosures of hazardous areas, horizontal exits, smoke barriers, vertical shafts and openings enclosures.

3. Close openings in smoke barriers and fire-rated con struction to maintain fire ratings. Seal penetrations with liste d through- penetration firestop materials in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

E. Temporary Heating and Electrical: Install, use and maintain installations in accordance with 29 CFR 1926 , NFPA 241 and NFPA 70.

F. Means of Egress: Do not block exiting for occupied buildings, including paths from exits to roads. Minimize disru ptions and coordinate with Contracting Officer Representative.

G. Egress Routes for Construction Workers: Maintain fr ee and unobstructed egress. Inspect daily. Report findings and correcti ve actions weekly to Contracting Officer Representative.

H. Fire Extinguishers: Provide and maintain extinguish ers in construction areas and temporary storage areas in accordance wit h 29 CFR 1926 , NFPA 241 and NFPA 10.




01 35 26-13

I. Flammable and Combustible Liquids: Store, dispense and use liquids in accordance with 29 CFR 1926 , NFPA 241 and NFPA 30.

J. Standpipes: Install and extend standpipes up with e ach floor in accordance with 29 CFR 1926 and NFPA 241. Do not charge wet standpipes subject to freezing until weather protected.

K. Sprinklers: Install, test and activate new automati c sprinklers prior to removing existing sprinklers.

L. Existing Fire Protection: Do not impair automatic s prinklers, smoke and heat detection, and fire alarm systems, except for portions immediately under construction, and temporarily for connections . Provide fire watch for impairments more than 4 hours in a 24-hour peri od. Request interruptions in accordance with Article, OPERATION S AND STORAGE AREAS, and coordinate with Contracting Officer Representat ive. All existing or temporary fire protection systems (fire alarms, spr inklers) located in construction areas shall be tested as coordinated w ith the medical center. Parameters for the testing and results of a ny tests performed shall be recorded by the medical center and copies provided to the Contracting Officer Representative.

M. Smoke Detectors: Prevent accidental operation. Remo ve temporary covers at end of work operations each day. Coordinate with Contracting Officer Representative.

N. Hot Work: Perform and safeguard hot work operations in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 51B. Coordinate with Contracting Officer Representative at least 10 days in advance. Designa te contractor's responsible project-site fire prevention program ma nager to permit hot work.

O. Fire Hazard Prevention and Safety Inspections: Insp ect entire construction areas weekly. Coordinate with, and rep ort findings and corrective actions weekly to Contracting Officer Re presentative.

P. Smoking: Smoking is prohibited in and adjacent to c onstruction areas inside existing buildings and additions under const ruction. In separate and detached buildings under construction, smoking is prohibited except in designated smoking rest areas.

Q. Dispose of waste and debris in accordance with NFPA 241. Remove from buildings daily.

R. If required, submit documentation to the Contractin g Officer Representative that personnel have been trained in the fire safety aspects of working in areas with impaired structura l or compartmentalization features.

1.14 ELECTRICAL

A. All electrical work shall comply with NFPA 70 (NEC) , NFPA 70B, NFPA 70E, 29 CFR Part 1910 Subpart J – General Environmental Controls, 29 CFR Part 1910 Subpart S – Electrical, and 29 CFR 1926 Subpart K in addition to other references required by contract.

B. All qualified persons performing electrical work un der this contract shall be licensed journeyman or master electricians . All apprentice electricians performing under this contract shall b e deemed unqualified persons unless they are working under the immediate supervision of a licensed electrician or master electrician.




01 35 26-14

C. All electrical work will be accomplished de-energiz ed and in the Electrically Safe Work Condition ( refer to NFPA 70 E for Work Involving Electrical Hazards, including Exemptions to Work Pe rmit). Any Contractor, subcontractor or temporary worker who f ails to fully comply with this requirement is subject to immediate termi nation in accordance with FAR clause 52.236-5(c). Only in rare circumsta nce where achieving an electrically safe work condition prior to beginn ing work would increase or cause additional hazards, or is infeasi ble due to equipment design or operational limitations is energized work permitted. The Contracting Officer Representative with approval of the Medical Center Director will make the determination if the circums tances would meet the exception outlined above. An AHA specific to en ergized work activities will be developed, reviewed, and accepte d prior to the start of that work.

1. Development of a Hazardous Electrical Energy Contro l Procedure is required prior to de-energizing. A single Simple Lo ckout/Tagout Procedure for multiple work operations can only be used for work involving qualified person(s) de-energizing one set of conductors or circuit part source. Task specific Complex Lockout/ Tagout Procedures are required at all other times.

2. Verification of the absence of voltage after de-ene rgizing and lockout/tagout is considered “energized electrical work” (live work) under NFPA 70E, and shall only be performed by qual ified persons wearing appropriate shock protective (voltage rated ) gloves and arc rate personal protective clothing and equipment, us ing Underwriters Laboratories (UL) tested and appropriately rated co ntact electrical testing instruments or equipment appropriate for th e environment in which they will be used.

3. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and electrical testing instruments will be readily available for inspectio n by the Contracting Officer Representative.

D. Before beginning any electrical work, an Activity H azard Analysis (AHA) will be conducted to include Shock Hazard and Arc F lash Hazard analyses (NFPA Tables can be used only as a last alterative and it is strongly suggested a full Arc Flash Hazard Analyses be condu cted). Work shall not begin until the AHA for the work activity has b een accepted by the Contracting Officer Representative and discussed wi th all engaged in the activity, including the Contractor, subcontract or(s), and Government on-site representatives at preparatory a nd initial control phase meetings.

E. Ground-fault circuit interrupters. All 120-volt, si ngle-phase 15- and 20-ampere receptacle outlets on construction sites shall have approved ground-fault circuit interrupters for personnel pro tection. “Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program” only is not allowed.

1.15 FALL PROTECTION

A. The fall protection (FP) threshold height requireme nt is 6 ft (1.8 m) for ALL WORK, unless specified differently or the O SHA 29 CFR 1926 requirements are more stringent, to include steel e rection activities, systems-engineered activities (prefabricated) metal buildings, residential (wood) construction and scaffolding wor k.




01 35 26-15

1. The use of a Safety Monitoring System (SMS) as a fa ll protection method is prohibited.

2. The use of Controlled Access Zone (CAZ) as a fall p rotection method is prohibited.

3. A Warning Line System (WLS) may ONLY be used on flo ors or flat or low-sloped roofs (between 0 - 18.4 degrees or 4:12 slope) and shall be erected around all sides of the work area (See 2 9 CFR 1926.502(f) for construction of WLS requirements). Working with in the WLS does not require FP. No worker shall be allowed in the a rea between the roof or floor edge and the WLS without FP. FP is re quired when working outside the WLS.

4. Fall protection while using a ladder will be govern ed by the OSHA requirements.

1.16 SCAFFOLDS AND OTHER WORK PLATFORMS

A. All scaffolds and other work platforms construction activities shall comply with 29 CFR 1926 Subpart L .

B. The fall protection (FP) threshold height requireme nt is 6 ft (1.8 m) as stated in Section 1.16.

C. The following hierarchy and prohibitions shall be f ollowed in selecting appropriate work platforms.

1. Scaffolds, platforms, or temporary floors shall be provided for all work except that can be performed safely from the g round or similar footing.

2. Ladders less than 20 feet may be used as work platf orms only when use of small hand tools or handling of light materi al is involved.

3. Ladder jacks, lean-to, and prop-scaffolds are prohi bited.

4. Emergency descent devices shall not be used as work ing platforms.

D. Contractors shall use a scaffold tagging system in which all scaffolds are tagged by the Competent Person. Tags shall be c olor-coded: green indicates the scaffold has been inspected and is sa fe to use; red indicates the scaffold is unsafe to use. Tags shall be readily visible, made of materials that will withstand the environme nt in which they are used, be legible and shall include:

1. The Competent Person’s name and signature;

2. Dates of initial and last inspections.

E. Mast Climbing work platforms: When access ladders, including masts designed as ladders, exceed 20 ft (6 m) in height, positive fall protection shall be used.

1.17 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHES

A. All excavation and trenching work shall comply with 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P.

B. All excavations and trenches 5 feet in depth or gre ater shall require a written trenching and excavation permit (NOTE – som e States and other local jurisdictions require separate state/jurisdic tion-issued excavation permits). The permit shall be completed and provided to the Contracting Officer Representative prior to commenc ing work for the




01 35 26-16

day. At the end of the day, the permit shall be clo sed out and provided to the Contracting Officer Representative and/or other Government Designated Authority. The permit shall b e maintained onsite and include the following:

1. Determination of soil classification.

2. Indication that utilities have been located and ide ntified. If utilities could not be located after all reasonable attempt, then excavating operations will proceed cautiously.

3. Indication of selected excavation protective system .

4. Indication that the spoil pile will be stored at le ast 2 feet from the edge of the excavation and safe access provided within 25 feet of the workers.

5. Indication of assessment for a potential toxic, exp losive, or oxygen deficient atmosphere.

C. If not using an engineered protective system such a s a trench box, shielding, shoring, or other Professional Engineer designed system and using a sloping or benching system, soil classifica tion cannot be Solid Rock or Type A. All soil will be classified as Type B or Type C and sloped or benched in accordance with Appendix B of 29 CFR 1926 .

1.18 CRANES

A. All crane work shall comply with 29 CFR 1926 Subpart C .

B. Prior to operating a crane, the operator must be li censed, qualified or certified to operate the crane. Thus, all the provi sions contained with Subpart CC are effective and there is no “Phas e In” date of November 10, 2014.

C. A detailed lift permit shall be submitted 14 days p rior to the scheduled lift complete with route for truck carryi ng load, crane load analysis, siting of crane and path of swing. The li ft will not be allowed without approval of this document.

D. Crane operators shall not carry loads

1. Over the general public or VAMC personnel

2. Over any occupied building unless

a. The top two floors are vacated

b. Or overhead protection with a design live load of 3 00 psf is provided

1.19 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)

A. All installation, maintenance, and servicing of equ ipment or machinery shall comply with 29 CFR 1910.147 except for specifically referenced operations in 29 CFR 1926 such as concrete & masonry equipment 1926.702(j), heavy machinery & equipment 1926.600(a )(3)(i), and process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals (19 26.64). Control of hazardous electrical energy during the installation , maintenance, or servicing of electrical equipment shall comply with Section 1.15 to include NFPA 70E and other VA specific requirements discussed in the section.




01 35 26-17

1.20 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY

A. All confined space entry shall comply with 29 CFR 1910.146 except for specifically referenced operations in 29 CFR 1926 such as excavations/trenches 1926.651(g).

B. A site-specific Confined Space Entry Plan (including permitting process) shall be developed and submitted to the Contracting Officer Representative.

1.21 WELDING AND CUTTING

As specified in section 1.14, Hot Work: Perform and safeguard hot work operations in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 51B. Coordinate with Contracting Officer Representative. Obtain permits from Contracting Officer Representative at least _10_ days in advance .

1.22 LADDERS

A. All Ladder use shall comply with 29 CFR 1926 Subpart X .

B. All portable ladders shall be of sufficient length and shall be placed so that workers will not stretch or assume a hazardous position.

C. Manufacturer safety labels shall be in place on ladders.

D. Step Ladders shall not be used in the closed position.

E. Top steps or cap of step ladders shall not be used as a step.

F. Portable ladders, used as temporary access, shall extend at least 3 ft (0.9 m) above the upper landing surface.

1. When a 3 ft (0.9-m) extension is not possible, a grasping device(such as a grab rail) shall be provided to assist wo rkers inmounting and dismounting the ladder.

2. In no case shall the length of the ladder be such that ladderdeflection under a load would, by itself, cause the ladder to slipfrom its support.

G. Ladders shall be inspected for visible defects on a daily basis and after any occurrence that could affect their safe use. Broken or damaged ladders shall be immediately tagged "DO NOT USE," or with similar wording, and withdrawn from service until restored to a condition meeting their original design.

1.23 FLOOR & WALL OPENINGS

A. All floor and wall openings shall comply with 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M .

B. Floor and roof holes/openings are any that measure over 2 in (51 mm) in any direction of a walking/working surface which persons may trip or fall into or where objects may fall to the level below. See 21.F for covering and labeling requirements. Skylights located in floors or roofs are considered floor or roof hole/openings.

C. All floor, roof openings or hole into which a person can accidentally walk or fall through shall be guarded either by a railing system with toeboards along all exposed sides or a load-bearing cover. When the cover is not in place, the opening or hole shall be protected by a removable guardrail system or shall be attended when the guarding system has been removed or other fall protection system.




01 35 26-18

1. Covers shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at leasttwice the weight of the worker, equipment and materi al combined.

2. Covers shall be secured when installed, clearly marked with the word“HOLE”, “COVER” or “Danger, Roof Opening-Do Not Remo ve” or color-coded or equivalent methods (e.g., red or orange “X” ). Workers mustbe made aware of the meaning for color coding and eq uivalentmethods.

3. Roofing material, such as roofing membrane, insulation or felts ,covering or partly covering openings or holes, shall be immediatelycut out. No hole or opening shall be left unattended unless covered.

4. Non-load-bearing skylights shall be guarded by a load-bearingskylight screen, cover, or railing system along all exposed sides.

5. Workers are prohibited from standing/walking on skylights.

- - - E N D - - -




01 35 26-19

AWE Focus Program Review 2016 Construction: Excavation Safety

DATE: NAME OF REVIEWER:

ME

T

NO

T M

ET

N/A

REQUIREMENT

16.6A. Are the estimated locations of utility installations, such as sewer, telephone, fuel, electric, water lines, or any other underground installations that reasonably may be expected to be encountered during excavation work determined prior to opening an excavation? [OSHA 29 CFR 1926.651(b)(1)]

16.6B. Are utility companies contacted within established or customary local response times, advised of the proposed work, and asked to establish the location of utility underground installations up to their own meters prior to the start of actual excavation? [OSHA 29 CFR 1926.651(b)(2)]

16.6C. On VHA property, is the proposed dig site being marked, “as built” drawings reviewed, and visual indicators (manholes, valves, meters, permanent markers, etc…) of the utilities being utilized to establish the location of utility underground installations by in-house VHA personnel or a contracted private locator service? [OSHA 29 CFR 1926.651(b)(2)]

16.6D. On VHA property, are locations of utility underground installations being marked and maintained by use of stakes, paint, flags, or other clearly identifiable materials to show the field location of underground facilities, in accordance with the current color code standard of the American Public Works Association.? [OSHA 29 CFR 1926.651(b)(2)]

16.6E. If utility companies or the VHA cannot locate underground utility installations or cannot establish the exact location of these installations, are excavation contractors proceeding with caution and using detection equipment or other acceptable means to locate utility installations (careful hand digging, pot-holing and vacuum excavation, hand tools that use air or water under pressure, exploratory bar, or other)? [OSHA 29 CFR 1926.651(b)(2)]

16.6F. When excavation operations approach the estimated location (within 2 feet) of underground installations, are the exact location of the installations determined by safe and acceptable means (careful hand digging, pot-holing and vacuum excavation, hand tools that use air or water under pressure , exploratory bar, or other)? [OSHA 29 CFR 1926.651(b)(3)]

16.6G. While the excavation is open, are underground installations protected, supported or removed (LockOut/Tagout, supports built, etc…) as necessary to safeguard employees? [OSHA 29 CFR 1926.651(b)(4)]




01 35 26-20

16.6H. Are Activity Hazard Analyses and excavation permits being completed prior to opening excavations? (FAR 52.236-13, Accident Prevention; VA Master Specs, Div. 01, Section 01 35 26 Safety Requirements, Subtopic 1.5 & 1.18)

16.6I. Where workers enter an excavation greater than 5 feet in depth, are soils being classified in accordance with OSHA classification system (Solid Rock, Type A, Type B, or Type C)? [OSHA Directive CPL 2- 0.124; VHA Directive 2011-036, Subpar. 4(l)(7)] Note: If using an excavation protective system of sloping or benching, then the soil classification cannot be Solid Rock or Type A. Thus, the angle of repose cannot be steeper than 1 to 1 (45 degrees) (OSHA 29 CFR 1926.652 & associated Appendix A; VA Master Specs, Div. 01, Section 01 35 26 Safety Requirements, Subtopic 1.18, Par. C)?

16.6J. Where workers enter an excavation greater than 5 feet in depth, are protective systems being designed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P, Appendices B to E or designed by Professional Engineer [OSHA 29 CFR 1926.652(a)] Note: excavations in excess of 20 feet in depth must be designed by PE and sloping or benching systems cannot have an angle of repose steeper than 1 to 1 (45 degrees) as provided above.

Reviewer Signature:




01 45 29 - 1

SECTION 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

This section specifies materials testing activities and inspection

services required during project construction to be provided by a

Testing Laboratory retained by the General.


A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the

basic designation only.

B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO):

T27-11..................Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of

Fine and Coarse Aggregates

T96-02 (R2006)..........Standard Method of Test for Resistance to

Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by

Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

T99-10..................Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density

Relations of Soils Using a 2.5 Kg (5.5 lb.)

Rammer and a 305 mm (12 in.) Drop

T104-99 (R2007).........Standard Method of Test for Soundness of

Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium

Sulfate

T180-10.................Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density

Relations of Soils using a 4.54 kg (10 lb.)

Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop

T191-02(R2006)..........Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In-

Place by the Sand-Cone Method

C. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

506.4R-94 (R2004).......Guide for the Evaluation of Shotcrete

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A325-10.................Standard Specification for S tructural Bolts,

Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum

Tensile Strength

A370-12.................Standard Test Methods and Definitions for

Mechanical Testing of Steel Products




01 45 29 - 2

A490-12.................Standard Specification for Heat Treated Steel

Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile

Strength

C31/C31M-10.............Standard Practice for Makin g and Curing

Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

C33/C33M-11a............Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

C39/C39M-12.............Standard Test Method for Co mpressive Strength

of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

C109/C109M-11b..........Standard Test Method for Co mpressive Strength

of Hydraulic Cement Mortars

C136-06.................Standard Test Method for Si eve Analysis of Fine

and Coarse Aggregates

C138/C138M-10b..........Standard Test Method for De nsity (Unit Weight),

Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of

Concrete

C143/C143M-10a..........Standard Test Method for Sl ump of Hydraulic

Cement Concrete

C172/C172M-10...........Standard Practice for Sampl ing Freshly Mixed

Concrete

C173/C173M-10b..........Standard Test Method for Ai r Content of freshly

Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method

C330/C330M-09...........Standard Specification for Lightweight

Aggregates for Structural Concrete

C1019-11................Standard Test Method for Sa mpling and Testing

Grout

C1064/C1064M-11.........Standard Test Method for Te mperature of Freshly

Mixed Portland Cement Concrete

C1077-11c...............Standard Practice for Agenc ies Testing Concrete

and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction

and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation

D422-63(2007)...........Standard Test Method for Pa rticle-Size Analysis

of Soils

D698-07e1...............Standard Test Methods for L aboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort

D1140-00(2006)..........Standard Test Methods for A mount of Material in

Soils Finer than No. 200 Sieve

01 45 29 - 3




D1188-07e1..............Standard Test Method for Bu lk Specific Gravity

and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures

Using Coated Samples

D1556-07................Standard Test Method for De nsity and Unit

Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method

D1557-09................Standard Test Methods for L aboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

(56,000ft lbf/ft3 (2,700 KNm/m3))

D2166-06................Standard Test Method for Un confined Compressive

Strength of Cohesive Soil

D2167-08)...............Standard Test Method for De nsity and Unit

Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon

Method

D2216-10................Standard Test Methods for L aboratory

Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of

Soil and Rock by Mass

D2974-07a...............Standard Test Methods for M oisture, Ash, and

Organic Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils

D3666-11................Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements

for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and

Paving Materials

D3740-11................Standard Practice for Minim um Requirements for

Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection

of Soil and Rock as used in Engineering Design

and Construction

D6938-10................Standard Test Method for In -Place Density and

Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

E94-04(2010)............Standard Guide for Radiogra phic Examination

E164-08.................Standard Practice for Conta ct Ultrasonic

Testing of Weldments

E329-11c................Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in

Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special

Inspection

E543-09.................Standard Specification for Agencies Performing

Non-Destructive Testing

01 45 29 - 4




E605-93(R2011)..........Standard Test Methods for T hickness and Density

of Sprayed Fire Resistive Material (SFRM)

Applied to Structural Members

E709-08.................Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle

Examination

E1155-96(R2008).........Determining FF Floor Flatne ss and FL Floor

Levelness Numbers

E. American Welding Society (AWS):

D1.D1.1M-10.............Structural Welding Code-Ste el

1.3 REQUIREMENTS:

A. Accreditation Requirements: Construction materials testing laboratories

must be accredited by a laboratory accreditation au thority and will be

required to submit a copy of the Certificate of Acc reditation and Scope

of Accreditation. The laboratory’s scope of accredi tation must include

the appropriate ASTM standards (i.e.; E329, C1077, D3666, D3740, A880,

E543) listed in the technical sections of the speci fications.

Laboratories engaged in Hazardous Materials Testing shall meet the

requirements of OSHA and EPA. The policy applies to the specific

laboratory performing the actual testing, not just the “Corporate

Office.”

B. Inspection and Testing: Testing laboratory shall in spect materials and

workmanship and perform tests described herein and additional tests

requested by COR. When it appears materials furnish ed, or work

performed by Contractor fail to meet construction c ontract

requirements, Testing Laboratory shall direct atten tion of COR to such

failure.

C. Written Reports: Testing laboratory shall submit te st reports to COR,

Contractor, unless other arrangements are agreed to in writing by the

COR. Submit reports of tests that fail to meet cons truction contract

requirements on colored paper.

D. Verbal Reports: Give verbal notification to COR imm ediately of any

irregularity.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK:

A. General: The Testing Laboratory shall provide quali fied personnel,

materials, equipment, and transportation as require d to perform the

01 45 29 - 5




services identified/required herein, within the agr eed to schedule

and/or time frame. The work to be performed shall b e as identified

herein and shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Observe fill and subgrades during proof-rolling to evaluate

suitability of surface material to receive fill or base course.

Provide recommendations to the COR regarding suitab ility or

unsuitability of areas where proof-rolling was obse rved. Where

unsuitable results are observed, witness excavation of unsuitable

material and recommend to COR extent of removal and replacement of

unsuitable materials and observe proof-rolling of r eplaced areas

until satisfactory results are obtained.

2. Provide full time observation of fill placement and compaction and

field density testing in vault areas and provide pa rt

timeobservation of fill placement and compaction an d field density

testing in pavement areas to verify that earthwork compaction

obtained is in accordance with contract documents.

3. Provide supervised geotechnical technician to inspe ct excavation,

subsurface preparation, and backfill for structural fill.

B. Testing Compaction:

1. Determine maximum density and optimum moisture cont ent for each type

of fill, backfill and subgrade material used, in co mpliance with

ASTM D698 , D1557, Method A ASTM D698, and/or ASTM D1557.

2. Make field density tests in accordance with the pri mary testing

method following ASTM D6938 wherever possible. Fiel d density tests

utilizing ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167shall be utilized on a case by

case basis only if there are problems with the vali dity of the

results from the primary method due to specific sit e field

conditions. Should the testing laboratory propose t hese alternative

methods, they should provide satisfactory explanati on to the COR

before the tests are conducted.

a. Slab Subgrade: At least one test of subgrade. In ea ch compacted

fill layer, perform one test at minimum for overlay ing building

slab.

b. Foundation Wall Backfill: One test per 30 m (100 fe et) of each

layer of compacted fill but in no case fewer than t wo tests.

01 45 29 - 6




c. Pavement Subgrade: One test for each 335 m 2 (400 square yards),

but in no case fewer than two tests.

d. Curb, Gutter, and Sidewalk: One test for each 90 m (300 feet),


e. Trenches: One test at maximum 30 m (100 foot) inter vals per 1200

mm (4 foot) of vertical lift and at changes in requ ired density,


C. Fill and Backfill Material Gradation: One test per 10 cubicyards

stockpiled or in-place source material. Gradation o f fill and backfill

material shall be determined in accordance with AST M C136, ASTM D422,

and ASTM D1140.

D. Testing Materials: Test suitability of on-site and off-site borrow as

directed by COR.

3.2 LANDSCAPING:

A. Test topsoil for organic materials, pH, phosphate, potash content, and

gradation of particles.

1. Test for organic material by using ASTM D2974.

2. Determine percent of silt, sand, clay, and foreign materials such as

rock, roots, and vegetation.

B. Submit laboratory test report of topsoil to COR.

3.3 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING:

A. Aggregate Base Course:

1. Determine maximum density and optimum moisture cont ent for aggregate

base material in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method D.

2. Make a minimum of three field density tests on each day's final

compaction on each aggregate course in accordance w ith ASTM D1556.

3. Sample and test aggregate as necessary to insure co mpliance with

specification requirements for gradation, wear, and soundness as

specified in the applicable state highway standards and

specifications.

B. Asphalt Concrete:

1. Aggregate: Sample and test aggregates in stock pile and hot-bins as

necessary to insure compliance with specification r equirements for

gradation (AASHTO T27), wear (AASHTO T96), and soun dness (AASHTO

T104).

01 45 29 - 7




2. Temperature: Check temperature of each load of asph alt concrete at

mixing plant and at site of paving operation.

3. Density: Make a minimum of two field density tests in accordance

with ASTM D1188 of asphalt base and surface course for each day's

paving operation.

3.4 SITE WORK CONCRETE:

Test site work concrete including materials for con crete as required in

Article CONCRETE of this section.

3.5 CONCRETE:

A. Batch Plant Inspection and Materials Testing:

1. Perform continuous batch plant inspection until con crete quality is

established to satisfaction of COR with concurrence of Contracting

Officer and perform periodic inspections thereafter as determined by

COR.

2. Periodically inspect and test batch proportioning e quipment for

accuracy and report deficiencies to COR.

3. Sample and test mix ingredients as necessary to ins ure compliance

with specifications.

4. Sample and test aggregates daily and as necessary f or moisture

content. Test the dry rodded weight of the coarse a ggregate whenever

a sieve analysis is made, and when it appears there has been a

change in the aggregate.

5. Certify, in duplicate, ingredients and proportions and amounts of

ingredients in concrete conform to approved trial m ixes. When

concrete is batched or mixed off immediate building site, certify

(by signing, initialing or stamping thereon) on del ivery slips

(duplicate) that ingredients in truck-load mixes co nform to

proportions of aggregate weight, cement factor, and water-cement

ratio of approved trial mixes.

B. Field Inspection and Materials Testing:

1. Provide a technician at site of placement at all ti mes to perform

concrete sampling and testing.

2. Review the delivery tickets of the ready-mix concre te trucks

arriving on-site. Notify the Contractor if the conc rete cannot be

placed within the specified time limits or if the t ype of concrete

delivered is incorrect. Reject any loads that do no t comply with the

Specification requirements. Rejected loads are to b e removed from

01 45 29 - 8




the site at the Contractor’s expense. Any rejected concrete that is

placed will be subject to removal.

3. Take concrete samples at point of placement in acco rdance with ASTM

C172. Mold and cure compression test cylinders in a ccordance with

ASTM C31. Make at least three cylinders for each 40 m3 (50 cubic

yards) or less of each concrete type, and at least three cylinders

for any one day's pour for each concrete type. Labe l each cylinder

with an identification number. COR may require addi tional cylinders

to be molded and cured under job conditions.

4. Perform slump tests in accordance with ASTM C143. T est the first

truck each day, and every time test cylinders are m ade. Test pumped

concrete at the hopper and at the discharge end of the hose at the

beginning of each day’s pumping operations to deter mine change in

slump.

5. Determine the air content of concrete per ASTM C173 . For concrete

required to be air-entrained, test the first truck and every 20 m 3

(25 cubic yards) thereafter each day. For concrete not required to

be air-entrained, test every 80 m 3 (100 cubic yards) at random. For

pumped concrete, initially test concrete at both th e hopper and the

discharge end of the hose to determine change in ai r content.

6. If slump or air content fall outside specified limi ts, make another

test immediately from another portion of same batch .

7. Perform unit weight tests in compliance with ASTM C 138 for normal

weight concrete and ASTM C567 for lightweight concr ete. Test the

first truck and each time cylinders are made.

8. Notify laboratory technician at batch plant of mix irregularities

and request materials and proportioning check.

9. Verify that specified mixing has been accomplished.

10. Environmental Conditions: Determine the temperature per ASTM C1064

for each truckload of concrete during hot weather a nd cold weather

concreting operations:

a. When ambient air temperature falls below 4.4 degree s C (40

degrees F), record maximum and minimum air temperat ures in each

24 hour period; record air temperature inside prote ctive

enclosure; record minimum temperature of surface of hardened

concrete.

01 45 29 - 9




b. When ambient air temperature rises above 29.4 degre es C (85

degrees F), record maximum and minimum air temperat ure in each 24

hour period; record minimum relative humidity; reco rd maximum

wind velocity; record maximum temperature of surfac e of hardened

concrete.

11. Inspect the reinforcing steel placement, including bar size, bar

spacing, top and bottom concrete cover, proper tie into the chairs,

and grade of steel prior to concrete placement. Sub mit detailed

report of observations.

12. Observe conveying, placement, and consolidation of concrete for

conformance to specifications.

13. Observe condition of formed surfaces upon removal o f formwork prior

to repair of surface defects and observe repair of surface defects.

14. Observe curing procedures for conformance with spec ifications,

record dates of concrete placement, start of prelim inary curing,

start of final curing, end of curing period.

15. Observe preparations for placement of concrete:

a. Inspect handling, conveying, and placing equipment, inspect

vibrating and compaction equipment.

b. Inspect preparation of construction, expansion, and isolation

joints.

16. Observe preparations for protection from hot weathe r, cold weather,

sun, and rain, and preparations for curing.

17. Observe concrete mixing:

a. Monitor and record amount of water added at project site.

b. Observe minimum and maximum mixing times.

18. Measure concrete flatwork for levelness and flatnes s as follows:

a. Perform Floor Tolerance Measurements F F and F L in accordance with

ASTM E1155. Calculate the actual overall F- numbers using the

inferior/superior area method.

b. Perform all floor tolerance measurements within 48 hours after

slab installation and prior to removal of shoring a nd formwork.

c. Provide the Contractor and the COR with the results of all

profile tests, including a running tabulation of th e overall F F

and F L values for all slabs installed to date, within 72 h ours

after each slab installation.

01 45 29 - 10




C. Laboratory Tests of Field Samples:

1. Test compression test cylinders for strength in acc ordance with ASTM

C39. For each test series, test one cylinder at 7 d ays and one

cylinder at 28 days. Use remaining cylinder as a sp are tested as

directed by COR. Compile laboratory test reports as follows:

Compressive strength test shall be result of one cy linder, except

when one cylinder shows evidence of improper sampli ng, molding or

testing, in which case it shall be discarded and st rength of spare

cylinder shall be used.

2. Make weight tests of hardened lightweight structura l concrete in

accordance with ASTM C567.

3. Furnish certified compression test reports (duplica te) to COR. In

test report, indicate the following information:

a. Cylinder identification number and date cast.

b. Specific location at which test samples were taken.

c. Type of concrete, slump, and percent air.

d. Compressive strength of concrete in MPa (psi).

e. Weight of lightweight structural concrete in kg/m 3 (pounds per

cubic feet).

f. Weather conditions during placing.

g. Temperature of concrete in each test cylinder when test cylinder

was molded.

h. Maximum and minimum ambient temperature during plac ing.

i. Ambient temperature when concrete sample in test cy linder was

taken.

j. Date delivered to laboratory and date tested.

3.6 REINFORCEMENT:

A. Review mill test reports furnished by Contractor.

3.7 TYPE OF TEST:

Approximate Number of Tests Required

A. Earthwork:

Laboratory Compaction Test, Soils:

(ASTM D1557) (ASTM D698) 10

Field Density, Soils (AASHTO T191, T205, or T238) 5

Penetration Test, Soils 5

01 45 29 - 11




B. Landscaping:

Topsoil Test 2

C. Aggregate Base:

Laboratory Compaction, (ASTM D1557) 5

Field Density, (ASTM D1556) 2

Aggregate, Base Course Gradation (AASHTO T27) 1

Wear (AASHTO T96) 1

Soundness (AASHTO T104) 1

D. Asphalt Concrete:

Field Density, (AASHTO T230 5

Aggregate, Asphalt Concrete Gradation (AASHTO T27) 2

Wear (AASHTO T96) 1

Soundness (AASHTO T104) 1

E. Concrete:

Making and Curing Concrete Test Cylinders (ASTM C31 )

Compressive Strength, Test Cylinders (ASTM C39)

4

12

Concrete Slump Test (ASTM C143) 5

Concrete Air Content Test (ASTM C173) 5

Unit Weight, Lightweight Concrete (ASTM C567) 1

Aggregate, Normal Weight: Gradation (ASTM C33) 1

Deleterious Substances (ASTM C33) 1

Soundness (ASTM C33) 1

Abrasion (ASTM C33) 1

Aggregate, Lightweight Gradation (ASTM C330) 1

Deleterious Substances (ASTM C330) 1

Unit Weight (ASTM C330) 4

Flatness and Levelness Readings (ASTM E1155) (numbe r of days) 2

L. Inspection:

Technical Personnel (Man-days) 40

01 45 29 - 12




- - - E N D - - -




01 57 19- 1

SECTION 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the control of environmental pollution and damage

that the Contractor must consider for air, water, a nd land resources. It

includes management of visual aesthetics, noise, so lid waste, radiant

energy, and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants and

resources encountered or generated by the Contracto r. The Contractor is

obligated to consider specified control measures wi th the costs included

within the various contract items of work.

B. Environmental pollution and damage is defined as th e presence of

chemical, physical, or biological elements or agent s which:

1. Adversely effect human health or welfare,

2. Unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life,

3. Effect other species of importance to humankind, or ;

4. Degrade the utility of the environment for aestheti c, cultural, and

historical purposes.

C. Definitions of Pollutants:

1. Chemical Waste: Petroleum products, bituminous mate rials, salts,

acids, alkalis, herbicides, pesticides, organic che micals, and

inorganic wastes.

2. Debris: Combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves, tree

trimmings, ashes, and waste materials resulting fro m construction or

maintenance and repair work.

3. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been erode d and transported

by runoff water.

4. Solid Waste: Rubbish, debris, garbage, and other di scarded solid

materials resulting from industrial, commercial, an d agricultural

operations and from community activities.

5. Surface Discharge: The term "Surface Discharge" imp lies that the

water is discharged with possible sheeting action a nd subsequent soil

erosion may occur. Waters that are surface discharg ed may terminate

in drainage ditches, storm sewers, creeks, and/or " water of the

United States" and would require a permit to discha rge water from the

governing agency.

6. Rubbish: Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as paper, boxes,

glass and crockery, metal and lumber scrap, tin can s, and bones.




01 57 19- 2

7. Sanitary Wastes:

a. Sewage: Domestic sanitary sewage and human and anim al waste.

b. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparati on, cooking,

dispensing, and consumption of food.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Establish and maintain quality control for the envi ronmental protection

of all items set forth herein.

B. Record on daily reports any problems in complying w ith laws,

regulations, and ordinances. Note any corrective ac tion taken.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this s pecification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic

designation only.

B. U.S. National Archives and Records Administration ( NARA):

33 CFR 328..............Definitions

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section, 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS , PRODUCT DATA, AND

SAMPLES, furnish the following:

1. Environmental Protection Plan: After the contract i s awarded and

prior to the commencement of the work, the Contract or shall meet with

the COR to discuss the proposed Environmental Prote ction Plan and to

develop mutual understanding relative to details of environmental

protection. Not more than 20 days after the meeting , the Contractor

shall prepare and submit to the COR for approval, a written and/or

graphic Environmental Protection Plan including, bu t not limited to,

the following:

a. Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organi zation who is

(are) responsible for ensuring adherence to the Env ironmental

Protection Plan.

b. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for

manifesting hazardous waste to be removed from the site.

c. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training

the Contractor's environmental protection personnel .

d. Description of the Contractor's environmental prote ction personnel

training program.

e. A list of Federal, State, and local laws, regulatio ns, and permits

concerning environmental protection, pollution cont rol, noise

control and abatement that are applicable to the Co ntractor's

proposed operations and the requirements imposed by those laws,

regulations, and permits.




01 57 19- 3

f. Methods for protection of features to be preserved within

authorized work areas including trees, shrubs, vine s, grasses,

ground cover, landscape features, air and water qua lity, fish and

wildlife, soil, historical, and archeological and c ultural

resources.

g. Procedures to provide the environmental protection that comply

with the applicable laws and regulations. Describe the procedures

to correct pollution of the environment due to acci dent, natural

causes, or failure to follow the procedures as desc ribed in the

Environmental Protection Plan.

h. Permits, licenses, and the location of the solid wa ste disposal

area.

i. Drawings showing locations of any proposed temporar y excavations

or embankments for haul roads, material storage are as, structures,

sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or sp oil materials.

Include as part of an Erosion Control Plan approved by the

District Office of the U.S. Soil Conservation Servi ce and the

Department of Veterans Affairs.

j. Environmental Monitoring Plans for the job site inc luding land,

water, air, and noise.

k. Work Area Plan showing the proposed activity in eac h portion of

the area and identifying the areas of limited use o r nonuse. Plan

should include measures for marking the limits of u se areas. This

plan may be incorporated within the Erosion Control Plan.

B. Approval of the Contractor's Environmental Protecti on Plan will not

relieve the Contractor of responsibility for adequa te and continued

control of pollutants and other environmental prote ction measures.

1.5 PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES

A. Protect environmental resources within the project boundaries and those

affected outside the limits of permanent work durin g the entire period

of this contract. Confine activities to areas defin ed by the

specifications and drawings.

B. Protection of Land Resources: Prior to construction , identify all land

resources to be preserved within the work area. Do not remove, cut,

deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs,

vines, grasses, top soil, and land forms without pe rmission from the

COR. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to trees for

anchorage unless specifically authorized, or where special emergency use

is permitted.




01 57 19- 4

1. Work Area Limits: Prior to any construction, mark t he areas that

require work to be performed under this contract. M ark or fence

isolated areas within the general work area that ar e to be saved and

protected. Protect monuments, works of art, and mar kers before

construction operations begin. Convey to all person nel the purpose of

marking and protecting all necessary objects.

2. Protection of Landscape: Protect trees, shrubs, vin es, grasses, land

forms, and other landscape features shown on the dr awings to be

preserved by marking, fencing, or using any other a pproved

techniques.

a. Box and protect from damage existing trees and shru bs to remain on

the construction site.

b. Immediately repair all damage to existing trees and shrubs by

trimming, cleaning, and painting with antiseptic tr ee paint.

c. Do not store building materials or perform construc tion activities

closer to existing trees or shrubs than the farthes t extension of

their limbs.

3. Reduction of Exposure of Unprotected Erodible Soils : Plan and conduct

earthwork to minimize the duration of exposure of u nprotected soils.

Clear areas in reasonably sized increments only as needed to use.

Form earthwork to final grade as shown. Immediately protect side

slopes and back slopes upon completion of rough gra ding.

4. Temporary Protection of Disturbed Areas: Construct diversion ditches,

benches, and berms to retard and divert runoff from the construction

site to protected drainage areas approved under par agraph 208 of the

Clean Water Act.

a. Reuse or conserve the collected topsoil sediment as directed by

the COR. Topsoil use and requirements are specified in Section 31

20 00, EARTH MOVING.

5. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Devices: The eros ion and sediment

controls selected and maintained by the Contractor shall be such that

water quality standards are not violated as a resul t of the

Contractor's activities. Construct or install all t emporary and

permanent erosion and sedimentation control feature s shown on the

Erosion Control Plan. Maintain temporary erosion an d sediment control

measures such as berms, dikes, drains, sedimentatio n basins,

grassing, and mulching, until permanent drainage an d erosion control

facilities are completed and operative.

6. Protect adjacent areas from despoilment by temporar y excavations and

embankments.

01 57 19- 5




7. Handle and dispose of solid wastes in such a manner that will prevent

contamination of the environment. Place solid waste s (excluding

clearing debris) in containers that are emptied on a regular

schedule. Transport all solid waste off Government property and

dispose of waste in compliance with Federal, State, and local

requirements.

8. Store chemical waste away from the work areas in co rrosion resistant

containers and dispose of waste in accordance with Federal, State,

and local regulations.

9. Handle discarded materials other than those include d in the solid

waste category as directed by the COR.

C. Protection of Water Resources: Keep construction ac tivities under

surveillance, management, and control to avoid poll ution of surface and

ground waters and sewer systems. Implement manageme nt techniques to

control water pollution by the listed construction activities that are

included in this contract.

1. Washing and Curing Water: Do not allow wastewater d irectly derived

from construction activities to enter water areas. Collect and place

wastewater in retention ponds allowing the suspende d material to

settle, the pollutants to separate, or the water to evaporate.

2. Control movement of materials and equipment at stre am crossings

during construction to prevent violation of water p ollution control

standards of the Federal, State, or local governmen t.

3. Monitor water areas affected by construction.

D. Protection of Fish and Wildlife Resources: Keep con struction activities

under surveillance, management, and control to mini mize interference

with, disturbance of, or damage to fish and wildlif e. Prior to beginning

construction operations, list species that require specific attention

along with measures for their protection.

E. Protection of Air Resources: Keep construction acti vities under

surveillance, management, and control to minimize p ollution of air

resources. Burning is not permitted on the job site . Keep activities,

equipment, processes, and work operated or performe d, in strict

accordance with the State of Wisconsin and Federal emission and

performance laws and standards. Maintain ambient ai r quality standards

set by the Environmental Protection Agency, for tho se construction

operations and activities specified.

1. Particulates: Control dust particles, aerosols, and gaseous by-

products from all construction activities, processi ng, and

preparation of materials (such as from asphaltic ba tch plants) at all

01 57 19- 6




EARTHMOVING MATERIALS HANDLING

FRONT LOADERS 75 CONCRETE MIXERS 75

BACKHOES 75 CONCRETE PUMPS 75

DOZERS 75 CRANES 75

TRACTORS 75 DERRICKS IMPACT 75

SCAPERS 80 PILE DRIVERS 95

times, including weekends, holidays, and hours when work is not in

progress.

2. Particulates Control: Maintain all excavations, sto ckpiles, haul

roads, permanent and temporary access roads, plant sites, spoil

areas, borrow areas, and all other work areas withi n or outside the

project boundaries free from particulates which wou ld cause a hazard

or a nuisance. Sprinklering, chemical treatment of an approved type,

light bituminous treatment, baghouse, scrubbers, el ectrostatic

precipitators, or other methods are permitted to co ntrol particulates

in the work area.

3. Hydrocarbons and Carbon Monoxide: Control monoxide emissions from

equipment to Federal and State allowable limits.

4. Odors: Control odors of construction activities and prevent obnoxious

odors from occurring.

F. Reduction of Noise: Minimize noise using every acti on possible. Perform

noise-producing work in less sensitive hours of the day or week as

directed by the COR. Maintain noise-produced work a t or below the

decibel levels and within the time periods specifie d.

1. Perform construction activities involving repetitiv e, high-level

impact noise only between 8:00 a.m. and 6:00p.m unl ess otherwise

permitted by local ordinance or the COR. Repetitive impact noise on

the property shall not exceed the following dB limi tations:

Time Duration of Impact Noise Sound Level in dB

More than 12 minutes in any hour 70

Less than 30 seconds of any hour 85

Less than three minutes of any hour 80

Less than 12 minutes of any hour 75

2. Provide sound-deadening devices on equipment and ta ke noise abatement

measures that are necessary to comply with the requ irements of this

contract, consisting of, but not limited to, the fo llowing:

a. Maintain maximum permissible construction equipment noise levels

at 15 m (50 feet) (dBA):

01 57 19- 7




GRADERS 75 JACK HAMMERS 75

TRUCKS 75 ROCK DRILLS 80

PAVERS, STATIONARY

80 PNEUMATIC TOOLS 80

PUMPS 75 BLASTING N/A

GENERATORS 75 SAWS 75

COMPRESSORS 75 VIBRATORS 75

b. Use shields or other physical barriers to restrict noise

transmission.

c. Provide soundproof housings or enclosures for noise -producing

machinery.

d. Use efficient silencers on equipment air intakes.

e. Use efficient intake and exhaust mufflers on intern al combustion

engines that are maintained so equipment performs b elow noise

levels specified.

f. Line hoppers and storage bins with sound deadening material.

g. Conduct truck loading, unloading, and hauling opera tions so that

noise is kept to a minimum.

3. Measure sound level for noise exposure due to the c onstruction at

least once every five successive working days while work is being

performed above 55 dB(A) noise level. Measure noise exposure at the

property line or 15 m (50 feet) from the noise sour ce, whichever is

greater. Measure the sound levels on the A weighing network of a

General Purpose sound level meter at slow response. To minimize the

effect of reflective sound waves at buildings, take measurements at

900 to 1800 mm (three to six feet) in front of any building face.

Submit the recorded information to the COR noting a ny problems and

the alternatives for mitigating actions.

G. Restoration of Damaged Property: If any direct or i ndirect damage is

done to public or private property resulting from a ny act, omission,

neglect, or misconduct, the Contractor shall restor e the damaged

property to a condition equal to that existing befo re the damage at no

additional cost to the Government. Repair, rebuild, or restore property

as directed or make good such damage in an acceptab le manner.

H. Final Clean-up: On completion of project and after removal of all

debris, rubbish, and temporary construction, Contra ctor shall leave the

construction area in a clean condition satisfactory to the COR. Cleaning

shall include off the station disposal of all items and materials not

01 57 19- 8




required to be salvaged, as well as all debris and rubbish resulting

from demolition and new work operations.

- - - E N D - - -




01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the requirements for the man agement of non-

hazardous building construction and demolition wast e.

B. Waste disposal in landfills shall be minimized to t he greatest extent

possible. Of the inevitable waste that is generated , as much of the

waste material as economically feasible shall be sa lvaged, recycled or

reused.

C. Contractor shall use all reasonable means to divert construction and

demolition waste from landfills and incinerators, a nd facilitate their

salvage and recycle not limited to the following:

1. Waste Management Plan development and implementatio n.

2. Techniques to minimize waste generation.

3. Sorting and separating of waste materials.

4. Salvage of existing materials and items for reuse o r resale.

5. Recycling of materials that cannot be reused or sol d.

D. At a minimum the following waste categories shall b e diverted from

landfills:

1. Soil.

2. Inerts (eg, concrete, masonry and asphalt).

3. Clean dimensional wood and palette wood.

4. Green waste (biodegradable landscaping materials).

5. Engineered wood products (plywood, particle board a nd I-joists,

etc).

6. Metal products (eg, steel, wire, beverage container s, copper, etc).

7. Cardboard, paper and packaging.

9. Plastics (eg, ABS, PVC).

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION.

B. Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

C. Lead Paint: Section 02 83 33.13, LEAD BASED PAINT R EMOVAL AND DISPOSAL.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor shall practice efficient waste managemen t when sizing,

cutting and installing building products. Processes shall be employed




01 74 19 - 2

to ensure the generation of as little waste as poss ible. Construction

Demolition waste includes products of the following :

1. Excess or unusable construction materials.

2. Packaging used for construction products.

3. Poor planning and/or layout.

4. Construction error.

5. Over ordering.

6. Weather damage.

7. Contamination.

8. Mishandling.

9. Breakage.

B. Establish and maintain the management of non-hazard ous building

construction and demolition waste set forth herein. Conduct a site

assessment to estimate the types of materials that will be generated by

demolition and construction.

C. Contractor shall develop and implement procedures t o recycle

construction and demolition waste to a minimum of 5 0 percent.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of any special

programs involving rebates or similar incentives re lated to recycling.

Any revenues or savings obtained from salvage or re cycling shall accrue

to the contractor.

E. Contractor shall provide all demolition, removal an d legal disposal of

materials. Contractor shall ensure that facilities used for recycling,

reuse and disposal shall be permitted for the inten ded use to the

extent required by local, state, federal regulation s. The Whole

Building Design Guide website http://www.wbdg.org/t ools/cwm.php

provides a Construction Waste Management Database t hat contains

information on companies that haul, collect, and pr ocess recyclable

debris from construction projects.

F. Contractor shall assign a specific area to facilita te separation of

materials for reuse, salvage, recycling, and return . Such areas are to

be kept neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid

contamination or mixing of materials.

G. Contractor shall provide on-site instructions and s upervision of

separation, handling, salvaging, recycling, reuse a nd return methods to

be used by all parties during waste generating stag es.




01 74 19 - 3

H. Record on daily reports any problems in complying w ith laws,

regulations and ordinances with corrective action t aken.

1.4 TERMINOLOGY

A. Class III Landfill: A landfill that accepts non-haz ardous resources

such as household, commercial and industrial waste resulting from

construction, remodeling, repair and demolition ope rations.

B. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; uncontaminated with adhesives, oils,

solvents, mastics and like products.

C. Construction and Demolition Waste: Includes all non -hazardous resources

resulting from construction, remodeling, alteration s, repair and

demolition operations.

D. Dismantle: The process of parting out a building in such a way as to

preserve the usefulness of its materials and compon ents.

E. Disposal: Acceptance of solid wastes at a legally o perating facility

for the purpose of land filling (includes Class III landfills and inert

fills).

F. Inert Backfill Site: A location, other than inert f ill or other

disposal facility, to which inert materials are tak en for the purpose

of filling an excavation, shoring or other soil eng ineering operation.

G. Inert Fill: A facility that can legally accept iner t waste, such as

asphalt and concrete exclusively for the purpose of disposal.

H. Inert Solids/Inert Waste: Non-liquid solid resource s including, but not

limited to, soil and concrete that does not contain hazardous waste or

soluble pollutants at concentrations in excess of w ater-quality

objectives established by a regional water board, a nd does not contain

significant quantities of decomposable solid resour ces.

I. Mixed Debris: Loads that include commingled recycla ble and non-

recyclable materials generated at the construction site.

J. Mixed Debris Recycling Facility: A solid resource p rocessing facility

that accepts loads of mixed construction and demoli tion debris for the

purpose of recovering re-usable and recyclable mate rials and disposing

non-recyclable materials.

K. Permitted Waste Hauler: A company that holds a vali d permit to collect

and transport solid wastes from individuals or busi nesses for the

purpose of recycling or disposal.

L. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treat ing, and

reconstituting materials for the purpose of using t he altered form in




01 74 19 - 4

the manufacture of a new product. Recycling does no t include burning,

incinerating or thermally destroying solid waste.

1. On-site Recycling – Materials that are sorted and p rocessed on site

for use in an altered state in the work, i.e. concr ete crushed for

use as a sub-base in paving.

2. Off-site Recycling – Materials hauled to a location and used in an

altered form in the manufacture of new products.

M. Recycling Facility: An operation that can legally a ccept materials for

the purpose of processing the materials into an alt ered form for the

manufacture of new products. Depending on the types of materials

accepted and operating procedures, a recycling faci lity may or may not

be required to have a solid waste facilities permit or be regulated by

the local enforcement agency.

N. Reuse: Materials that are recovered for use in the same form, on-site

or off-site.

O. Return: To give back reusable items or unused produ cts to vendors for

credit.

P. Salvage: To remove waste materials from the site fo r resale or re-use

by a third party.

Q. Source-Separated Materials: Materials that are sort ed by type at the

site for the purpose of reuse and recycling.

R. Solid Waste: Materials that have been designated as non-recyclable and

are discarded for the purposes of disposal.

S. Transfer Station: A facility that can legally accep t solid waste for

the purpose of temporarily storing the materials fo r re-loading onto

other trucks and transporting them to a landfill fo r disposal, or

recovering some materials for re-use or recycling.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and


B. Prepare and submit to the Resident Engineer a writt en demolition debris

management plan. The plan shall include, but not be limited to, the

following information:

1. Procedures to be used for debris management.

2. Techniques to be used to minimize waste generation.

3. Analysis of the estimated job site waste to be gene rated:




01 74 19 - 5

a. List of each material and quantity to be salvaged, reused,

recycled.

b. List of each material and quantity proposed to be t aken to a

landfill.

4. Detailed description of the Means/Methods to be use d for material

handling.

a. On site: Material separation, storage, protection w here

applicable.

b. Off site: Transportation means and destination. Inc lude list of

materials.

1) Description of materials to be site-separated and s elf-hauled

to designated facilities.

2) Description of mixed materials to be collected by d esignated

waste haulers and removed from the site.

c. The names and locations of mixed debris reuse and r ecycling

facilities or sites.

d. The names and locations of trash disposal landfill facilities or

sites.

e. Documentation that the facilities or sites are appr oved to

receive the materials.

C. Designated Manager responsible for instructing pers onnel, supervising,

documenting and administer over meetings relevant t o the Waste

Management Plan.

D. Monthly summary of construction and demolition debr is diversion and

disposal, quantifying all materials generated at th e work site and

disposed of or diverted from disposal through recyc ling.


A Publications listed below form a part of this spe cification to the

extent referenced. Publications are referenced by t he basic designation

only. In the event that criteria requirements confl ict, the most

stringent requirements shall be met.

B. U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC):

LEED Green Building Rating System for New Construct ion

1.7 RECORDS

Maintain records to document the quantity of waste generated; the

quantity of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the




01 74 19 - 6

quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incinerat ion. Records shall

be kept in accordance with the LEED Reference Guide and LEED Template.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. List of each material and quantity to be salvaged, recycled, reused.

B. List of each material and quantity proposed to be t aken to a landfill.

C. Material tracking data: Receiving parties, dates re moved,

transportation costs, weight tickets, tipping fees, manifests,

invoices, net total costs or savings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COLLECTION

A. Provide all necessary containers, bins and storage areas to facilitate

effective waste management. VA dumpsters may be use d if available and

if approved by COR. Contractor to reimburse VA for use of such

equipment if approved.

B. Clearly identify containers, bins and storage areas so that recyclable

materials are separated from trash and can be trans ported to respective

recycling facility for processing.Submit report fro m construction and

demolition “recycle” facility. One such facility th at can/has been used

is the Wast Management C&D Recycling facility. 1070 0 West Brown Deer

Road, Milwaukee, WI, 53224. Facility will give cont ractor estimated

weight of recycled materials and approximate amount of materials that

cannot be recycles. Other facilities offering simil ar reporting and

methods can be proposed by Contractor.

C. Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, dispos ed of according to

local, state, federal regulations.

3.2 DISPOSAL

A. Contractor shall be responsible for transporting an d disposing of

materials that cannot be delivered to a source-sepa rated or mixed

materials recycling facility to a transfer station or disposal facility

that can accept the materials in accordance with st ate and federal

regulations.

B. Construction or demolition materials with no practi cal reuse or that

cannot be salvaged or recycled shall be disposed of at a landfill or

incinerator.




01 74 19 - 7

3.3 REPORT

A. With each application for progress payment, submit a summary of

construction and demolition debris diversion and di sposal including

beginning and ending dates of period covered.

B. Quantify all materials diverted from landfill dispo sal through salvage

or recycling during the period with the receiving p arties, dates

removed, transportation costs, weight tickets, mani fests, invoices.

Include the net total costs or savings for each sal vaged or recycled

material.

C. Quantify all materials disposed of during the perio d with the receiving

parties, dates removed, transportation costs, weigh t tickets, tipping

fees, manifests, invoices. Include the net total co sts for each

disposal.

- - - E N D - - -




Introduction.

This site based Construction Waste Management Plan has been developed to manage the non-hazardous building construction and demolition waste by diverting waste from the landfills through salvaging, recycling, or reusing building materials for the Department of Veterans Affairs during construction activities. The Construction Waste Management Plan has been designed to establish records to quantify construction and demolition debris diversion and disposal. Based on the work that is scheduled to be part of the contract and the engineering practices to be implemented in conjunction with the work, every effort is being made to protect the people, assets, and the environment of the Department of Veterans Affairs.

Contents.

ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES Job Site Superintendent General Contractor All Other On-site Personnel Construction/Renovation Area

SITE DESCRIPTION

PERSONNEL WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS

PLAN IMPLEMENTATION, OVERSIGHT & ENFORCEMENT

MEETINGS & COMMUNICATION

SITE ASSESSMENT DISPOSAL AND HANDLING

WASTE AUDITING PROCEDURES

WASTE MANAGEMENT DOCUMENTATION




Personnel Organization and Responsibilities.

This construction project has been authorized by and is under the supervision of the Department of Veterans Affairs, Milwaukee, WI. Job Site Superintendent: [Superintendent Name] will be the on-site employee responsible for the implementation and enforcement of the Construction Waste Management Plan and is so delegated by [Prime Contractor Name]. Prime Contractor: [Prime Contractor Name] will oversee the work of all construction staff and subcontractors. The Contractor will be responsible for instituting the measures as outlined in this Construction Waste Management Plan and ensuring their effectiveness. All Other On-site Personnel: All other on-site construction personnel, including all subcontractors, will be responsible for adhering to the Construction Waste Management Plan as established by [Prime Contractor Name] as well as any additional practices, laws, and regulations for ensuring a safe work environment. Construction/Renovation Area: The work will take place at the Department of Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Milwaukee Wisconsin. The main construction area is contained at the [Contract Location] as shown on the drawings.

Site Description. The worksite is an enclosed steel, concrete and masonry building structure.

Personnel. As required in Specification Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management: All construction workers will be aware of the Construction Waste Management Plan through the project’s Pre- Construction Meeting as well as the Project Kick-Off Meeting conducted by [Prime Contractor Name]. The meetings will consist of the information contained in this Construction Waste Management Plan, including, but not limited to; the construction limits, waste management goals, plan implementation, oversight and enforcement, meetings and communication, documentation, site assessment-expected wastes, disposal and handling, trade contractor waste management plan, waste management progress report, and work area limits, as well as the safety guidelines of the VA. Upon completing this briefing [Superintendent Name] will enforce the Construction Waste Management Plan throughout the life of the project. Weekly contractor meetings will include the Construction Waste Management Plan as well as the Environmental Protection Plan in section 01 57 19 to ensure new and all workers onsite are aware of the requirements and procedures.

Waste Management Goals.

This Construction Waste Management Plan is the responsibility of the Prime Contractor and to be enforced for all subcontractors by the Prime Contractor. By effectively managing this Construction Waste Management Plan, [Prime Contractor Name] will recycle or salvage (for reuse) all feasible materials to a minimum of 50 percent by weight.

The Waste Management Plan outlines the expected wastes to be confronted on site, means of disposal and handling methods, and required documentation. The [Prime Contractor Name]




will provide non hazardous waste manifest identifying weight of all waste generated per delivery (dumpster)

This Construction Waste Management Plan is in conjunction with specification section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management.

[Prime Contractor Name] will monitor, implement, and document this plan throughout the construction of this project. Monitoring of on-site compliance with this plan will be performed by the [Prime Contractor Name] Superintendents on a daily basis. During demolition, the demolition contractor will provide one metal scrap dumpster and one mixed waste dumpster that will be used for all materials. The metal dumpster will be taken by [Demolition Subcontractor Name, Address] for recycling. The mixed waste dumpster will be taken to [Company 1 Name, address], where it will be sorted and separated for recycling. Any non-recyclable material will be sent to landfill. Recyclable material will be weighed and recorded by [Company 1 Name, address]. During reconstruction there will be one dumpster provided for mixed waste. The mixed waste dumpster will be taken to [Company 2 Name], where it will be sorted and separated for recycling. Records will be provided in accordance with LEED Reference Guide and LEED Template. The reports will be submitted monthly.

Meetings and Communication.

Each and every trade contractor and subcontractor will be required to attend a Pre-Construction Meeting and Project Kick-Off Meeting. New construction personnel that are unable to attend are required to attend a brief safety meeting that will include a construction waste training session before being allowed to work on the site. Further, the Demolition Debris Management Plan will be on the agenda at regular construction meetings to update the project team on the status of [Prime Contractor Name] goals for diverted waste and what measures may need to be implemented if these goals are not being met.

SITE ASSESSMENT- DISPOSAL & HANDLING

Contractor to provide dumpsters for processing recyclables and waste; Examples are: 1) Concrete materials; 2) Metal; 3) mixed waste All of these to be sorted at landfill site or recycling facility.

Upon approval, [Prime Contractor Name] will use the VA-provided cardboard dumpster for all cardboard materials.

The following table lists expected wastes on this project, their disposal method, and handling procedures:

Hauler: [Company Name, Contact, Address]

Recycling:

[Company Name, Contact, Address]

Item Disposal method Handling Procedure Destination/Recipient

Masonry Recycle Place in concrete

dumpster

ACME WASTE, INC.




Concrete Recycle Place in concrete

dumpster

ACME WASTE, INC.

Scrap Metals Recycle Place in Metal

dumpster

ACME WASTE, INC.

Cardboard Recycle or reuse Minimal packaging

where possible, or place

in cardboard dumpster

VA-provided cardboard

dumpster (permission

required)

Drywall Recycle Place in mixed

dumpster

ACME WASTE, INC.

Wood (clean) Recycle Place in mixed

dumpster

ACME WASTE, INC.

Plumbing Fixtures Recycle Place in mixed

dumpster

ACME WASTE, INC.

Glass Recycle Place in mixed

dumpster

ACME WASTE, INC.

Plastics

(noncontaminated)

Recycle Place in mixed

dumpster

ACME WASTE, INC.

Plastics (contaminated) Landfill Place in mixed

dumpster

ACME WASTE, INC.

Ceiling Tile Recycle Place in mixed

dumpster

ACME WASTE, INC.

Wiring Recycle/Salvage Electrician will reuse or

recycle

[Trade Subcontractor

Name]

Light Fixtures Recycle/Salvage Electrician will reuse,

salvage, or recycle


Name]

Lamps (Universal

Waste)

Recycle/Salvage Electrician will reuse,

salvage, or recycle


Name]

Ballasts Recycle/Salvage Electrician will reuse,

salvage, or recycle


Name]

Carpet Recycle Carpet Subcontractor

place in mixed

dumpster or recycle

[Company Name]

Inerts Recycle Place in Concrete

Dumpster

[Company Name]

Soil Reuse Reuse throughout

project

[Contractor Name]

All Other Wastes Landfill Reduce waste where

possible, research

recycling or reuse

opportunities

[Company Name]

Waste Auditing. All subcontractors are responsible for daily site cleanup and ensuring that all recycling containers are kept free of contamination. [Prime Contractor Name] representatives shall be responsible for daily checks of trash and recycling containers to check for and ensure the




removal of contamination. Violators will be required to re-sort any misplaced waste and, if the problem continues, pay the cost of [Prime Contractor Name] time to sort recyclables from the trash. [Prime Contractor Name] representatives shall be responsible for contacting haulers for collection service.

Documentation. Documentation of the waste management plan will consist of the following:

1. Records will be provided in accordance with LEED Reference Guide and LEED Template. 2. Records will include the amount of material salvaged, recycled and re-used. 3. Records will include a list of materials taken to the landfill. 4. Material tracking data shall be provided indicating receiving parties, dates, weight tickets, tipping fees, manifests and the total resulting cost or savings.

The quantities in the report will be updated by [Prime Contractor Name] based on information provided by each Trade Contractor and the independent hauler under contract to provide the metal dumpsters. Each Trade Contractor shall be responsible for providing the following documentation for any waste generated on site that is not deposited in the dumpsters provided by [Prime Contractor Name].

1. A record of the type and quantity (by weight) of each material salvaged, reused, recycled, or disposed in a manner other than that provided by [Prime Contractor Name] through their independent hauler. 2. Disposal receipts: Provide copies of all receipts issued by a disposal facility for CDL waste that is disposed in a landfill. 3. Recycling Receipts: Provide copies of all receipts issued by an approved recycling facility. 4. Salvaged materials document: types and quantities (by weight) for materials salvaged for reuse on site, sold, or donated to a third party.

This documentation will then be compiled by [Prime Contractor Name] in monthly waste tracking reports.




02 41 00 - 1

SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

This section specifies demolition and removal of bu ildings, portions of

buildings, utilities, other structures and debris f rom trash dumps

shown.

1.2 RELATED WORK:

A. Demolition and removal of roads, walks, curbs, and on-grade slabs

outside buildings to be demolished: Section 31 20 0 0, EARTHWORK Section

31 20 11.

B. Safety Requirements: Section 01 35 26 Safety Requir ements Article,

ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP).

C. Disconnecting utility services prior to demolition: Section 01 00 00,

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

D. Reserved items that are to remain the property of t he Government:

Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

G. Environmental Protection: Section 01 57 19, TEMPORA RY ENVIRONMENTAL

CONTROLS.

H. Construction Waste Management: Section 017419 CONST RUCTION WASTE

MANAGEMENT.

I. Infectious Control: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUI REMENTS, Article

1.7, INFECTION PREVENTION MEASURES.

1.3 PROTECTION:

A. Perform demolition in such manner as to eliminate h azards to persons

and property; to minimize interference with use of adjacent areas,

utilities and structures or interruption of use of such utilities; and

to provide free passage to and from such adjacent a reas of structures.

Comply with requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS Arti cle, ACCIDENT

PREVENTION.

B. Provide safeguards, including warning signs, barric ades, temporary

fences, warning lights, and other similar items tha t are required for

protection of all personnel during demolition and r emoval operations.

Comply with requirements of Section 01 00 00, GENER AL REQUIREMENTS,

Article PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTUR ES, EQUIPMENT,

UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS.




02 41 00 - 2

C. Maintain fences, barricades, lights, and other simi lar items around

exposed excavations until such excavations have bee n completely filled.

D. Provide enclosed dust chutes with control gates fro m each floor to

carry debris to truck beds and govern flow of mater ial into truck.

Provide overhead bridges of tight board or prefabri cated metal

construction at dust chutes to protect persons and property from

falling debris.

E. Prevent spread of flying particles and dust. Sprink le rubbish and

debris with water to keep dust to a minimum. Do not use water if it

results in hazardous or objectionable condition suc h as, but not

limited to; ice, flooding, or pollution. Vacuum and dust the work area

daily.

F. In addition to previously listed fire and safety ru les to be observed

in performance of work, include following:

1. No wall or part of wall shall be permitted to fall outwardly from

structures.

2. Maintain at least one stairway in each structure in usable condition

to highest remaining floor. Keep stairway free of o bstructions and

debris until that level of structure has been remov ed.

3. Wherever a cutting torch or other equipment that mi ght cause a fire

is used, provide and maintain fire extinguishers ne arby ready for

immediate use. Instruct all possible users in use o f fire

extinguishers.

4. Keep hydrants clear and accessible at all times. Pr ohibit debris

from accumulating within a radius of 4500 mm (15 fe et) of fire

hydrants.

G. Before beginning any demolition work, the Contracto r shall survey the

site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the

extent of the work. The contractor shall take neces sary precautions to

avoid damages to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to

remain the property of the Medical Center; any dama ged items shall be

repaired or replaced as approved by the COR. The Co ntractor shall

coordinate the work of this section with all other work and shall

construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and suppor ts as required. The

Contractor shall ensure that structural elements ar e not overloaded and

shall be responsible for increasing structural supp orts or adding new

supports as may be required as a result of any cutt ing, removal, or




02 41 00 - 3

demolition work performed under this contract. Do n ot overload

structural elements. Provide new supports and reinf orcement for

existing construction weakened by demolition or rem oval works. Repairs,

reinforcement, or structural replacement must have COR’s approval.

H. The work shall comply with the requirements of Sect ion 01 57 19,

TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.

I. The work shall comply with the requirements of Sect ion 01 00 00,

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article 1.7 INFECTION PREVENT ION MEASURES.

1.4 UTILITY SERVICES:

A. Demolish and remove outside utility service lines s hown to be removed.

B. Remove abandoned outside utility lines that would i nterfere with

installation of new utility lines and new construct ion.


PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION:

A. Completely demolish and remove buildings and struct ures, including all

appurtenances related or connected thereto, as note d below:

1. As required for installation of new utility service lines.

2. To full depth within an area defined by hypothetica l lines located

1500 mm (5 feet) outside building lines of new stru ctures.

B. Debris, including brick, concrete, stone, metals an d similar materials

shall become property of Contractor and shall be di sposed of by him

daily, off the Medical Center to avoid accumulation at the demolition

site. Materials that cannot be removed daily shall be stored in areas

specified by the COR. Break up concrete slabs below grade that do not

require removal from present location into pieces n ot exceeding 600 mm

(24 inches) square to permit drainage. Contractor s hall dispose debris

in compliance with applicable federal, state or loc al permits, rules

and/or regulations.

C. In removing buildings and structures of more than t wo stories, demolish

work story by story starting at highest level and p rogressing down to

third floor level. Demolition of first and second s tories may proceed

simultaneously.

D. Remove and legally dispose of all materials, other than earth to remain

as part of project work, from any trash dumps shown . Materials removed

shall become property of contractor and shall be di sposed of in

compliance with applicable federal, state or local permits, rules

02 41 00 - 4




and/or regulations. All materials in the indicated trash dump areas,

including above surrounding grade and extending to a depth of 1500mm

(5feet) below surrounding grade, shall be included as part of the lump

sum compensation for the work of this section. Mate rials that are

located beneath the surface of the surrounding grou nd more than 1500 mm

(5 feet), or materials that are discovered to be ha zardous, shall be

handled as unforeseen. The removal of hazardous mat erial shall be

referred to Hazardous Materials specifications.

E. Remove existing utilities as indicated or uncovered by work and

terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code

covering the specific utility and approved by the C OR. When Utility

lines are encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the COR

shall be notified prior to further work in that are a.

3.2 CLEAN-UP:

On completion of work of this section and after rem oval of all debris,

leave site in clean condition satisfactory to COR. Clean-up shall

include off the Medical Center disposal of all item s and materials not

required to remain property of the Government as we ll as all debris and

rubbish resulting from demolition operations.

- - - E N D - - -




02 42 00-1

SECTION 02 42 00

CUTTING, REMOVAL, DEMOLITION, RESTORATION AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE:

A. Refer to SECTION 01 00 00 for special requirements, protection,

constraints, timing of work, scheduling of work, en closures and

similar requirements relating to this section.

B. This section covers cutting, demolition, removal wo rk, patching,

leveling and restoration work as necessary to accom plish and

complete all work under this contract, including an y relocation

or reuse of existing materials, equipment, systems, or other

work, as well as the disposition of salvaged materi als or debris.

This Section applies to all work under this contrac t, including

general construction, mechanical and electrical wor k.

C. Contractor and his subcontractors shall examine the spaces/work

site themselves to determine the actual conditions and

requirements. All removals, demolition, cutting, re storation,

new installations and other work shall be accomplis hed to

transform the existing spaces and conditions to the new

conditions required under the Contract, as well as to accomplish

all tie-in work of new to existing.

D. It is the intent that, unless specifically shown on the

schedules, or is inherent in the work to be accompl ished under

the general construction work of the area, that eac h contractor

shall perform the demolition, cutting, removals, re locations,

patching and leveling, and restoration as will be r equired to

accomplish the work under their contracts. All work indicated on

the schedules shall be accomplished by the General Contractor.

E. Except for general demolition of entire areas, it i s the intent

that at each area or space the contractor and each subcontractor

shall make removals, perform cutting or demolition and accomplish

relocations of work normal to his trade (i.e., Mech anical

Contractor removes or relocates piping, ductwork an d similar. At




02 42 00-2

areas of general demolition of entire area spaces, the Mechanical

Contractor shall make removals normal to their trad e or may be

called for, for reuse or relocation, make any reloc ations and

cutoffs, terminate, or otherwise discontinue servic es that will

be abandoned, shall be removed to the nearest activ e main. The

general contractor shall then demolish or remove al l unwanted

electrical or mechanical materials, items or elemen ts in the

area.

F. Contractor is required to restore all finishes, sur faces, items,

& materials as required to accommodate new finishes . For

example, if wall paper, vinyl wall covering, cerami c wall tile,

etc. is existing on wall, and new wall finish calls for wall to

be painted, contractor is required to remove existi ng wall paper,

vinyl wall covering, ceramic wall tile, etc. to acc ommodate new

painted finish. These surfaces are required to be v erified prior

to bid, as no change to contract will be provided a fter award if

existing finishes are clearly present.

PART 2: MATERIALS

2.1 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS TO BE STORED BY OWNER (VA):

A. The owner shall mark or tag existing materials, equ ipment or

other items that are to be retained during a pre-de molition walk

through. Salvageable materials and items designated or marked to

remain the property of the government shall be care fully removed

by applicable trades, protected from damage and sto red adjacent

to the removal area as directed.

B. Consult the Project Manager concerning any possible salvageable

items prior to demolition thereof. Carefully remove and salvage

any materials designated to be retained.

C. Any materials not wanted by the government shall be removed from

the site by the contractor, without additional cost to the

government.

D. Removal from the area and the site to the governmen t’s storage

area shall be by the contractor.




02 42 00-3

PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.1 TEMPORARY PROTECTION:

A. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, needling and su pport during

demolition, cutting, remodeling and related new con struction

necessary for the execution of the work and the pro tection of

persons and property. Perform all work with appropr iate

supports, protection and methods to prevent collaps e, settling or

damage to property or persons. Provide adequate sup ports for the

loads to be carried, with loads properly distribute d, and

including to lower levels and sound bearing, if nec essary.

B Provide protective covering and enclosures necess ary to prevent

damage to existing spaces and materials to remain.

C. Provide dust proof temporary enclosures (includi ng above

ceilings) separating areas under demolition and rem odeling from

the remainder of the buildings as well as temporary filters at

ductwork. If work produces fumes or odors that impa ct patient

care or staff operations, granulated active carbon filters shall

be provided for all HVAC intake units where operati ons provide

these odors or fumes. Provide temporary hinged door s in

temporary enclosures where necessary.Temporary and permanent

doors shall be completely sealed with tape or other suitable

material during demolition work and shall remain se aled until

dust has settled.

3.2 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK EXPOSED

A. Where unknown mechanical piping, ductwork or electr ical conduit

is exposed during removal of partitions, walls, flo ors and

ceilings, the removal or re-routing shall be by the Mechanical or

Electrical Contractor as applicable. The contractor is to

provide at minimum labor and materials required for one

journeyman electrician or plumber 40-manhours to re locate these

utilities. Re-routed piping shall be located where directed and

shall be re-connected to maintain all functions in proper

operation. Abandoned piping may be left in place wh ere it is




02 42 00-4

disconnected from its source and capped or as direc ted by Project

Manager. There shall be no"dead end" water, sewer, medical gas,

or vent piping existing in the completed work.

B. Removals, capping or otherwise terminating services which are

abandoned or need to be abandoned, shall be accompl ished without

additional cost to the government, whether shown or noted on

drawings or otherwise encountered.

C. Contractor is to remove all old abandoned oval pneu matic tube

lines, transfer boxes, and related equipment and co mponents

exposed within the construction area. The contracto r is to

provide at minimum labor and materials required for one

electrician or laborer 40-manhours for removal.

3.3 WORK OF EACH CONTRACT

A. The contractor and each subcontractor shall careful ly review the

contract documents, including those primarily for o ther trades,

with respect to the coordination of demolition, rem oval and

remodeling work and perform such removals normal to their

respective trade as may be shown, noted, or otherwi se required.

Cutting and patching incidental to demolition, remo val and/or

remodeling of general construction work shall be co nstrued as the

work of the general contractor when shown or indica ted on the

general construction drawings or schedules or speci fically noted

or called for on documents primarily for other trad es as being

accomplished by the general contractor. Other contr actors shall

perform such other cutting, demolition, patching, r eplacement and

restoration as may be required to accomplish their part of the

work.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Any painting to match adjacent or surrounding areas . 3.5 LEVELING OF FLOORS

A. Contractor shall submit for approval - brand of lat ex, floor

leveler to be used. Leveler shall include additive for

02 42 00-5




waterproofing. 3.6 PATCHING

A. Contractor shall be responsible for all patching re quired as a

result of installation of new work.

B. Contractor shall furnish all related components, tr ims, etc.

required to complete the work.

- - - END- - -



03 30 00 - 1

Steam Line Piping and Insulation Project No. 695-17 -103

SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

This section specifies cast-in-place structural con crete and materials

and mixes for other concrete.

1.2 RELATED WORK:

A. Materials testing and inspection during constructio n: Section 01 45 29,

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.

B. Concrete roads, walks, and similar exterior site wo rk: Section 32 05

23, CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS.

1.3 TESTING AGENCY FOR CONCRETE MIX DESIGN:

A. Testing agency for the trial concrete mix design re tained and

reimbursed by the Contractor and approved by Contra cting Officer’s

Representative (COR). For all other testing, refer to Section 01 45 29

Testing Laboratory Services.

B. Testing agency maintaining active participation in Program of Cement

and Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL) of Nationa l Institute of

Standards and Technology.

C. Testing agency shall furnish equipment and qualifie d technicians to

establish proportions of ingredients for concrete m ixes.

1.4 TOLERANCES:

A. Formwork: ACI 117, except the elevation tolerance o f formed surfaces

before removal of shores is +0 mm (+0 inch) and -20 mm (-3/4 inch).

B. Reinforcement Fabricating and Placing: ACI 117, exc ept that fabrication

tolerance for bar sizes Nos. 10, 13, and 16 (Nos. 3 , 4, and 5)

(Tolerance Symbol 1 in Fig. 2.1(a), ACI, 117) used as column ties or

stirrups is +0 mm (+0 inch) and -13 mm (-1/2 inch) where gross bar

length is less than 3600 mm (12 feet), or +0 mm (+0 inch) and -20 mm (-

3/4 inch) where gross bar length is 3600 mm (12 fee t) or more.

C. Cross-Sectional Dimension: ACI 117, except toleranc e for thickness of

slabs 12 inches or less is +20 mm (+3/4 inch) and - 6 mm (-1/4 inch).

Tolerance of thickness of beams more than 300 mm (1 2 inch) but less

than 900 mm (3 feet) is +20 mm (+3/4 inch) and -10 mm (-3/8 inch).

D. Slab Finishes: ACI 117, Section 4.5.6, F-number met hod in accordance

with ASTM E1155, except as follows:

03 30 00 - 2

Milwaukee VAMC Upgrade and Replace Building 123 Steam Piping and Insulation



1. Test entire slab surface, including those areas wit hin 600 mm (2

feet) of construction joints and vertical elements that project

through slab surface.

2. Maximum elevation change which may occur within 600 mm (2 feet) of

any column or wall element is 6 mm (0.25 inches).

3. Allow sample measurement lines that are perpendicul ar to

construction joints to extend past joint into previ ous placement no

further than 1500 mm (5 feet).


A. ACI SP-66 – ACI Detailing Manual.

B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

C. ACI 301 – Standard Specifications for Structural Co ncrete.

1.6 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DR AWINGS, PRODUCT

DATA, and SAMPLES.

B. Shop Drawings: Reinforcing steel: Complete shop dra wings that detail

fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar si zes, lengths,

material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, be nt bar diagrams, bar

arrangements, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and suppor ts.

C. Mill Test Reports:

1. Reinforcing Steel.

2. Cement.

D. Manufacturer's Certificates:

1. Abrasive aggregate.

2. Lightweight aggregate for structural concrete.

3. Air-entraining admixture.

4. Chemical admixtures, including chloride ion content .

5. Waterproof paper for curing concrete.

6. Liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concre te.

7. Non-shrinking grout.

8. Liquid hardener.

9. Waterstops.

10. Expansion joint filler.

11. Adhesive binder.

E. Testing Agency for Concrete Mix Design: Approval re quest including

qualifications of principals and technicians and ev idence of active

03 30 00 - 3




participation in program of Cement and Concrete Ref erence Laboratory

(CCRL) of National Institute of Standards and Techn ology.

F. Test Report for Concrete Mix Designs: Trial mixes i ncluding

water-cement fly ash ratio curves, concrete mix ing redients, and

admixtures.

G. Shoring and Reshoring Sequence: Submit for approval a shoring and

reshoring sequence for flat slab/flat plate portion s, prepared by a

registered Professional Engineer. As a minimum, inc lude timing of form

stripping, reshoring, number of floors to be re-sho red and timing of

re-shore removal to serve as an initial outline of procedures subject

to modification as construction progresses. Submit revisions to

sequence, whether initiated by COR (see FORMWORK) o r Contractor.

H. Test reports on splitting tensile strength (Fct) of lightweight

concrete.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Conform to ACI 304. Store aggregate separately for each kind or grade,

to prevent segregation of sizes and avoid inclusion of dirt and other

materials.

B. Deliver cement in original sealed containers bearin g name of brand and

manufacturer, and marked with net weight of content s. Store in suitable

watertight building in which floor is raised at lea st 300 mm (1 foot)

above ground. Store bulk cement and fly ash in sepa rate suitable bins.

C. Deliver other packaged materials for use in concret e in original sealed

containers, plainly marked with manufacturer's name and brand, and

protect from damage until used.

1.8 PRE-CONCRETE CONFERENCE:

A. General: At least 15 days prior to submittal of des ign mixes, conduct a

meeting to review proposed methods of concrete cons truction to achieve

the required results.

B. Agenda: Includes but is not limited to:

1. Submittals.

2. Coordination of work.

3. Availability of material.

4. Concrete mix design including admixtures.

5. Methods of placing, finishing, and curing.

6. Finish criteria required to obtain required flatnes s and levelness.

03 30 00 - 4




7. Timing of floor finish measurements.

8. Material inspection and testing.

C. Attendees: Include but not limited to representativ es of Contractor;

subcontractors involved in supplying, conveying, pl acing, finishing,

and curing concrete; lightweight aggregate manufact urer; admixture

manufacturers; COR; Consulting Engineer; Department of Veterans Affairs

retained testing laboratories for concrete testing and finish (F-

number) verification.

D. Minutes of the meeting: Contractor shall take minut es and type and

distribute the minutes to attendees within five day s of the meeting.


A. Publications listed below form a part of this speci fication to extent

referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation

only.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

117-10..................Specifications for Toleranc es for Concrete

Construction and Materials and Commentary

211.1-91(R2009).........Standard Practice for Selec ting Proportions for

Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete

211.2-98(R2004).........Standard Practice for Selec ting Proportions for

Structural Lightweight Concrete

214R-11.................Guide to Evaluation of Stre ngth Test Results of

Concrete

301-10..................Standard Practice for Struc tural Concrete

304R-00(R2009)..........Guide for Measuring, Mixing , Transporting, and

Placing Concrete

305.1-06................Specification for Hot Weath er Concreting 306.1-

90(R2002).........Standard Specification for Cold W eather

Concreting

308.1-11................Specification for Curing Co ncrete

309R-05.................Guide for Consolidation of Concrete

318-11..................Building Code Requirements for Structural

Concrete and Commentary

347-04..................Guide to Formwork for Concr ete

SP-66-04................ACI Detailing Manual

03 30 00 - 5




C. American National Standards Institute and American Hardboard

Association (ANSI/AHA):

A135.4-2004.............Basic Hardboard


A82/A82M-07.............Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain,

for Concrete Reinforcement

A185/185M-07............Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

A615/A615M-09...........Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain

Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

A653/A653M-11...........Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc

Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated

(Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process

A706/A706M-09...........Standard Specification for Low Alloy Steel

Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement

A767/A767M-09...........Standard Specification for Zinc Coated

(Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement

A775/A775M-07...........Standard Specification for Epoxy Coated

Reinforcing Steel Bars

A820-11.................Standard Specification for Steel Fibers for

Fiber Reinforced Concrete

A996/A996M-09...........Standard Specification for Rail Steel and Axle

Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

C31/C31M-10.............Standard Practice for Makin g and Curing

Concrete Test Specimens in the field

C33/C33M-11A............Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

C39/C39M-12.............Standard Test Method for Co mpressive Strength

of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

C94/C94M-12.............Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete

C143/C143M-10...........Standard Test Method for Sl ump of Hydraulic

Cement Concrete

C150-11.................Standard Specification for Portland Cement C171-

07.................Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for

Curing Concrete

03 30 00 - 6




C172-10.................Standard Practice for Sampl ing Freshly Mixed

Concrete

C173-10.................Standard Test Method for Ai r Content of Freshly

Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method

C192/C192M-07...........Standard Practice for Makin g and Curing

Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory

C231-10.................Standard Test Method for Ai r Content of Freshly

Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method C260-

10.................Standard Specification for Air E ntraining

Admixtures for Concrete

C309-11.................Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane

Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

C330-09.................Standard Specification for Lightweight

Aggregates for Structural Concrete

C494/C494M-11...........Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures

for Concrete

C618-12.................Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw

or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in

Concrete

C666/C666M-03(R2008)....Standard Test Method for Re sistance of Concrete

to Rapid Freezing and Thawing

C881/C881M-10...........Standard Specification for Epoxy Resin Base

Bonding Systems for Concrete

C1107/1107M-11..........Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,

Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)

C1315-11................Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane

Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for

Curing and Sealing Concrete

D6-95(R2011)............Standard Test Method for Lo ss on Heating of Oil

and Asphaltic Compounds

D297-93(R2006)..........Standard Methods for Rubber Products Chemical

Analysis

D412—06AE2..............Standard Test Methods for V ulcanized Rubber and

Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension

D1751-04(R2008).........Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion

Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural

03 30 00 - 7




Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient

Bituminous Types)

D4263-83(2012)..........Standard Test Method for In dicating Moisture in

Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method.

D4397-10................Standard Specification for Polyethylene

Sheeting for Construction, Industrial and

Agricultural Applications

E1155-96(R2008).........Standard Test Method for De termining F F Floor

Flatness and F L Floor Levelness Numbers F1869-

11................Standard Test Method for Measurin g Moisture

Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using

Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.

E. American Welding Society (AWS):

D1.4/D1.4M-11...........Structural Welding Code - R einforcing Steel

F. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):

Handbook 2008

H. U. S. Department of Commerce Product Standard (PS):

PS 1....................Construction and Industrial Plywood

PS 20...................American Softwood Lumber

I. U. S. Army Corps of Engineers Handbook for Concrete and Cement:

CRD C513................Rubber Waterstops

CRD C572................Polyvinyl Chloride Watersto ps

PART 2 – PRODUCTS:

2.1 FORMS:

A. Wood: PS 20 free from loose knots and suitable to f acilitate finishing

concrete surface specified; tongue and grooved.

B. Plywood: PS-1 Exterior Grade B-B (concrete-form) 16 mm (5/8 inch), or

20 mm (3/4 inch) thick for unlined contact form. B- B High Density

Concrete Form Overlay optional.

C. Corrugated Fiberboard Void Boxes: Double faced, com pletely impregnated

with paraffin and laminated with moisture resistant adhesive, size as

shown. Design forms to support not less than 48 KPa (1000 psf) and not

lose more than 15 percent of their original strengt h after being

completely submerged in water for 24 hours and then air dried.

D. Form Lining:

1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4, Class 2 with one (S1S) smooth side)

03 30 00 - 8




2. Plywood: Grade B-B Exterior (concrete-form) not les s than 6 mm (1/4

inch) thick.

3. Plastic, fiberglass, or elastomeric capable of repr oducing the

desired pattern or texture.

E. Concrete products shall comply with following stand ards for biobased

materials:

Material Type Percent by Weight

Concrete Penetrating Liquid 79 percent biobased mat erial

Concrete form Release Agent 87 percent biobased mat erial

Concrete Sealer 11 percent biobased material

The minimum-content standards are based on the weig ht (not the volume)

of the material.

F. Form Ties: Develop a minimum working strength of 13 .35 kN (3000 pounds)

when fully assembled. Ties shall be adjustable in l ength to permit

tightening of forms and not have any lugs, cones, w ashers to act as

spreader within form, nor leave a hole larger than 20 mm (3/4 inch)

diameter, or a depression in exposed concrete surfa ce, or leave metal

closer than 40 mm (1 1/2 inches) to concrete surfac e. Wire ties not

permitted. Cutting ties back from concrete face not permitted.

G. Chamfer strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, ¾ by ¾ inch,

minimum.

2.2 MATERIALS:

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I or II.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F including suppleme ntary optional

requirements relating to reactive aggregates and al kalies, and loss on

ignition (LOI) not to exceed 5 percent.

C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33.

1. Size 67 or Size 467 may be used for footings and wa lls over 300 mm

(12 inches) thick.

3. Maximum size of coarse aggregates not more than one-fifth of

narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-thi rd of depth of

slabs,three-fourth of minimum clear spacing between reinforcing

bars, nor 0.75 inches.

D. Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete: AST M C330, Table 1.

Maximum size of aggregate not larger than one-fifth of narrowest

03 30 00 - 9




dimension between forms, nor three-fourth of minimu m clear distance

between reinforcing bars. Contractor to furnish cer tified report to

verify that aggregate is sound and durable, and has a durability factor

of not less than 80 based on 300 cycles of freezing and thawing when

tested in accordance with ASTM C666.

E. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33. Fine aggregate for applie d concrete floor

topping shall pass a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, 10 perc ent maximum shall

pass a 150 µm (No. 100) sieve.

F. Mixing Water: Fresh, clean, and potable.

G. Admixtures:

1. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A and not contain more

chloride ions than are present in municipal drinkin g water.

2. Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Typ e D and not

contain more chloride ions than are present in muni cipal drinking

water.

3. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Superplasticiz er): ASTM C494,

Type F or G, and not contain more chloride ions tha n are present in

municipal drinking water.

4. Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E, and

not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal

drinking water. Admixture manufacturer must have lo ng-term non-

corrosive test data from an independent testing lab oratory of at

least one year duration using an acceptable acceler ated corrosion

test method such as that using electrical potential measures.

5. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.

6. Microsilica: Use only with prior review and accepta nce of the COR.

Use only in conjunction with high range water reduc er.

7. Calcium Nitrite corrosion inhibitor: ASTM C494 Type C.

8. Cementitious Crystalline Concrete Waterproofing Adm ixture: Xypex C-

1000/C-100 NF or approved equal.

9. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanat e or admixtures

containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted.

10. Certification: Written conformance to the requireme nts above and

the chloride ion content of the admixture prior to mix design

review.

H. Vapor Barrier: ASTM D4397, 0.25 mm (10 mil) or 0.38 mm (15 mil).

03 30 00 - 10




I. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, or ASTM A996, deforme d, grade 60. All

reinforcing to be epoxy coated per note M in this s ection.

J. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. All reinforcing to b e epoxy coated per

note M in this section.

K. Reinforcing Bars to be Welded: ASTM A706.

L. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A767.

M. Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A775, with less than 2 percent

damaged coating in each 12-inch bar length.

N. Cold Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A82.

O. Supports, Spacers, and Chairs: Types which will hol d reinforcement in

position shown in accordance with requirements of A CI 318 except as

specified.

P. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D1751.

Q. Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete: ASTM C171.

R. Liquid Membrane-forming Compounds for Curing Concre te: ASTM C309, Type

I, with fugitive dye, and shall meet the requiremen ts of ASTM

C1315.Compound shall be compatible with scheduled s urface treatment,

such as paint and resilient tile, and shall not dis color concrete

surface.

S. Abrasive Aggregate: Aluminum oxide grains or emery grits.

T. Non-Shrink Grout:

1. ASTM C1107, pre-mixed, produce a compressive streng th of at least 18

MPa at three days and 35 MPa (5000 psi) at 28 days. Furnish test

data from an independent laboratory indicating that the grout when

placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95 perc ent bearing under

a 1200 mm x 1200 mm (4 foot by 4 foot) base plate.

2. Where high fluidity or increased placing time is re quired, furnish

test data from an independent laboratory indicating that the grout

when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95 percent under an

450 mm x 900 mm (18 inch by 36 inch) base plate.

U. Adhesive Binder: ASTM C881.

V. Waterstops:

1. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or

trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentoni te or other

03 30 00 - 11




hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concr ete, 3/8 by 3/4

inch.

2. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufacture d rectangular or

trapezoidal strip, bentonite-free hydrophilic polym er-modified

chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to concret e, 3/8 by 3/4

inch.

3. Install Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops in construc tion joints and

at other locations indicated according to manufactu rer’s written

instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fasten ing, and firmly

pressing into place. Install in longest lengths pra cticable.

W. Porous Backfill: Crushed stone or gravel graded fro m 25 mm to 20 mm (1

inch to 3/4 inch).

X. Fibers:

1. Synthetic Fibers: Monofilament or fibrillated polyp ropylene fibers

for secondary reinforcing of concrete members. Use appropriate

length and 0.9 kg/m 3 (1.5 lb. per cubic yard). Product shall have a

UL rating.

Y. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two component, 100 percent soli ds compound, with a

minimum shore D hardness of 50.

Z. Bonding Admixture: Non-rewettable, polymer modified , bonding compound.

2.3 CONCRETE MIXES:

A. Mix Designs: Proportioned in accordance with Sectio n 5.3,

"Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and /or Trial Mixtures"

of ACI 318.

1. If trial mixes are used, make a set of at least 6 c ylinders in

accordance with ASTM C192 for test purposes from ea ch trial mix;

test three for compressive strength at 7 days and t hree at 28 days.

2. Submit a report of results of each test series, inc lude a detailed

listing of the proportions of trial mix or mixes, i ncluding cement,

fly ash, admixtures, weight of fine and coarse aggr egate per m 3

(cubic yard) measured dry rodded and damp loose, sp ecific gravity,

fineness modulus, percentage of moisture, air conte nt,

water-cement -fly ash ratio, and consistency of eac h cylinder in

terms of slump. Include dry unit weight of lightwei ght structural

concrete.

03 30 00 - 12




3. Prepare a curve showing relationship between water- cement -fly ash

ratio at 7-day and 28-day compressive strengths. Pl ot each curve

using at least three specimens.

4. If the field experience method is used, submit comp lete standard

deviation analysis.

B. Fly Ash Testing: Submit certificate verifying confo rmance with ASTM 618

initially with mix design and for each truck load o f fly ash delivered

from source. Submit test results performed within 6 months of submittal

date. Notify COR immediately when change in source is anticipated.

1. Testing Laboratory used for fly ash certification/t esting shall

participate in the Cement and Concrete Reference La boratory (CCRL)

program. Submit most recent CCRL inspection report.

C. After approval of mixes no substitution in material or change in

proportions of approval mixes may be made without a dditional tests and

approval of COR or as specified. Making and testing of preliminary test

cylinders may be carried on pending approval of cem ent and fly ash,

providing Contractor and manufacturer certify that ingredients used in

making test cylinders are the same. COR may allow C ontractor to proceed

with depositing concrete for certain portions of wo rk, pending final

approval of cement and fly ash and approval of desi gn mix.

D. Cement Factor: Maintain minimum cement factors in T able I regardless of

compressive strength developed above minimums. Use Fly Ash as an

admixture with 20% replacement by weight in all str uctural work.

Increase this replacement to 40% for mass concrete, and reduce it to

10% for drilled piers and caissons.

03 30 00 - 13




TABLE I - CEMENT AND WATER FACTORS FOR CONCRETE

Concrete Strength Non-Air- Entrained

Air-Entrained

Min. 28 Day Comp. Str.

MPa (psi)

Min. Cement kg/m 3 (lbs/c.

yd)

Max. Water Cement Ratio

Min. Cement

kg/m 3

(lbs/c. yd)

Max. Water Cement Ratio

35 (5000) 1,3 375 (630) 0.45 385 (650) 0.40

30 (4000) 1,3 325 (550) 0.55 340 (570) 0.50

25 (3000) 1,3 280 (470) 0.65 290 (490) 0.55

25 (3000) 1,2 300 (500)

* 310 (520)

*

1. If trial mixes are used, the proposed mix design sh all achieve a

compressive strength 8.3 MPa (1200 psi) in excess o f f'c. For

concrete strengths above 35 Mpa (5000 psi), the pro posed mix design

shall achieve a compressive strength 9.7 MPa (1400 psi) in excess of

f’c.

2. Lightweight Structural Concrete. Pump mixes may req uire higher

cement values.

3. For concrete exposed to high sulfate content soils maximum water

cement ratio is 0.44.

4. Determined by Laboratory in accordance with ACI 211 .1 for normal

concrete or ACI 211.2 for lightweight structural co ncrete.

E. Maximum Slump: Maximum slump, as determined by ASTM C143 with

tolerances as established by ASTM C94, for concrete to be vibrated

shall be as shown in Table II.

TABLE II - MAXIMUM SLUMP, MM (INCHES)*

Type of Construction Normal Weight Concrete

Lightweight Structural Concrete

Reinforced Footings and Substructure Walls

75mm (3 inches) 75 mm (3 inches)

Slabs, Beams, Reinforced Walls, and Building Columns

100 mm (4 inches)

100 mm (4 inches)

F. Slump may be increased by the use of the approved h igh-range water-

reducing admixture (superplasticizer). Tolerances a s established by

ASTM C94. Concrete containing the high-range-water- reducing admixture

03 30 00 - 14




may have a maximum slump of 225 mm (9 inches). The concrete shall

arrive at the job site at a slump of 50 mm to 75 mm (2 inches to 3

inches), and 75 mm to 100 mm (3 inches to 4 inches) for lightweight

concrete. This should be verified, and then the hig h-range-water-

reducing admixture added to increase the slump to t he approved level.

G. Air-Entrainment: Air-entrainment of normal weight c oncrete shall

conform with Table III. Air-entrainment of lightwei ght structural

concrete shall conform with Table IV. Determine air content by either

ASTM C173 or ASTM C231.

TABLE III - TOTAL AIR CONTENT FOR VARIOUS SIZES OF COARSE AGGREGATES (NORMAL CONCRETE)

Nominal Maximum Size of Total Air Content

Coarse Aggregate, mm (Inches) Percentage by Volume

10 mm (3/8 in).6 to 10 13 mm (1/2 in).5 to 9

20 mm (3/4 in).4 to 8 25 mm (1 in).3-1/2 to 6-1/2

40 mm (1 1/2 in).3 to 6

TABLE IV

AIR CONTENT OF LIGHTWEIGHT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

Nominal Maximum size of Total Air Content

Coarse Aggregate, mm’s (Inches) Percentage by Volume

Greater than 10 mm (3/8 in) 4 to 8

10 mm (3/8 in) or less 5 to 9

H. High early strength concrete, made with Type III ce ment or Type I

cement plus non-corrosive accelerator, shall have a 7-day compressive

strength equal to specified minimum 28-day compress ive strength for

concrete type specified made with standard Portland cement.

I. Lightweight structural concrete shall not weigh mor e than air-dry unit

weight shown. Air-dry unit weight determined on 150 mm by 300 mm (6

inch by 12 inch) test cylinders after seven days st andard moist curing

followed by 21 days drying at 23 degrees C ± 1.7 degrees C (73.4 ± 3

degrees Fahrenheit), and 50 (plus or minus 7) perce nt relative

humidity. Use wet unit weight of fresh concrete as basis of control in

field.

J. Concrete slabs placed at air temperatures below 10 degrees C (50 degrees

Fahrenheit) use non-corrosive, non-chloride acceler ator. Concrete

03 30 00 - 15




required to be air entrained use approved air entra ining admixture.

Pumped concrete, synthetic fiber concrete, architec tural concrete,

concrete required to be watertight, and concrete wi th a water/cement

ratio below 0.50 use high-range water-reducing admi xture

(superplasticizer).

K. Durability: Use air entrainment for exterior expose d concrete subjected

to freezing and thawing and other concrete shown or specified. For air

content requirements see Table III or Table IV.

L. Enforcing Strength Requirements: Test as specified in Section 01 45 29,

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES, during the progress of the work. Seven-day

tests may be used as indicators of 28-day strength. Average of any

three 28-day consecutive strength tests of laborato ry-cured specimens

representing each type of concrete shall be equal t o or greater than

specified strength. No single test shall be more th an 3.5 MPa (500 psi)

below specified strength. Interpret field test resu lts in accordance

with ACI 214. Should strengths shown by test specim ens fall below

required values, COR may require any one or any com bination of the

following corrective actions, at no additional cost to the Government:

1. Require changes in mix proportions by selecting one of the other

appropriate trial mixes or changing proportions, in cluding cement

content, of approved trial mix.

2. Require additional curing and protection.

3. If five consecutive tests fall below 95 percent of minimum values

given in Table I or if test results are so low as t o raise a

question as to the safety of the structure, COR may direct

Contractor to take cores from portions of the struc ture. Use

results from cores tested by the Contractor retaine d testing agency

to analyze structure.

4. If strength of core drilled specimens falls below 8 5 percent of

minimum value given in Table I, COR may order load tests, made by

Contractor retained testing agency, on portions of building so

affected. Load tests in accordance with ACI 318 and criteria of

acceptability of concrete under test as given there in.

5. Concrete work, judged inadequate by structural anal ysis, by results

of load test, or for any reason, shall be reinforce d with additional

construction or replaced, if directed by the COR.

03 30 00 - 16




2.4 BATCHING AND MIXING:

A. General: Concrete shall be "Ready-Mixed" and comply with ACI 318 and

ASTM C94, except as specified. Batch mixing at the site is permitted.

Mixing process and equipment must be approved by CO R. With each batch

of concrete, furnish certified delivery tickets lis ting information in

Paragraph 16.1 and 16.2 of ASTM C94. Maximum delive ry temperature of

concrete is 38 0C (100 degrees Fahrenheit). Minimum delivery temper ature

as follows:

Atmospheric Temperature Minimum Concrete Temperatur e

-1. degrees to 4.4 degrees C

(30 degrees to 40 degrees F)

15.6 degrees C (60 degrees F.)

-17 degrees C to -1.1 degrees C (0 degrees to 30 degrees F.)

21 degrees C (70 degrees F.)

1. Services of aggregate manufacturer's representative shall be

furnished during the design of trial mixes and as r equested by the

COR for consultation during batching, mixing, and p lacing operations

of lightweight structural concrete. Services will b e required until

field controls indicate that concrete of required q uality is being

furnished. Representative shall be thoroughly famil iar with the

structural lightweight aggregate, adjustment and co ntrol of mixes to

produce concrete of required quality. Representativ e shall assist

and advise COR.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK:

A. General: Design in accordance with ACI 347 is the r esponsibility of the

Contractor. The Contractor shall retain a registere d Professional

Engineer to design the formwork, shores, and reshor es.

1. Form boards and plywood forms may be reused for con tact surfaces of

exposed concrete only if thoroughly cleaned, patche d, and repaired

and COR approves their reuse.

2. Provide forms for concrete footings unless COR dete rmines forms are

not necessary.

3. Corrugated fiberboard forms: Place forms on a smoot h firm bed, set

tight, with no buckled cartons to prevent horizonta l displacement,

and in a dry condition when concrete is placed.

03 30 00 - 17




B. Treating and Wetting: Treat or wet contact forms as follows:

1. Coat plywood and board forms with non-staining form sealer. In hot

weather, cool forms by wetting with cool water just before concrete

is placed.

2. Clean and coat removable metal forms with light for m oil before

reinforcement is placed. In hot weather, cool metal forms by

thoroughly wetting with water just before placing c oncrete.

3. Use sealer on reused plywood forms as specified for new material.

C. Size and Spacing of Studs: Size and space studs, wa les and other

framing members for wall forms so as not to exceed safe working stress

of kind of lumber used nor to develop deflection gr eater than 1/270 of

free span of member.

D. Unlined Forms: Use plywood forms to obtain a smooth finish for concrete

surfaces. Tightly butt edges of sheets to prevent l eakage. Back up all

vertical joints solidly and nail edges of adjacent sheets to same stud

with 6d box nails spaced not over 150 mm (6 inches) apart.

E. Lined Forms: May be used in lieu of unlined plywood forms. Back up form

lining solidly with square edge board lumber secure ly nailed to studs

with all edges in close contact to prevent bulging of lining. No joints

in lining and backing may coincide. Nail abutted ed ges of sheets to

same backing board. Nail lining at not over 200 mm (8 inches) on center

along edges and with at least one nail to each squa re foot of surface

area; nails to be 3d blued shingle or similar nails with thin

flatheads.

G. Wall Form Ties: Locate wall form ties in symmetrica lly level horizontal

rows at each line of wales and in plumb vertical ti ers. Space ties to

maintain true, plumb surfaces. Provide one row of t ies within 150 mm (6

inches) above each construction joint. Space throug h-ties adjacent to

horizontal and vertical construction joints not ove r 450 mm (18 inches)

on center.

1. Tighten row of ties at bottom of form just before p lacing concrete

and, if necessary, during placing of concrete to pr event seepage of

concrete and to obtain a clean line. Ties to be ent irely removed

shall be loosened 24 hours after concrete is placed and shall be

pulled from least important face when removed.

2. Coat surfaces of all metal that is to be removed wi th paraffin, cup

grease or a suitable compound to facilitate removal .

03 30 00 - 18




H. Inserts, Sleeves, and Similar Items: Flashing regle ts, steel strips,

masonry ties, anchors, wood blocks, nailing strips, grounds, inserts,

wire hangers, sleeves, drains, guard angles, forms for floor hinge

boxes, inserts or bond blocks for elevator guide ra ils and supports,

and other items specified as furnished under this a nd other sections of

specifications and required to be in their final po sition at time

concrete is placed shall be properly located, accur ately positioned,

and built into construction, and maintained securel y in place.

1. Locate inserts or hanger wires for furred and suspe nded ceilings

only in bottom of concrete joists, or similar concr ete member of

overhead concrete joist construction.

2. Install sleeves, inserts and similar items for mech anical services

in accordance with drawings prepared specially for mechanical

services. Contractor is responsible for accuracy an d completeness

of drawings and shall coordinate requirements for m echanical

services and equipment.

3. Do not install sleeves in beams, joists or columns except where

shown or permitted by COR. Install sleeves in beams , joists, or

columns that are not shown, but are permitted by th e COR, and

require no structural changes, at no additional cos t to the

Government.

4. Minimum clear distance of embedded items such as co nduit and pipe is

at least three times diameter of conduit or pipe, e xcept at stub-ups

and other similar locations.

5. Provide recesses and blockouts in floor slabs for d oor closers and

other hardware as necessary in accordance with manu facturer's

instructions.

I. Construction Tolerances:

1. Set and maintain concrete formwork to assure erecti on of completed

work within tolerances specified and to accommodate installation of

other rough and finish materials. Accomplish remedi al work necessary

for correcting excessive tolerances. Erected work t hat exceeds

specified tolerance limits shall be remedied or rem oved and

replaced, at no additional cost to the Government.

2. Permissible surface irregularities for various clas ses of materials

are defined as "finishes" in specification sections covering

individual materials. They are to be distinguished from tolerances

03 30 00 - 19




specified which are applicable to surface irregular ities of

structural elements.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT:

A. General: Details of concrete reinforcement in accor dance with ACI 318

unless otherwise shown. Use epoxy-coated bars confo rming to ASTM A775

for all applications.

B. Placing: Place reinforcement conforming to CRSI DA4 , unless otherwise

shown.

1. Place reinforcing bars accurately and tie securely at intersections

and splices with 1.6 mm (16 gauge) black annealed w ire. Use epoxy-

coated tie wire with epoxy-coated reinforcing. Secu re reinforcing

bars against displacement during the placing of con crete by spacers,

chairs, or other similar supports. Portions of supp orts, spacers,

and chairs in contact with formwork shall be made o f plastic in

areas that will be exposed when building is occupie d. Type, number,

and spacing of supports conform to ACI 318. Where c oncrete slabs are

placed on ground, use concrete blocks or other non- corrodible

material of proper height, for support of reinforce ment. Use of

brick or stone supports will not be permitted.

2. Lap welded wire fabric at least 1 1/2 mesh panels p lus end extension

of wires not less than 300 mm (12 inches) in struct ural slabs. Lap

welded wire fabric at least 1/2 mesh panels plus en d extension of

wires not less than 150 mm (6 inches) in slabs on g rade.

3. Splice column steel at no points other than at foot ings and floor

levels unless otherwise shown.

C. Spacing: Minimum clear distances between parallel b ars, except in

columns and multiple layers of bars in beams shall be equal to nominal

diameter of bars. Minimum clear spacing is 25 mm (1 inch) or 1-1/3

times maximum size of coarse aggregate.

D. Splicing: Splices of reinforcement made only as req uired or shown or

specified. Accomplish splicing as follows:

1. Lap splices: Do not use lap splices for bars larger than Number 36

(Number 11). Minimum lengths of lap as shown.

2. Welded splices: Splicing by butt-welding of reinfor cement permitted

providing the weld develops in tension at least 125 percent of the

yield strength (fy) for the bars. Welding conform t o the

03 30 00 - 20




requirements of AWS D1.4. Welded reinforcing steel conform to the

chemical analysis requirements of AWS D1.4.

a. Submit test reports indicating the chemical analysi s to establish

weldability of reinforcing steel.

b. Submit a field quality control procedure to insure proper

inspection, materials and welding procedure for wel ded splices.

c. Department of Veterans Affairs retained testing age ncy shall test

a minimum of three splices, for compliance, locatio ns selected by

COR.

3. Mechanical Splices: Develop in tension and compress ion at least 125

percent of the yield strength (fy) of the bars. Str esses of

transition splices between two reinforcing bar size s based on area

of smaller bar. Provide mechanical splices at locat ions indicated.

Use approved exothermic, tapered threaded coupling, or swaged and

threaded sleeve. Exposed threads and swaging in the field not

permitted.

a. Initial qualification: In the presence of COR, make three test

mechanical splices of each bar size proposed to be spliced.

Department of Veterans Affairs retained testing lab oratory will

perform load test.

b. During installation: Furnish, at no additional cost to the

Government, one companion (sister) splice for every 50 splices

for load testing. Department of Veterans Affairs re tained testing

laboratory will perform the load test.

E. Bending: Bend bars cold, unless otherwise approved. Do not field bend

bars partially embedded in concrete, except when ap proved by COR.

F. Cleaning: Metal reinforcement, at time concrete is placed, shall be

free from loose flaky rust, mud, oil, or similar co atings that will

reduce bond. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair

coating according to ASTM D3963/D 3963 M.

G. Future Bonding: Protect exposed reinforcement bars intended for bonding

with future work by wrapping with felt and coating felt with a

bituminous compound unless otherwise shown.

3.3 VAPOR BARRIER:

A. Except where membrane waterproofing is required, in terior concrete slab

on grade shall be placed on a continuous vapor barr ier.

03 30 00 - 21




1. Place 100 mm (4 inches) of fine granular fill over the vapor barrier

to act as a blotter for concrete slab.

2. Vapor barrier joints lapped 150 mm (6 inches) and s ealed with

compatible waterproof pressure-sensitive tape.

3. Patch punctures and tears.

3.4 SLABS RECEIVING RESILIENT COVERING

A. Slab shall be allowed to cure for 6 weeks minimum p rior to placing

resilient covering. After curing, slab shall be tes ted by the

Contractor for moisture in accordance with ASTM D42 63 or ASTM F1869.

Moisture content shall be less than 3 pounds per 10 00 sf prior to

placing covering.

B. In lieu of curing for 6 weeks, Contractor has the o ption, at his own

cost, to utilize the Moisture Vapor Emissions & Alk alinity Control

Sealer as follows:

1. Sealer is applied on the day of the concrete pour o r as soon as

harsh weather permits, prior to any other chemical treatments for

concrete slabs either on grade, below grade or abov e grade receiving

resilient flooring, such as, sheet vinyl, vinyl com position tile,

rubber, wood flooring, epoxy coatings and overlays.

2. Manufacturer’s representative will be on the site t he day of

concrete pour to install or train its application a nd document. He

shall return on every application thereafter to ver ify that proper

procedures are followed.

a. Apply Sealer to concrete slabs as soon as final fin ishing

operations are complete and the concrete has harden ed

sufficiently to sustain floor traffic without damag e.

b. Spray apply Sealer at the rate of 20 m 2 (200 square feet) per

gallon. Lightly broom product evenly over the subst rate and

product has completely penetrated the surface.

c. If within two (2) hours after initial application a reas are

subjected to heavy rainfall and puddling occurs, re apply Sealer

product to these areas as soon as weather condition permits.

3.5 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS:

A. Unless otherwise shown, location of construction jo ints to limit

individual placement shall not exceed 24,000 mm (80 feet) in any

horizontal direction, except slabs on grade which s hall have

03 30 00 - 22




construction joints shown. Allow 48 hours to elapse between pouring

adjacent sections unless this requirement is waived by COR.

E. Install polyvinyl chloride or rubber water seals , as shown in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to for m continuous

watertight seal.

3.6 EXPANSION JOINTS AND CONTRACTION JOINTS:

A. Clean expansion joint surfaces before installing pr emolded filler and

placing adjacent concrete.

B. Install polyvinyl chloride or rubber water seals, a s shown in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to for m continuous

watertight seal.

C. Provide contraction (control) joints in floor slabs as indicated on the

contract drawings. Joints shall be either formed or saw cut, to the

indicated depth after the surface has been finished . Complete saw

joints within 4 to 12 hours after concrete placemen t. Protect joints

from intrusion of foreign matter.

3.7 PLACING CONCRETE:

A. Preparation:

1. Remove hardened concrete, wood chips, shavings and other debris from

forms.

2. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from interior

surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment.

3. Have forms and reinforcement inspected and approved by COR before

depositing concrete.

4. Provide runways for wheeling equipment to convey co ncrete to point

of deposit. Keep equipment on runways which are not supported by or

bear on reinforcement. Provide similar runways for protection of

vapor barrier on coarse fill.

B. Bonding: Before depositing new concrete on or again st concrete which

has been set, thoroughly roughen and clean existing surfaces of

laitance, foreign matter, and loose particles.

1. Preparing surface for applied topping:

a. Remove laitance, mortar, oil, grease, paint, or oth er foreign

material by sand blasting. Clean with vacuum type e quipment to

remove sand and other loose material.

b. Broom clean and keep base slab wet for at least fou r hours before

topping is applied.

03 30 00 - 23




c. Use a thin coat of one part Portland cement, 1.5 pa rts fine sand,

bonding admixture; and water at a 50: 50 ratio and mix to achieve

the consistency of thick paint. Apply to a damp bas e slab by

scrubbing with a stiff fiber brush. New concrete sh all be placed

while the bonding grout is still tacky.

C. Conveying Concrete: Convey concrete from mixer to f inal place of

deposit by a method which will prevent segregation. Method of conveying

concrete is subject to approval of COR.

D. Placing: For special requirements see Paragraphs, H OT WEATHER and COLD

WEATHER.

1. Do not place concrete when weather conditions preve nt proper

placement and consolidation, or when concrete has a ttained its

initial set, or has contained its water or cement c ontent more than

1 1/2 hours.

2. Deposit concrete in forms as near as practicable in its final

position. Prevent splashing of forms or reinforceme nt with concrete

in advance of placing concrete.

3. Do not drop concrete freely more than 3000 mm (10 f eet) for concrete

containing the high-range water-reducing admixture

(superplasticizer) or 1500 mm (5 feet) for conventi onal concrete.

Where greater drops are required, use a tremie or f lexible spout

(canvas elephant trunk), attached to a suitable hop per.

4. Discharge contents of tremies or flexible spouts in horizontal

layers not exceeding 500 mm (20 inches) in thicknes s, and space

tremies such as to provide a minimum of lateral mov ement of

concrete.

5. Continuously place concrete until an entire unit be tween

construction joints is placed. Rate and method of p lacing concrete

shall be such that no concrete between construction joints will be

deposited upon or against partly set concrete, afte r its initial set

has taken place, or after 45 minutes of elapsed tim e during concrete

placement.

6. On bottom of members with severe congestion of rein forcement,

deposit 25 mm (1 inch) layer of flowing concrete co ntaining the

specified high-range water-reducing admixture (supe rplasticizer).

Successive concrete lifts may be a continuation of this concrete or

concrete with a conventional slump.

03 30 00 - 24




E. Consolidation: Conform to ACI 309. Immediately afte r depositing, spade

concrete next to forms, work around reinforcement a nd into angles of

forms, tamp lightly by hand, and compact with mecha nical vibrator

applied directly into concrete at approximately 450 mm (18 inch)

intervals. Mechanical vibrator shall be power drive n, hand operated

type with minimum frequency of 5000 cycles per minu te having an

intensity sufficient to cause flow or settlement of concrete into

place. Vibrate concrete to produce thorough compact ion, complete

embedment of reinforcement and concrete of uniform and maximum density

without segregation of mix. Do not transport concre te in forms by

vibration.

1. Use of form vibration shall be approved only when c oncrete sections

are too thin or too inaccessible for use of interna l vibration.

2. Carry on vibration continuously with placing of con crete. Do not

insert vibrator into concrete that has begun to set .

3.8 HOT WEATHER:

Follow the recommendations of ACI 305 or as specifi ed to prevent

problems in the manufacturing, placing, and curing of concrete that can

adversely affect the properties and serviceability of the hardened

concrete. Methods proposed for cooling materials an d arrangements for

protecting concrete shall be made in advance of con crete placement and

approved by COR.

3.9 COLD WEATHER:

Follow the recommendations of ACI 306 or as specifi ed to prevent

freezing of concrete and to permit concrete to gain strength properly.

Use only the specified non-corrosive, non-chloride accelerator. Do not

use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not use

calcium chloride, thiocyantes or admixtures contain ing more than 0.05

percent chloride ions. Methods proposed for heating materials and

arrangements for protecting concrete shall be made in advance of

concrete placement and approved by COR.

3.10 PROTECTION AND CURING:

A. Conform to ACI 308: Initial curing shall immediatel y follow the

finishing operation. Protect exposed surfaces of co ncrete from

premature drying, wash by rain and running water, w ind, mechanical

injury, and excessively hot or cold temperatures. K eep concrete not

covered with membrane or other curing material cont inuously wet for at

03 30 00 - 25




least 7 days after placing, except wet curing perio d for high-early-

strength concrete shall be not less than 3 days. Ke ep wood forms

continuously wet to prevent moisture loss until for ms are removed. Cure

exposed concrete surfaces as described below. Other curing methods may

be used if approved by COR.

1. Liquid curing and sealing compounds: Apply by power -driven spray or

roller in accordance with the manufacturer’s instru ctions. Apply

immediately after finishing. Maximum coverage 10m 2/L (400 square feet

per gallon) on steel troweled surfaces and 7.5m 2/L (300 square feet

per gallon) on floated or broomed surfaces for the curing/sealing

compound.

2. Plastic sheets: Apply as soon as concrete has harde ned sufficiently

to prevent surface damage. Utilize widest practical width sheet and

overlap adjacent sheets 50 mm (2 inches). Tightly s eal joints with

tape.

3. Paper: Utilize widest practical width paper and ove rlap adjacent

sheets 50 mm (2 inches). Tightly seal joints with s and, wood planks,

pressure-sensitive tape, mastic or glue.

3.11 REMOVAL OF FORMS:

A. Remove in a manner to assure complete safety of str ucture after the

following conditions have been met.

1. Where structure as a whole is supported on shores, forms for beams

and girder sides, columns, and similar vertical str uctural members

may be removed after 24 hours, provided concrete ha s hardened

sufficiently to prevent surface damage and curing i s continued

without any lapse in time as specified for exposed surfaces.

2. Take particular care in removing forms of architect ural exposed

concrete to insure surfaces are not marred or gouge d, and that

corners and arises are true, sharp and unbroken.

B. Control Test: Use to determine if the concrete has attained sufficient

strength and curing to permit removal of supporting forms. Cylinders

required for control tests taken in accordance with ASTM C172, molded

in accordance with ASTM C31, and tested in accordan ce with ASTM C39.

Control cylinders cured and protected in the same m anner as the

structure they represent. Supporting forms or shori ng not removed until

strength of control test cylinders have attained at least 70 percent of

minimum 28-day compressive strength specified.Exerc ise care to assure

03 30 00 - 26




that newly unsupported portions of structure are no t subjected to heavy

construction or material loading.

C. Reshoring: Reshoring is required if superimposed lo ad plus dead load of

the floor exceeds the capacity of the floor at the time of loading.

Reshoring accomplished in accordance with ACI 347 a t no additional cost

to the Government.

3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE PREPARATION:

A. Metal Removal: Unnecessary metal items cut back flu sh with face of

concrete members.

B. Patching: Maintain curing and start patching as soo n as forms are

removed. Do not apply curing compounds to concrete surfaces requiring

patching until patching is completed. Use cement mo rtar for patching of

same composition as that used in concrete. Use whit e or gray Portland

cement as necessary to obtain finish color matching surrounding

concrete. Thoroughly clean areas to be patched. Cut out honeycombed or

otherwise defective areas to solid concrete to a de pth of not less than

25 mm (1 inch). Cut edge perpendicular to surface o f concrete. Saturate

with water area to be patched, and at least 150 mm (6 inches)

surrounding before placing patching mortar. Give ar ea to be patched a

brush coat of cement grout followed immediately by patching mortar.

Cement grout composed of one part Portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand,

bonding admixture, and water at a 50:50 ratio, mix to achieve

consistency of thick paint. Mix patching mortar app roximately 1 hour

before placing and remix occasionally during this p eriod without

addition of water. Compact mortar into place and sc reed slightly higher

than surrounding surface. After initial shrinkage h as occurred, finish

to match color and texture of adjoining surfaces. C ure patches as

specified for other concrete. Fill form tie holes w hich extend entirely

through walls from unexposed face by means of a pre ssure gun or other

suitable device to force mortar through wall. Wipe excess mortar off

exposed face with a cloth.

C. Upon removal of forms, clean vertical concrete surf ace that is to

receive bonded applied cementitious application wit h wire brushes or by

sand blasting to remove unset material, laitance, a nd loose particles

to expose aggregates to provide a clean, firm, gran ular surface for

bond of applied finish.

03 30 00 - 27




3.13 CONCRETE FINISHES:

A. Vertical and Overhead Surface Finishes:

1. Unfinished areas: Vertical and overhead concrete su rfaces exposed in

pipe basements, elevator and dumbwaiter shafts, pip e spaces, pipe

trenches, above suspended ceilings, manholes, and o ther unfinished

areas will not require additional finishing.

3. Interior and exterior exposed areas finished: Give a grout finish of

uniform color and smooth finish treated as follows:

a. After concrete has hardened and laitance, fins and burrs removed,

scrub concrete with wire brushes. Clean stained con crete surfaces

by use of a hone stone.

b. Apply grout composed of one part of Portland cement , one part

fine sand, smaller than a 600 µm (No. 30) sieve. Wo rk grout into

surface of concrete with cork floats or fiber brush es until all

pits, and honeycombs are filled.

c. After grout has hardened slightly, but while still plastic,

scrape grout off with a sponge rubber float and, ab out 1 hour

later, rub concrete vigorously with burlap to remov e any excess

grout remaining on surfaces.

d. In hot, dry weather use a fog spray to keep grout w et during

setting period. Complete finish of area in same day . Make limits

of finished areas at natural breaks in wall surface . Leave no

grout on concrete surface overnight.

4. Textured: Finish as specified. Maximum quantity of patched area 0.2

m2 (2 square feet) in each 93 m 2 (1000 square feet) of textured

surface.

B. Slab Finishes:

1. Monitoring and Adjustment: Provide continuous cycle of placement,

measurement, evaluation and adjustment of procedure s to produce

slabs within specified tolerances. Monitor elevatio ns of structural

steel in key locations before and after concrete pl acement to

establish typical deflection patterns for the struc tural steel.

Determine elevations of cast-in-place slab soffits prior to removal

of shores. Provide information to COR and floor con sultant for

evaluation and recommendations for subsequent place ments.

03 30 00 - 28




2. Set perimeter forms to serve as screed using either optical or laser

instruments. For slabs on grade, wet screeds may be used to

establish initial grade during strike-off, unless C OR determines

that the method is proving insufficient to meet req uired finish

tolerances and directs use of rigid screed guides. Where wet screeds

are allowed, they shall be placed using grade stake s set by optical

or laser instruments. Use rigid screed guides, as o pposed to wet

screeds, to control strike-off elevation for all ty pes of elevated

(non slab-on-grade) slabs. Divide bays into halves or thirds by hard

screeds. Adjust as necessary where monitoring of pr evious placements

indicates unshored structural steel deflections to other than a

level profile.

3. Place slabs monolithically. Once slab placement com mences, complete

finishing operations within same day. Slope finishe d slab to floor

drains where they occur, whether shown or not.

4. Use straightedges specifically made for screeding, such as hollow

magnesium straightedges or power strike-offs. Do no t use pieces of

dimensioned lumber. Strike off and screed slab to a true surface at

required elevations. Use optical or laser instrumen ts to check

concrete finished surface grade after strike-off. R epeat strike-off

as necessary. Complete screeding before any excess moisture or

bleeding water is present on surface. Do not sprink le dry cement on

the surface.

5. Immediately following screeding, and before any ble ed water appears,

use a 3000 mm (10 foot) wide highway straightedge i n a cutting and

filling operation to achieve surface flatness. Do n ot use bull

floats or darbys, except that darbying may be allow ed for narrow

slabs and restricted spaces.

6. Wait until water sheen disappears and surface stiff ens before

proceeding further. Do not perform subsequent opera tions until

concrete will sustain foot pressure with maximum of 6 mm (1/4 inch)

indentation.

7. Scratch Finish: Finish base slab to receive a bonde d applied

cementitious application as indicated above, except that bull floats

and darbys may be used. Thoroughly coarse wire broo m within two

hours after placing to roughen slab surface to insu re a permanent

bond between base slab and applied materials.

03 30 00 - 29




8. Float Finish: Slabs to receive unbonded toppings, s teel trowel

finish, fill, mortar setting beds, or a built-up ro of, and ramps,

stair treads, platforms (interior and exterior), an d equipment pads

shall be floated to a smooth, dense uniform, sandy textured finish.

During floating, while surface is still soft, check surface for

flatness using a 3000 mm (10 foot) highway straight edge. Correct

high spots by cutting down and correct low spots by filling in with

material of same composition as floor finish. Remov e any surface

projections and re-float to a uniform texture.

9. Steel Trowel Finish: Concrete surfaces to receive r esilient floor

covering or carpet, monolithic floor slabs to be ex posed to view in

finished work, future floor roof slabs, applied top pings, and other

interior surfaces for which no other finish is indi cated. Steel

trowel immediately following floating. During final troweling, tilt

steel trowel at a slight angle and exert heavy pres sure to compact

cement paste and form a dense, smooth surface. Fini shed surface

shall be smooth, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and

appearance.

10. Broom Finish: Finish exterior slabs, ramps, and sta ir treads with a

bristle brush moistened with clear water after surf aces have been

floated. Brush in a direction transverse to main tr affic. Match

texture approved by COR from sample panel.

11. Finished slab flatness (FF) and levelness (FL) valu es comply with

the following minimum requirements:

b. Areas that will be exposed:

1) Slab on grade:

a) Specified overall value FF 36/FL 20

b) Minimum local value FF 24/FL 15

2) Level suspended slabs (shored until after testing) and topping

slabs

a) Specified overall value FF 30/FL 20

b) Minimum local value FF 24/FL 15

3) Unshored suspended slabs:

a) Specified overall value FF 30

b) Minimum local value FF 24

03 30 00 - 30




4) Level tolerance such that 80 percent of all points fall within

a 20 mm (3/4 inch) envelope +10 mm, -10 mm (+3/8 in ch, -3/8

inch) from the design elevation.

c. "Specified overall value" is based on the composite of all

measured values in a placement derived in accordanc e with ASTM

E1155.

d. "Minimum local value" (MLV) describes the flatness or levelness

below which repair or replacement is required. MLV is based on

the results of an individual placement and applies to a minimum

local area. Minimum local area boundaries may not c ross a

construction joint or expansion joint. A minimum lo cal area will

be bounded by construction and/or control joints, o r by column

lines and/or half-column lines, whichever is smalle r.

12. Measurements

a. Contractor retained testing laboratory will take me asurements as

directed by COR, to verify compliance with FF, FL, and other

finish requirements. Measurements will occur within 72 hours

after completion of concrete placement (weekends an d holidays

excluded). Make measurements before shores or forms are removed

to insure the "as-built" levelness is accurately as sessed.

Profile data for above characteristics may be colle cted using a

laser level or any Type II apparatus (ASTM E1155, " profileograph"

or "dipstick"). Contractor's surveyor shall establi sh reference

elevations to be used by Department of Veterans Aff airs retained

testing laboratory.

b. Contractor not experienced in using FF and FL crite ria is

encouraged to retain the services of a floor consul tant to assist

with recommendations concerning adjustments to slab thicknesses,

finishing techniques, and procedures on measurement s of the

finish as it progresses in order to achieve the spe cific flatness

and levelness numbers.

13. Acceptance/ Rejection:

a. If individual slab section measures less than eithe r of specified

minimum local F F/F L numbers, that section shall be rejected and

remedial measures shall be required. Sectional boun daries may be

set at construction and contraction (control) joint s, and not

smaller than one-half bay.

03 30 00 - 31




b. If composite value of entire slab installation, com bination of

all local results, measures less than either of spe cified overall

FF/F L numbers, then whole slab shall be rejected and reme dial

measures shall be required.

14. Remedial Measures for Rejected Slabs: Correct rejec ted slab areas by

grinding, planing, surface repair with underlayment compound or

repair topping, retopping, or removal and replaceme nt of entire

rejected slab areas, as directed by COR, until a sl ab finish

constructed within specified tolerances is accepted .

- - - E N D - - -




05 50 00- 1

SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies items and assemblies fabrica ted from structural

steel shapes and other materials as shown and speci fied.

B. Items specified.

1. Support for Wall and Ceiling Mounted Items: (SD0550 00-01,

SD055000-02, SD102113-01, SD102600-01, SD123100-01 &

SD123100-02)

2. Frames

4. Covers and Frames for Pits and Trenches.

5. Gratings

11. Ladders

12. Railings

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Prime and finish painting: Section 09 91 00, PAINTI NG.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


DATA, AND SAMPLES.

B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

Grating, each type Floor plate

Trap door Wheel guards

Ceiling hatch Sidewalk Access door

Manhole Covers Safety nosing

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Each item specified, showing complete detail, locat ion in the

project, material and size of components, method of joining various

components and assemblies, finish, and location, si ze and type of

anchors.

2. Mark items requiring field assembly for erection id entification and

furnish erection drawings and instructions.

3. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as requ ired.

D. Manufacturer's Certificates:

1. Anodized finish as specified.




05 50 00- 2

2. Live load designs as specified.

E. Design Calculations for specified live loads includ ing dead loads.

F. Furnish setting drawings and instructions for insta llation of anchors

to be preset into concrete and masonry work, and fo r the positioning of

items having anchors to be built into concrete or m asonry construction.


A. Each manufactured product shall meet, as a minimum, the requirements

specified, and shall be a standard commercial produ ct of a manufacturer

regularly presently manufacturing items of type spe cified.

B. Each product type shall be the same and be made by the same

manufacturer.

C. Assembled product to the greatest extent possible b efore delivery to

the site.

D. Include additional features, which are not specific ally prohibited by

this specification, but which are a part of the man ufacturer's standard

commercial product.



extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the


B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

B18.6.1-97..............Wood Screws

B18.2.2-87(R2005).......Square and Hex Nuts


A36/A36M-12.............Structural Steel

A47-99(R2009)...........Malleable Iron Castings

A48-03(R2012)...........Gray Iron Castings

A53-12..................Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated

Welded and Seamless

A123-12.................Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) C oatings on Iron and

Steel Products

A240/A240M-14...........Standard Specification for Chromium and

Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet

and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General

Applications.

A269-10.................Seamless and Welded Austeni tic Stainless Steel

Tubing for General Service

05 50 00- 3




A307-12.................Carbon Steel Bolts and Stud s, 60,000 PSI

Tensile Strength

A391/A391M-07(R2012)....Grade 80 Alloy Steel Chain A786/A786M-

09...........Rolled Steel Floor Plate

B221-13.................Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes

B456-11.................Electrodeposited Coatings o f Copper Plus Nickel

Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium B632-

08.................Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plat e

C1107-13................Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cem ent Grout

(Nonshrink)

D3656-13................Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from

Vinyl-Coated Glass Yarns F436-

11.................Hardened Steel Washers

F468-06(R2012)..........Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap S crews, Socket Head

Cap Screws and Studs for General Use

F593-13.................Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and

Studs

F1667-11................Driven Fasteners: Nails, Sp ikes and Staples

D. American Welding Society (AWS):

D1.1-10.................Structural Welding Code Ste el

D1.2-08.................Structural Welding Code Alu minum

D1.3-08.................Structural Welding Code She et Steel

E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufac turers (NAAMM)

AMP 521-01..............Pipe Railing Manual

AMP 500-06..............Metal Finishes Manual

MBG 531-09..............Metal Bar Grating Manual

MBG 532-09..............Heavy Duty Metal Bar Gratin g Manual

F. Structural Steel Painting Council (SSPC)/Society of Protective

Coatings:

SP 1-04.................No. 1, Solvent Cleaning

SP 2-04.................No. 2, Hand Tool Cleaning

SP 3-04.................No. 3, Power Tool Cleaning

G. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec):

RR-T-650E...............Treads, Metallic and Nonmet allic, Nonskid

05 50 00- 4




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. In addition to the dead loads, design fabrications to support the

following live loads unless otherwise specified.

B. Ladders and Rungs: 120 kg (250 pounds) at any point .

C. Railings and Handrails: 900 N (200 pounds) in any d irection at any

point.

D. Gratings: 500 kg/m 2 (100 pounds per square foot).

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36.

B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240, Type 302 or 304.

C. Aluminum, Extruded: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5 unless otherwise

specified. For structural shapes use alloy 6061-T6 and alloy 6061-

T4511.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53.

1. Galvanized for exterior locations.

2. Type S, Grade A unless specified otherwise.

3. NPS (inside diameter) as shown.

F. Primer Paint: As specified in Section 09 91 00, PAI NTING.

G. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, type 302 or 304.

H. Modular Channel Units:

1. Factory fabricated, channel shaped, cold formed she et steel shapes,

complete with fittings bolts and nuts required for assembly.

2. Form channel within turned pyramid shaped clamping ridges on each

side.

3. Provide case hardened steel nuts with serrated groo ves in the top

edges designed to be inserted in the channel at any point and be

given a quarter turn so as to engage the channel cl amping ridges.

Provide each nut with a spring designed to hold the nut in place.

4. Factory finish channels and parts with oven baked p rimer when

exposed to view. Channels fabricated of ASTM A525, G90 galvanized

steel may have primer omitted in concealed location s. Finish screws

and nuts with zinc coating.

5. Fabricate snap-in closure plates to fit and close e xposed channel

openings of not more than 0.3 mm (0.0125 inch) thic k stainless

steel.

I. Grout: ASTM C1107, pourable type.

05 50 00- 5




J. Insect Screening: ASTM D3656.

2.3 HARDWARE

A. Rough Hardware:

1. Furnish rough hardware with a standard plating, app lied after

punching, forming and assembly of parts; galvanized , cadmium plated,

or zinc-coated by electro-galvanizing process. Galv anized G-90 where

specified.

2. Use G90 galvanized coating on ferrous metal for ext erior work unless

non-ferrous metal or stainless is used.

B. Fasteners:

1. Bolts with Nuts:

a. ASME B18.2.2.

b. ASTM A307 for 415 MPa (60,000 psi) tensile strength bolts.

c. ASTM F468 for nonferrous bolts.

d. ASTM F593 for stainless steel.

2. Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

3. Washers: ASTM F436, type to suit material and ancho rage.

4. Nails: ASTM F1667, Type I, style 6 or 14 for finish work.

2.4 FABRICATION GENERAL

A. Material

1. Use material as specified. Use material of commerci al quality and

suitable for intended purpose for material that is not named or its

standard of quality not specified.

2. Use material free of defects which could affect the appearance or

service ability of the finished product.

B. Size:

1. Size and thickness of members as shown.

2. When size and thickness is not specified or shown f or an individual

part, use size and thickness not less than that use d for the same

component on similar standard commercial items or i n accordance with

established shop methods.

C. Connections

1. Except as otherwise specified, connections may be m ade by welding,

riveting or bolting.

2. Field riveting will not be approved.

3. Design size, number and placement of fasteners, to develop a joint

strength of not less than the design value.

05 50 00- 6




4. Holes, for rivets and bolts: Accurately punched or drilled and burrs

removed.

5. Size and shape welds to develop the full design str ength of the

parts connected by welds and to transmit imposed st resses without

permanent deformation or failure when subject to se rvice loadings.

6. Use Rivets and bolts of material selected to preven t corrosion

(electrolysis) at bimetallic contacts. Plated or co ated material

will not be approved.

7. Use stainless steel connectors for removable member s machine screws

or bolts.

D. Fasteners and Anchors

1. Use methods for fastening or anchoring metal fabric ations to

building construction as shown or specified.

2. Where fasteners and anchors are not shown, design t he type, size,

location and spacing to resist the loads imposed wi thout deformation

of the members or causing failure of the anchor or fastener, and

suit the sequence of installation.

3. Use material and finish of the fasteners compatible with the kinds

of materials which are fastened together and their location in the

finished work.

4. Fasteners for securing metal fabrications to new co nstruction only,

may be by use of threaded or wedge type inserts or by anchors for

welding to the metal fabrication for installation b efore the

concrete is placed or as masonry is laid.

5. Fasteners for securing metal fabrication to existin g construction or

new construction may be expansion bolts, toggle bol ts, power

actuated drive pins, welding, self drilling and tap ping screws or

bolts.

E. Workmanship

1. General:

a. Fabricate items to design shown.

b. Furnish members in longest lengths commercially ava ilable within

the limits shown and specified.

c. Fabricate straight, true, free from warp and twist, and where

applicable square and in same plane.

d. Provide holes, sinkages and reinforcement shown and required for

fasteners and anchorage items.

05 50 00- 7




e. Provide openings, cut-outs, and tapped holes for at tachment and

clearances required for work of other trades.

f. Prepare members for the installation and fitting of hardware.

g. Cut openings in gratings and floor plates for the p assage of

ducts, sumps, pipes, conduits and similar items. Pr ovide

reinforcement to support cut edges.

h. Fabricate surfaces and edges free from sharp edges, burrs and

projections which may cause injury.

2. Welding:

a. Weld in accordance with AWS.

b. Welds shall show good fusion, be free from cracks a nd porosity

and accomplish secure and rigid joints in proper al ignment.

c. Where exposed in the finished work, continuous weld for the full

length of the members joined and have depressed are as filled and

protruding welds finished smooth and flush with adj acent

surfaces.

d. Finish welded joints to match finish of adjacent su rface.

3. Joining:

a. Miter or butt members at corners.

b. Where frames members are butted at corners, cut leg of frame

member perpendicular to surface, as required for cl earance.

4. Anchors:

a. Where metal fabrications are shown to be preset in concrete, weld

32 x 3 mm (1-1/4 by 1/8 inch) steel strap anchors, 150 mm (6

inches) long with 25 mm (one inch) hooked end, to b ack of member

at 600 mm (2 feet) on center, unless otherwise show n.

b. Where metal fabrications are shown to be built into masonry use

32 x 3 mm (1-1/4 by 1/8 inch) steel strap anchors, 250 mm (10

inches) long with 50 mm (2 inch) hooked end, welded to back of

member at 600 mm (2 feet) on center, unless otherwi se shown.

5. Cutting and Fitting:

a. Accurately cut, machine and fit joints, corners, co pes, and

miters.

b. Fit removable members to be easily removed.

c. Design and construct field connections in the most practical

place for appearance and ease of installation.

d. Fit pieces together as required.

05 50 00- 8




e. Fabricate connections for ease of assembly and disa ssembly

without use of special tools.

f. Joints firm when assembled.

g. Conceal joining, fitting and welding on exposed wor k as far as

practical.

h. Do not show rivets and screws prominently on the ex posed face.

i. The fit of components and the alignment of holes sh all eliminate

the need to modify component or to use exceptional force in the

assembly of item and eliminate the need to use othe r than common

tools.

F. Finish:

1. Finish exposed surfaces in accordance with NAAMM AM P 500 Metal

Finishes Manual.

3. Steel and Iron: NAAMM AMP 504.

a. Zinc coated (Galvanized): ASTM A123, G90 unless not ed otherwise.

b. Surfaces exposed in the finished work:

1) Finish smooth rough surfaces and remove projections .

2) Fill holes, dents and similar voids and depressions with epoxy

type patching compound.

c. Shop Prime Painting:

1) Surfaces of Ferrous metal:

a) Items not specified to have other coatings.

b) Galvanized surfaces specified to have prime paint.

c) Remove all loose mill scale, rust, and paint, by ha nd or

power tool cleaning as defined in SSPC-SP2 and SP3.

d) Clean of oil, grease, soil and other detrimental ma tter by

use of solvents or cleaning compounds as defined in SSPC-

SP1.

e) After cleaning and finishing apply one coat of prim er as

specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

2) Non ferrous metals: Comply with MAAMM-500 series.

4. Stainless Steel: NAAMM AMP-504 Finish No. 4.

G. Protection:

1. Insulate aluminum surfaces that will come in contac t with concrete,

masonry, plaster, or metals other than stainless st eel, zinc or

white bronze by giving a coat of heavy-bodied alkal i resisting

bituminous paint or other approved paint in shop.

05 50 00- 9




2. Spot prime all abraded and damaged areas of zinc co ating which

expose the bare metal, using zinc rich paint on hot -dip zinc coat

items and zinc dust primer on all other zinc coated items.

2.5 SUPPORTS

A. General:

1. Fabricate ASTM A36 structural steel shapes as shown .

2. Use clip angles or make provisions for welding hang ers and braces to

overhead construction.

3. Field connections may be welded or bolted.

C. For Wall Mounted Items:

1. For items supported by metal stud partitions.

2. Steel strip or hat channel minimum of 1.5 mm (0.059 8 inch) thick.

3. Steel strip minimum of 150 mm (6 inches) wide, leng th extending one

stud space beyond end of item supported.

4. Steel hat channels where shown. Flange cut and flat ted for anchorage

to stud.

5. Structural steel tube or channel for grab bar at wa ter closets floor

to structure above with clip angles or end plates f ormed for

anchors.

6. Use steel angles for thru wall counters. Drill angl e for fasteners

2.6 COVERS AND FRAMES FOR PITS AND TRENCHES

A. Furnish steam pit entrance cover and frame as shown . Frame shall be

installed as shown on drawings.

B. Cover: 1/4“ thick aluminum diamond plate, 300 psf l ive load rating,

mill finish, lifting mechanism with reinforced comp osite tubes and

electro coated compression springs, automatic hold open arm, forged

aluminum hinges with stainless steel pins, neoprene gasketed standard

slam lock with keyed cylinder lock and underside re lease knob.

C. Frame: 1/4” thick extruded aluminum channel with co ntinuous concrete

anchor, with continuous EPDM debris gasket and 1-1/ 2” aluminum coupling

for drain.

D. Warranty: 10-year material.

2.7 GRATINGS

A. Fabricate gratings to support live loads specified and a concentrated

load as specified.

B. Provide clearance at all sides to permit easy remov al of grating.

05 50 00- 10




C. Make cutouts in gratings with 6 mm (1/4 inch) minim um to 25 mm (one

inch) maximum clearance for penetrations or passage of pipes and ducts.

Edge band cutouts.

D. Fabricate in sections not to exceed 2.3 m 2 (25 square feet) in area and

90 kg (200 pounds) in weight.

E. Fabricate sections of grating with end-banding bars .

F. Fabricate angle frames and supports, including anch orage as shown.

1. Fabricate intermediate supporting members from "T's " or angles.

2. Locate intermediate supports to support grating sec tion edges.

3. Fabricate frame to finish flush with top of grating .

4. Locate anchors at ends and not over 600 mm (24 inch es) o.c.

5. Butt or miter, and weld angle frame at corners.

G. Steel Bar Gratings:

1. Fabricate grating using steel bars, frames, support s and other

members shown in accordance with Metal Bar Grating Manual.

2. Galvanize steel members after fabrication in accord ance with ASTM

A123, G-90 for exterior gratings, gratings in concr ete floors, and

interior grating where specified.

2.8 LADDERS

A. Steel Ladders:

1. Fixed-rail type with steel rungs shouldered and hea ded into and

welded to rails.

2. Fabricate angle brackets of 50 mm (2 inch) wide by 13 mm (1/2 inch)

thick steel; brackets spaced maximum of 1200 mm (4 feet) apart and

of length to hold ladder 175 mm (7 inches) from wal l to center of

rungs. Provide turned ends or clips for anchoring.

3. Provide holes for anchoring with expansion bolts th rough turned ends

and brackets.

4. Where shown, fabricate side rails curved, twisted a nd formed into a

gooseneck.

5. Galvanize exterior ladders after fabrication, ASTM A123, G-90.

C. Ladder Rungs:

1. Fabricate from 25 mm (one inch) diameter steel bars .

2. Fabricate so that rungs will extend at least 100 mm (4 inches) into

wall with ends turned 50 mm (2 inches), project out from wall 175 mm

(7 inches), be 400 mm (16 inches) wide and be desig ned so that foot

cannot slide off end.

05 50 00- 11




3. Galvanized after fabrication, ASTM A123, G-90 rungs for exterior use

and for access to pits.

D. Safety Post

1. Provide galvanized assembly with release rod and pu ll up loop.

2. Post shall be fabricated of steel.

3. Post shall not have twist type locking mechanism.

2.9 RAILINGS

A. In addition to the dead load design railing assembl y to support live

load specified.

B. Fabrication General:

1. Provide continuous welded joints, dressed smooth an d flush.

2. Standard flush fittings, designed to be welded, may be used.

3. Exposed threads will not be approved.

4. Form handrail brackets to size and design shown.

5. Exterior Post Anchors.

a. Fabricate tube or pipe sleeves with closed ends or plates as

shown.

b. Where inserts interfere with reinforcing bars, prov ide flanged

fittings welded or threaded to posts for securing t o concrete

with expansion bolts.

c. Provide heavy pattern sliding flange base plate wit h set screws

at base of pipe or tube posts.

6. Interior Post Anchors:

a. Provide flanged fittings for securing fixed posts t o floor with

expansion bolts, unless shown otherwise.

b. Weld or thread flanged fitting to posts at base.

d. Provide sliding flange base plate on posts secur ed with set

screws.

D. Steel Pipe Railings:

1. Fabricate of steel pipe with welded joints.

2. Number and space of rails as shown.

3. Space posts for railings not over 1800 mm (6 feet) on centers

between end posts.

4. Form handrail brackets from malleable iron.

5. Fabricate removable sections with posts at end of s ection.

7. Opening Guard Rails:

05 50 00- 12




a. Fabricate rails with flanged fitting at each end to fit between

wall opening jambs.

b. Design flange fittings for fastening with machine s crews to steel

plate anchored to jambs.

c. Fabricate rails for floor openings for anchorage in sleeves.

9. Chains:

a. Chains: ASTM A391, Grade 63, straight link style, n ormal size

chain bar 8 mm (5/16 inch) diameter, eight links pe r 25 mm (foot)

and with boat type snap hook on one end, and throug h type eye

bolt on other end.

b. Fabricate eye bolt for attaching chain to pipe post s, size not

less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter.

c. Fabricate anchor at walls, for engagement of snap h ook of either

a 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter eye bolt or punched angl e.

d. Galvanize chain and bolts after fabrication.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set work accurately, in alignment and where shown, plumb, level, free

of rack and twist, and set parallel or perpendicula r as required to

line and plane of surface.

B. Items set into concrete or masonry.

1. Provide temporary bracing for such items until conc rete or masonry

is set.

2. Place in accordance with setting drawings and instr uctions.

3. Build strap anchors, into masonry as work progresse s.

C. Set frames of gratings, covers, corner guards, trap doors and similar

items flush with finish floor or wall surface and, where applicable,

flush with side of opening.

D. Field weld in accordance with AWS.

1. Design and finish as specified for shop welding.

2. Use continuous weld unless specified otherwise.

E. Install anchoring devices and fasteners as shown an d as necessary for

securing metal fabrications to building constructio n as specified.

Power actuated drive pins may be used except for re movable items and

where members would be deformed or substrate damage d by their use.

05 50 00- 13




F. Spot prime all abraded and damaged areas of zinc co ating as specified

and all abraded and damaged areas of shop prime coa t with same kind of

paint used for shop priming.

G. Isolate aluminum from dissimilar metals and from co ntact with concrete

and masonry materials as required to prevent electr olysis and

corrosion.

H. Secure escutcheon plate with set screw.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS

A. Anchorage to structure.

1. Secure angles or channels and clips to overhead str uctural steel by

continuous welding unless bolting is shown.

2. Secure supports to concrete inserts by bolting or c ontinuous welding

as shown.

3. Secure supports to mid height of concrete beams whe n inserts do not

exist with expansion bolts and to slabs, with expan sion bolts.

unless shown otherwise.

4. Secure steel plate or hat channels to studs as deta iled.

C. Supports for Wall Mounted items:

1. Locate center of support at anchorage point of supp orted item.

2. Locate support at top and bottom of wall hung cabin ets.

3. Locate support at top of floor cabinets and shelvin g installed

against walls.

4. Locate supports where required for items shown.

H. Supports for Trapeze Bars:

1. Secure plates to overhead construction with fastene rs as shown.

2. Secure angle brace assembly to overhead constructio n with fasteners

as shown and bolt plate to braces.

3. Fit modular channel unit flush with finish ceiling, and secure to

plate with modular channel unit manufacturer's stan dard fittings

through steel shims or spreaders as shown.

a. Install closure plates in channel between eye bolts .

b. Install eyebolts in channel.

3.3 COVERS AND FRAMES FOR PITS AND TRENCHES

A. Set frame and cover flush with finish floor.

B. Secure plates to frame with flat head countersunk s crews.

C. Set gratings loose in drainage trenches or over pit s unless shown

anchored.

05 50 00- 14




D. Coating of aluminum steam pit frames: Coat aluminum frames that come

into contact with concrete with bitumastic or epoxy ocating. Where

frame coating has been damaged or is missing recoat before pouring

concrete.

3.4 GRATINGS

A. Set grating flush with finish floor; top of curb, o r areaway wall. Set

frame so that horizontal leg of angle frame is flus h with face of wall

except when frame is installed on face of wall.

B. Set frame in formwork before concrete is placed.

3.5 LADDERS

A. Anchor ladders to walls and floors with expansion b olts through turned

lugs or angle clips or brackets.

C. Ladder Rungs:

1. Set ladder rungs into formwork before concrete is p laced.

2. Set step portion of rung 150 mm (6 inches) from wal l.

3. Space rungs approximately 300 mm (12 inches) on cen ters.

4. Where only one rung is required, locate it 400 mm ( 16 inches) above

the floor.

3.6 RAILINGS

A. Steel Posts:

1. Secure fixed posts to concrete with expansion bolts through flanged

fittings except where sleeves are shown with pourab le grout.

2. Install sleeves in concrete formwork.

3. Set post in sleeve and pour grout to surface. Apply beveled bead of

urethane sealant at perimeter of post or under flan ge fitting as

specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS on ex terior posts.

4. Secure removable posts to concrete with either mach ine screws

through flanged fittings which are secured to inver ted flanges

embedded in and set flush with finished floor, or s et posts in close

fitting pipe sleeves without grout.

5. Secure sliding flanged fittings to posts at base wi th set screws.

6. Secure fixed flanged fittings to concrete with expa nsion bolts. 7. Secure posts to steel with welds.

C. Anchor to Walls:

1. Anchor rails to concrete or solid masonry with mach ine screws

through flanged fitting to steel plate.

a. Anchor steel plate to concrete or solid masonry wit h expansion

bolts.

05 50 00- 15




b. Anchor steel plate to hollow masonry with toggle bo lts.

2. Anchor flanged fitting with toggle bolt to steel su pport in frame

walls.

F. Chains:

1. Eye bolt chains to pipe posts.

3.7 CLEAN AND ADJUSTING

A. Adjust movable parts including hardware to operate as designed without

binding or deformation of the members centered in t he opening or frame

and, where applicable, contact surfaces fit tight a nd even without

forcing or warping the components.

B. Clean after installation exposed prefinished and pl ated items and items

fabricated from stainless steel, aluminum and coppe r alloys, as

recommended by the metal manufacture and protected from damage until

completion of the project.

- - - E N D - - -




07 13 52 - 1

SECTION 07 13 52 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Modified bituminous sheet material used for exterio r below grade

waterproofing and split slab waterproofing.


A. Comply with references to extent specified in this section.

B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):

1. UU-B-790A Notice 2- Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber : (Kraft,

Waterproofed, Water Repellent, and Fire Resistant).

C. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. D41/D41M-11 - Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampp roofing and

Waterproofing.

D. American Hardboard Association (AHA):

1. A135.4-2012 - Basic Hardboard. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Conduct preinstallation meeting at project site min imum 30 days before

beginning Work of this section.

1. Required Participants:

a. Contracting Officer's Representative.

b. Architect/Engineer.

c. Contractor.

d. Installer.

e. Other installers responsible for adjacent and inter secting work,

including substrate and flashing installers.

2. Meeting Agenda: Distribute agenda to participants m inimum 3 days

before meeting.

a. Installation schedule.

b. Installation sequence.

c. Preparatory work.

d. Protection before, during, and after installation.

e. Installation.

f. Terminations.

g. Transitions and connections to other work.




07 13 52 - 2

h. Inspecting and testing.

i. Other items affecting successful completion.

3. Document and distribute meeting minutes to particip ants to record

decisions affecting installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Procedures: Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWIN GS, PRODUCT DATA,

AND SAMPLES.

B. Submittal Drawings:

1. Show size, configuration, and installation details.

C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Description of each product.

2. Installation instructions.

3. Warranty.

D. Samples:

1. Waterproofing and Flashing Sheet: 200 mm (8 inch) s quare, each type

and color.

2. Insulation: 200 mm (8 inch) square.

E. Test reports: Certify products comply with specific ations.

F. Certificates: Certify products comply with specific ations.

G. Qualifications: Substantiate qualifications comply with specifications.

1. Installer with project experience list. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Regularly installs specified products.

2. Installed specified products with satisfactory serv ice on five

similar installations for minimum five years.

a. Project Experience List: Provide contact names and addresses for

completed projects. 1.6 DELIVERY

A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original sealed packaging.

B. Mark packaging, legibly. Indicate manufacturer's na me or brand, type,

color, production run number, and manufacture date.

C. Before installation, return or dispose of products within distorted,

damaged, or opened packaging.

1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store products indoors in dry, weathertight conditi oned facility.




07 13 52 - 3

B. Protect products from damage during handling and co nstruction

operations.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environment:

1. Product Temperature: Minimum 4 degrees C (40 degree s F) for minimum

48 hours before installation.

2. Weather Limitations: Install waterproofing only dur ing dry current

and forecasted weather conditions.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Construction Warranty: FAR clause 52.246-21, "Warra nty of

Construction."

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Warrant waterproofing syst em against material

and manufacturing defects and agree to repair any l eak caused by a

defect in the waterproofing system materials or wor kmanship of the

installer.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Waterproofing System: Modified bituminous sheet mat erial for exterior

below grade and split slab waterproofing.

2.2 PRODUCTS - GENERAL

A. Provide each product from one manufacturer. 2.3 BITUMINOUS SHEET (WALLS and ROOF)

A. Cold applied waterproofing membrane composed primar ily of modified

bituminous material prefabricated in sheet form des igned for below

grade exterior and split slab waterproofing. Sheet reinforced with

fibers at manufacturer's option.

B. Thickness: 1.5 mm (60 mils), plus or minus 0.13 mm (5 mils), and bonded

to 0.1 mm (4 mil) thick plastic sheet, with joints lapped minimum 6”.

C. Provide release sheet to prevent bonding of bitumin ous sheet to itself.

D. Tensile strength (ASTM D412): 250 psi min.

E. Ultimate elongation (ASTM D412): 300% min.

F. Brittleness Temperature (ASTM D746): 25 deg. F. (32 deg. C.).

G. Hydrostatic Head Resistance: 150 feet min.

07 13 52 - 4




H. Water Absorption (ASTM D570): Not more than 0.5% we ight gain for 48

hours of immersion at 70 deg. F.

2.4 BLINDSIDE MEMBRANE (UNDERSLAB)

A. Material: Composite sheet, HDPE film, adhesive and water resistant protective coating.

B. Elongation: 300%, ASTM D 412

C. Peel Adhesion to Concrete:5 lb./in. ASTM D903

D. Tensile Strength: 1200 lbs./in. ASTM D412

E. Hydrostatic Head Resistance: 230 feet min.

F. Accessories: Primer, mastic, joint sealers, Joint S eam Tape, cant straps and protection boards as recommended by manu facturers.

2.5 PROTECTION MATERIAL

A. Drain board: 0.4” High impact polystyrene, non-wove n geotextile fabric, 12 GPM flow rate. Apply service tap at joints 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick.

2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Patching Compound: Factory-prepared, non-shrinking, fast-setting,

cementitious adhesive compound containing no ferrou s metal or oxide.

B. Primer: ASTM D41/D41M.

1. Rubber based solvent (Oil Based). Suitable for appl ications to green

concrete. Roll or brush, and other accessories as r ecommended by

product manufacturer.

C. Joint sealers.

1. Liquid elastomeric, cold applied, towel applied.

2. Trowel, paddle mixer and other accessories as recom mend by product

manufacturer.

D. Cant strips.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine and verify substrate suitability for produc t installation.

1. Concrete surfaces cured minimum time recommended by waterproofing

manufacturer.

2. Substrate to be dry as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

B. Protect existing construction and completed work fr om damage.

C. Correct substrate deficiencies.

1. Fill voids, joints, and cracks with patching compou nd.

07 13 52 - 5




D. Clean substrates. Remove contaminants capable of pr eventing full

adhesion.

E. Priming:

1. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces.

2. Application method, amount of primer and condition or primer before

installation of bituminous sheet as recommended by primer

manufacturer.

3. Reprime when required according to manufacturer's i nstructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install products according to manufacturer's instru ctions and approved

submittal drawings.

1. When manufacturer's instructions deviate from speci fications, submit

proposed resolution for Contracting Officer's Repre sentative

consideration.

3.3 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Bituminous Sheet Installation:

1. Remove release sheet before application.

2. Lay bituminous sheet from low point to high point s o laps shed

water.

3. Treat expansion, construction and control joints an d evident working

cracks as expansion joints. Apply bituminous sheet in double

thickness over joint by first applying a strip of b ituminous sheet

minimum 200 mm (8 inches) wide, centered over joint .

4. Lap seams minimum 50 mm (2 inches).

5. Lay succeeding sheet with laps, and roll or press i nto place.

6. Repair misaligned or inadequately lapped seams acco rding to

manufacturer’s instructions.

7. Seal seams and terminations according to sheet manu facturer’s

instructions.

8. Install on exterior concrete surface (including flo ors) of new steam

pits, existing building structures and where detail ed.

B. Blindside Membrane (Underslab):

1. Roll membrane out over flat surface cleared of all sharp or

puncturing material. ALL seams shall be lap seems. Butt joint seam

are not allowed. Install adhesive side up. Lap seem s not less than

6 inch.

07 13 52 - 6




2. Roll excess membrane outside footprint of base slab to lap vertical

at least 6 inch on base slab.

3. Protect waterproofing during construction in accord ance with

manufacturer recommendation.

4. Installed over pit or tunnel floor bedding stone pr ior to

installation of rebar and concrete and where detail ed.

5. Extend minimum 18” onto existing construction or as shown on

drawings.

C. Corner Treatment:

1. At inside and outside corners, apply double cover u sing an initial

strip minimum 280 mm (11 inches) wide, centered alo ng axis of

corner.

2. Cover each strip completely by the regular applicat ion of bituminous

sheet.

3. Provide a fillet or cant on inside corners.

4. Form cants using patching compound.

5. Do not use wood, fiber, and insulating materials fo r cants.

D. Projection Treatment:

1. Apply a double layer of bituminous sheet around pip es and similar

projections at least 150 mm (6 inches) wide.

E. Patching:

1. Repair tears, punctures, air blisters, and inadequa tely lapped

seams, according to manufacturer’s instructions bef ore protection

course is applied.

F. Permanent Protection:

1. Drain Board:

a. Apply protection board in strict accordance with ma nufacturer's

directions to steam pit and box conduits as a prote ction board

for waterproofing. Use adhesive to secure protectio n board to

wall. Adhesive shall be compatible with waterproofi ng. Tape

all joints as work proceeds to prevent stones from migrating

between protection board and waterproofing.

b. Protection board should be laid with closed joints and staggered

end joints.

c. After membrane waterproofing barrier has been insta lled, allow a

24 hour waiting period before installation of board and

backfilling.

07 13 52 - 7




d. Backfill within two (2) days (or time as recommende d by the

manufacturer) to prevent shrinkage of the membrane and cracking.

e. Install over all waterproofed membrane surfaces of steam pits,

existing building structurers and where detailed.

G. Temporary Protection:

1. When waterproofing materials are subjected to damag e by sunlight and

cannot be immediately protected as specified, prote ct waterproofing

materials by waterproof building paper or suitable coating approved

by manufacturer of waterproofing system used.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection:

1. Do not cover waterproofed surfaces by other materia ls or backfill

until work is approved by Contracting Officer's Rep resentative.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive before adhesive sets.

B. Clean exposed waterproofing surfaces. Remove contam inants and stains. 3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect waterproofing from construction operations.

B. Remove protective materials immediately before acce ptance.

C. Repair damage.

- - - E N D - - -


Steam Piping and Insulation



09 06 00 - 1

SECTION 09 06 00 SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES

PART I – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section contains a coordinated system in which requirements for materials specified in other

sections shown are identified by abbreviated materi al names and finish codes in the room finish

schedule or shown for other locations.

1.2 MANUFACTURERS

Manufacturer’s trade names and numbers used herein are only to identify colors, finishes, textures

and patterns. Products of other manufacturer’s equi valent to colors, finishes, textures and patterns

of manufacturers listed that meet requirements of t echnical specifications will be acceptable upon

approval in writing by contracting officer for fini sh requirements.

1.3 SUBMITALS

Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 33 23, SHOP DR AWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES provide

quadruplicate samples for color approval of materia ls and finishes specified in this section.


A. Publications listed below form a part of this speci fication to the extent referenced. Publications

are referenced in text by basic designation only.

B. MASTER PAINTING INSTITUTE: (MPI)

2001....................Architectural Painting Spec ification Manual





09 06 00 - 2

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

A. SECTION 32 17 23, PAVEMENT MARKINGS.

Color Manufacturer MFG. Color Name/No.

Yellow

White

2.2 DIVISION 05 – METALS

A. SECTION 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATION

Item Finish

Steel Grating and Frames

Steel Pipe Railings and Gates (not on Steel Stairs)

B. SECTION 09 91 00, PAINT AND COATINGS

1. MPI Gloss and Sheen Standards

Gloss @60 Sheen @85

Gloss Level 1 a traditional matte finish-flat max 5 units, and max 10 units

2. Paint code Gloss Manufacturer Mfg. Color Name/No .

P

P

P

P





09 06 00 - 3

Term Abbreviation Paint P

PART III EXECUTION

3.1 FINISH SCHEDULES & MISCELLANEOUS ABBREVIATIONS FINISH SCHEDULE & MISCELLANEOUS ABBREVIATIONS

--- E N D---




09 91 00 - 1

SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and

services necessary to complete the painting and fin ishing as shown on the

construction documents and/or specified herein, inc luding, but not limited

to, the following:

1. Prime coats which may be applied in shop under othe r sections.

2. Prime painting unprimed surfaces to be painted unde r this Section.

3. Painting items furnished with a prime coat of paint , including touching

up of or repairing of abraded, damaged or rusted pr ime coats applied by

others.

4. Painting ferrous metal (except stainless steel) exp osed to view.

5. Painting galvanized ferrous metals exposed to view.

6. Painting pipes, pipe coverings, conduit, ducts, ins ulation, hangers,

supports and other mechanical and electrical items and equipment

exposed to view.

7. Painting includes shellacs, stains, varnishes, coat ings specified, and

striping or markers and identity markings.

8. Incidental painting and touching up as required to produce proper

finish for painted surfaces, including touching up of factory finished

items.

9. Painting of any surface not specifically mentioned to be painted herein

or on construction documents, but for which paintin g is obviously

necessary to complete the job, or work which comes within the intent of

these specifications, is to be included as though s pecified.

1.2 RELATED WORK:

A. Activity Hazard Analysis: Section 01 35 26, SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.

B. Shop prime painting of steel and ferrous metals: Di vision 05 - METALS,

C. Type of Finish, Color, and Gloss Level of Finish Co at: Section 09 06 00,

SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

D. Asphalt and concrete pavement marking: Section 32 1 7 23, PAVEMENT

MARKINGS.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DR AWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,

AND SAMPLES.




09 91 00 - 2

B. Sustainable Design Submittals as described below:

1. Volatile organic compounds per volume as specified in

PART 2 - PRODUCTS.

C. Painter qualifications.

D. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Before work is started, or sample panels are prepar ed, submit

manufacturer's literature and technical data, the c urrent Master

Painters Institute (MPI) "Approved Product List" in dicating brand

label, product name and product code as of the date of contract award,

will be used to determine compliance with the submi ttal requirements of

this specification. The Contractor may choose to us e subsequent MPI

"Approved Product List", however, only one (1) list may be used for the

entire contract and each coating system is to be fr om a single

manufacturer. All coats on a particular substrate m ust be from a single

manufacturer. No variation from the MPI "Approved P roduct List" where

applicable is acceptable.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:

A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's sealed container marked to

show following:

1. Name of manufacturer.

2. Product type.

3. Batch number.

4. Instructions for use.

5. Safety precautions.

B. In addition to manufacturer's label, provide a labe l legibly printed as

following:

1. Federal Specification Number, where applicable, and name of material.

2. Surface upon which material is to be applied.

3. Specify Coat Types: Prime; body; finish; etc.

C. Maintain space for storage, and handling of paintin g materials and

equipment in a ventilated, neat and orderly conditi on to prevent

spontaneous combustion from occurring or igniting a djacent items.

D. Store materials at site at least 24 hours before us ing, at a temperature

between 7 and 30 degrees C (45 and 85 degrees F).

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Qualification of Painters: Use only qualified journ eyman painters for the

mixing and application of paint on exposed surfaces . Submit evidence that




09 91 00 - 3

key personnel have successfully performed surface p reparation and

application of coating on a minimum of three (3) si milar projects within

the past three (3) years.

B. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with the

prime paints used. Review other Sections of these s pecifications in which

prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibi lity of the total

coatings system for the various substrates. Upon re quest from other

subcontractors, furnish information on the characte ristics of the finish

materials proposed to be used, to ensure that compa tible prime coats are

used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible prime rs or remove and re-

prime as required. Notify the Contracting Officer R epresentative (COR) in

writing of any anticipated problems using the coati ng systems as specified

with substrates primed by others.


A. Paint materials are to conform to the restrictions of the local

Environmental and Toxic Control jurisdiction.

1. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) Emissions Requirem ents: Field-applied

paints and coatings that are inside the waterproofi ng system to not

exceed limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Chromate, Cadmium, Mercury, and Silica: Provide mat erials that do not

contain zinc-chromate, strontium-chromate, Cadmium, mercury or mercury

compounds or free crystalline silica.

5. Human Carcinogens: Provide materials that do not co ntain any of the

ACGIH-BKLT and ACGHI-DOC confirmed or suspected hum an carcinogens.

6. Use high performance acrylic paints in place of alk yd paints.

1.7 SAFETY AND HEALTH

A. Apply paint materials using safety methods and equi pment in accordance

with the following:

1. Comply with applicable Federal, State, and local la ws and regulations,

and with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including th e Activity Hazard

Analysis (AHA) as specified in Section 01 35 26, SA FETY REQUIREMENTS.

The AHA is to include analyses of the potential imp act of painting

operations on painting personnel and on others invo lved in and adjacent

to the work zone.

B. Safety Methods Used During Paint Application: Compl y with the requirements

of SSPC PA Guide 10.




09 91 00 - 4

C. Toxic Materials: To protect personnel from overexpo sure to toxic

materials, conform to the most stringent guidance o f:

1. The applicable manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or

local regulation.

2. 29 CFR 1910.1000.

3. ACHIH-BKLT and ACGHI-DOC, threshold limit values .


A. Publications listed below form a part of this speci fication to the extent

referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation

only.

B. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygi enists (ACGIH):

ACGIH TLV-BKLT-2012.....Threshold Limit Values (TLV ) for Chemical

Substances and Physical Agents and Biological

Exposure Indices (BEIs)

ACGIH TLV-DOC-2012......Documentation of Threshold Limit Values and

Biological Exposure Indices, (Seventh Edition)

C. ASME International (ASME):

A13.1-07(R2013).........Scheme for the Identificati on of Piping Systems

D. Code of Federal Regulation (CFR):

40 CFR 59...............Determination of Volatile M atter Content, Water

Content, Density Volume Solids, and Weight Solids

of Surface Coating

E. Commercial Item Description (CID):

A-A-1272A...............Plaster Gypsum (Spackling C ompound)

F. Federal Specifications (Fed Spec):

TT-P-1411A..............Paint, Copolymer-Resin, Cem entitious (For

Waterproofing Concrete and Masonry Walls) (CEP)

G. Master Painters Institute (MPI):

8.......................Exterior Alkyd, Flat MPI Gl oss Level 1

9.......................Exterior Alkyd Enamel MPI G loss Level 6

10......................Exterior Latex, Flat

11......................Exterior Latex, Semi-Gloss

18......................Organic Zinc Rich Primer

22......................Aluminum Paint, High Heat ( up to 590% - 1100F)

27......................Exterior / Interior Alkyd F loor Enamel, Gloss

31......................Polyurethane, Moisture Cure d, Clear Gloss

36......................Knot Sealer




09 91 00 - 5

43......................Interior Satin Latex, MPI G loss Level 4

44......................Interior Low Sheen Latex, M PI Gloss Level 2

45......................Interior Primer Sealer

46......................Interior Enamel Undercoat

47......................Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5

48......................Interior Alkyd, Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 6

50......................Interior Latex Primer Seale r

51......................Interior Alkyd, Eggshell, M PI Gloss Level 3

52......................Interior Latex, MPI Gloss L evel 3

53......................Interior Latex, Flat, MPI G loss Level 1

54......................Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5

59......................Interior/Exterior Alkyd Por ch & Floor Enamel, Low

Gloss

60......................Interior/Exterior Latex Por ch & Floor Paint, Low

Gloss

66......................Interior Alkyd Fire Retarda nt, Clear Top-Coat (ULC

Approved)

67......................Interior Latex Fire Retarda nt, Top-Coat (ULC

Approved)

68......................Interior/ Exterior Latex Po rch & Floor Paint,

Gloss

71......................Polyurethane, Moisture Cure d, Clear, Flat

77......................Epoxy Cold Cured, Gloss

79......................Marine Alkyd Metal Primer

90......................Interior Wood Stain, Semi-T ransparent

91......................Wood Filler Paste

94......................Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss

95......................Fast Drying Metal Primer

98......................High Build Epoxy Coating

101.....................Epoxy Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer

108.....................High Build Epoxy Coating, L ow Gloss

114.....................Interior Latex, Gloss

119.....................Exterior Latex, High Gloss (acrylic)

134.....................Galvanized Water Based Prim er

135.....................Non-Cementitious Galvanized Primer

138.....................Interior High Performance L atex, MPI Gloss Level 2


09 91 00 - 6





141.....................Interior High Performance L atex (SG) MPI Gloss

Level 5

163.....................Exterior Water Based Semi-G loss Light Industrial

Coating, MPI Gloss Level 5

G. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

SSPC SP 1-82(R2004).....Solvent Cleaning

SSPC SP 2-82(R2004).....Hand Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 3-28(R2004).....Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 10/NACE No.2....Near-White Blast Cleaning

SSPC PA Guide 10........Guide to Safety and Health Requirements

H. Maple Flooring Manufacturer’s Association (MFMA):

I. U.S. National Archives and Records Administration ( NARA):

29 CFR 1910.1000........Air Contaminants

J. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3.

Submit manufacturer’s technical data sheets for spe cified coatings and

solvents.

2.2 PAINT PROPERTIES:

A. Use ready-mixed (including colors), except two comp onent epoxies,

polyurethanes, polyesters, paints having metallic p owders packaged

separately and paints requiring specified additives .

B. Where no requirements are given in the referenced s pecifications for

primers, use primers with pigment and vehicle, comp atible with substrate

and finish coats specified.

C. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufa cturer as the finish

coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manu facturer, and use only

to recommended limits.

D. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing

system, paints and coating to comply with VOC conte nt limits of

authorities having jurisdiction and the following V OC content limits:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.

2. Non-flat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.

3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.

4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.

09 91 00 - 7




5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints applied to Ferrou s Metals: 250 g/L.

6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.

7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.

9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

E. VOC test method for paints and coatings is to be in accordance with

40 CFR 59 (EPA Method 24). Part 60, Appendix A with the exempt compounds’

content determined by Method 303 (Determination of Exempt Compounds) in

the South Coast Air Quality Management District’s ( SCAQMD) “Laboratory

Methods of Analysis for Enforcement Samples” manual .

2.3 PLASTIC TAPE:

A. Pigmented vinyl plastic film in colors as specified in Section 09 06 00,

SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES or specified.

B. Pressure sensitive adhesive back.

C. Snap on coil plastic markers.

D. Widths as shown on construction documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Safety: Observe required safety regulations and man ufacturer's warning and

instructions for storage, handling and application of painting materials.

1. Take necessary precautions to protect personnel and property from

hazards due to falls, injuries, toxic fumes, fire, explosion, or other

harm.

2. Deposit soiled cleaning rags and waste materials in metal containers

approved for that purpose. Dispose of such items of f the site at end of

each day’s work.

B. Atmospheric and Surface Conditions:

1. Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditio ns are:

a. Less than 3 degrees C (5 degrees F) above dew point .

b. Below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) or over 35 degree s C

(95 degrees F), unless specifically pre-approved by the COR and the

product manufacturer. Under no circumstances are ap plication

conditions to exceed manufacturer recommendations.

c. When the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or t o damp or wet

surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint m anufacturer’s

printed instructions.

09 91 00 - 8




2. Maintain interior temperatures until paint dries ha rd.

3. Do no exterior painting when it is windy and dusty.

4. Do not paint in direct sunlight or on surfaces that the sun will warm.

5. Apply only on clean, dry and frost free surfaces ex cept as follows:

a. Apply water thinned acrylic and cementitious paints to damp (not

wet) surfaces only when allowed by manufacturer's p rinted

instructions.

6. Varnishing:

a. Apply in clean areas and in still air.

b. Before varnishing vacuum and dust area.

c. Immediately before varnishing wipe down surfaces wi th a tack rag.

3.2 INSPECTION:

A. Examine the areas and conditions where painting and finishing are to be

applied and correct any conditions detrimental to t he proper and timely

completion of the work. Do not proceed with the wor k until unsatisfactory

conditions are corrected to permit proper installat ion of the work.

3.3 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP REQUIREMENTS:

A. Application may be by brush or roller. Spray applic ation only upon

acceptance from the COR in writing.

B. Furnish to the COR a painting schedule indicating w hen the respective

coats of paint for the various areas and surfaces w ill be completed. This

schedule is to be kept current as the job progresse s.

C. Protect work at all times. Protect all adjacent wor k and materials by

suitable covering or other method during progress o f work. Upon completion

of the work, remove all paint and varnish spots fro m floors, glass and

other surfaces. Remove from the premises all rubbis h and accumulated

materials of whatever nature not caused by others a nd leave work in a

clean condition.

D. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, device pl ates, lighting

fixtures, and factory finished work, and similar it ems, or provide in

place protection. Upon completion of each space, ca refully replace all

removed items by workmen skilled in the trades invo lved.

E. When indicated to be painted, remove electrical pan el box covers and doors

before painting walls. Paint separately and re-inst all after all paint is

dry.

09 91 00 - 9




F. Materials are to be applied under adequate illumina tion, evenly spread and

flowed on smoothly to avoid runs, sags, holidays, b rush marks, air bubbles

and excessive roller stipple.

G. Apply materials with a coverage to hide substrate c ompletely. When color,

stain, dirt or undercoats show through final coat o f paint, the surface is

to be covered by additional coats until the paint f ilm is of uniform

finish, color, appearance and coverage, at no addit ional cost to the

Government.

H. All coats are to be dry to manufacturer’s recommend ations before applying

succeeding coats.

I. All suction spots or “hot spots” in plaster after t he application of the

first coat are to be touched up before applying the second coat.

J. Do not apply paint behind frameless mirrors that us e mastic for adhering

to wall surface.

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION:

A. General:

1. The Contractor shall be held wholly responsible for the finished

appearance and satisfactory completion of painting work. Properly

prepare all surfaces to receive paint, which includ es cleaning,

sanding, and touching-up of all prime coats applied under other

Sections of the work. Broom clean all spaces before painting is

started. All surfaces to be painted or finished are to be completely

dry, clean and smooth.

2. See other sections of specifications for specified surface conditions

and prime coat.

3. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in stri ct accordance with

the paint manufacturer’s instructions and as herein specified, for each

particular substrate condition.

4. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface tre atments with

materials and methods compatible with substrate and specified finish.

Remove any residue remaining from cleaning agents u sed. Do not use

solvents, acid, or steam on concrete and masonry. S chedule the cleaning

and painting so that dust and other contaminants fr om the cleaning

process will not fall in wet, newly painted surface s.

B. Ferrous Metals:

09 91 00 - 10




1. Remove oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compo unds, flux and other

detrimental foreign matter in accordance with SSPC- SP 1 (Solvent

Cleaning).

2. Remove loose mill scale, rust, and paint, by hand o r power tool

cleaning, as defined in SSPC-SP 2 (Hand Tool Cleani ng) and SSPC-SP 3

(Power Tool Cleaning).

3. Fill dents, holes and similar voids and depressions in flat exposed

surfaces of hollow steel doors and frames, access p anels, roll-up steel

doors and similar items specified to have semi-glos s or gloss finish

with TT-F-322D (Filler, Two-Component Type, For Den ts, Small Holes and

Blow-Holes). Finish flush with adjacent surfaces.

a. Fill flat head countersunk screws used for permanen t anchors.

b. Do not fill screws of item intended for removal suc h as glazing

beads.

4. Spot prime abraded and damaged areas in shop prime coat which expose

bare metal with same type of paint used for prime c oat. Feather edge of

spot prime to produce smooth finish coat.

5. Spot prime abraded and damaged areas which expose b are metal of factory

finished items with paint as recommended by manufac turer of item.

3.5 PAINT PREPARATION:

A. Thoroughly mix painting materials to ensure uniform ity of color, complete

dispersion of pigment and uniform composition.

B. Do not thin unless necessary for application and wh en finish paint is used

for body and prime coats. Use materials and quantit ies for thinning as

specified in manufacturer's printed instructions.

C. Remove paint skins, then strain paint through comme rcial paint strainer to

remove lumps and other particles.

D. Mix two (2) component and two (2) part paint and th ose requiring additives

in such a manner as to uniformly blend as specified in manufacturer's

printed instructions unless specified otherwise.

E. For tinting required to produce exact shades specif ied, use color pigment

recommended by the paint manufacturer.

3.6 APPLICATION:

A. Start of surface preparation or painting will be co nstrued as acceptance

of the surface as satisfactory for the application of materials.

09 91 00 - 11




B. Unless otherwise specified, apply paint in three (3 ) coats; prime, body,

and finish. When two (2) coats applied to prime coa t are the same, first

coat applied over primer is body coat and second co at is finish coat.

C. Apply each coat evenly and cover substrate complete ly.

D. Allow not less than 48 hours between application of succeeding coats,

except as allowed by manufacturer's printed instruc tions, and approved by

COR.

E. Apply by brush or roller. Spray application for new or existing occupied

spaces only upon approval by acceptance from COR in writing.

1. Apply painting materials specifically required by m anufacturer to be

applied by spraying.

2. In new construction and in existing occupied spaces , where paint is

applied by spray, mask or enclose with polyethylene , or similar air

tight material with edges and seams continuously se aled including items

specified in “Building and Structural Work Field Pa inting”; “Work not

Painted”; motors, controls, telephone, and electric al equipment, fronts

of sterilizes and other recessed equipment and simi lar prefinished

items.

F. Do not paint in closed position operable items such as access doors and

panels, window sashes, overhead doors, and similar items except overhead

roll-up doors and shutters.

3.7 PRIME PAINTING:

A. After surface preparation, prime surfaces before ap plication of body and

finish coats, except as otherwise specified.

B. Spot prime and apply body coat to damaged and abrad ed painted surfaces

before applying succeeding coats.

C. Additional field applied prime coats over shop or f actory applied prime

coats are not required except for exterior exposed steel apply an

additional prime coat.

D. Prime rabbets for stop and face glazing of wood, an d for face glazing of

steel.

E. Metals except boilers, incinerator stacks, and engi ne exhaust pipes:

1. Steel and iron: MPI 79 (Marine Alkyd Metal Primer). Use MPI 101 (Cold

Curing Epoxy Primer) where MPI 108 (High Build Epox y Marine Coating

finish is specified.

09 91 00 - 12




3.8 PAINT COLOR:

A. Color and gloss of finish coats is specified in Sec tion 09 06 00, SCHEDULE

FOR FINISHES.

B. For additional requirements regarding color see Art icles, “REFINISHING

EXISTING PAINTED SURFACE” and “MECHANICAL AND ELECT RICAL FIELD PAINTING

SCHEDULE”.

C. Coat Colors:

1. Color of priming coat: Lighter than body coat.

2. Color of body coat: Lighter than finish coat.

3. Color prime and body coats to not show through the finish coat and to

mask surface imperfections or contrasts.

D. Painting, Caulking, Closures, and Fillers Adjacent to Casework:

1. Paint to match color of casework where casework has a paint finish.

2. Paint to match color of wall where casework is stai nless steel, plastic

laminate, or varnished wood.

3.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK FIELD PAINTING SCHEDULE:

A. Field painting of mechanical and electrical consist s of cleaning,

touching-up abraded shop prime coats, and applying prime, body and finish

coats to materials and equipment if not factory fin ished in space

scheduled to be finished.

B. In spaces not scheduled to be finish painted in Sec tion 09 06 00, SCHEDULE

FOR FINISHES paint as specified below.

C. Paint various systems specified in Division 02 – EX ISTING CONDITIONS,

Division 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIO NING, Division 26 –

ELECTRICAL.

D. Paint after tests have been completed.

E. Omit prime coat from factory prime-coated items.

F. Finish painting of mechanical and electrical equipm ent is not required

when located in interstitial spaces, above suspende d ceilings, in

concealed areas such as pipe and electric closets, pipe basements, pipe

tunnels, trenches, attics, roof spaces, shafts and furred spaces except on

electrical conduit containing feeders 600 volts or more.

G. Omit field painting of items specified in “BUILDING AND STRUCTURAL WORK

FIELD PAINTING”; “Building and Structural Work not Painted”.

H. Color:

1. Paint items having no color specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR

FINISHES to match surrounding surfaces.

09 91 00 - 13




2. Paint colors as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHE DULE FOR FINISHES

except for following:

a. Gray: Heating, ventilating, air conditioning and re frigeration

equipment (except as required to match surrounding surfaces), and

water and sewage treatment equipment and sewage eje ction equipment.

I. Apply paint systems on properly prepared and primed surface as follows:

1. Exterior Locations:

a. Apply two (2) coats of MPI 10 (Exterior Latex, Flat ) to galvanized

and zinc-copper alloy metal.

2. Interior Locations:

a. Apply two (2) coats of MPI 47 (Interior Alkyd, Semi -Gloss) to

following items:

1) Metal under 94 degrees C (201 degrees F) of items s uch as bare

piping, fittings, hangers and supports.

2) Equipment and systems such as hinged covers and fra mes for

control cabinets and boxes, cast-iron radiators, el ectric

conduits and panel boards.

3) Heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing eq uipment, and

machinery having shop prime coat and not factory fi nished.

d. Apply two (2) coats of MPI 22 (High Heat Resista nt Coating) to

ferrous metal surface over 94 degrees K (290 degree s F) of following

items:

4) Steam line flanges, bare pipe, fittings, valves, ha ngers and

supports over 94 degrees K (290 degrees F).

3. Other exposed locations:

b. Cloth jackets of insulation of ducts and pipes i n connection with

plumbing, air conditioning, ventilating refrigerati on and heating

systems: One (1) coat of MPI 50 (Interior Latex Pri mer Sealer) and

one (1) coat of MPI 10 (Exterior Latex, Flat).

3.10 BUILDING AND STRUCTURAL WORK FIELD PAINTING:

A. Painting and finishing of interior and exterior wor k except as specified

here-in-after.

1. Painting and finishing of new and existing work inc luding colors and

gloss of finish selected is specified in Finish Sch edule, Section 09 06

00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

09 91 00 - 14




2. Painting of disturbed, damaged and repaired or patc hed surfaces when

entire space is not scheduled for complete repainti ng or refinishing.

3. Painting of ferrous metal and galvanized metal.

4. Painting of wood with fire retardant paint exposed in attics, when used

as mechanical equipment space (except shingles).

5. Identity painting and safety painting.

B. Building and Structural Work not Painted:

1. Prefinished items:

a. Casework, doors, elevator entrances and cabs, metal panels, wall

covering, and similar items specified factory finis hed under other

sections.

b. Factory finished equipment and pre-engineered metal building

components such as metal roof and wall panels.

2. Finished surfaces:

a. Hardware except ferrous metal.

b. Anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium platin g, copper, and

brass, except as otherwise specified.

c. Signs, fixtures, and other similar items integrally finished.

5. Labels:

a. Code required label, such as Underwriters Laborator ies Inc.,

Intertek Testing Service or Factory Mutual Research Corporation.

b. Identification plates, instruction plates, performa nce rating, and

nomenclature.

3.11 IDENTITY PAINTING SCHEDULE:

A. Identify designated service in new buildings or pro jects with extensive

remodeling in accordance with ASME A13.1, unless sp ecified otherwise, on

exposed piping, piping above removable ceilings, pi ping in accessible pipe

spaces, interstitial spaces, and piping behind acce ss panels. For existing

spaces where work is minor match existing.

1. Legend may be identified using snap-on coil plastic markers or by paint

stencil applications.

2. Apply legends adjacent to changes in direction, on branches, where

pipes pass through walls or floors, adjacent to ope rating accessories

such as valves, regulators, strainers and cleanouts a minimum of 12.2 M

(40 feet) apart on straight runs of piping. Identif ication next to

plumbing fixtures is not required.

3. Locate Legends clearly visible from operating posit ion.

09 91 00 - 15




4. Use arrow to indicate direction of flow using black stencil paint.

5. Identify pipe contents with sufficient additional d etails such as

temperature, pressure, and contents to identify pos sible hazard. Insert

working pressure shown on construction documents wh ere asterisk appears

for High, Medium, and Low Pressure designations as follows:

a. High Pressure - 414 kPa (60 psig) and above.

6. Legend name in full or in abbreviated form as follo ws:

COLOR OF COLOR OF COLOR OF LEGEND

PIPING EXPOSED PIPING BACKGROUND LETTERS ABBREVIATIONS

High Pressure Steam Green White H.P. *

High Pressure Condensate

Return Green White H.P. Ret *

Green White L.P. Ret *

Pumped Condensate Green White Pump Cond

3.12 PROTECTION CLEAN UP, AND TOUCH-UP:

A. Protect work from paint droppings and spattering by use of masking, drop

cloths, removal of items or by other approved metho ds.

B. Upon completion, clean paint from hardware, glass a nd other surfaces and

items not required to be painted of paint drops or smears.

C. Before final inspection, touch-up or refinished in a manner to produce

solid even color and finish texture, free from defe cts in work which was

damaged or discolored.

- - - E N D - - -




26 05 11 - 1

SECTION 26 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section applies to all sections of Division 26 .

B. Furnish and install electrical systems, materials, equipment, and

accessories in accordance with the specifications a nd drawings.

Capacities and ratings of motors, conductors and ca ble, , and other

items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on the

drawings.

C. D. Conductor ampacities specified or shown on the d rawings are based

on copper conductors, with the conduit and raceways sized per NEC.

Aluminum conductors are prohibited.

1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

A. The latest International Building Code (IBC), Under writers

Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Institute of Electrical an d Electronics

Engineers (IEEE), and National Fire Protection Asso ciation (NFPA) codes

and standards are the minimum requirements for mate rials and

installation.

B. The drawings and specifications shall govern in tho se instances where

requirements are greater than those stated in the a bove codes and

standards.

1.3 TEST STANDARDS

A. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labele d, or certified by a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) to meet Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. (UL), standards where test stand ards have been

established. Materials and equipment which are not covered by UL

standards will be accepted, providing that material s and equipment are

listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet the safety

requirements of a NRTL. Materials and equipment whi ch no NRTL accepts,

certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, will be considered

if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial

standards, such as ANSI, NEMA, and NETA. Evidence o f compliance shall

include certified test reports and definitive shop drawings.

B. Definitions:




26 05 11 - 2

1. Listed: Materials and equipment included in a list published by an

organization that is acceptable to the Authority Ha ving Jurisdiction

and concerned with evaluation of products or servic es, that

maintains periodic inspection of production or list ed materials and

equipment or periodic evaluation of services, and w hose listing

states that the materials and equipment either meet s appropriate

designated standards or has been tested and found s uitable for a

specified purpose.

2. Labeled: Materials and equipment to which has been attached a label,

symbol, or other identifying mark of an organizatio n that is

acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and concerned with

product evaluation, that maintains periodic inspect ion of production

of labeled materials and equipment, and by whose la beling the

manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or

performance in a specified manner.

3. Certified: Materials and equipment which:

a. Have been tested and found by a NRTL to meet nation ally

recognized standards or to be safe for use in a spe cified manner.

b. Are periodically inspected by a NRTL.

c. Bear a label, tag, or other record of certification .

4. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory: Testing l aboratory which

is recognized and approved by the Secretary of Labo r in accordance

with OSHA regulations.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)

A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: The manufacturer sha ll regularly and

currently produce, as one of the manufacturer's pri ncipal products, the

materials and equipment specified for this project, and shall have

manufactured the materials and equipment for at lea st three years.

B. Product Qualification:

1. Manufacturer's materials and equipment shall have b een in

satisfactory operation, on three installations of s imilar size and

type as this project, for at least three years.

2. The Government reserves the right to require the Co ntractor to

submit a list of installations where the materials and equipment

have been in operation before approval.




26 05 11 - 3


A. Applicable publications listed in all Sections of D ivision 26 shall be

the latest issue, unless otherwise noted.

B. Products specified in all sections of Division 26 s hall comply with the

applicable publications listed in each section.

1.6 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of curre nt production by

manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, and

for which replacement parts shall be available. Mat erials and

equipment furnished shall be new, and shall have su perior quality and

freshness.

B. When more than one unit of the same class or type o f materials and

equipment is required, such units shall be the prod uct of a single

manufacturer.

C. Equipment Assemblies and Components:

1. Components of an assembled unit need not be product s of the same

manufacturer.

2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which includ e components made

by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final

assembled unit.

3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total

assembly for the intended service.

4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the pr oduct of a single

manufacturer.

D. Factory wiring and terminals shall be identified on the equipment being

furnished and on all wiring diagrams.

1.7 VARIATIONS FROM CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

A. Where the Government or the Contractor requests var iations from the

contract requirements, the connecting work and rela ted components shall

include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits,

circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders , controls, panels

and installation methods.

1.8 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PROTECTION

A. Materials and equipment shall be protected during s hipment and storage

against physical damage, vermin, dirt, corrosive su bstances, fumes,

moisture, cold and rain.




26 05 11 - 4

1. Store materials and equipment indoors in clean dry space with

uniform temperature to prevent condensation.

2. During installation, equipment shall be protected a gainst entry of

foreign matter, and be vacuum-cleaned both inside a nd outside before

testing and operating. Compressed air shall not be used to clean

equipment. Remove loose packing and flammable mater ials from inside

equipment.

3. Damaged equipment shall be repaired or replaced, as determined by

the COR.

4. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory in stalled removable

heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal.

5. Damaged paint on equipment shall be refinished with the same quality

of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacture r so repaired

areas are not obvious.

1.9 WORK PERFORMANCE

A. All electrical work shall comply with requirements of the latest NFPA

70 (NEC), NFPA 70B, NFPA 70E, NFPA 99, NFPA 110, OS HA Part 1910 subpart

J – General Environmental Controls, OSHA Part 1910 subpart K – Medical

and First Aid, and OSHA Part 1910 subpart S – Elect rical, in addition

to other references required by contract.

B. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibi lity of the

Contractor.

C. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affe cted circuits or

equipment de-energized. However, energized electric al work may be

performed only for the non-destructive and non-inva sive diagnostic

testing(s), or when scheduled outage poses an immin ent hazard to

patient care, safety, or physical security. In such case, all aspects

of energized electrical work, such as the availabil ity of

appropriate/correct personal protective equipment ( PPE) and the use of

PPE, shall comply with the latest NFPA 70E, as well as the following

requirements:

1. Only Qualified Person(s) shall perform energized el ectrical work.

Supervisor of Qualified Person(s) shall witness the work of its

entirety to ensure compliance with safety requireme nts and approved

work plan.

2. At least two weeks before initiating any energized electrical work,

the Contractor and the Qualified Person(s) who is d esignated to




26 05 11 - 5

perform the work shall visually inspect, verify and confirm that the

work area and electrical equipment can safely accom modate the work

involved.

3. At least two weeks before initiating any energized electrical work,

the Contractor shall develop and submit a job speci fic work plan,

and energized electrical work request to the COR, a nd Medical

Center’s Chief Engineer or his/her designee. At the minimum, the

work plan must include relevant information such as proposed work

schedule, area of work, description of work, name(s ) of Supervisor

and Qualified Person(s) performing the work, equipm ent to be used,

procedures to be used on and near the live electric al equipment,

barriers to be installed, safety equipment to be us ed, and exit

pathways.

4. Energized electrical work shall begin only after th e Contractor has

obtained written approval of the work plan, and the energized

electrical work request from the COR, and Medical C enter’s Chief

Engineer or his/her designee. The Contractor shall make these

approved documents present and available at the tim e and place of

energized electrical work.

5.

D. For work that affects existing electrical systems, arrange, phase and

perform work to assure minimal interference with no rmal functioning of

the facility. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORA GE AREAS under

Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

E. New work shall be installed and connected to existi ng work neatly,

safely and professionally. Disturbed or damaged wor k shall be replaced

or repaired to its prior conditions, as required by Section 01 00 00,


F. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with o ther trades to

minimize interference.

1.10 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical t o locations shown on

the drawings.

B. Working clearances shall not be less than specified in the NEC.

C. Inaccessible Equipment:

1. Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed

equipment not readily accessible for operation and maintenance, the




26 05 11 - 6

equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as direc ted at no

additional cost to the Government.

2. "Readily accessible” is defined as being capable of being reached

quickly for operation, maintenance, or inspections without the use

of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under o r over obstacles

such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt gu ards,

transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceway s.

D. Electrical service entrance equipment and arrangeme nts for temporary

and permanent connections to the electric utility c ompany’s system

shall conform to the electric utility company's req uirements.

Coordinate fuses, circuit breakers and relays with the electric utility

company’s system, and obtain electric utility compa ny approval for

sizes and settings of these devices.

1.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to the requirements of the NEC, install an identification

sign which clearly indicates information required f or use and

maintenance of items such as switchboards and switc hgear, panelboards,

cabinets, motor controllers, fused and non-fused sa fety switches,

generators, automatic transfer switches, separately enclosed circuit

breakers, individual breakers and controllers in sw itchboards,

switchgear and motor control assemblies, control de vices and other

significant equipment.

B. Identification signs for Normal Power System equipm ent shall be

laminated black phenolic resin with a white core wi th engraved

lettering. Identification signs for Essential Elect rical System (EES)

equipment, as defined in the NEC, shall be laminate d red phenolic resin

with a white core with engraved lettering. Letterin g shall be a minimum

of 12 mm (1/2 inch) high. Identification signs shal l indicate equipment

designation, rated bus amperage, voltage, number of phases, number of

wires, and type of EES power branch as applicable. Secure nameplates

with screws.

C. Install adhesive arc flash warning labels on all eq uipment as required

by the latest NFPA 70E. Label shall show specific a nd correct

information for specific equipment based on its arc flash calculations.

Label shall show the followings:

1. Nominal system voltage.




26 05 11 - 7

2. Equipment/bus name, date prepared, and manufacturer name and

address.

3. Arc flash boundary.

4. Available arc flash incident energy and the corresp onding working

distance.

5. Minimum arc rating of clothing.

6. Site-specific level of PPE.

1.12 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the COR in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS,

PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.

B. Maintenance and Operation Manuals:

1. Submit as required for systems and equipment specif ied in the

technical sections. Furnish in hardcover binders or an approved

equivalent.

2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words

"MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL," the name and lo cation of the

system, material, equipment, building, name of Cont ractor, and

contract name and number. Include in the manual the names,

addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontrac tor installing

the system or equipment and the local representativ es for the

material or equipment.

3. Provide a table of contents and assemble the manual to conform to

the table of contents, with tab sheets placed befor e instructions

covering the subject. The instructions shall be leg ible and easily

read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.

4. The manuals shall include:

a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control dia grams with

data to explain detailed operation and control of t he equipment.

b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.

c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.

d. Installation instructions.

e. Safety precautions for operation and maintenance.

f. Diagrams and illustrations.

g. Periodic maintenance and testing procedures and fre quencies,

including replacement parts numbers.

h. Performance data.




26 05 11 - 8

i. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall

be placed on the use of special tools and instrumen ts. The list

shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare and

replacement parts, and name of servicing organizati on.

j. List of factory approved or qualified permanent ser vicing

organizations for equipment repair and periodic tes ting and

maintenance, including addresses and factory certif ication

qualifications.

C. Approvals will be based on complete submission of s hop drawings,

manuals, test reports, certifications, and samples as applicable.

D. After approval and prior to installation, furnish t he COR with one

sample of each of the following:

1. A minimum 300 mm (12 inches) length of each type an d size of wire

and cable along with the tag from the coils or reel s from which the

sample was taken. The length of the sample shall be sufficient to

show all markings provided by the manufacturer.

2. Each type of conduit coupling, bushing, and termina tion fitting.

3. Conduit hangers, clamps, and supports.

4. Duct sealing compound.

5. Each type of receptacle, toggle switch, lighting co ntrol sensor,

outlet box, manual motor starter, device wall plate , engraved

nameplate, wire and cable splicing and terminating material, and

branch circuit single pole molded case circuit brea ker.

I. Training, manuals, schematics, maintenance sched ules are required on

all new equipment installed. Each new equipment ite m to be labeled

as to equipment identification number, installation date, area

serving, feeder services, voltage, amperage, main b reaker rating,

etc.

1.13 SINGULAR NUMBER

A. Where any device or part of equipment is referred t o in these

specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the s witch"), this

reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are

required to complete the installation as shown on t he drawings.

1.14 ACCEPTANCE CHECKS AND TESTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish the instruments, mater ials, and labor for

tests.




26 05 11 - 9

B. Where systems are comprised of components specified in more than one

section of Division 26, the Contractor shall coordi nate the

installation, testing, and adjustment of all compon ents between various

manufacturer’s representatives and technicians so t hat a complete,

functional, and operational system is delivered to the Government.

C. When test results indicate any defects, the Contrac tor shall repair or

replace the defective materials or equipment, and r epeat the tests for

the equipment. Repair, replacement, and re-testing shall be

accomplished at no additional cost to the Governmen t.

1.15 WARRANTY

A. All work performed and all equipment and material f urnished under this

Division shall be free from defects and shall remai n so for a period of

one year from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the

Contracting Officer for the Government.

1.16 INSTRUCTION

A. Instruction to designated Government personnel shal l be provided for

the particular equipment or system as required in e ach associated

technical specification section.

B. Furnish the services of competent and factory-train ed instructors to

give full instruction in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of

the specified equipment and system, including perti nent safety

requirements. Instructors shall be thoroughly famil iar with all

aspects of the installation, and shall be factory-t rained in operating

theory as well as practical operation and maintenan ce procedures.

C. A training schedule shall be developed and submitte d by the Contractor

and approved by the COR at least 30 days prior to t he planned training.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

---END---




26 05 19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation , connection, and

testing of the electrical conductors and cables for use in electrical

systems rated 600 V and below, indicated as cable(s ), conductor(s),

wire, or wiring in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREwMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INST ALLATIONS:

Requirements that apply to all sections of Division 26.

B. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRI CAL SYSTEMS:

Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path

for possible ground fault currents.

C. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits

for conductors and cables.

D. Section 26 05 41, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTI ON: Installation of

conductors and cables in manholes and ducts.


A. Quality Assurance shall be in accordance with Parag raph, QUALIFICATIONS

(PRODUCTS AND SERVICES) in Section 26 05 11, REQUIR EMENTS FOR

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Paragraph, SUBMITTALS in Section 26 05 11,

REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, and the following

requirements:

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit sufficient information to demonstrate compli ance with

drawings and specifications.

b. Submit the following data for approval:

1) Electrical ratings and insulation type for each con ductor and

cable.

2) Splicing materials and pulling lubricant.

2. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection , submit the

following.

a. Certification by the manufacturer that the conducto rs and cables

conform to the requirements of the drawings and spe cifications.




26 05 19 - 2

b. Certification by the Contractor that the conductors and cables

have been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.


A. Publications listed below (including amendments, ad denda, revisions,

supplements and errata) form a part of this specifi cation to the extent

referenced. Publications are reference in the text by designation only.

B. American Society of Testing Material (ASTM):

D2301-10................Standard Specification for Vinyl Chloride

Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical

Insulating Tape

D2304-10................Test Method for Thermal End urance of Rigid

Electrical Insulating Materials

D3005-10................Low-Temperature Resistant V inyl Chloride

Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical

Insulating Tape

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA ):

WC 70-09................Power Cables Rated 2000 Vol ts or Less for the

Distribution of Electrical Energy

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-17...................National Electrical Code (N EC)

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

44-14...................Thermoset-Insulated Wires a nd Cables

83-14...................Thermoplastic-Insulated Wir es and Cables

467-13..................Grounding and Bonding Equip ment

486A-486B-13............Wire Connectors

486C-13.................Splicing Wire Connectors

486D-15.................Sealed Wire Connector Syste ms

486E-15.................Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with

Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors

493-07..................Thermoplastic-Insulated Und erground Feeder and

Branch Circuit Cables

514B-12.................Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conductors and cables shall be in accordance with A STM, NEMA, NFPA, UL,

as specified herein, and as shown on the drawings.

B. All conductors shall be copper.




26 05 19 - 3

C. Single Conductor and Cable:

1. No. 12 AWG: Minimum size, except where smaller size s are specified

herein or shown on the drawings.

2. No. 12 AWG and larger: Stranded.

3. No. 14 AWG and smaller: Solid; except shall be stra nded for final

connection to motors, transformers, and vibrating e quipment.

4. Insulation: XHHW-2.

E. Color Code:

1. No. 10 AWG and smaller: Solid color insulation or s olid color

coating.

2. No. 8 AWG and larger: Color-coded using one of the following

methods:

a. Solid color insulation or solid color coating.

b. Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified.

c. Color using 19 mm (0.75 inches) wide tape.

4. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color

coding shall conform to the existing wiring system.

5. Conductors shall be color-coded as follows:

208/120 V Phase 480/277 V

Black A Brown

Red B Yellow

Blue C Orange

White Neutral Gray *

* or white with colored (other than green) tracer.

6. Lighting circuit “switch legs”, and 3-way and 4-way switch

“traveling wires,” shall have color coding that is unique and

distinct (e.g., pink and purple) from the color cod ing indicated

above. The unique color codes shall be solid and in accordance with

the NEC. Coordinate color coding in the field with the COR.

7. Color code for isolated power system wiring shall b e in accordance

with the NEC.

2.2 SPLICES

A. Splices shall be in accordance with NEC and UL.

B. Above Ground Splices for No. 10 AWG and Smaller:

1. Solderless, screw-on, reusable pressure cable type, with integral

insulation, approved for copper and aluminum conduc tors.




26 05 19 - 4

2. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to comple tely cover the

stripped conductors.

3. The number, size, and combination of conductors use d with the

connector, as listed on the manufacturer's packagin g, shall be

strictly followed.

C. Above Ground Splices for No. 8 AWG to No. 4/0 AWG:

1. Compression, hex screw, or bolt clamp-type of high conductivity and

corrosion-resistant material, listed for use with c opper and

aluminum conductors.

2. Insulate with materials approved for the particular use, location,

voltage, and temperature. Insulation level shall be not less than

the insulation level of the conductors being joined .

3. Splice and insulation shall be product of the same manufacturer.

4. All bolts, nuts, and washers used with splices shal l be cadmium-

plated steel.

D.

G. Plastic electrical insulating tape: Per ASTM D23 04, flame-retardant,

cold and weather resistant.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS

A. Mechanical type of high conductivity and corrosion- resistant material,

listed for use with copper and aluminum conductors.

B. Long barrel compression type of high conductivity a nd

corrosion-resistant material, with minimum of two c ompression indents

per wire, listed for use with copper and aluminum c onductors.

C. All bolts, nuts, and washers used to connect connec tions and

terminations to bus bars or other termination point s shall be cadmium-

plated steel.

2.4 CONTROL WIRING

A. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in these speci fications, control

wiring shall be as specified herein, except that th e minimum size shall

be not less than No. 14 AWG.

B. Control wiring shall be sized such that the voltage drop under in-rush

conditions does not adversely affect operation of t he controls.

2.5 WIRE LUBRICATING COMPOUND

A. Lubricating compound shall be suitable for the wire insulation and

conduit, and shall not harden or become adhesive.

B. Shall not be used on conductors for isolated power systems.




26 05 19 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Neutral Conductor Installation

1. The use of single-phase, multi-wire branch circuits with a

common neutral is not permitted. All branch circuit s shall be

furnished and installed with an individual accompan ying

neutral, sized the same as the phase conductors.

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, a s shown on the

drawings, and manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install all conductors in raceway systems.

C. Splice conductors only in outlet boxes, junction bo xes, pullboxes,

manholes, or handholes.

D. Conductors of different systems (e.g., 120 V and 27 7 V) shall not be

installed in the same raceway.

E. Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the

NEC. Provide split wedge type which firmly clamps e ach individual cable

and tightens due to cable weight.

F. In panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches, enclo sures, and equipment

assemblies, neatly form, train, and tie the conduct ors with non-

metallic ties.

G. For connections to motors, transformers, and vibrat ing equipment,

stranded conductors shall be used only from the las t fixed point of

connection to the motors, transformers, or vibratin g equipment.

H. Use expanding foam or non-hardening duct-seal to se al conduits entering

a building, after installation of conductors.

I. Conductor and Cable Pulling:

1. Provide installation equipment that will prevent th e cutting or

abrasion of insulation during pulling. Use lubrican ts approved for

the cable.

2. Use nonmetallic pull ropes.

3. Attach pull ropes by means of either woven basket g rips or pulling

eyes attached directly to the conductors.

4. All conductors in a single conduit shall be pulled simultaneously.

5. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended maximum pu lling tensions

and sidewall pressure values.

J. No more than three branch circuits shall be install ed in any one

conduit.




26 05 19 - 6

K. When stripping stranded conductors, use a tool that does not damage the

conductor or remove conductor strands.

3.2 SPLICE AND TERMINATION INSTALLATION

A. Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure,

and tightened to manufacturer’s published torque va lues using a torque

screwdriver or wrench.

B. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory splices or

terminations have been installed, replace the splic es or terminations

at no additional cost to the Government.

3.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION

A. When using colored tape to identify phase, neutral, and ground

conductors larger than No. 8 AWG, apply tape in hal f-overlapping turns

for a minimum of 75 mm (3 inches) from terminal poi nts, and in junction

boxes, pullboxes, and manholes. Apply the last two laps of tape with no

tension to prevent possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered

by tape, apply tags to cable, stating size and insu lation type.

3.4 EXISTING CONDUCTORS

A. Unless specifically indicated on the plans, existin g conductors shall

not be reused.


A. Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recom mendations. In

addition, include the following:

1. Visual Inspection and Tests: Inspect physical condi tion.

2. Electrical tests:

a. After installation but before connection to utiliza tion devices,

such as fixtures, motors, or appliances, test condu ctors phase-

to-phase and phase-to-ground resistance with an ins ulation

resistance tester. Existing conductors to be reused shall also

be tested.

b. Applied voltage shall be 500 V DC for 300 V rated c able, and 1000

V DC for 600 V rated cable. Apply test for one minu te or until

reading is constant for 15 seconds, whichever is lo nger. Minimum

insulation resistance values shall not be less than 25 megohms

for 300 V rated cable and 100 megohms for 600 V rat ed cable.

c. Perform phase rotation test on all three-phase circ uits.

- - - END - - -




26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


testing of grounding and bonding equipment, indicat ed as grounding

equipment in this section.

B. C. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used intercha ngeably in this

section and have the same meaning.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTA LLATIONS:


B. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER COND UCTORS AND CABLES:

Low-voltage conductors.

C. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduit and

boxes.







supplements, and errata) form a part of this specif ication to the

extent referenced. Publications are referenced in t he text by

designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

B1-13...................Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper

Wire

B3-13...................Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed

Copper Wire

B8-11...................Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-

Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard,

or Soft



70E-15..................National Electrical Safety Code

99-15...................Health Care Facilities




26 05 26 - 2


44-14 ..................Thermoset-Insulated Wires a nd Cables

83-14 ..................Thermoplastic-Insulated Wir es and Cables

467-13 .................Grounding and Bonding Equip ment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be insulated s tranded copper,

except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be s olid copper.

Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding

conductors, except that wire sizes No. 4 AWG and la rger shall be

identified per NEC.

B. Bonding conductors shall be bare stranded copper, e xcept that sizes No.

10 AWG and smaller shall be bare solid copper. Bond ing conductors

shall be stranded for final connection to motors, t ransformers, and

vibrating equipment.

C. Conductor sizes shall not be less than shown on the drawings, or not

less than required by the NEC, whichever is greater .

D. Insulation: THWN-2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL



3.2 RACEWAY

A. Conduit Systems:

1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic c onduit systems

shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.

2. Non-metallic conduit systems, except non-metallic f eeder conduits

that carry a grounded conductor from exterior trans formers to

interior or building-mounted service entrance equip ment, shall

contain an equipment grounding conductor.

3. Metallic conduit that only contains a grounding con ductor, and is

provided for its mechanical protection, shall be bo nded to that

conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit .

4. Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanica l connection to

an electrical equipment housing by means of locknut and bushings or

adapters, shall be provided with grounding bushings . Connect




26 05 26 - 3

bushings with a equipment grounding conductor to th e equipment

ground bus.

B. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grou nding conductors

with all feeders, and power and lighting branch cir cuits.

C. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards:

1. Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pull box, junction

box, outlet box, device box, cabinets, and other en closures through

which the conductor passes (except for special grou nding systems for

intensive care units and other critical units shown ).

2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipmen t grounding

conductor termination.

E. Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mou nting screws. Ground

receptacles with a jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to

the device box ground screw and a jumper to the bra nch circuit

equipment grounding conductor.

F. Ground lighting fixtures to the equipment grounding conductor of the

wiring system. Fixtures connected with flexible con duit shall have a

green ground wire included with the power wires fro m the fixture

through the flexible conduit to the first outlet bo x.

G. Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shall be provided with a

ground lug for termination of the equipment groundi ng conductor.

H.

3.3 CORROSION INHIBITORS

A. When making grounding and bonding connections, appl y a corrosion

inhibitor to all contact surfaces. Use corrosion in hibitor appropriate

for protecting a connection between the metals used .

---END---




26 05 33 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation , and connection of

conduit, fittings, and boxes, to form complete, coo rdinated, grounded

raceway systems. Raceways are required for all wiri ng unless shown or

specified otherwise.

B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this spec ification, shall

mean any or all of the raceway types specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTA LLATIONS: General

electrical requirements and items that are common t o more than one

section of Division 26.

B. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRI CAL SYSTEMS:



C. Section 26 05 41, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTI ON: Underground

conduits.


Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 0 5 11, REQUIREMENTS

FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit six copies of the following in accordance wi th Section 26 05 11,

REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1. Shop Drawings:

b. Size and location of panels and pull-boxes.

c. Layout of required conduit penetrations through str uctural

elements.

d. Submit the following data for approval:

1) Raceway types and sizes.

2) Conduit bodies, connectors and fittings.

3) Junction and pull boxes, types and sizes.


following:

a. Certification by the manufacturer that raceways, co nduits,

conduit bodies, connectors, fittings, junction and pull boxes,




26 05 33 - 2

and all related equipment conform to the requiremen ts of the


b. Certification by the Contractor that raceways, cond uits, conduit

bodies, connectors, fittings, junction and pull box es, and all

related equipment have been properly installed.





designation only.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

C80.1-05................Electrical Rigid Steel Cond uit

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

6-07....................Electrical Rigid Metal Cond uit - Steel

50-95...................Enclosures for Electrical E quipment


514A-13.................Metallic Outlet Boxes

514B-12.................Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings

514C-07.................Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, F lush-Device Boxes

and Covers

651-11..................Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PV C Conduit and

Fittings

651A-11.................Type EB and A Rigid PVC Con duit

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA ):

TC-2-13.................Electrical Polyvinyl Chlori de (PVC) Tubing and

Conduit

TC-3-13.................PVC Fittings for Use with R igid PVC Conduit and

Tubing

FB1-12..................Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies

for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and

Cable

FB2.10-13...............Selection and Installation Guidelines for

Fittings for use with Non-Flexible Conduit or

Tubing (Rigid Metal Conduit, Intermediate




26 05 33 - 3

Metallic Conduit, and Electrical Metallic

Tubing)

FB2.20-12...............Selection and Installation Guidelines for

Fittings for use with Flexible Electrical

Conduit and Cable

F. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):

S100-2007...............North American Specificatio n for the Design of

Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Conduit Requirements General

1. Conduit within 5’ of the Steam Pit and within the S team Pit shall be

PVC Coated Rigid Metallic Steel Conduit (RMC). Appl y Copper Shield

anti-corrosion compound to all exposed pipe threads or exposed metal.

2. Conduit direct buried farther than 5’ from the Stea m Pit shall be

Schedule 80 PVC.

3. Conduit within 5’ of the Power Panel shall be PVC C oated Rigid

Metallic Steel Conduit (RMC).

4. All supports, connectors, and hardware shall be sta inless steel.

B. Conduit:

1. Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 13 mm (0.75-

inch).

2. Rigid Steel Metallic Conduit (RMC): Shall conform t o UL 6 and ANSI

C80.1.

8. Direct Burial Plastic Conduit: Shall conform to UL 651 and UL 651A,

heavy wall PVC or high density polyethylene (PE).

C. Conduit Fittings:

1. Rigid Steel Metallic Conduit Fittings:

a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1.

b. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, co nduit bodies,

and elbows: Only steel or malleable iron materials are

acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also

acceptable.

c. Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the

metal wall of an enclosure.

d. Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of a n insulating

insert, molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting.




26 05 33 - 4

Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic mate rial are not

permitted.

e. Erickson (Union-Type) and Set Screw Type Couplings: Approved for

use in concrete are permitted for use to complete a conduit run

where conduit is installed in concrete. Use set scr ews of case-

hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firml y seat in

conduit wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with

pliers is prohibited.

f. Sealing Fittings: Threaded cast iron type. Use cont inuous

drain-type sealing fittings to prevent passage of w ater vapor.

In concealed work, install fittings in flush steel boxes with

blank cover plates having the same finishes as that of other

electrical plates in the room.

6. Direct Burial Plastic Conduit Fittings: Fittings shall meet the

requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC3.

D. Conduit Supports:

1. Parts and Hardware: Stainless Steel.

2. Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpos e, having a

pre-assembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a

hanger rod.

3. 4. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Self-drillin g expansion

shields, or machine bolt expansion.

E. Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:

1. UL-50 and UL-514A.

2. Within the Steam Pit boxes shall be cast aluminum o r fiberglass.

3. Sheet Metal Boxes adjacent to the power panel shall be stainless

steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PENETRATIONS

A. Cutting or Holes:

2. Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new an d existing

structures with a diamond core drill or concrete sa w. Pneumatic

hammers, impact electric, hand, or manual hammer-ty pe drills are not

allowed, except when permitted by the /COR where wo rking space is

limited.




26 05 33 - 5

C. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations,

completely seal the gap around conduit to render it watertight, as

specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. In accordance with UL, NEC, NEMA, as shown on drawi ngs, and as

specified herein.

B. Raceway systems used for Essential Electrical Syste ms (EES) shall be

entirely independent of other raceway systems.

C. Install conduit as follows:

1. In complete mechanically and electrically continuou s runs before

pulling in cables or wires.

2. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or speci fied herein,

installation of all conduits shall be concealed wit hin finished

walls, floors, and ceilings.

3. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permi tted. Remove and

replace the damaged conduits with new conduits.

4. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling

height head room, walkways, or doorways.

5. Cut conduits square, ream, remove burrs, and draw u p tight.

6. Independently support conduit at 2.4 M (8 feet) on centers with

specified materials and as shown on drawings.

7. Do not use suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling su pporting members,

lighting fixtures, other conduits, cable tray, boxe s, piping, or

ducts to support conduits and conduit runs.

8. Support within 300 mm (12 inches) of changes of dir ection, and

within 300 mm (12 inches) of each enclosure to whic h connected.

9. Close ends of empty conduits with plugs or caps at the rough-in

stage until wires are pulled in, to prevent entry o f debris.

11. Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull-b oxes, and outlet

boxes with bonding type locknuts. For rigid steel a nd IMC conduit

installations, provide a locknut on the inside of t he enclosure,

made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connectio ns to junction

box covers.

12. Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is sp ecified in

Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.

13. Conduit bodies shall only be used for changes in di rection, and

shall not contain splices.




26 05 33 - 6

14. Do not use aluminum conduits in wet locations.

D. Conduit Bends:

1. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.

2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets and f or straightening

stubbed out conduits.

3. Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is proh ibited.

E. Layout and Homeruns:

1. Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, as shown on

drawings.

2. Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid inte rferences and

only after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been

submitted and approved by the COR.

3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION

A. In Concrete:

1. Conduit: PVC Coated Rigid Metallic Steel. 2. Align and run

conduit in direct lines.

2. Conduit shall not be installed within concrete exce pt where passing

horizontally through a vertical steam pit vault.

3. Installation of conduit in concrete slabs is prohib ited.

4. Make couplings and connections watertight. Use thre ad compounds

that are UL approved conductive type to ensure low resistance ground

continuity through the conduits. Tightening setscre ws with pliers

is prohibited.

3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, exposed con duit is only

permitted in steam pits and electrical rooms.

B. C. Conduit for Conductors 600 V and Below: PVC Coat ed Rigid

Metallic Steel Conduit.. Mixing different types of conduits in the

system is prohibited.

D. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.

E. Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or bea ms and secure with

conduit straps.

F. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2.4 M (8 feet)

intervals.

3.5 DIRECT BURIAL INSTALLATION

Refer to Section 26 05 41, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL C ONSTRUCTION.




26 05 33 - 7

3.6 WET OR DAMP LOCATIONS

A. Use PVC Coated Rigid Steel Metallic Conduits unless as shown on

drawings.

B. Provide sealing fittings to prevent passage of wate r vapor where

conduits pass from warm to cold locations, i.e., re frigerated spaces,

constant-temperature rooms, air-conditioned spaces, building exterior

walls, roofs, or similar spaces.

C. Use PVC Coated Rigid Metallic Steel or IMC conduit within 1.5 M (5

feet) of the exterior and below concrete building s labs in contact with

soil, gravel, or vapor barriers, unless as shown on drawings. Conduit

shall be half-lapped with 10 mil PVC tape before in stallation. After

installation, completely recoat or retape any damag ed areas of coating.

D. Conduits run on roof shall be supported with integr al galvanized lipped

steel channel, attached to UV-inhibited polycarbona te or polypropylene

blocks every 2.4 M (8 feet) with 9 mm (3/8-inch) ga lvanized threaded

rods, square washer and locknut. Conduits shall be attached to steel

channel with conduit clamps.

3.7 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Safe working load shall not exceed one-quarter of p roof test load of

fastening devices.

B. Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for s upporting individual

conduits.

C. Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze

hangers that are designed to support a load equal t o or greater than

the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hang er itself, and an

additional 90 kg (200 lbs). Attach each conduit wit h U-bolts or other

approved fasteners.

D. Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pu ll-boxes, fixtures,

suspended ceiling T-bars, angle supports, and simil ar items.

E. Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concret e:

1. New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concr ete inserts set

in place prior to placing the concrete.

2. Existing Construction:

a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 6 mm (0.25-in ch) bolt size

and not less than 28 mm (1.125 inch) in embedment.

b. Power set fasteners not less than 6 mm (0.25-inch) diameter with

depth of penetration not less than 75 mm (3 inch).




26 05 33 - 8

c. Use vibration and shock-resistant anchors and faste ners for

attaching to concrete ceilings.

F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts.

G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.

H. Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or ot her devices

specifically designed and approved for the applicat ion.

I. Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal

anchors, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is

prohibited.

J. Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten

conduit.

K. Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibi ted for all uses

except horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners w ithin walls.

L. Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and

supports in accordance with the NEC and as shown. P rovide supports for

cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining

collars.

3.8 BOX INSTALLATION

A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits:

1. Flush-mounted.

2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling,

construction, and finish.

B. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxe s where needed to

prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling-i n operations or

where more than the equivalent of 4-90 degree bends are necessary.

C. Locate pullboxes so that covers are accessible and easily removed.

Coordinate locations with piping and ductwork where installed above

ceilings.

D. Remove only knockouts as required. Plug unused open ings. Use threaded

plugs for cast metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal

boxes.

E. Outlet boxes mounted back-to-back in the same wall are prohibited. A

minimum 600 mm (24 inch) center-to-center lateral s pacing shall be

maintained between boxes.

F. Flush-mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be instal led with raised

covers so that the front face of raised cover is fl ush with the wall.




26 05 33 - 9

Surface-mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be inst alled with surface-

style flat or raised covers.

G. Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault circu it interrupter

(GFCI) receptacles is 100 mm (4 inches) square x 55 mm (2.125 inches)

deep, with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved.

H. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of all branch circuit

junction box covers.

I. Junction boxes to be labeled for voltage, service b reaker & panel, or

fire alarm system designation of equipment.

- - - E N D - - -




26 05 41 - 1

SECTION 26 05 41 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


underground ducts and raceways, and precast manhole s and pullboxes to

form a complete underground electrical raceway syst em.

B. The terms “duct” and “conduit” are used interchange ably in this

section.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS: Sealing of condui t penetrations.

B. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTA LLATIONS:


C. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRI CAL SYSTEMS:



D. Section 31 20 00, EARTH MOVING: Trenching, backfill , and compaction.





B. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manhol es, and pullboxes

with final arrangement of other utilities, site gra ding, and surface

features.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



requirements:

1. Shop Drawings:



b. Submit information on ducts, and. c. Proposed devia tions

from the drawings shall be clearly marked on the su bmittals. If

it is necessary to locate manholes, pullboxes, or d uct banks at

locations other than shown on the drawings, show th e proposed

locations accurately on scaled site drawings, and s ubmit to the

COR for approval prior to construction.




26 05 41 - 2

2. Certifications: Two weeks prior to the final inspec tion, submit the

following.

a. Certification by the manufacturer that the material s conform to

the requirements of the drawings and specifications .

b. Certification by the Contractor that the materials have been

properly installed, connected, and tested.





designation only.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

318-14/318M-14..........Building Code Requirements for Structural

Concrete & Commentary SP-66-

04................ACI Detailing Manual

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

77-14...................Underground Enclosure Integ rity


C478 REV A-15...........Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced

Concrete Manhole Sections

C858-10.................Underground Precast Concret e Utility Structures

C990-09.................Joints for Concrete Pipe, M anholes and Precast

Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint

Sealants.

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA ):

TC 2-13.................Electrical Polyvinyl Chlori de (PVC) Conduit

TC 3-15.................Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fi ttings for Use With

Rigid PVC Conduit And Tubing

TC 6 & 8-13.............Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pl astic Utilities Duct

For Underground Installations

TC 9-04.................Fittings For Polyvinyl Chlo ride (PVC) Plastic

Utilities Duct For Underground Installation

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


70E-15..................National Electrical Safety Code

G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

26 05 41 - 3




6-07....................Electrical Rigid Metal Cond uit-Steel


651-11..................Schedule 40, 80, Type EB an d A Rigid PVC

Conduit and Fittings

651A-11.................Schedule 40 and 80 High Den sity Polyethylene

(HDPE) Conduit

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTS

A. Number and sizes shall be as shown on the drawings.

B.

B. Ducts (direct-burial):

1. Plastic duct:

a. Schedule 80 PVC or HDPE conduit.

b. Duct shall be suitable for use with 90˚ C (167˚ F) rated

conductors.

2. Rigid metal conduit: UL 6 and NEMA RN1 galvanized r igid metal, half-

lap wrapped with 10 mil PVC tape.

2.2 WARNING TAPE

A. 4-mil polyethylene 75 mm (3 inches) wide detectable tape, red with

black letters, imprinted with “CAUTION - BURIED ELE CTRIC CABLE BELOW”

or similar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANHOLE AND PULLBOX INSTALLATION

A. Assembly and installation shall be per the requirem ents of the

manufacturer.

1. Install manholes and pullboxes level and plumb.

2. Units shall be installed on a 300 mm (12 inches) th ick level bed of

90% compacted granular fill, well-graded from the 2 5 mm (1 inch)

sieve to the No. 4 sieve. Granular fill shall be co mpacted with a

minimum of four passes with a plate compactor.

B. Access: Ensure the top of frames and covers are flu sh with finished

grade.

C. Grounding in Manholes:

1. Ground Rods in Manholes: Drive a ground rod into th e earth, through

the floor sleeve, after the manhole is set in place . Fill the sleeve

26 05 41 - 4




with sealant to make a watertight seal. Rods shall protrude

approximately 100 mm (4 inches) above the manhole f loor.

2. Install a No. 3/0 AWG bare copper ring grounding co nductor around

the inside perimeter of the manhole and anchor to t he walls with

metallic cable clips.

3. Connect the ring grounding conductor to the ground rod by an

exothermic welding process.

4. Bond the ring grounding conductor to the duct bank equipment

grounding conductors, the exposed non-current carry ing metal parts

of racks, sump covers, and like items in the manhol es with a minimum

No. 6 AWG bare copper jumper using an exothermic we lding process.

D. Steam Pit Lighting: Provide NEMA 3R lighting switch mounted no more

than 600 mm (2 feet) from top of ladder.

3.2 TRENCHING

A. Refer to Section 31 20 00, EARTH MOVING for trenchi ng, backfilling, and

compaction.

B. Before performing trenching work at existing facili ties, a Ground

Penetrating Radar Survey shall be carefully perform ed by a certified

technician to reveal all existing underground ducts , conduits, cables,

and other utility systems.

C. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduit s, and other

utilities to avoid damaging them.

D. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly.

E. For Concrete-Encased Ducts:

1. After excavation of the trench, stakes shall be dri ven in the bottom

of the trench at 1.2 M (4 feet) intervals to establ ish the grade and

route of the duct bank.

2. Pitch the trenches uniformly toward manholes or bot h ways from high

points between manholes for the required duct line drainage. Avoid

pitching the ducts toward buildings wherever possib le.

3. The walls of the trench may be used to form the sid e walls of the

duct bank, provided that the soil is self-supportin g and that the

concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclus ions. Forms are

required where the soil is not self-supporting.

4. After the concrete-encased duct has sufficiently cu red, the trench

shall be backfilled to grade with earth, and approp riate warning

tape installed.

26 05 41 - 5




F. Individual conduits to be installed under existing paved areas and

roads that cannot be disturbed shall be jacked into place using rigid

metal conduit, or bored using plastic utilities duc t or PVC conduit, as

approved by the COR.

3.3 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements:

1. Ducts shall be in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings,

and as specified.

2. Join and terminate ducts with fittings recommended by the

manufacturer.

3. Slope ducts to drain towards manholes and pullboxes , and away from

building and equipment entrances. Pitch not less th an 100 mm (4

inches) in 30 M (100 feet).

4. Underground conduit stub-ups and sweeps to equipmen t inside of

buildings shall be galvanized rigid metal conduit h alf-lap wrapped

with PVC tape, and shall extend a minimum of 1.5 M (5 feet) outside

the building foundation. Tops of conduits below bui lding slab shall

be minimum 610 mm (24 inches) below bottom of slab.

5. Stub-ups and sweeps to equipment mounted on outdoor concrete slabs

shall be galvanized rigid metal conduit half-lap wr apped with PVC

tape, and shall extend a minimum of 1.5 M (5 feet) away from the

edge of slab.

6. Install insulated grounding bushings on the conduit terminations.

7. Radius for sweeps shall be sufficient to accomplish pulls without

damage. Minimum radius shall be six times conduit d iameter.

8. All multiple conduit runs shall have conduit spacer s. Spacers shall

securely support and maintain uniform spacing of th e duct assembly a

minimum of 75 mm (3 inches) above the bottom of the trench during

the concrete pour. Spacer spacing shall not exceed 1.5 M (5 feet).

Secure spacers to ducts and earth to prevent floati ng during

concrete pour. Provide nonferrous tie wires to prev ent displacement

of the ducts during concrete pour. Tie wires shall not act as

substitute for spacers.

9. Duct lines shall be installed no less than 300 mm ( 12 inches) from

other utility systems, such as water, sewer, chille d water.

10. Clearances between individual ducts:

a. For similar services, not less than 75 mm (3 inches ).

26 05 41 - 6




b. For power and signal services, not less than 150 mm (6 inches).

11. Duct lines shall terminate at window openings in ma nhole walls as

shown on the drawings. All ducts shall be fitted wi th end bells.

12. Couple the ducts with proper couplings. Stagger cou plings in rows

and layers to ensure maximum strength and rigidity of the duct bank.

13. Keep ducts clean of earth, sand, or gravel, and sea l with tapered

plugs upon completion of each portion of the work.

14. Spare Ducts: Where spare ducts are shown, they shal l have a nylon

pull rope installed. They shall be capped at each e nd and labeled as

to location of the other end.

15. Duct Identification: Place continuous strip of warn ing tape

approximately 300 mm (12 inches) above ducts before backfilling

trenches. Warning tape shall be preprinted with pro per

identification.

16. Duct Sealing: Seal ducts, including spare ducts, at building

entrances and at outdoor terminations for equipment , with a suitable

non-hardening compound to prevent the entrance of f oreign objects

and material, moisture, and gases.

17. Use plastic ties to secure cables to insulators on cable arms. Use

minimum two ties per cable per insulator.

B. Concrete-Encased Ducts:

1. Install concrete-encased ducts for medium-voltage s ystems, low-

voltage systems, and signal systems, unless otherwi se shown on the

drawings.

2. Duct banks shall be single or multiple duct assembl ies encased in

concrete. Ducts shall be uniform in size and materi al throughout the

installation.

3. Tops of concrete-encased ducts shall be:

a. Not less than 600 mm (24 inches) and not less than shown on the

drawings, below finished grade.

b. Not less than 750 mm (30 inches) and not less than shown on the

drawings, below roads and other paved surfaces.

c. Additional burial depth shall be required in order to accomplish

NEC-required minimum bend radius of ducts.

d. Conduits crossing under grade slab construction joi nts shall be

installed a minimum of 1.2 M (4 feet) below slab.

26 05 41 - 7




4. Extend the concrete envelope encasing the ducts not less than 75 mm

(3 inches) beyond the outside walls of the outer du cts.

5. Within 3 M (10 feet} of building and manhole wall p enetrations,

install reinforcing steel bars at the top and botto m of each

concrete envelope to provide protection against ver tical shearing.

6. Install reinforcing steel bars at the top and botto m of each

concrete envelope of all ducts underneath roadways and parking

areas.

7. Where new ducts and concrete envelopes are to be jo ined to existing

manholes, pullboxes, ducts, and concrete envelopes, make the joints

with the proper fittings and fabricate the concrete envelopes to

ensure smooth durable transitions.

8. Duct joints in concrete may be placed side by side horizontally, but

shall be staggered at least 150 mm (6 inches) verti cally.

9. Pour each run of concrete envelope between manholes or other

terminations in one continuous pour. If more than o ne pour is

necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 19 mm

(0.75 inch) reinforcing rod dowels extending 450 mm (18 inches) into

concrete on both sides of joint near corners of env elope.

10. Pour concrete so that open spaces are uniformly fil led. Do not

agitate with power equipment unless approved by COR .

C. Direct-Burial Ducts:

1. Install direct-burial ducts only where shown on the drawings.

Provide direct-burial ducts only for low-voltage po wer and lighting

branch circuits.

2. Tops of ducts shall be:

a. Not less than 920 mm (36 inches) and not less than shown on the

drawings, below finished grade.

c. Additional burial depth shall be required in ord er to accomplish

NEC-required minimum bend radius of ducts.

3. Do not kink the ducts. Compaction shall not deform the ducts.

D. Connections to Manholes: Ducts connecting to manhol es shall be flared

to have an enlarged cross-section to provide additi onal shear strength.

Dimensions of the flared cross-section shall be lar ger than the

corresponding manhole opening dimensions by no less than 300 mm (12

inches) in each direction. Perimeter of the duct ba nk opening in the

manhole shall be flared toward the inside or keyed to provide a

26 05 41 - 8




positive interlock between the duct and the wall of the manhole. Use

vibrators when this portion of the encasement is po ured to ensure a

seal between the envelope and the wall of the struc ture.

E. Connections to Existing Manholes: For duct connecti ons to existing

manholes, break the structure wall out to the dimen sions required and

preserve the steel in the structure wall. Cut steel and extend into the

duct bank envelope. Chip the perimeter surface of t he duct bank opening

to form a key or flared surface, providing a positi ve connection with

the duct bank envelope.

F. Connections to Existing Ducts: Where connections to existing ducts are

indicated, excavate around the ducts as necessary. Cut off the ducts

and remove loose concrete from inside before instal ling new ducts.

Provide a reinforced-concrete collar, poured monoli thically with the

new ducts, to take the shear at the joint of the du ct banks.

G. Partially-Completed Ducts: During construction, whe rever a construction

joint is necessary in a duct bank, prevent debris s uch as mud and dirt

from entering ducts by providing suitable plugs. Fi t concrete envelope

of a partially completed ducts with reinforcing ste el extending a

minimum of 600 mm (2 feet) back into the envelope a nd a minimum of 600

mm (2 feet) beyond the end of the envelope. Provide one No. 4 bar in

each corner, 75 mm (3 inches) from the edge of the envelope. Secure

corner bars with two No. 3 ties, spaced approximate ly 300 mm (12

inches) apart. Restrain reinforcing assembly from m oving during pouring

of concrete.


A. Duct Testing and Cleaning:

1. Upon completion of the duct installation, a standar d flexible

mandrel shall be pulled through each duct to loosen particles of

earth, sand, or foreign material left in the duct, and to test for

out-of-round conditions.

2. The mandrel shall be not less than 300 mm (12 inche s) long, and

shall have a diameter not less than 13 mm (0.5 inch ) less than the

inside diameter of the duct. A brush with stiff bri stles shall then

be pulled through each duct to remove the loosened particles. The

diameter of the brush shall be the same as, or slig htly larger than,

the diameter of the duct.

26 05 41 - 9




3. If testing reveals obstructions or out-of-round con ditions, the

Contractor shall replace affected section(s) of duc t and retest to

the satisfaction of the COR.

---END---




26 27 26 - 1

SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


testing of wiring devices.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTA LLATIONS: General

electrical requirements that are common to more tha n one section of

Division 26.


Cables and wiring.



to ground for possible ground fault currents.

D. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduit and

boxes.


A. Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SE RVICES), in Section

26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS .

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Shop Drawings:



b. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting de tails,

construction materials, grade, and termination info rmation.

2. Manuals:

a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, comp anion copies

of complete maintenance and operating manuals, incl uding

technical data sheets and information for ordering replacement

parts.

b. If changes have been made to the maintenance and op erating

manuals originally submitted, submit updated mainte nance and

operating manuals two weeks prior to the final insp ection.




26 27 26 - 2


following.

a. Certification by the manufacturer that the wiring d evices conform

to the requirements of the drawings and specificati ons.

b. Certification by the Contractor that the wiring dev ices have been

properly installed and adjusted.



supplements and errata) form a part of this specifi cation to the extent

referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic

designation only.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


99-15...................Health Care Facilities


WD 1-10.................General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices

WD 6-12 ................Wiring Devices – Dimensiona l Specifications

D. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

5-11....................Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings

20-10...................General-Use Snap Switches

231-08..................Power Outlets


498-12..................Attachment Plugs and Recept acles

943-15..................Ground-Fault Circuit-Interr upters

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECEPTACLES

A. General: All receptacles shall comply with NEMA, NF PA, UL, and as shown

on the drawings.

1. Mounting straps shall be nickel plated brass, brass , with break-off

plaster ears, and shall include self-grounding feat ure. Terminal

screws shall be brass, brass plated or copper alloy metal.

2. Receptacles shall have provisions for back wiring w ith separate

metal clamp type terminals (four minimum) and side wiring from four

captively held binding screws.

B.

1. Ground Fault Current Interrupter (GFCI) Duplex Rece ptacles: Shall be

an integral unit, 20Amp hospital-grade, suitable fo r mounting in a




26 27 26 - 3

standard outlet box, with end-of-life indication an d provisions to

isolate the face due to improper wiring. GFCI recep tacles shall be

self-test receptacles in accordance with UL 943.

a. Ground fault interrupter shall consist of a differe ntial current

transformer, self-test, solid state sensing circuit ry and a

circuit interrupter switch. Device shall have nomin al sensitivity

to ground leakage current of 4-6 milliamperes and s hall function

to interrupt the current supply for any value of gr ound leakage

current above five milliamperes (+ or – 1 milliampe re) on the

load side of the device. Device shall have a minimu m nominal

tripping time of 0.025 second.

b. Self-test function shall be automatically initiated within 5

seconds after power is activated to the receptacles . Self-test

function shall be periodically and automatically pe rformed every

3 hours or less.

c. End-of-life indicator light shall be a persistent f lashing or

blinking light to indicate that the GFCI receptacle is no longer

in service.

C. Receptacles - 20, 30, and 50 ampere, 250 Volts: Sha ll be complete with

appropriate cord grip plug.

D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Shall consist of a duplex receptacle, mounted

in a cast aluminum box with a gasketed, weatherproo f, cast aluminum

metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle open ing. The cap shall

be permanently attached to the cover plate by a spr ing-hinged flap. The

weatherproof integrity shall not be affected when h eavy duty

specification or hospital grade attachment plug cap s are inserted.

Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted flush in the w all shall be

gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner.

E. Weatherproof Switches shall consist of a single tog gle switch mounted

in cast aluminum box with a gasketed, weatherproof cast aluminum cover

plate and cap over each device opening. The cap sha ll be permanently

attached to the cover plate by a spring-hinged flap .

2.2 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Toggle switches shall be totally enclosed tumbler t ype with nylon

bodies. Handles shall be ivory in color unless othe rwise specified or





26 27 26 - 4

1. Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be expl osion-proof type

in accordance with the NEC and as shown on the draw ings.

2. Shall be single unit toggle, butt contact, quiet AC type, heavy-duty

general-purpose use with an integral self grounding mounting strap

with break-off plasters ears and provisions for bac k wiring with

separate metal wiring clamps and side wiring with c aptively held

binding screws.

3. Switches shall be rated 20 amperes at 120-277 Volts AC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC an d as shown as on the

drawings.

B. Install wiring devices after wall construction and painting is

complete.

C. The ground terminal of each wiring device shall be bonded to the outlet

box with an approved green bonding jumper, and also connected to the

branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

D. Outlet boxes for toggle switches shall be mounted a djacent to the entry

ladder.

E.

F. Coordinate the electrical work with the work of oth er trades to ensure

that wiring device flush outlets are positioned wit h box openings aligned

with the face of the surrounding finish material. P ay special attention

to installations in cabinet work, and in connection with laboratory

equipment.

G. Exact field locations of floors, walls, partitions, doors, windows, and

equipment may vary from locations shown on the draw ings. Prior to

locating sleeves, boxes and chases for roughing-in of conduit and

equipment, the Contractor shall coordinate exact fi eld location of the

above items with other trades.

H. Install wall switches 1.2 M (48 inches) above floor , with the toggle OFF

position down.

I.

J. Install receptacles 450 mm (48 inches) above floor, and 152 mm (6 inches)

above counter backsplash or workbenches. Install sp ecific-use

receptacles at heights shown on the drawings.

K. Install horizontally mounted receptacles with the g round pin to the

26 27 26 - 5




right.

L. When required or recommended by the manufacturer, u se a torque

screwdriver. Tighten unused terminal screws.

M. Label device plates with a permanent adhesive label listing panel and

circuit feeding the wiring device.


A. Perform manufacturer’s required field checks in acc ordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations, and the latest NFPA 99. In addition,

include the following:

1. Visual Inspection and Tests:

a. Inspect physical and electrical conditions.

b. Vacuum-clean surface metal raceway interior. Clean metal raceway

exterior.

c. Test wiring devices for damaged conductors, high ci rcuit

resistance, poor connections, inadequate fault curr ent path,

defective devices, or similar problems using a port able

receptacle tester. Correct circuit conditions, remo ve

malfunctioning units and replace with new, and rete st as

specified above.

d. Test GFCI receptacles.

---END---




26 29 21 - 1

SECTION 26 29 21 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


fused and unfused disconnect switches (indicated as switches in this

section), and separately-enclosed circuit breakers for use in

electrical systems rated 600 V and below.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTA LLATIONS:



Low-voltage conductors.



for possible ground faults.

D. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits.





1.4 SUBMITTALS



requirements:

1. Shop Drawings:



b. Submit the following data for approval:

1) Electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, m aterials,

required clearances, terminations, weight, fuses, c ircuit

breakers, wiring and connection diagrams, accessori es, and

device nameplate data.

2. Manuals:

a. Submit complete maintenance and operating manuals i ncluding

technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and informa tion for

ordering fuses, circuit breakers, and replacement p arts.




26 29 21 - 2

1) Include schematic diagrams, with all terminals iden tified,

matching terminal identification in the enclosed sw itches and

circuit breakers.

2) Include information for testing, repair, troublesho oting,

assembly, and disassembly.





following.

a. Certification by the manufacturer that the enclosed switches and

circuit breakers conform to the requirements of the drawings and

specifications.

b. Certification by the Contractor that the enclosed s witches and

circuit breakers have been properly installed, adju sted, and

tested.





designation only.

B. International Code Council (ICC):

IBC-15..................International Building Code


FU l-12.................Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

KS l-13.................Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dea d-Front Switches

(600 Volts Maximum)




98-16...................Enclosed and Dead-Front Swi tches

248 1-11................Low Voltage Fuses

489-13..................Molded Case Circuit Breaker s and Circuit

Breaker Enclosures




26 29 21 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSED SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS

A. Switches shall be in accordance with NEMA, NEC, UL, as specified, and

as shown on the drawings.

B. Shall be NEMA classified 4X Stainless Steel, Alumin um, or Fiberglass as

noted on plans.

C. Shall be horsepower (HP) rated.

D. Shall have the following features:

1. Switch mechanism shall be the quick-make, quick-bre ak type.

2. Copper blades, visible in the open position.

3. An arc chute for each pole.

4. External operating handle shall indicate open and c losed positions,

and have lock-open padlocking provisions.

5. Mechanical interlock shall permit opening of the do or only when the

switch is in the open position, defeatable to permi t inspection.

6. Fuse holders for the sizes and types of fuses speci fied.

7. Solid neutral for each switch being installed in a circuit which

includes a neutral conductor.

8. Ground lugs for each ground conductor.

9. Enclosures:

a. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings.

b. Where the types of switch enclosures are not shown, they shall be

the NEMA types most suitable for the ambient enviro nmental

conditions.

c. Shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard gray baked enamel

paint over pretreated steel.

d. Safety Switches to be labeled as to voltage, fuse s ize, amperage,

equipment or service feeding and where it fed from (provide

similar data, i.e., V, A, Ckt #, Pnl #, etc.)

2.2 UNFUSED SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS

A. Shall be the same as fused switches, but without pr ovisions for fuses.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



26 29 21 - 4





A. Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recom mendations. In

addition, include the following:

1. Visual Inspection and Tests:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with specification s and approved

shop drawings.

b. Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condit ion.

c. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical co nnections by

calibrated torque-wrench method.

d. Vacuum-clean enclosure interior. Clean enclosure ex terior.

---END---




26 56 00 - 1

RSECTION 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies the furnishing, installation , and connection of

exterior fixtures, poles, and supports. The terms “ lighting fixtures”,

“fixture” and “luminaire” are used interchangeably.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

B. Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES: Finishes f or exterior light

poles and luminaires.

C. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTA LLATIONS: General

electrical requirements and items that are common t o more than one

section of Division 26.

D. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER COND UCTORS AND CABLES

(600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low voltage power and lighti ng wiring.

E. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRI CAL SYSTEMS:



F. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits,

fittings, and boxes for raceway systems.

G. Section 26 05 41, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTI ON: Underground

handholes and conduits.


A. Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SE RVICES), in Section

26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS .

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit the following information for each type of l ighting

fixture designated on the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE , arranged in

order of lighting fixture designation.

b. Material and construction details, include informat ion on housing

and optics system.

c. Physical dimensions and description.

d. Wiring schematic and connection diagram.




26 56 00 - 2

e. Installation details.

f. Energy efficiency data.

g. Photometric data based on laboratory tests complyin g with IES

Lighting Measurements testing and calculation guide s.

h. Lamp data including lumen output (initial and mean) , color

rendition index (CRI), rated life (hours), and colo r temperature

(degrees Kelvin).

i. Ballast data including ballast type, starting metho d, ambient

temperature, ballast factor, sound rating, system w atts, and

total harmonic distortion (THD).

j. For LED lighting fixtures, submit US DOE LED Lighti ng Facts

label, and IES L70 rated life.

k. Submit site plan showing all exterior lighting fixt ures with

fixture tags consistent with Lighting Fixture Sched ule as shown

on drawings. Site plan shall show computer generate d point–by-

point illumination calculations. Include lamp lumen and light

loss factors used in calculations.

2. Manuals:

a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, comp lete

maintenance and operating manuals, including techni cal data

sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for orderi ng replacement

parts.





following.

a. Certification by the Contractor that the exterior l ighting

systems have been properly installed and tested.





designation only.

B. Aluminum Association Inc. (AA):

AAH35.1-06..............Alloy and Temper Designatio n Systems for

Aluminum




26 56 00 - 3

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

C81.61-09 ..............Electrical Lamp Bases – Spe cifications for

Bases (Caps) for Electric Lamps


A123/A123M-12 ..........Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) C oatings on Iron and

Steel Products

A153/A153M-09...........Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on I ron and Steel

Hardware

B108-03a-08 ............Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mo ld Castings C1089-

13 ...............Spun Cast Prestressed Concrete Po les

E. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ( IESNA):

HB-9-00.................Lighting Handbook

LM-72-10................Directional Positioning of Photometric Data LM-

79-08................Approved Method for the Electr ical and

Photometric Measurements of Solid-Sate Lighting

Products

LM-80-08................Approved Method for Measuri ng Lumen Maintenance

of LED Light Sources

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA ):

ICS 2-00 (R2005) .......Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays

Rated 600 Volts

ICS 6-93 (R2006) .......Enclosures

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-11 ..................National Electrical Code (N EC)

H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

496-08 .................Lampholders

1598-08 ................Luminaires

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Luminaires, materials and equipment shall be in acc ordance with NEC,

UL, ANSI, and as shown on the drawings and specifie d.

2.2 LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires shall be weatherproof, heavy duty, outdo or types designed

for efficient light utilization, adequate dissipati on of lamp and

ballast heat, and safe cleaning and relamping.

26 56 00 - 4




B. Illumination distribution patterns, BUG ratings and cutoff types as

defined by the IESNA shall be as shown on the drawi ngs.

C. Incorporate ballasts in the luminaire housing, exce pt where otherwise


D. Lenses shall be frame-mounted, heat-resistant, boro silicate glass, with

prismatic refractors, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Attach

the frame to the luminaire housing by hinges or cha in. Use heat and

aging-resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and cush ion lenses and

refractors in luminaire doors.

E. F. Pre-wire internal components to terminal strips at the factory.

G. Bracket-mounted luminaires shall have leveling prov isions and clamp-

type adjustable slip-fitters with locking screws.

H. Materials shall be rustproof. Latches and fittings shall be non-

ferrous metal.

I. Provide manufacturer's standard finish, as schedule d on the drawings.

Where indicated on drawings, match finish process a nd color of pole or

support materials.

J. Luminaires shall carry factory labels, showing comp lete, specific lamp

and ballast information.

2.3 LAMPS

A. LED sources shall meet the following requirements:

1. Operating temperature rating shall be between -40 d egrees C (-40

degrees F) and 50 degrees C (120 degrees F).

2. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 5000K.

3. Color Rendering Index (CRI): ≥ 85.

4. The manufacturer shall have performed reliability t ests on the LEDs

luminaires complying with Illuminating Engineering Society (IES)

LM79 for photometric performance and LM80 for lumen maintenance and

L70 life.

F. Mercury vapor lamps shall not be used.

2.4 LED DRIVERS

A. LED drivers shall meet the following requirements:

1. Drivers shall have a minimum efficiency of 85%.

2. Starting Temperature: -40 degrees C (-40 degrees F) .

3. Input Voltage: 120 to 480 (±10%) volt.

4. Power Supplies: Class I or II output.

26 56 00 - 5




5. Surge Protection: The system must survive 250 repet itive strikes of

“C Low” (C Low: 6kV/1.2 x 50 µs, 10kA/8 x 20 µs) waveforms at 1-

minute intervals with less than 10% degradation in clamping voltage.

“C Low” waveforms are as defined in IEEE/ASNI C62.4 1.2-2002,

Scenario 1 Location Category C.

6. Power Factor (PF): ≥ 0.90.

7. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): ≤ 20%.

8. Comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer R FI/EMI Standards.

9. Drivers shall be reduction of hazardous substances (ROHS)-compliant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lighting in accordance with the NEC, as sho wn on the drawings,

and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendatio ns.


Verify operation after installing luminaires and en ergizing circuits.

- - - E N D - - -




SECTION 31 20 00 EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. This section specifies the requirements for furnish ing all equipment,

materials, labor, tools, and techniques for earthwo rk including, but

not limited to, the following:

1. Site preparation.

2. Excavation.

3. Underpinning.

4. Filling and backfilling.

5. Grading.

6. Soil Disposal.

7. Clean Up.

1.2 DEFINITIONS:

A. Unsuitable Materials:

1. Fills: Topsoil; frozen materials; construction mate rials and

materials subject to decomposition; clods of clay a nd stones larger

than 75 mm (3 inches); organic material, including silts, which are

unstable; and inorganic materials, including silts, too wet to be

stable and any material with a liquid limit and pla sticity index

exceeding 40 and 15 respectively. Unsatisfactory so ils also include

satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum

moisture content at time of compaction, as defined by ASTM D698.

2. Existing Subgrade (Except Footing Subgrade): Same m aterials as

1.2.A.1, that are not capable of direct support of slabs, pavement,

and similar items with possible exception of improv ement by

compaction, proofrolling, or similar methods.

3. Existing Subgrade (Footings Only): Same as paragrap h 1, but no fill

or backfill. If materials differ from design requir ements, excavate

to acceptable strata subject to COR's approval.

B. Building Earthwork: Earthwork operations required i n area enclosed by a

line located 1500 mm (5 feet) outside of principal building perimeter.

It also includes earthwork required for auxiliary s tructures and

buildings.

C. Trench Earthwork: Trenchwork required for utility l ines.




31 20 00 - 2

D. Site Earthwork: Earthwork operations required in ar ea outside of a line

located 1500 mm (5 feet) outside of principal build ing perimeter and

within new construction area with exceptions noted above.

E. Degree of compaction: Degree of compaction is expre ssed as a percentage

of maximum density obtained by laboratory test proc edure. This

percentage of maximum density is obtained through u se of data provided

from results of field test procedures presented in ASTM D1556, ASTM

D2167, and ASTM D6938.

F. Fill: Satisfactory soil materials used to raise exi sting grades. In the

Construction Documents, the term “fill” means fill or backfill as

appropriate.

G. Backfill: Soil materials or controlled low strength material used to

fill an excavation.

H. Unauthorized excavation: Removal of materials beyon d indicated sub-

grade elevations or indicated lines and dimensions without written

authorization by the COR. No payment will be made f or unauthorized

excavation or remedial work required to correct una uthorized

excavation.

I. Authorized additional excavation: Removal of additi onal material

authorized by the COR based on the determination by the Government’s

soils testing agency that unsuitable bearing materi als are encountered

at required sub-grade elevations. Removal of unsuit able material and

its replacement as directed will be paid on basis o f Conditions of the

Contract relative to changes in work.

J. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted so il layer immediately

below granular sub-base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

K. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, cu rbs, mechanical and

electrical appurtenances, or other man-made station ary features

constructed above or below the ground surface.

L. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site fo r use as fill or

backfill.

M. Drainage course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade use d to minimize

capillary flow of pore water.

N. Bedding course: Layer placed over the excavated sub -grade in a trench

before laying pipe. Bedding course shall extend up to the springline

of the pipe.

31 20 00 - 3




O. Sub-base Course: Layer placed between the sub-grade and base course for

asphalt paving or layer placed between the sub-grad e and a concrete

pavement or walk.

P. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, condui ts, ducts, and

cables as well as underground services within build ings.

Q. Debris: Debris includes all materials located withi n the designated

work area not covered in the other definitions and shall include but

not be limited to items like vehicles, equipment, a ppliances, building

materials or remains thereof, tires, any solid or l iquid chemicals or

products stored or found in containers or spilled o n the ground.

R. Contaminated soils: Soil that contains contaminates as defined and

determined by the COR or the Government’s testing a gency.

1.3 RELATED WORK:



B. Safety requirements, protection of existing utiliti es, fire protection

services, existing equipment, roads, and pavements: Section 01 00 00,


C. Subsurface Investigation: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS,

Article, PHYSICAL DATA.

D. Erosion Control: Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRO NMENTAL CONTROLS,

and Section 32 90 00, PLANTING.

E. Site preparation: Section 31 23 19, DEWATERING, Sec tion 02 41 00,

DEMOLITION, and Section 02 42 00 CUTTING, REMOVAL, DEMOLITION,

RESTORATION, AND PATCHING.

F. Paving sub-grade requirements: Section 32 12 16, AS PHALT PAVING.

1.4 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION:

A. Unclassified Excavation: Removal and disposal of pa vements and other

man-made obstructions visible on surface; utilities , and other items

including underground structures indicated to be de molished and

removed; together with any type of materials regard less of character of

material and obstructions encountered.

1.5 SUBMITTALS:


DATA, AND SAMPLES.

31 20 00 - 4




B. Furnish to COR:

1. Contactor shall furnish resumes with all personnel involved in the

project including Project Manager, Superintendent, and on-site

Engineer. Project Manager and Superintendent should have at least 3

years of experience on projects of similar size.

2. Soil samples.

a. Classification in accordance with ASTM D2487 for ea ch on-site or

borrow soil material proposed for fill, backfill, e ngineered

fill, or structural fill.

b. Laboratory compaction curve in accordance with ASTM D698 for each

on site or borrow soil material proposed for fill, backfill,

engineered fill, or structural fill.

c. Test reports for compliance with ASTM D2940 require ments for

subbase material.

d. Pre-excavation photographs and videotape in the vic inity of the

existing structures to document existing site featu res, including

surfaces finishes, cracks, or other structural blem ishes that

might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations.

3. Contractor shall submit procedure and location for disposal of

unused satisfactory material. Proposed source of bo rrow material.

Notification of encountering rock in the project. A dvance notice on

the opening of excavation or borrow areas. Advance notice on

shoulder construction for rigid pavements.




only.

B. American Association of State Highway and Transport ation Officials

(AASHTO):

T99-10..................Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density

Relations of Soils Using a 2.5 kg (5.5 lb)

Rammer and a 305 mm (12 inch) Drop

T180-10.................Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density

Relations of Soils using a 4.54 kg (10 lb)

Rammer and a 457 mm (18 inch) Drop


C33-03..................Concrete Aggregate

31 20 00 - 5




D448-08.................Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate

for Road and Bridge Construction

D698-07e1...............Standard Test Method for La boratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort

(12,400 ft. lbf/ft 3 (600 kN m/m 3))

D1140-00................Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No.

200 (75-micrometer) Sieve


Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method

D1557-09................Standard Test Methods for L aboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

(56,000 ft-lbf/ft 3 (2700 kN m/m 3))


Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon

Method

D2487-11................Standard Classification of Soils for

Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil

Classification System)

D2940-09................Standard Specifications for Graded Aggregate

Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or

Airports

D6938-10................Standard Test Method for In -Place Density and

Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth

D. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE):

J732-07.................Specification Definitions - Loaders

J1179-08................Hydraulic Excavator and Bac khoe Digging Forces

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. General: Provide borrow soil material when sufficie nt satisfactory

soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Fills: Material in compliance with ASTM D2487 Soil Classification

Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, SM, SC, and ML, or any c ombination of these

groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 75 mm (3 inches) in any

dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetat ion, and other

deleterious matter. Material approved from on site or off site sources

31 20 00 - 6




having a minimum dry density of 1760 kg/m3 (110 pcf ), a maximum

Plasticity Index of 15, and a maximum Liquid Limit of 40.

C. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded m ixture of compliance

with ASTM D2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, SM, SC,

and ML, or any combination of these groups, or as a pproved by the

Engineer or material with at least 90 percent passi ng a 37.5-mm (1 1/2-

inch) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a 75-µm (No. 200)

sieve, per ASTM D2940;.

D. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture o f natural or crushed

gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; except

with 100 percent passing a 25 mm (1 inch) sieve and not more than 8

percent passing a 75- µm (No. 200) sieve.

E. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of c rushed stone, or

crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D448; coarse-aggr egate grading Size

57; with 100 percent passing a 37.5 mm (1 1/2-inch) sieve and 0 to 5

percent passing a 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve.

F. Granular Fill:

2. Bedding for sanitary and storm sewer pipe, crush ed stone or gravel

graded from 13 mm (1/2 inch) to 4.75 mm (No 4), per ASTM D2940.

G. Requirements for Offsite Soils: Offsite soils broug ht in for use as

backfill shall be tested for TPH, BTEX and full TCL P including

ignitability, corrosivity and reactivity. Backfill shall contain less

than 100 parts per million (ppm) of total hydrocarb ons (TPH) and less

than 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene, Toleune, Ethyl B enzene, and Xylene

(BTEX) and shall not fail the TCLP test. TPH concen trations shall be

determined by using EPA 600/4-79/020 Method 418.1. BTEX concentrations

shall be determined by using EPA SW-846.3-3a Method 5030/8020. TCLP

shall be performed in accordance with EPA SW-846.3- 3a Method 1311.

Provide Borrow Site Testing for TPH, BTEX and TCLP from a composite

sample of material from the borrow site, with at le ast one test from

each borrow site.

H. Buried Warning and Identification Tape: Polyethylen e plastic and

metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-r esistant

polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured spec ifically for warning

and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3

inch minimum width, color coded as specific below f or the intended

utility with warning and identification imprinted i n bold black letters

31 20 00 - 7




continuously over the entire tape length. Warning a nd identification

to read, “CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE B ELOW” or similar

wording. Color and printing shall be permanent, Una ffected by moisture

or soil. Warning tape color codes:

Red: Electric

Blue: Water Systems

Green: Sewer Systems

White: Steam Systems

I. Warning Tape for Metallic Piping: Acid and alkali-r esistant

polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing

requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0.076

mm (0.003 inch). Tape shall have a minimum strength of 10.3 MPa (1500

psi) lengthwise, and 8.6 MPa (1250 psi) crosswise, with a maximum 350

percent elongation.

J. Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping: Po lyethylene plastic

tape conforming to the width, color, and printing r equirements

specified above. Minimum thickness of the tape shal l be 0.102 mm

(0.004 inch). Tape shall have a minimum strength of 10.3 MPa (1500 psi)

lengthwise and 8.6 MPa (1250 psi) crosswise. Tape s hall be

manufactured with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of

enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 0.9 m

(3 feet) deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective

jacket or provide with other means of corrosion pro tection.

K. Detection Wire For Non-Metallic Piping: Detection w ire shall be

Insulated single strand, solid copper with a minimu m of 12 AWG.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE PREPARATION:

A. Clearing: Clear within limits of earthwork operatio ns as shown. Work

includes removal of trees, shrubs, fences, foundati ons, incidental

structures, paving, debris, trash, and other obstru ctions. Remove

materials from Medical Center Property.

B. Grubbing: Remove stumps and roots 75 mm (3 inch) an d larger diameter.

Undisturbed sound stumps, roots up to 75 mm (3 inch ) diameter, and

nonperishable solid objects a minimum of 900 mm (3 feet) below subgrade

or finished embankment may be left.

31 20 00 - 8




C. Trees and Shrubs: Trees and shrubs, not shown for r emoval, may be

removed from areas within 4500 mm (15 feet) of new construction and

2250 mm (7.5 feet) of utility lines when removal is approved in advance

by COR. Remove materials from Medical Center Proper ty. Box, and

otherwise protect from damage, existing trees and s hrubs which are not

shown to be removed in construction area. Immediate ly repair damage to

existing trees and shrubs by trimming, cleaning and painting damaged

areas, including roots, in accordance with standard industry

horticultural practice for the geographic area and plant species. Do

not store building materials closer to trees and sh rubs, that are to

remain, than farthest extension of their limbs.

D. Stripping Topsoil: Strip topsoil from within limits of earthwork

operations as specified. Topsoil shall be a fertile , friable, natural

topsoil of loamy character and characteristic of lo cality. Topsoil

shall be capable of growing healthy horticultural c rops of grasses.

Stockpile topsoil and protect as directed by COR. E liminate foreign

materials, such as weeds, roots, stones, subsoil, f rozen clods, and

similar foreign materials larger than 0.014 m3 (1/2 cubic foot) in

volume, from soil as it is stockpiled. Retain topso il on station.

Remove foreign materials larger than 50 mm (2 inche s) in any dimension

from topsoil used in final grading. Topsoil work, s uch as stripping,

stockpiling, and similar topsoil work shall not, un der any

circumstances, be carried out when soil is wet so t hat the composition

of the soil will be destroyed.

E. Concrete Slabs and Paving: Score deeply or saw cut to insure a neat,

straight cut, sections of existing concrete slabs a nd paving to be

removed where excavation or trenching occurs. Exten d pavement section

to be removed a minimum of 300 mm (12 inches) on ea ch side of widest

part of trench excavation and insure final score li nes are

approximately parallel unless otherwise indicated. Remove material from

Medical Center Property.

F. Lines and Grades: Registered Professional Land Surv eyor or Registered

Civil Engineer, specified in Section 01 00 00, GENE RAL REQUIREMENTS,

shall establish lines and grades.

1. Grades shall conform to elevations indicated on pla ns within the

tolerances herein specified. Generally grades shall be established

to provide a smooth surface, free from irregular su rface changes.

31 20 00 - 9




Grading shall comply with compaction requirements a nd grade cross

sections, lines, and elevations indicated. Where sp ot grades are

indicated the grade shall be established based on i nterpolation of

the elevations between the spot grades while mainta ining appropriate

transition at structures and paving and uninterrupt ed drainage flow

into inlets.

2. Locations of existing elevations indicated on plans are from a

site survey that measured spot elevations and subse quently generated

existing contours and spot elevations. Proposed spo t elevations

shall match existing elevations for restoration wor k. Contractor is

responsible to notify COR of any differences betwee n existing

elevations shown on plans and those encountered on site by

Surveyor/Engineer described above. Notify COR of an y differences

between existing or constructed grades, as compared to those shown

on the plans.

3. Subsequent to establishment of lines and grades, Co ntractor will be

responsible for any additional cut and/or fill requ ired to ensure

that site is graded to conform to elevations indica ted on plans.

4. Finish grading is specified in Section 32 90 00, PL ANTING.

G. Disposal: All materials removed from the property s hall be disposed of

at a legally approved site, for the specific materi als, and all

removals shall be in accordance with all applicable Federal, State and

local regulations. No burning of materials is permi tted onsite.

3.2 EXCAVATION:

A. Shoring, Sheeting and Bracing: Shore, brace, or slo pe, its angle of

repose or to an angle considered acceptable by the COR, banks of

excavations to protect workmen, banks, adjacent pav ing, structures, and

utilities.

1. Design of the temporary support of excavation syste m is the

responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor sh all submit a

Shoring and Sheeting plan for approval 15 days prio r to starting

work. Submit drawings and calculations, certified b y a registered

professional engineer, describing the methods for s horing and

sheeting of excavations. Shoring, including sheet p iling, shall be

furnished and installed as necessary to protect wor kmen, banks,

adjacent paving, structures, and utilities. Shoring , bracing, and

31 20 00 - 10




sheeting shall be removed as excavations are backfi lled, in a manner

to prevent caving.

2. Construction of the support of excavation system sh all not interfere

with the permanent structure and may begin only aft er a review by

the COR.

3. Extend shoring and bracing to a minimum of 1500 mm (5 feet) below

the bottom of excavation. Shore excavations that ar e carried below

elevations of adjacent existing foundations.

4. If bearing material of any foundation is disturbed by excavating,

improper shoring or removal of existing or temporar y shoring,

placing of backfill, and similar operations, the Co ntractor shall

provide a concrete fill support in compliance with specifications

Section 31 23 23.33, FLOWABLE FILL, under disturbed foundations, as

directed by COR, at no additional cost to the Gover nment. Do not

remove shoring until permanent work in excavation h as been inspected

and approved by COR.

5. The Contractor is required to hire a Professional G eotechnical

Engineer to provide inspection of excavations and s oil/groundwater

conditions throughout construction. The Geotechnica l Engineer shall

be responsible for performing pre-construction and periodic site

visits throughout construction to assess site condi tions. The

Geotechnical Engineer shall update the excavation, sheeting and

dewatering plans as construction progresses to refl ect changing

conditions and shall submit an updated plan if nece ssary. A written

report shall be submitted, at least monthly, inform ing the

Contractor and COR of the status of the plan and an accounting of

the Contractor's adherence to the plan addressing a ny present or

potential problems. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be available to

meet with the COR at any time throughout the contra ct duration.

B. Subgrade Protection: Protect subgrades from softeni ng, undermining,

washout, or damage by rain or water accumulation. R eroute surface

water runoff from excavated areas and not allow wat er to accumulate in

excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as tempo rary drainage

ditches. When subgrade for foundations has been dis turbed by water,

remove disturbed material to firm undisturbed mater ial after water is

brought under control. Replace disturbed subgrade i n trenches with

concrete or material approved by the COR.

31 20 00 - 11




C. Trench Earthwork:

1. Utility trenches (except sanitary and storm sewer):

a. Excavate to a width as necessary for sheeting and b racing and

proper performance of the work.

b. Grade bottom of trenches with bell holes scooped ou t to provide a

uniform bearing.

c. Support piping on suitable undisturbed earth unless a mechanical

support is shown. Unstable material removed from th e bottom of

the trench or excavation shall be replaced with sel ect granular

material placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm (6 i nches) loose

thickness.

d. Length of open trench in advance of piping laying s hall not be

greater than is authorized by COR.

e. Provide buried utility lines with utility identific ation tape.

Bury tape 300 mm (12 inches) below finished grade; under

pavements and slabs, bury tape 150 mm (6 inches) be low top of

subgrade

f. Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic pip ing at a

distance not to exceed 300 mm (12 inches) above the top of pipe.

The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken, fr om manhole to

manhole. The ends of the wire shall terminate insid e the

manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 0.9 m (3

feet) of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. The

wire shall remain insulated over its entire length. The wire

shall enter manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame,

and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the

chimney seal. For force mains, the wire shall termi nate in the

valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.

g. Initial backfill material shall be placed and compa cted with

approved tampers to a height of at least one foot a bove the

utility pipe or conduit. The backfill shall be brou ght up evenly

on both sides of the pipe for the full length of th e pipe. Care

shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under

the haunches of the pipe. Except as specified other wise in the

individual piping section, provide bedding for buri ed piping in

accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specif ied herein.

Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 pe rcent of ASTM

31 20 00 - 12




D 698 maximum density. Plastic piping shall have b edding to

spring line of pipe. Provide materials as follows:

1) Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size

of 40 mm (1.5 inches), including various graded san ds and

gravels containing small percentages of fines, gene rally

granular and noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil T ypes GW,

GP, SW, and SP are included in this class as specif ied in ASTM

D2487.

2. Storm sewer trenches:

a. Trench width below a point 150 mm (6 inches) above top of pipe

shall be 600 mm (24 inches) maximum for pipe up to and including

300 mm (12 inches) diameter, and four-thirds diamet er of pipe

plus 200 mm (8 inches) for pipe larger than 300 mm (12 inches).

Width of trench above that level shall be as necess ary for

sheeting and bracing and proper performance of the work.

1) Bed bottom quadrant of pipe on suitable undisturbed soil or

granular fill. Unstable material removed from the b ottom of

the trench or excavation shall be replaced with sel ect

granular material placed in layers not exceeding 15 0 mm (6

inches) loose thickness.1) Undisturbed: Bell holes shall be no

larger than necessary for jointing. Backfill up to a point 300

mm (12 inches) above top of pipe shall be clean ear th placed

and tamped by hand.

2) Granular Fill: Depth of fill shall be a minimum of 75 mm (3

inches) plus one sixth of pipe diameter below pipe to 300 mm

(12 inches) above top of pipe. Place and tamp fill material by

hand.

b. Place and compact as specified remainder of backfil l using

acceptable excavated materials. Do not use unsuitab le materials.

c. Use granular fill for bedding where rock or rocky m aterials are

excavated.

d. Provide buried utility lines with utility identific ation tape.

Bury tape 300 mm (12 inches) below finished grade; under

pavements and slabs, bury tape 150 mm (6 inches) be low top of

subgrade

e. Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic pip ing at a

distance not to exceed 300 mm (12 inches) above the top of pipe.

31 20 00 - 13




The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken, fr om manhole to

manhole. The ends of the wire shall terminate insid e the

manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 0.9 m (3

feet) of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. The

wire shall remain insulated over it's entire length . The wire

shall enter manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame,

and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the

chimney seal. For force mains, the wire shall termi nate in the

valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.

f. Initial backfill material shall be placed and compa cted with

approved tampers to a height of at least one foot a bove the

utility pipe or conduit. The backfill shall be brou ght up evenly

on both sides of the pipe for the full length of th e pipe. Care

shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under

the haunches of the pipe. Except as specified other wise in the

individual piping section, provide bedding for buri ed piping in

accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specif ied herein.

Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 pe rcent of ASTM

D698 maximum density. Plastic piping shall have be dding to

spring line of pipe. Provide materials as follows:

1) Class I: Angular, 6 to 40 mm (0.25 to 1.5 inches), graded

stone, including a number of fill materials that ha ve regional

significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, and

crushed shells.

D. Site Earthwork: Earth excavation includes excavatin g pavements and

obstructions visible on surface; underground struct ures, utilities, and

other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and

other materials not classified as rock or unauthori zed excavation.

Excavation shall be accomplished as required by dra wings and

specifications. Excavate to indicated elevations an d dimensions within

a tolerance of plus or minus 25 mm (1 inch). Extend excavations a

sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete

formwork, for installing services and other constru ction, complying

with OSHA requirements, and for inspections. Remove subgrade materials

that are determined by COR as unsuitable, and repla ce with acceptable

material. If there is a question as to whether mate rial is unsuitable

or not, the contractor shall obtain samples of the material, under the

31 20 00 - 14




direction of the COR, and the materials shall be ex amined by an

independent testing laboratory for soil classificat ion to determine

whether it is unsuitable or not. When unsuitable ma terial is

encountered and removed, contract price and time wi ll be adjusted in

accordance with Articles, DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS , CHANGES and

CHANGES-SUPPLEMENT of the GENERAL CONDITIONS as app licable. Adjustments

to be based on volume in cut section only.

1. Site Grading:

a. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existi ng grades and

new grades.

b. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high s pots to comply

with required surface tolerances.

c. Slope grades to direct water away from buildings an d to prevent

ponds from forming where not designed. Finish subgr ades to

required elevations within the following tolerances :

1) Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 25 mm (1 inch) .

2) Walks: Plus or minus 6 mm (1/4 inch).

3) Pavements: Plus or minus 6 mm (1/4 inch).

3.3 UNDERPINNING:

A. Design of the underpinning system is the responsibi lity of the

Contractor and should be designed by a registered p rofessional engineer

and is subject to review and approval by the COR. U nderpinning of

existing building foundations, as indicated on stru ctural drawings, or

where excavation undermines existing foundations, s hall be accomplished

in the following manner:

1. Make general excavation for new construction, where new foundations

are to be below existing foundations, to elevation of new

foundations (or sized stone subbase), maintaining a 45 degree sloped

berm.

2. For underpinning pits, underpin existing wall found ations by

excavating 1200 mm (4 feet) wide pits to depth show n on drawings

skipping 3 sections at any one time so as to mainta in support for

wall at all times.

3. Underpin intervening sections one at a time; no adj acent sections

shall be underpinned until concrete in adjacent sec tions shall have

reached 20 MPa (2500 psi) strength and have been dr y packed with

non-shrink grout to obtain positive bearing. Sheet and brace

31 20 00 - 15




underpinning pits if soil will not stand on a verti cal cut during

this operation, or as required for safety of workme n. Repack any

voids behind sheeting to prevent sloughing which co uld cause

settlement of existing foundations. Contractor perf orming this

portion of work shall have been prequalified by COR as having

previously performed successfully this type of work or will

demonstrate his capability for successfully perform ing this work. It

shall be sole responsibility of the Contractor to g uard against

objectionable movement or settlement and to preserv e integrity of

existing structures.

4. The tip elevation of the underpinning pits shall be a minimum of 900

mm (3 feet) below the adjacent excavation elevation .

5. Subgrades at the tip of the underpinning pit shall be clean, dry,

and free of debris and shall be observed by the COR prior to

concrete placement.

6. Concrete shall not be free fall greater than 3000 m m (10 feet) into

the pit.

3.4 FILLING AND BACKFILLING:

A. General: Do not fill or backfill until all debris, water,

unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and de leterious materials

have been removed from excavation. For fill and bac kfill, use excavated

materials and borrow meeting the criteria specified herein, as

applicable. Borrow will be supplied at no additiona l cost to the

Government. Do not use unsuitable excavated materia ls. Do not backfill

until foundation walls have been completed above gr ade and adequately

braced, waterproofing or dampproofing applied, foun dation drainage, and

pipes coming in contact with backfill have been ins talled and work

inspected and approved by COR.

B. Placing: Place materials in horizontal layers not e xceeding 200 mm (8

inches) in loose depth for material compacted by he avy compaction

equipment, and not more than 100 mm (4 inches) in l oose depth for

material compacted by hand-operated tampers and the n compacted. Place

backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to

required elevations, and uniformly along the full l ength of each

structure. Place no material on surfaces that are m uddy, frozen, or

contain frost.

31 20 00 - 16




C. Compaction: Compact with approved tamping rollers, sheepsfoot rollers,

pneumatic tired rollers, steel wheeled rollers, vib rator compactors, or

other approved equipment (hand or mechanized) well suited to soil being

compacted. Do not operate mechanized vibratory comp action equipment

within 3000 mm (10 feet) of new or existing buildin g walls without

prior approval of COR. Moisten or aerate material a s necessary to

provide moisture content that will readily facilita te obtaining

specified compaction with equipment used. Backfill adjacent to any and

all types of structures shall be placed and compact ed to at least 90

percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive mat erials or 95 percent

laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materia ls to prevent

wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the structure.

Compact soil to not less than the following percent ages of maximum dry

density, according to ASTM D698 or ASTM D1557 as sp ecified below:

1. Fills, Embankments, and Backfill

a. Under proposed structures, building slabs, steps, a nd paved

areas, scarify and recompact top 300 mm (12 inches) of existing

subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill materia l in

accordance with ASTM D698 95 percent.

b. Curbs, curbs and gutters, ASTM D698 95 percent.

c. Under Sidewalks, scarify and recompact top 150 mm ( 6 inches)

below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill o r fill

material in accordance with ASTM D698 95 percent.

d. Landscaped areas, top 400 mm (16 inches), ASTM D698 85 percent.

e. Landscaped areas, below 400 mm (16 inches) of finis hed grade,

ASTM D698 90 percent.

D. Borrow Material: Borrow material shall be selected to meet the

requirements and conditions of the particular fill or embankment for

which it is to be used. Borrow material shall be ob tained from the

borrow areas from approved private sources. Unless otherwise provided

in the contract, the Contractor shall obtain from t he owners the right

to procure material, pay royalties and other charge s involved, and bear

the expense of developing the sources, including ri ghts-of-way for

hauling. Borrow material from approved sources on G overnment-

controlled land may be obtained without payment of royalties. Unless

specifically provided, no borrow shall be obtained within the limits of

the project site without prior written approval. Ne cessary clearing,

31 20 00 - 17




grubbing, and satisfactory drainage of borrow pits and the disposal of

debris thereon shall be considered related operatio ns to the borrow

excavation.

E. Opening and Drainage of Excavation and Borrow Pits: The Contractor

shall notify the COR sufficiently in advance of the opening of any

excavation or borrow pit to permit elevations and m easurements of the

undisturbed ground surface to be taken. Except as o therwise permitted,

borrow pits and other excavation areas shall be exc avated providing

adequate drainage. Overburden and other spoil mater ial shall be

transported to designated spoil areas or otherwise disposed of as

directed. Borrow pits shall be neatly trimmed and d rained after the

excavation is completed. The Contractor shall ensur e that excavation

of any area, operation of borrow pits, or dumping o f spoil material

results in minimum detrimental effects on natural e nvironmental

conditions.

3.5 GRADING:

A. General: Uniformly grade the areas within the limit s of this section,

including adjacent transition areas. Smooth the fin ished surface within

specified tolerance. Provide uniform levels or slop es between points

where elevations are indicated, or between such poi nts and existing

finished grades. Provide a smooth transition betwee n abrupt changes in

slope.

B. Cut rough or sloping rock to level beds for foundat ions. In pipe spaces

or other unfinished areas, fill low spots and level off with coarse

sand or fine gravel.

C. Slope backfill outside building away from building walls for a minimum

distance of 1800 mm (6 feet).

D. Finish grade earth floors in pipe basements as show n to a level,

uniform slope and leave clean.

E. Finished grade shall be at least 150 mm (6 inches) below bottom line of

window or other building wall openings unless great er depth is shown.

F. Place crushed stone or gravel fill under concrete s labs on grade,

tamped, and leveled. Thickness of fill shall be 150 mm (6 inches)

unless otherwise shown.

G. Finish subgrade in a condition acceptable to COR at least one day in

advance of paving operations. Maintain finished sub grade in a smooth

and compacted condition until succeeding operation has been

31 20 00 - 18




accomplished. Scarify, compact, and grade subgrade prior to further

construction when approved compacted subgrade is di sturbed by

Contractor's subsequent operations or adverse weath er.

H. Grading for Paved Areas: Provide final grades for b oth subgrade and

base course to +/- 6 mm (0.25 inches) of indicated grades.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE AND EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL:

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and wast e material,

including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, a nd legally dispose

of it off Medical Center property.

B. Place excess excavated materials suitable for fill and/or backfill on

site where directed.

C. Remove from site and dispose of any excess excavate d materials after

all fill and backfill operations have been complete d.

D. Segregate all excavated contaminated soil designate d by the COR from

all other excavated soils, and stockpile on site on two 0.15 mm (6 mil)

polyethylene sheets with a polyethylene cover. A de signated area shall

be selected for this purpose. Dispose of excavated contaminated

material in accordance with State and Local require ments.

3.7 CLEAN UP:

Upon completion of earthwork operations, clean area s within contract

limits, remove tools, and equipment. Provide site c lear, clean, free of

debris, and suitable for subsequent construction op erations. Remove all

debris, rubbish, and excess material from Medical C enter Property.

----- E N D -----




SECTION 31 23 19 DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

This section specifies performance of dewatering re quired to lower and

control ground water table levels and hydrostatic p ressures to permit

excavation, backfill, and construction to be perfor med in the dry.

Control of surface water shall be considered as par t of the work under

this specification.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. The work to be completed by the Contractor includes , but is not

necessarily limited to the following:

1. Implementation of the Erosion and Sedimentation Con trol Plan.

2. Dewater excavations, including seepage and precipit ation.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a ll materials,

equipment, labor, and services necessary for care o f water and erosion

control. Excavation work shall not begin before the Erosion and

Sedimentation Control Plan is in place.

1.3 REQUIREMENT:

A. Dewatering system shall be of sufficient size and c apacity necessary to

lower and maintain ground water table to an elevati on at least 300 mm (1

foot) below lowest foundation subgrade or bottom of pipe trench and to

allow material to be excavated, piles to be driven, and concrete placed,

in a reasonably dry condition. Materials to be remo ved shall be

sufficiently dry to permit excavation to grades sho wn and to stabilize

excavation slopes where sheeting is not required. O perate dewatering

system continuously until backfill work has been co mpleted.

B. Reduce hydrostatic head below any excavation to the extent that water

level in the construction area is a minimum of 300 mm (1 foot) below

prevailing excavation surface.

C. Prevent loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condit ions or softening of

foundation strata.

D. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavatio n.

E. Construction operations are performed in the dry.

F. Control of surface and subsurface water is part of dewatering

requirements. Maintain adequate control so that:

1. The stability of excavated and constructed slopes a re not adversely

affected by saturated soil, including water enterin g prepared subbase




31 23 19 - 2

and subgrades where underlying materials are not fr ee draining or are

subject to swelling or freeze-thaw action.

2. Erosion is controlled.

3. Flooding of excavations or damage to structures doe s not occur.

4. Surface water drains away from excavations.

5. Excavations are protected from becoming wet from su rface water, or

insure excavations are dry before additional work i s undertaken.

G. Permitting Requirements: The contractor shall compl y with and obtain the

required State and County permits where the work is performed.

1.4 RELATED WORK:



B. Safety Requirements: Section 00 72 00, GENERAL COND ITIONS, Article,

ACCIDENT PREVENTION.

C. Submittal requirements as specified in Section 01 3 3 23 SHOP DRAWINGS,

PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.

D. Protection of existing utilities, fire protection s ervices, existing

equipment, roads, and pavements: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

E. Subsurface Investigation: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS,

Article 1.11, PHYSICAL DATA.

F. Excavation, backfilling, site grade and utilities: Section 31 20 00,

EARTH MOVING.

1.5 SUBMITTALS:


AND SAMPLES.

B. Drawings and Design Data:

1. Submit drawings and data showing the method to be e mployed in

dewatering excavated areas 30 days before commencem ent of excavation.

2. Material shall include: location, depth and size of wellpoints,

headers, sumps, ditches, size and location of disch arge lines,

capacities of pumps and standby units, and detailed description of

dewatering methods to be employed to convey the wat er from site to

adequate disposal.

3. Include a written report outlining control procedur es to be adopted

if dewatering problem arises.

4. Capacities of pumps, prime movers, and standby equi pment.

5. Design calculations proving adequacy of system and selected

equipment. The dewatering system shall be designed using accepted and

professional methods of design and engineering cons istent with the

best modern practice. The dewatering system shall i nclude the deep

31 23 19 - 3




wells, wellpoints, and other equipment, appurtenanc es, and related

earthwork necessary to perform the function.

6. Detailed description of dewatering procedure and ma intenance method.

7. Materials submitted shall be in a format acceptable for inclusion in

required permit applications to any and all regulat ory agencies for

which permits for discharge water from the dewateri ng system are

required due to the discharge reaching regulated bo dies of water.

C. Inspection Reports.

D. All required permits.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install a dewatering system to lower and control gr ound surface water in

order to permit excavation, construction of structu re, and placement of

backfill materials to be performed under dry condit ions. Make the

dewatering system adequate to pre-drain the water-b earing strata above

and below the bottom of structure foundations, util ities and other

excavations.

B. In addition, reduce hydrostatic pressure head in wa ter-bearing strata

below structure foundations, utility lines, and oth er excavations, to

extent that water levels in construction area are a minimum of 300 mm (1

foot) below prevailing excavation surface at all ti mes.

3.2 OPERATION:

A. Prior to any excavation below the ground water tabl e, place system into

operation to lower water table as required and oper ate it continuously

24 hours a day, 7 days a week until utilities and s tructures have been

satisfactorily constructed, which includes the plac ement of backfill

materials and dewatering is no longer required.

B. Place an adequate weight of backfill material to pr event buoyancy prior

to discontinuing operation of the system.

3.3 WATER DISPOSAL:

A. Dispose of water removed from the excavations in su ch a manner as:

1. Will not endanger portions of work under constructi on or completed.

2. Will cause no inconvenience to Government or to oth ers working near

site.

3. Will comply with the stipulations of required permi ts for disposal of

water.

4. Will Control Runoff: The Contractor shall be respon sible for control

of runoff in all work areas including but not limit ed to:

excavations, access roads, parking areas, laydown, and staging areas.

31 23 19 - 4




The Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain all ditches,

basins, sumps, culverts, site grading, and pumping facilities to

divert, collect, and remove all water from the work areas. All water

shall be removed from the immediate work areas and shall be disposed

of in accordance with applicable permits.

B. Excavation Dewatering:

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a ll facilities

required to divert, collect, control, and remove wa ter from all

construction work areas and excavations.

2. Drainage features shall have sufficient capacity to avoid flooding of

work areas.

3. Drainage features shall be so arranged and altered as required to

avoid degradation of the final excavated surface(s) .

4. The Contractor shall utilize all necessary erosion and sediment

control measures as described herein to avoid const ruction related

degradation of the natural water quality.

C. Dewatering equipment shall be provided to remove an d dispose of all

surface and ground water entering excavations, tren ches, or other parts

of the work during construction. Each excavation sh all be kept dry

during subgrade preparation and continually thereaf ter until the

structure to be built, or the pipe to be installed therein, is completed

to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic press ure, flotation, or

other cause will result.

3.4 STANDBY EQUIPMENT:

Provide complete standby equipment, installed and a vailable for

immediate operation, as may be required to adequate ly maintain de-

watering on a continuous basis and in the event tha t all or any part of

the system may become inadequate or fail.

3.5 CORRECTIVE ACTION:

If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or

failure of the dewatering system (loosening of the foundation strata, or

instability of slopes, or damage to foundations or structures), perform

work necessary for reinstatement of foundation soil and damaged

structure or damages to work in place resulting fro m such inadequacy or

failure by Contractor, at no additional cost to Gov ernment.

3.6 DAMAGES:

Immediately repair damages to adjacent facilities c aused by dewatering

operations.

31 23 19 - 5




3.7 REMOVAL:

Insure compliance with all conditions of regulating permits and provide

such information to the Resident Engineer. Obtain w ritten approval from

Resident Engineer before discontinuing operation of dewatering system.

----- E N D -----




SECTION 31 23 23.33 FLOWABLE FILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 INTRODUCTION:

A. Flowable fill refers to a cementitious slurry consi sting of a mixture of

fine aggregate or filler, water, and cementitious m aterial(s), which is

used as a fill or backfill in lieu of compacted ear th. This mixture is

capable of filling all voids in irregular excavatio ns and hard to reach

places (such as under undercuts of existing slabs), is self-leveling,

and hardens in a matter of a few hours without the need for compaction

in layers. Flowable fill is sometimes referred to a s controlled density

fill (CDF), controlled low strength material (CLSM) , lean concrete

slurry, and unshrinkable fill.

B. Flowable fill materials will be used as only as a s tructural fill

replacement on VA projects. The materials and mix d esign for the

flowable fill should be designed to produce a compa rable compressive

strength to the surrounding soil after hardening, m aking excavation at a

later time possible /to produce the compressive str ength indicated for

the placed location, as determined by the COR.

1.2 DESCRIPTION:

Furnish and place flowable fill in a fluid conditio n, that sets within

the required time and, after curing, obtains the de sired strength

properties as evidenced by the laboratory testing o f the specific mix

design, at locations shown on the plans or as direc ted by the COR,

verbally and as shown in plan.

1.3 RELATED WORK:



B. Earthwork, excavation and backfill and compaction r equirements: Section

31 20 00, EARTH MOVING.

1.4 DEFINITIONS:

A. Flowable fill - Ready-mix Controlled Low Strength M aterial used as an

alternative to compacted soil, and is also known as controlled density

fill, and several other names, some of which are tr ademark names of

material suppliers. Flowable fill (Controlled Low S trength Material)

differs from portland cement concrete as it contain s a low cementitious

content to reduce strength development for possible future removal.

Unless specifically approved otherwise, by the COR, flowable fill shall

be designed as a permanent material, not designed f or future removal.

Design strength for this permanent type flowable fi ll shall be a




31 23 23.33 - 2

compressive strength of 2.1 MPa (300 psi) minimum a t 28 days. Chemical

admixtures may also be used in flowable fill to mod ify performance

properties of strength, flow, set and permeability.

B. Excavatable Flowable fill – flowable fill designed with a compressive

strength that will allow excavation as either machi ne tool excavatable

at compressive strength of 1.5 MPa (200 psi) maximu m at 1 year, or hand

tool excavatable at compressive strength of 0.7 MPa (100 psi) maximum at

1 year.

1.5 SUBMITTALS:


AND SAMPLES.

B. Flowable fill Mix Design: Provide flowable fill mix design containing

cement and water. At the contractor’s option, it ma y also contain fly

ash, aggregate, or chemical admixtures in any propo rtions such that the

final product meets the strength and flow consisten cy, and shrinkage

requirements included in this specifications. The m ix design should

state the sources and proportions of each of the fl owable fill

constituents. The coefficient of permeability of fl owable fill shall be

that of uniform fine sand, 4.0 X 10-1 cm/sec (0.16 in/sec) or as

indicated to provide a backfill material with perme ability equal to or

greater than that of the surrounding soil.

1. Test and Performance - Submit the following data:

a. Flowable fill shall have a minimum strength of 2.1 MPa (300 psi)

according to ASTM C 39 at 28 days after placement.

b. Flowable fill shall have minimal subsidence and ble ed water

shrinkage. Evaporation of bleed water shall not res ult in

shrinkage of more than 10.4 mm per m (1/8 inch per ft.) of

flowable fill depth (for mixes containing high fly ash content).

Measurement of a Final Bleeding shall be as measure d in Section 10

of ASTM C 940 “Standard Test Method for Expansion a nd Bleeding of

Freshly Mixed Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concre te in the

Laboratory.

c. Flowable fill shall have a unit weight of 1500 - 19 00 kg/m3 (90 -

115 lbs/feet 3) measured at the point of placement after a 60

minute ready-mix truck ride.

C. Provide documentation that the admixture supplier h as experience of at

least one year, with the products being provided an d any equipment

required to obtain desired performance of the produ ct.




31 23 23.33 - 3

D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Provide COR with docum entation issued by

the State Agency responsible for approving material s for burial,

indicating conformance with applicable rules and re gulations.




only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

D4832-10................Standard Test Method for Pr eparation and Testing

of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test

Cylinders.

C618-12.................Standard Specifications for Coal Fly Ash and Raw

or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use in

Concrete. (Use Fly Ash conforming to the

chemical and physical requirements for mineral

admixture, Class F listed, including Table 2

(except for Footnote A). Waive the loss on

ignition requirement.)

C403/C403M-08...........Standard Test Method for Ti me of Setting of

Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance.

C150/C150M-11...........Standard Specification for Portland Cement

C33/C33M-11a............Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

C94/C94M-12.............Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

C494/C494M-11...........Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures

for Concrete

C685/C685M-11...........Standard Specification for Concrete Made by

Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing

C940-10a................Standard Specification for Expansion and

Bleeding of Freshly Mixed Grouts for Preplaced –

Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory

D5971...................Sampling Freshly Mixed Cont rolled Low Strength

Material

D6103...................Flow Consistency of Control led Low Strength

Material

D6023...................Unit Weight, Yield, Cement Content and Air

Content (Gravimetric) of Controlled Low Strength

Material


SP-150-94...............Controlled Low-Strength Mat erials




31 23 23.33 - 4


A. Manufacturer: Flowable fill shall be manufactured b y a ready-mix

concrete producer with a minimum of 1 year experien ce in the production

of similar products.

B. Materials: For each type of material required for t he work of this

Section, provide primary materials that are the pro ducts of one

manufacturer. If not otherwise specified here, mate rials shall comply

with recommendations of ACI 229, “Controlled Low St rength Materials.”

C. Pre-Approval Procedures: The use of flowable fill d uring any part of the

project shall be restricted to those incidences whe re, due to field

conditions, the Contractor has made the COR aware o f the conditions for

which he recommends the use of the flowable, and th e COR has confirmed

those conditions and approved the use of the flowab le fill, in advance.

During the submittal process, the contractor shall prepare and submit

various flowable fill mix designs corresponding to required conditions

or if the contractor desires to use flowable fill d ue to economics.

Approval for the strength of the flowable fill shal l be obtained from

the COR when the contractor desires, or is required , to use flowable

fill at specific location(s) within the project. Pr ior to commencement

of field operations the contractor shall establish procedures to

maintain optimum working conditions and to coordina te this work with

related and adjacent work.

D. Sampling and Acceptance: Flowable fill shall be sam ples and testing in

the field in conformance with either ASTM C 94 or C 685. Samples for

tests shall be taken for every 115 cubic meters (15 0 cubic yards) of

material, or fraction thereof, for each day’s place ment. Tests shall

include temperature reading and four compressive st rength cylinders.

Compressive strength sampling and testing shall con form to ASTM D 4832

with one specimen tested at 7 days, two at 28 days, and one held for

each batch of four specimens. Sampling and testing shall be performed

by a qualified, independent commercial testing labo ratory. Test results

should be submitted within 48 hours of completion o f testing.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

Deliver and handle all products and equipment requi red, in strict

compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Pro tect from damage due

to weather, excessive temperatures, and constructio n operations.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

Perform installation of flowable fill only when app roved by the COR, and

when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits

established by the manufacturer of the materials an d products used.

31 23 23.33 - 5




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Provide flowable fill containing, at a minimum, cem entitious materials

and water. Cementitious materials shall be portland cement, pozzolanic

materials, or other self-cementing materials, or co mbinations thereof,

at the contractor’s option, and following approval by the COR. The

flowable fill mix design may also contain, fine agg regate or filler,

and/or chemical admixtures in any proportions such that the final

product meets the strength, flow consistency and sh rinkage requirements

included in this specification, as approved by the COR.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 or Type 2. Meeti ng Wisconsin State

DOT standards.

C. Mixing Water: Meeting Wisconsin State DOT standards for use as mix-water

for cast-in-place concrete.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C494.

F. Aggregate: ASTM C33.

2.2 FLOWABLE FILL MIXTURE:

A. Mix design shall produce a consistency that will re sult in a flowable

product at the time of placement which does not req uire manual means to

move it into place.

B. Flowable fill shall have a minimum strength of 2.1 MPa (300 psi)

according to ASTM C39 at 28 days after placement.

C. Flowable fill shall have minimal subsidence and ble ed water shrinkage.

Evaporation of bleed water shall not result in shri nkage of more than

10.4 mm per m (1/8 inch per foot) of flowable fill depth (for mixes

containing high fly ash content). Measurement of a Final Bleeding shall

be as measured in Section 10 of ASTM C 940 “Standar d Test Method for

Expansion and Bleeding of Freshly Mixed Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate

Concrete in the Laboratory.

D. Flowable fill shall have a unit weight of 1500 - 19 00 kg/m3 (90 - 115

lbs/feet3) measured at the point of placement after a 60 minute ready-

mix truck ride. In the absence of strength data the cementitious content

shall be a maximum of 90 kg/m3 (150 lbs/cy).

E. Flowable fill shall have an in-place yield of at le ast 98% of design

yield for permanent type a maximum of 110% of desig n yield for removable

types at 1 year.

F. Provide equipment as recommended by the Manufacture r and comply with

manufacturer’s recommendations for the addition of additives, whether at

the production plant or prior to placement at the s ite.

31 23 23.33 - 6




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

Examine conditions of substrates and other conditio ns under which work

is to be performed and notify COR, in writing, of c ircumstances

detrimental to the proper completion of the work. D o not proceed until

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 APPLICATION OF FLOWABLE FILL:

Secure tanks, pipes and other members to be encased in flowable fill.

Insure that there are no exposed metallic pipes, co nduits, or other

items that will be in contact with the flowable fil l after placement. If

so, replace with non-metallic materials or apply ma nufacturers

recommended coating to protect metallic objects bef ore placing the

flowable fill. Replacement or protection of metalli c objects is subject

to the approval of the COR.

3.3 PROTECTION AND CURING:

Protect exposed surfaces of flowable fill from prem ature drying, wash by

rain or running water, wind, mechanical injury, and excessively hot or

cold temperature. Curing method shall be subject to approval by COR.

- - - E N D - - -




32 05 23 - 1

SECTION 32 05 23 CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS



1. Subbase for concrete pavements.

2. Curbs, gutters, and combination curbs and gutters.

3. Pedestrian Pavement: Walks. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Field Testing: Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.

B. Step Nosings and Railings: Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS.

C. Subgrade Preparation and Subbase Compaction: Sectio n 31 20 00,

EARTHWORK.



B. American Association of State Highway and Transport ation Officials

(AASHTO):

1. M147-65-UL-04 - Materials for Aggregate and Soil-Ag gregate Subbase,

Base and Surface Courses.

2. M233-86 - Boiled Linseed Oil Mixture for Treatment of Portland

Cement Concrete.


1. 305R-10 - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting.

2. 306R-10 - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting.

D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. B101.3 - Wet DOCF of Common Hard Surface Floor Mate rials (Including

Action and Limit Thresholds for the Suitable Assess ment of the

Measured Values).

E. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. A615/A615M-16 - Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bar s for Concrete

Reinforcement.

2. A996/A996M-15 - Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement.

3. A1064/A1064M-16 - Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement,

Plain and Deformed, for Concrete.

4. C33/C33M-16 - Concrete Aggregates.




32 05 23 - 2

5. C94/C94M-16 - Ready Mixed Concrete.

6. C143/C143M-15a - Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete .

7. C150/C150M-16 - Portland Cement.

8. C171-16 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

9. C260/C260M-10a - Air Entraining Admixtures for Conc rete.

10. C309-11 - Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Cur ing Concrete.

11. C494/C494M-15a - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

12. C618-15 - Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use

in Concrete.

13. C979/C979M-16 - Pigments for Integrally Colored Con crete.

14. C989/C989M-14 - Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars.

15. C1240-15 - Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixture s.

16. D1751-04(2013)e1 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete

Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding an d Resilient

Bituminous Types).

17. D5893/D5893M-10 - Cold Applied, Single Component, C hemically Curing

Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements.

18. D6690-15 - Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, f or Concrete and

Asphalt Pavements.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS





b. Contractor.

c. Installer.


before meeting.

a. Installation schedule.

b. Installation sequence.

c. Preparatory work.

d. Protection before, during, and after installation.

e. Installation.

f. Terminations.

g. Transitions and connections to other work.

h. Inspecting and testing.

i. Other items affecting successful completion.

32 05 23 - 3






1.5 SUBMITTALS


AND SAMPLES.


1. Show size, configuration, and fabrication and insta llation details.

2. Show reinforcing.

3. Include jointing plan for concrete pavements, curbs and gutters.




D. Test reports: Certify products comply with specific ations.

1. Concrete materials.

2. Field test reports.

E. Certificates: Certify products comply with specific ations.

1. Expansion joint filler.

2. Reinforcement.

3. Curing materials.

4. Concrete protective coating.

F. Qualifications: Substantiate qualifications comply with specifications.

1. Installer with project experience list.

G. Concrete mix design.

H. Proposed hot and cold weather concreting methods. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE




similar installations.


completed projects.

3. Concrete mix design. 1.7 DELIVERY

A. Deliver steel reinforcement to prevent damage.

B. Before installation, return or dispose of distorted or damaged steel

reinforcement.

32 05 23 - 4




C. Bulk Products: Deliver bulk products away from buil dings, utilities,

pavement, and existing turf and planted areas. Main tain dry bulk

product storage away from contaminants.

1.8 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store products indoors in dry, weathertight facilit y.


operations.


A. Hot Weather Concreting Procedures: ACI 305R.

B. Cold Weather Concreting Procedures: ACI 306R.

1. Use non-corrosive, non-chloride accelerator admixtu re.

2. Do not use calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixt ures containing

more than 0.05 percent chloride ions.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Construction Warranty: FAR clause 52.246-21, "Wa rranty of

Construction."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. See section 03 30 00

B. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D1751.

C.

2.2 FORMS

A. Forms: Wood, plywood, metal, or other materials, ap proved by

Contracting Officer's Representative, of grade or t ype suitable to

obtain type of finish specified.

1. Plywood: Exterior grade, free of defects and patche s on contact

surface.

2. Lumber: Sound, grade-marked, S4S stress graded soft wood, minimum

50 mm (2 inches) thick, free from warp, twist, loos e knots, splits,

or other defects.

3. Form Coating: As recommended by Architect/Engineer.

B. Provide forms suitable in cross-section, depth, and strength to resist

springing during depositing and consolidating concr ete.

1. Do not use forms varying from straight line more th an 3 mm in

3000 mm (1/8 inch in 10 feet), horizontally and ver tically.

32 05 23 - 5




C. Provide flexible or curved forms for forming radii. 2.3 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS

A. Concrete curing materials, conform to one of the fo llowing:

1. Burlap: Minimum 233 g/sq. m (7 ounces/sq. yd.) dry.

2. Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete: ASTM C171.

3. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1 clear liquid mem brane forming

type, without paraffin or petroleum.

32 05 23 - 6




2.4 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Design concrete mixes according to ASTM C94/C94M, O ption C.

B. Concrete Type: Air-entrained. See Table I.

TABLE I - CONCRETE TYPES

Concrete

Type

Minimum 28 Day

Compressive

Strength f'c

MPa (psi)

Non-Air-Entrained Air-Entrained

Min. Cement

kg/cu. m

(lbs./cu. yd.)

Max.

Water

Cement

Ratio

Min. Cement

kg/cu. m

(lbs./cu. yd.)

Max.

Water

Cement

Ratio

A 35 (5000)1,3 375 (630) 0.45 385 (650) 0.40

B 30 (4000)1,3 325 (550) 0.55 340 (570) 0.50

C 25 (3000)1,3 280 (470) 0.65 290 (490) 0.55

D 25 (3000)1,2 300 (500) * 310 (520) *

Footnotes:

1. If trial mixes are used, achieve compressive streng th 8.3 MPa (1,200 psi)

in excess of f'c. For concrete strengths greater th an 35 MPa (5,000 psi),

achieve compressive strength 9.7 MPa (1,400 psi) in excess of f’c.

2. For Concrete Exposed to High Sulfate Content Soils: Maximum water cement

ratio is 0.44.

3. Laboratory Determined according to ACI 211.1 for no rmal weight concrete.

C. Maximum Slump: ASTM C143/C143M. See Table II.

TABLE II - MAXIMUM SLUMP

APPLICATION MAXIMUM SLUMP

Curb & Gutter 75 mm (3 inches)

Pedestrian Pavement 75 mm (3 inches)

Vehicular Pavement 50 mm (2 inches) Machine Finishe d

100 mm (4 inches) Hand Finished

Equipment Pad 75 to 100 mm (3 to 4 inches)

D. Provide fibers, per 03 03 00, Article 2.2 (CC)

32 05 23 - 7




2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Equipment and Tools: Obtain Contracting Officer's R epresentative's,

approval of equipment and tools needed for handling materials and

performing work before work begins.

B. Maintain equipment and tools in satisfactory workin g condition.

C. Sealants:

1. Concrete Paving Expansion Joints: ASTM D5893/D5893M , Type SL, single

component, self-leveling, silicone joint sealant.

2. Concrete Paving Joints: ASTM D6690, Type IV, hot-ap plied, single

component joint sealant.

D. Concrete Protective Coating: AASHTO M233 linseed oi l mixture.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION



C. Prepare, construct, and finish subgrade. See Sectio n 31 20 00,

EARTHWORK.

D. Maintain subgrade in smooth, compacted condition, i n conformance with

the required section and established grade until th e succeeding

operation has been accomplished.

3.2 SETTING FORMS

A. Form Substrate:

1. Compact form substrate to uniformly support forms a long entire

length.

2. Correct substrate imperfections and variations by c utting, filling,

and compacting.

B. Form Setting:

1. Set forms to indicated line and grade with tight jo ints. Rigidly

brace forms preventing movement.

2. Remove forms when removal will not damage concrete and when required

for finishing.

3. Clean and oil forms before each use.

4. Correct forms, when required, immediately before pl acing concrete.

C. Form Tolerances:

1. Variation from Indicated Line: Maximum 6 mm (1/4 in ch).

32 05 23 - 8




2. Variation from Indicated Grade: Maximum 3 mm in 300 0 mm (1/8 inch in

10 feet). 3.3 JOINTS - GENERAL

A. Place joints, where shown on approved submittal Dra wings.

1. Conform to details shown.

2. Install joints perpendicular to finished concrete s urface.

B. Make joints straight and continuous from edge to ed ge of pavement. 3.4 CONTRACTION JOINTS

A. Tool or cut joints to width, depth, and radius edge shown on drawings

using grooving tool, jointer, or saw.

B. Construct joints in curbs and gutters by inserting 3 mm (1/8 inch)

steel plates conforming to curb and gutter cross se ctions.

1. Keep plates in place until concrete can hold its sh ape.

C. Finish joint edges with edging tool.

D. Score pedestrian pavement with grooving tool or joi nter. 3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Form expansion joints with expansion joint filler o f thickness shown on

drawings.

1. Locate joints around perimeter of structures and fe atures abutting

site work concrete.

2. Create complete, uniform separation between structu re and site work

concrete.

B. Extend expansion joint material full depth of concr ete with top edge of

joint filler below finished concrete surface where sealant is indicated

on Drawings.

C. Cut and shape material matching cross section.

D. Anchor with approved devices to prevent displacing during placing and

finishing operations.

E. Round joint edges with edging tool. 3.6 PLACING CONCRETE - GENERAL

A. Preparation before Placing Concrete:

1. Obtain Contracting Officer's Representative approva l.

2. Remove debris and other foreign material.

3. Uniformly moisten substrate, without standing water .

B. Convey concrete from mixer to final location withou t segregation or

loss of ingredients. Deposit concrete to minimize h andling.

32 05 23 - 9




C. During placement, consolidate concrete by spading o r vibrating to

minimize voids, honeycomb, and rock pockets.

1. Vibrate concrete against forms and along joints.

2. Avoid excess vibration and handling causing segrega tion.

D. Place concrete continuously between joints without bulkheads.

E. Install construction joint in concrete placement su spended for more

than 30 minutes.

F. Replace concrete with cracks, chips, bird baths, an d other defects to

nearest joints, approved by Contracting Officer's R epresentative.

3.7 PLACING CONCRETE FOR CURB AND GUTTER AND PEDESTRIAN PAVEMENT

A. Place concrete in one layer conforming to cross sec tion shown on

Drawings after consolidating and finishing.

B. Deposit concrete near joints without disturbing joi nts. Do not place

concrete directly onto joint assemblies.

C. Strike concrete surface to proper section ready for consolidation.

D. Consolidate concrete by tamping and spading or with approved mechanical

finishing equipment.

E. Finish concrete surface with wood or metal float.

F. Construct concrete pads and pavements with sufficie nt slope to drain,

preventing standing water.

3.8 FORM REMOVAL

A. Keep forms in place minimum 12 hours after concrete placement. Remove

forms without damaging concrete.

B. Do not use bars or heavy tools against concrete to remove forms. Repair

damage concrete found after form removal. 3.9 CONCRETE FINISHING - GENERAL

A. Follow operation sequence below, unless otherwise i ndicated on

Drawings:

1. Consolidating, floating, striking, troweling, textu ring, and joint

edging.

B. Use edging tool with 6 mm (1/4 inch) radius.

C. Keep finishing equipment and tools clean and suitab le for use. 3.10 CONCRETE FINISHING - PEDESTRIAN PAVEMENT

A. Walks:

1. Finish concrete surfaces with metal float, troweled smooth, and

finished with a broom moistened with clear water.

32 05 23 - 10




2. Finish slab edges and formed transverse joints with edger.

3. Broom surfaces transverse to traffic direction.

a. Use brooming to eliminate flat surface produced by edger.

b. Produce uniform corrugations, maximum 1.5 mm (1/16 inch) deep

profile.

4. Provide surface uniform in color and free of surfac e blemishes, form

marks, and tool marks.

5. Paving Tolerances:

a. Variation from Indicated Plane: Maximum 5 mm in 300 0 mm (3/16

inch in 10 feet).

b. Variation from Indicated Thickness: Maximum 6 mm (1 /4 inch).

6. Replace paving within joint boundary when paving ex ceeds specified

tolerances.

3.11 CONCRETE FINISHING - CURBS AND GUTTERS

A. Round edges of gutter and top of curb with edging t ool.

B. Gutter and Curb Top:

1. Float surfaces and finish with smooth wood or metal float until true

to grade and section and uniform color.

2. Finish surfaces, while still plastic, longitudinall y with bristle

brush.

C. Curb Face:

1. Remove curb form and immediately rub curb face with wood or concrete

rubbing block removing blemishes, form marks, and t ool marks and

providing uniform color.

2. Brush curb face, while still plastic, matching gutt er and curb top.

D. Curb and Gutter Tolerances:

1. Variation from Indicated Plane and Grade:

a. Gutter: Maximum 3 mm in 3000 mm (1/8 inch in 10 fee t).

b. Curb Top and Face: Maximum 6 mm in 3000 mm (1/4 inc h in

10 feet).

E. Replace curbs and gutters within joint boundary whe n curbs and gutters

exceed specified tolerances.

F. Correct depressions causing standing water. 3.12 CONCRETE CURING

A. Concrete Protection:

1. Protect unhardened concrete from rain and flowing w ater.

32 05 23 - 11




2. Provide sufficient curing and protection materials available and

ready for use before concrete placement begins.

3. Protect concrete to prevent pavement cracking from ambient

temperature changes during curing period.

a. Replace pavement damaged by curing method allowing concrete

cracking.

b. Employ another curing method as directed by Contrac ting

Officer's Representative.

B. Cure concrete for minimum 7 days by one of the foll owing methods

appropriate to weather conditions preventing moistu re loss and rapid

temperature change:

1. Burlap Mat: Provide minimum two layers kept saturat ed with water

during curing period. Overlap Mats at least 150 mm (6 inches).

2. Sheet Materials:

a. Wet exposed concrete surface with fine water spray and cover

with sheet materials.

b. Overlap sheets minimum 300 mm (12 inches).

c. Securely anchor sheet materials preventing displace ment.

3. Curing Compound:

a. Protect joints indicated to receive sealants preven ting

contamination from curing compound.

b. Insert moistened paper or fiber rope into joint or cover joint

with waterproof paper.

c. Apply curing compound before concrete dries.

d. Apply curing compound in two coats at right angles to each

other.

e. Application Rate: Maximum 5 sq. m/L (200 sq. ft./ga llon), both

coats.

f. Immediately reapply curing compound to surfaces dam aged during

curing period.

3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTIVE COATING

A. Apply protective coating of linseed oil mixture to exposed-to-view

concrete surfaces, drainage structures, and feature s that project

through, into, or against concrete exterior improve ments to protect the

concrete against deicing materials.

B. Complete backfilling and curing operation before ap plying protective

coating.

32 05 23 - 12




C. Dry and thoroughly clean concrete before each appli cation.

D. Apply two coats, with maximum coverage of 11 sq. m/ L (50 sq.

yds./gal.); first coat, and maximum 16 sq. m/L (70 sq. yds./gal.);

second coat, except apply commercially prepared mix ture according to

manufacturer's instructions.

E. Protect coated surfaces from vehicular and pedestri an traffic until

dry.

F. Do not heat protective coating, and do not expose p rotective coating to

open flame, sparks, or fire adjacent to open contai ners or applicators.

Do not apply material at temperatures lower than 10 degrees C

(50 degrees F).


A. Field Tests: Performed by testing laboratory spe cified in Section

01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.

1. Compaction.

a. Pavement subgrade.

b. Curb, gutter, and sidewalk.

2. Concrete:

a. Delivery samples.

b. Field samples.

3. Slip Resistance: Steps and pedestrian paving. 3.15 CLEANING

A. After completing curing:

1. Remove burlap and sheet curing materials.

2. Sweep concrete clean, removing foreign matter from the joints.

3. Seal joints as specified. 3.16 PROTECTION

A. Protect exterior improvements from traffic and cons truction operations.

1. Prohibit traffic on paving for minimum seven days a fter placement,

or longer as directed by Contracting Officer's Repr esentative.

B. Remove protective materials immediately before acce ptance.

C. Repair damage.

1. Replace concrete containing excessive cracking, fra ctures, spalling,

and other defects within joint boundary, when direc ted by

Contracting Officer's Representative, and at no add itional cost to

the Government.

32 05 23 - 13




- - - E N D - - -




32 12 16 - 1

SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This work shall cover the composition, mixing, cons truction upon the

prepared subgrade, and the protection of hot asphal t concrete pavement.

The hot asphalt concrete pavement shall consist of an aggregate or

asphalt base course and asphalt surface course cons tructed in

conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and c ross sections as

shown. Each course shall be constructed to the dept h, section, or

elevation required by the drawings and shall be rol led, finished, and

approved before the placement of the next course.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Laboratory and field testing requirements: Section 01 45 29, TESTING

LABORATORY SERVICES.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Paragraph 3.3 and Section 31 20 00, EARTH MOVING.

C. Pavement Markings: Section 32 17 23, PAVEMENT MARKI NGS.

1.3 INSPECTION OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

The COR shall have access at all times to all parts of the material

producing plants for checking the mixing operations and materials and

the adequacy of the equipment in use.

1.4 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE CONTROL

The Contractor’s Registered Professional Land Surve yor shall establish

and control the pavement (aggregate or asphalt base course and asphalt

surface course) alignments, grades, elevations, and cross sections as

shown on the Drawings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND


B. Data and Test Reports:

1. Aggregate Base Course: Sources, gradation, liquid l imit, plasticity

index, percentage of wear, and other tests required by State Highway

Department.

2. Asphalt Base/Surface Course: Aggregate source, grad ation, soundness

loss, percentage of wear, and other tests required by State Highway

Department.

3. Job-mix formula.




32 12 16 - 2

C. Certifications:

1. Asphalt prime and tack coat material certificate of conformance to

State Highway Department requirements.

2. Asphalt cement certificate of conformance to State Highway

Department requirements.

3. Job-mix certification - Submit plant mix certificat ion that mix

equals or exceeds the State Highway Specification.

D. Provide MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) for all chemicals used on

ground.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Aggregate base and asphalt concrete materials shall conform to the

requirements of the following and other appropriate sections of the

latest version of the State Highway Material Specif ications, including

amendments, addenda and errata. Where the term "Eng ineer" or

"Commission" is referenced in the State Highway Spe cifications, it

shall mean the VA COR or VA Contracting Officer.

2.2 AGGREGATES

A. Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone, gra vel, sand, or other

sound, durable mineral materials processed and blen ded, and naturally

combined.

B. Subbase aggregate (where required) maximum size: 38 mm(1-1/2").

C. Base aggregate maximum size:

1. Base course over 152mm(6") thick: 38mm(1-1/2");

2. Other base courses: 19mm(3/4").

D. Asphaltic base course:

1. Maximum particle size not to exceed 25.4mm(1”).

2. Where conflicts arise between this specification an d the

requirements in the latest version of the State Hig hway

Specifications, the State Specifications shall cont rol.

E. Aggregates for asphaltic concrete paving: Provide a mixture of sand,

mineral aggregate, and liquid asphalt mixed in such proportions that

the percentage by weight will be within comply with Wisconsin DOT

specifications.

2.3 ASPHALTS

A. Comply with provisions of Asphalt Institute Specifi cation SS2:

1. Asphalt cement: Penetration grade 50/60




32 12 16 - 3

2. Prime coat: Cut-back type, grade MC-250

3. Tack coat: Uniformly emulsified, grade SS-1H

2.4 SEALER

A. Provide a sealer consisting of suitable fibrated ch emical type asphalt

base binders and fillers having a container consist ency suitable for

troweling after thorough stirring, and containing n o clay or other

deleterious substance.

B. Where conflicts arise between this specification an d the requirements

in the latest version of the State Highway Specific ations, the State

Specifications shall control.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

The Asphalt Concrete Paving equipment, weather limi tations, job-mix

formula, mixing, construction methods, compaction, finishing,

tolerance, and protection shall conform to the requ irements of the

appropriate sections of the State Highway Specifica tions for the type

of material specified.

3.2 MIXING ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Provide hot plant-mixed asphaltic concrete paving m aterials.

1. Temperature leaving the plant: 143 degrees C (290 d egrees F)

minimum, 160 degrees C (320 degrees F) maximum.

2. Temperature at time of placing: 138 degrees C (280 degrees F)

minimum.

3.3 SUBGRADE

A. Shape to line and grade and compact with self-prope lled rollers.

B. All depressions that develop under rolling shall be filled with

acceptable material and the area re-rolled.

C. Soft areas shall be removed and filled with accepta ble materials and

the area re-rolled.

D. Should the subgrade become rutted or displaced prio r to the placing of

the subbase, it shall be reworked to bring to line and grade.

E. Proof-roll the subgrade with maximum 45 tonne (50 t on) gross weight

dump truck as directed by VA COR or VA Contracting Officer. If

pumping, pushing, or other movement is observed, re work the area to

provide a stable and compacted subgrade.

3.4 BASE COURSES

A. Subbase (when required)

32 12 16 - 4




1. Spread and compact to the thickness shown on the dr awings.

2. Rolling shall begin at the sides and continue towar d the center and

shall continue until there is no movement ahead of the roller.

3. After completion of the subbase rolling there shall be no hauling

over the subbase other than the delivery of materia l for the top

course.

B. Base

1. Spread and compact to the thickness shown on the dr awings.

2. Rolling shall begin at the sides and continue towar d the center and

shall continue until there is no movement ahead of the roller.

3. After completion of the base rolling there shall be no hauling over

the base other than the delivery of material for th e top course.

C. Thickness tolerance: Provide the compacted thicknes ses shown on the

Drawings within a tolerance of minus 0.0mm (0.0") t o plus 12.7mm

(0.5").

D. Smoothness tolerance: Provide the lines and grades shown on the

Drawings within a tolerance of 5mm in 3m (3/16 inch in ten feet).

E. Moisture content: Use only the amount of moisture n eeded to achieve the

specified compaction.

3.5 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

A. Remove all loose materials from the compacted base.

B. Apply the specified prime coat, and tack coat where required, and allow

to dry in accordance with the manufacturer’s recomm endations as

approved by the Architect or Engineer.

C. Receipt of asphaltic concrete materials:

1. Do not accept material unless it is covered with a tarpaulin until

unloaded, and unless the material has a temperature of not less than

130 degrees C(280 degrees F).

2. Do not commence placement of asphaltic concrete mat erials when the

atmospheric temperature is below 10 degrees C (50 d egrees F), not

during fog, rain, or other unsuitable conditions.

D. Spreading:

1. Spread material in a manner that requires the least handling.

2. Where thickness of finished paving will be 76mm (3" ) or less, spread

in one layer.

E. Rolling:

32 12 16 - 5




1. After the material has been spread to the proper de pth, roll until

the surface is hard, smooth, unyielding, and true t o the thickness

and elevations shown own the drawings.

2. Roll in at least two directions until no roller mar ks are visible.

3. Finished paving smoothness tolerance:

a. No depressions which will retain standing water.

b. No deviation greater than 3mm in 1.8m (1/8" in six feet).

3.6 APPLICATION OF SEAL COAT

A. Prepare the surfaces, mix the seal coat material, a nd apply in

accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations as approved by the

Architect or Engineer.

B. Achieve a finished surface seal which, when dry and thoroughly set, is

smooth, tough, resilient, of uniform black color, a nd free from coarse

textured areas, lap marks, ridges, and other surfac e irregularities.

C. When sealing new asphalt paving wait an entire year to allow for the

expansion and contraction of a year’s cycle of both warm and cool

temperatures. This allows for the asphalt’s oils to properly cure and

begin oxidation before applying a seal coat.

D. When seal coating in less than a year apply two coa ts, spray applied.

This application method is preferred for less than a year application

when there is still plenty of asphalt cement presen t for the seal coat

to bond to.

E. When seal coating existing paving that has new asph alt patches, apply

two coats sprayed to the existing asphalt and a sin gle lighter coat on

new patch work, just enough to make the color of th e new patches match

the rest of the reseal coated paving.

F. When resealing existing paving 5, 10, 15 years and older, that is

oxidized and is very light in color, squeegee apply the first coat of

seal coat and spray on a second coat. Two coats are preferred in older

paving when the asphalt cement has oxidized leaving the seal coat with

nothing to bond to other than the aggregate that in many cases has

polished over time leaving less than a desirable su rface to bond to.

3.7 PROTECTION

Protect the asphaltic concrete paved areas from tra ffic until the

sealer is set and cured and does not pick up under foot or wheeled

traffic.

32 12 16 - 6




3.8 FINAL CLEAN-UP

Remove all debris, rubbish, and excess material fro m the work area.

- - - E N D - - -




32 17 23 - 1

SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS



1. Paint on pavement surfaces, in form of traffic lane s, parking bays,

areas restricted to handicapped persons, crosswalks , and other

detail pavement markings.




1. TT-B-1325D - Beads (Glass Spheres) Retro-Reflective .

2. TT-P-1952F - Paint, Traffic and Airfield Marking, W aterborne.

C. Master Painters Institute (MPI):

1. No. 97 - Traffic Marking Paint, Latex. 1.3 SUBMITTALS


AND SAMPLES.


1. Show pavement marking configuration and dimensions.

2. Show international symbol of accessibility at desig nated parking

spaces.



2. Application instructions.

D. Samples:

1. Paint: 200 mm (8 inches) square, each type and colo r.

E. Certificates: Certify products comply with specific ations.

F. Qualifications: Substantiate qualifications comply with specifications.

1. Installer with project experience list. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE








32 17 23 - 2


completed projects.

1.5 DELIVERY

A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original sealed packaging.

B. Mark packaging, legibly. Indicate manufacturer's na me or brand, type,

color, production run number, and manufacture date.

C. Before installation, return or dispose of products within distorted,

damaged, or opened packaging. 1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store products indoors in dry, weathertight conditi oned facility.


operations.


A. Environment:

1. Product Temperature: Minimum 13 degrees C (55 degre es F) for minimum

48 hours before installation.

a. Surface to be painted and ambient temperature: M inimum

10 degrees C (50 degrees F) and maximum 35 degrees C

(95 degrees F).

B. Field Measurements: Verify field conditions affecti ng traffic marking

installation. Show field measurements on Submittal Drawings.

1.8 WARRANTY


Construction."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Design paint complying with specified performance:

1. Application: Fed. Spec. TT-P-1952. 2.2 PRODUCTS - GENERAL

A. Basis of Design: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FIN ISHES.

B. Provide each product from one manufacturer and from one production run. 2.3 SANDBLASTING EQUIPMENT

A. Air compressor, hoses, and nozzles of proper size a nd capacity as

required for cleaning painted surfaces. Compressor to provide minimum




32 17 23 - 3

0.08 cu. m/s (150 cfm) of air at pressure of minimu m 625 kPa (90 psi)

at each nozzle used.

2.4 PAINT APPLICATOR

A. Apply marking paint with approved mechanical equipm ent. Provide

equipment with constant agitation of paint and trav el at controlled

speeds. Synchronize one or more paint "guns" to aut omatically begin and

cut off paint flow in case of skip lines. Equipment to have manual

control to apply continuous lines of varying length and marking widths

as indicated on Drawings. Provide pneumatic spray g uns for hand

application of paint in areas where mobile paint ap plicator cannot be

used.

2.5 PAINT

A. Paint: MPI No. 97. For obliterating existing markin gs comply with

Fed. Spec. TT-P-1952. Provide minimum 18 L (5 gallo ns) containers.

2.6 REFLECTIVE GLASS BEADS

A. Beads: Comply with Fed. Spec. TT-B-1325, Type I, Gr adation A. In

regions of high humidity, coat beads with silicone or other suitable

waterproofing material to ensure free flow. Provide glass beads in

containers suitable for handling and strong enough to prevent loss

during shipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


1. Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for period of m inimum 14 days

before application of marking materials.


C. Clean substrates. Remove contaminants capable of af fecting subsequently

installed product's performance.

1. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface depos its by sweeping,

blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or combination of

these methods.

2. Completely remove rubber deposits, existing paint m arkings, and

other coatings adhering to pavement with scrapers, wire brushings,

sandblasting, mechanical abrasion, or approved chem icals as directed

by Contracting Officer's Representative.

32 17 23 - 4




3. As an option, comply with Fed. Spec. TT-P-1952 for removal of

existing paint markings on asphalt pavement. Apply black paint in as

many coats as necessary to completely obliterate ex isting markings.

4. Scrub affected areas with several applications of t risodium

phosphate solution or other approved detergent or d egreaser, and

rinse thoroughly after each application, Where oil or grease are

present on old pavements to be marked.

a. After cleaning, seal oil-soaked areas with cut shel lac to

prevent bleeding through new paint.

5. Clean and dry surface before pavement marking. Do n ot begin any

marking until Contracting Officer's Representative inspected surface

and gives permission to proceed.

3.2 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Apply Temporary Pavement Markings of colors, widths and lengths shown

on drawings or directed by Contracting Officer's Re presentative. After

temporary marking has served its purpose and when s o ordered by

Contracting Officer's Representative, remove tempor ary marking by

carefully controlled sandblasting, approved grindin g equipment, or

other approved method to prevent damage on applied surface.

B. As an option, provide approved preformed pressure s ensitive, adhesive

tape type of temporary pavement marking of required colors, widths and

lengths in lieu of temporary painted marking. Conti nuous durability and

effectiveness of such marking is required during pe riod for which its

use is required. Remove any unsatisfactory tape typ e marking and

replace with painted markings.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install products according to manufacturer's instru ctions and approved

submittal drawings.

1. When manufacturer's instructions deviate from speci fications, submit

proposed resolution for Contracting Officer's Repre sentative

consideration.

3.4 PAINT APPLICATION

A. Apply uniformly painted and reflective pavement mar king of required

colors, length, and width with true, sharp edges an d ends on properly

cured, prepared, and dried surfaces.

32 17 23 - 5




B. Comply with details as indicated on drawings and es tablished control

points.

C. Apply paint at wet film thickness of 0.4 mm (0.015 inch). Disperse

reflective glass beads evenly on wet paint at rate of 720 g/L (6 pounds

per gal.) of paint. Apply paint in one coat. When d irected by

Contracting Officer's Representative, apply additio nal coats at

markings showing light spots. Comply with paint man ufacturer's maximum

drying time requirements to prevent undue softening of asphalt, and

pick-up, displacement, or discoloration by tires of traffic.

D. When deficiency in marking drying occurs, discontin ue paint operations

until cause of slow drying is determined and correc ted.

E. Remove and replace marking applied less than minimu m material rates,

deviates from true alignment, exceeds stipulated le ngth and width

tolerances, or shows light spots, faulty distributi on of beads, smears,

or other deficiencies or irregularities.

F. Remove marking by carefully controlled sandblasting , approved grinding

equipment, or other approve method to prevent damag e on applied

surface.

3.5 DETAIL PAVEMENT MARKING APPLICATION

A. Apply Detail Pavement Markings, exclusive of actual traffic lane

marking as follows:

1. At exit and entrance islands and turnouts.

2. On curbs.

3. At crosswalks.

4. At parking bays.

5. Other locations as indicated on drawings.

B. Apply International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces.

Color as shown on drawings. Apply paint for symbol using suitable

template that will provide pavement marking with tr ue, sharp edges and

ends.

C. Install detail pavement markings of colors, widths and lengths, and

design pattern at locations indicated on drawings.

3.6 TOLERANCES

A. Length and Width of Lines: Plus or minus 75 mm (3 i nches) and plus or

minus 3 mm (1/8 inch), respectively, in case of ski p markings.

B. Length of intervals exceeding line length tolerance are not acceptable.

32 17 23 - 6




3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove excess paint before paint sets. 3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect pavement markings from traffic and construc tion operations.

1. Protect newly painted markings from vehicular traff ic until paint is

dry and track free.

2. Place warning signs at beginning of wet line, and a t points well in

advance of marking equipment for alerting approachi ng traffic from

both directions.

3. Place small flags or other similarly effective smal l objects near

freshly applied markings at frequent intervals to r educe crossing by

traffic.

B. Repair damage.

- - - E N D - - -




32 90 00 - 1

SECTION 32 90 00 PLANTING



1. Sod. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Pesticide: Any substance or mixture of substances, including biological

control agents, that may prevent, destroy, repel, o r mitigate pests and

is specifically labeled for use by U.S. Environment al Protection Agency

(EPA). Also, any substance used as plant regulator, defoliant,

disinfectant, or biocide.

B. Stand of Turf: 80 percent of established species. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS



1. Z60.1-2014 - Nursery Stock.

C. American Society for Testing And Materials (ASTM):

1. B221-14 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars , Rods, Wire,

Profiles, and Tubes.

2. B221M-13 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar s, Rods, Wire,

Profiles, and Tubes.

3. C33/C33M-16-Concrete Aggregates.

4. C136/C136M-14 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse A ggregates.

5. C602-13a - Agricultural Liming Materials.

6. D977-13e1 - Emulsified Asphalt.

7. D5268-13 - Topsoil Used for Landscaping Purposes.

D. Hortus Third: Concise Dictionary of Plants Cultivat ed in United States

and Canada.

E. Tree Care Industry Association (TCIA):

1. A300P1-2008 - Tree Care Operations - Trees, Shrubs and Other Woody

Plant Maintenance Standard Practices (Pruning).

2. Z133.1-2012 - Arboricultural Operations - Safety Re quirements.

F. Turfgrass Producers International (TPI):

1. 2006 Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding.




32 90 00 - 2

G. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA):

1. DOA SSIR 42-2014 - Soil Survey Laboratory Methods M anual.

2. Handbook No. 60 - Diagnosis and Improvement of Sali ne and Alkali

Soils.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS





b. Contractor.

c. Installer.


before meeting.

a. Inspection of planting materials.

b. Installation schedule.

c. Installation sequence.

d. Preparatory work.

e. Protection before, during, and after installation.

f. Installation.

g. Inspecting.

h. Environmental procedures.



1.6 SUBMITTALS


AND SAMPLES.

B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:


2. Photographs: Color photographs of each plant specie s showing actual

size and condition of plants to be provided with me asuring device

included for scale. Where more than 20 plants are r equired of any

species, submit minimum three photographs of averag e, best, and

worst quality plant to be provided. Include on each photograph,

plant full scientific name, size, and source nurser y.


4. Warranty.

a. Show type and quantity for each product.

32 90 00 - 3




C. Test reports: Certify products comply with specific ations.

D. Certificates: Certify products comply with specific ations.

1. Plant Materials: Department of Agriculture certific ation by State

Nursery Inspector declaring material to be free fro m insects and

disease.

2. Seed and Turf Materials: Notarized certificate of p roduct analysis.

E. Qualifications: Substantiate qualifications comply with specifications.

1. Installer, including supervisor with project experi ence list.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Care instructions for each plant material. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE






completed projects.

3. Member in good standing of either Professional Land care Network or

American Nursery and Landscape Association.

4. Personnel assigned to Work certified in following c ategories from

Professional Landcare Network and submit one copy o f certificate to

Contracting Officer’s Representative:

a. Certified Landscape Technician (CLT) - Exterior, wi th

installation specialty areas, designated CLT-Exteri or.

B. Contracting Officer’s Representative may review pla nt materials either

at place of growth or project site before planting for compliance with

requirements. Contracting Officer’s Representative retains right to

inspect trees and shrubs to determine if any unacce ptable conditions

exist and to reject any trees or shrubs at any time during Project. All

rejected trees and shrubs must be immediately remov ed from Project

site.

1. Submit plant material source information to Contrac ting Officer’s

Representative seven days in advance of delivery to Project site. 1.8 DELIVERY

A. Deliver packaged products in manufacturer's origina l sealed packaging.

B. Bulk Products:

32 90 00 - 4




1. Deliver bulk products away from buildings, utilitie s, pavement, and

existing turf and planted areas. Maintain dry bulk product storage

away from contaminants.

2. Install erosion control materials to prevent erosio n or displacement

of bulk products. 1.9 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Plant Storage and Protection: Store and protect pla nts not planted on

day of arrival at Project site as follows:

1. Shade and protect plants in outdoor storage areas f rom wind and

direct sunlight until planted.

2. Heel-in bare root plants.

3. Protect balled and burlapped plants from freezing o r drying out by

covering balls or roots with moist burlap, sawdust, wood chips,

shredded bark, peat moss, or other approved materia l. Provide

covering that allows air circulation.

4. Keep plants in moist condition until planted by wat ering with fine

mist spray.

5. Do not store plant materials directly on concrete o r bituminous

surfaces.

B. Topsoil: Before stockpiling topsoil, eradicate on s ite undesirable

growing vegetation. Clear and grub existing vegetat ion three to four

weeks before stockpiling existing topsoil.

C. Root Control Barrier and Weed Control Fabric: Store materials in site

in enclosures or under protective covering in dry l ocation out of

direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on ground.

D. Handling: Do not drop or dump plants from vehicles. Avoid damaging

plants being moved from nursery or storage area to planting site.

Remove damaged plants from Project site.


A. Environment:

1. Coordinate installation of planting materials durin g optimal

planting seasons for each type of plant material re quired.

2. Restrictions: Do not plant when ground is frozen, s now

covered, muddy, or when air temperature exceed 32 d egrees C

(90 degrees F).

B. Weather Limitations: Install plantings only during current and

forecasted weather conditions that are comply with plant requirements.

32 90 00 - 5




Apply associated products in compliance with manufa cturers'

instructions.

1.11 WARRANTY


Construction."

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Warrant plantings and agai nst material

defects.

1. Warranty Period: Two years.

2. Plant and Turf Warranty Periods will begin from dat e of Government

acceptance of project or phase for beneficial use a nd occupancy.

3. Contracting Officer's Representative will reinspect plants and turf

at end of Warranty Period. Replace any dead, missin g, or defective

plant material and turf immediately. Warranty Perio d will end on

date of this inspection provided Contractor has com plied with

warranty work required by this specification. Compl y with following

requirements:

a. Replace any plants more than 25 percent dead, missi ng or

defective plant material before final inspection.

b. Only one replacement of each plant will be required except when

losses or replacements are due to failure to comply with these

requirements.

c. Complete remedial measures directed by Contracting Officer’s

Representative to ensure plant and turf survival.

d. Repair damage caused while making plant or turf rep lacements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS - GENERAL

A. Provide each product from one source or manufacture r. 2.2 SOD

A. Sod: Nursery grown, certified and classified in TPI 's "Guideline

Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding" as GSS. Machin e cut sod at uniform

thickness of 19 mm (3/4 inch) within tolerance of 6 mm (1/4 inch),

excluding top growth and thatch. Each individual so d piece to be strong

enough to support its own weight when lifted by end s. Broken pads,

irregularly shaped pieces, and torn or uneven ends will not be

permitted.

B. Sod Species: Genetically pure, free of weeds, pests , and disease.

32 90 00 - 6




2.3 PLANTING SOILS

A. Planting Soil: Evaluate soil for use as topsoil acc ording to

ASTM D5268. From 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by

topsoil composition tests of Organic Carbon, 6A, Ch emical Analysis

Method described in USDA DOA SSIR 42. Maximum parti cle size, 19 mm

(3/4 inch), with maximum 3 percent retained on 6 mm (1/4 inch) screen.

Mix topsoil with following soil amendments as recom mended by soils

analysis.

B. Existing Planting Soil: Existing, native surface to psoil formed under

natural conditions retained during excavation proce ss and stockpiled

on-site. Verify suitability of native surface topso il to produce viable

planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, st ones, clay lumps,

and other extraneous materials harmful to plant gro wth.

1. Supplement with planting soil when quantities are i nsufficient.

2. Mix existing, native surface topsoil with soil amen dments as

recommended by soils analysis.

C. Imported Planting Soil: Imported topsoil or manufac tured topsoil from

off-site sources are acceptable if sufficient topso il is not available

on site to meet specified depth. At least 10 days b efore topsoil

delivery, notify Contracting Officer’s Representati ve of topsoil

sources. Obtain imported topsoil displaced from nat urally well-drained

construction or mining sites where topsoil is at le ast 100 mm

(4 inches) deep. Topsoil from agricultural land, bo gs, or marshes will

be rejected.

2.4 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: Commercial grade hydrated limestone containin g calcium carbonate

equivalent (CCE) specified in ASTM C602 of minimum 80 percent.

B. Sulfur: 100 percent elemental.

C. Iron Sulfate: 100 percent elemental.

D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade.

E. Perlite: Horticultural grade.

F. Agricultural Gypsum: Coarsely ground from recycled scrap gypsum board

comprised of calcium sulfate dehydrate 91 percent, calcium 22 percent,

sulfur 17 percent, minimum 96 percent passing throu gh 850 micrometers

20 mesh screen, 100 percent passing through 970 mic rometers 16 mesh

screen.

32 90 00 - 7




G. Coarse Sand: ASTM C33/C33M, clean and free of mater ials harmful to

plants.

H. Vermiculite: Horticultural grade for planters.

I. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, wi th approximately 140

percent water absorption capacity by weight.

J. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 p ercent water

absorption by weight.

2.5 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Organic Matter: Commercially prepared compost. Free of substances toxic

to plantings and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: shredded hardwood, pine str aw mulch from

project site when available. Biobased content 100 p ercent. Wood

cellulose fiber processed to contain no growth or

germination-inhibiting factors, dyed with non-toxic , biodegradable

dye to appropriate color to facilitate visual meter ing of materials

application.

2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residu als; biosolids;

yard trimmings; or source-separated or compostable mixed solid

waste.

B. Peat: Natural product of peat moss derived from fre sh-water site,

conforming to ASTM D4427 and containing no invasive species, including

seeds. Shred and granulate peat to pass 12.5 mm (1/ 2 inch) mesh screen

and condition in storage pile for minimum 6 months after excavation.

Biobased content minimum 100 percent.

C. Composted Derivatives: Ground bark, nitolized sawdu st, humus, or other

green wood waste material free of stones, sticks, i nvasive species,

including seeds, and soil stabilized with nitrogen and having following

properties:

1. Particle Size: Minimum percent by weight passing:

a. 4.75 mm (No. 4) mesh screen: 95.

b. 2.36 mm (No. 8) mesh screen: 80.

2. Nitrogen Content: Minimum percent based on dry weig ht:

a. Fir sawdust: 0.7.

b. Fir or pine bark: 1.0.

3. Biobased Content: 100 percent.

32 90 00 - 8




D. Manure: Well-rotted, horse or cattle manure contain ing maximum 25

percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other beddi ng materials; free

of seeds, stones, sticks, soil, and other invasive species.

2.6 WEED CONTROL FABRIC

A. Roll Type Polypropylene or Polyester Mats: Woven, n eedle punched, or

non-woven fabric treated for protection against det erioration due to

ultraviolet radiation. Minimum 99 percent opaque to prevent

photosynthesis and seed germination, fabric allows air, water, and

nutrients to pass through to plant roots.

1. Minimum weight: 0.11 kg per square meter (5 ounces per square yard).

2. Minimum thickness: 0.50 mm (20 mils). 2.7 WATER

A. Water: Source approved by Contracting Officer's Rep resentative and

suitable quality for irrigation, containing no elem ents toxic to plant

life, including acids, alkalis, salts, chemical pol lutants, and organic

matter. Use collected storm water or graywater when available.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and

conditions affecting installation and performance.

1. Verify that no materials that would inhibit plant g rowth are present

in planting area. If such materials are present, re move soil and

contaminants ad directed by Contracting Officer's R epresentative and

provide new planting soil.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in fr ozen, wet, or

muddy conditions.

3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operat ions if soil

moisture becomes excessive. Resume soil preparation s when moisture

content returns to acceptable level.

4. If soil is excessively dry, not workable, and too d usty, moisten

uniformly.

5. Special conditions may exist that warrant variance in specified

planting dates or conditions. Submit written reques t to Contracting

Officer’s Representative stating special conditions and proposed

variance.

32 90 00 - 9




B. Proceed with planting operations only after unsatis factory conditions

have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect existing and proposed landscape features, e lements, and site

construction and completed work from damage. Protec t trees, vegetation,

and other designated features by erecting high-visi bility, reusable

construction fencing. Locate fence no closer to tre es than drip line.

Plan equipment and vehicle access to minimize and c onfine soil

disturbance and compaction to areas indicated on dr awings.

B. Install erosion control materials at all areas insi de or outside limits

of construction that are disturbed by planting oper ations. Provide

erosion control and seeding with native plant speci es to protect

slopes.

3.3 PLANT BED PREPARATION

A. Verify location of underground utilities before exc avation. Protect

existing adjacent turf before excavations are made. Do not disturb

topsoil and vegetation in areas outside those indic ated on Drawings.

Where planting beds occur in existing turf areas, r emove turf to depth

that will ensure removal of entire roof system. Mea sure depth of plant

pits from finished grade. Provide depth of plant pi t excavation and

relation of top of root ball and finish grade as in dicated on drawings.

Install plant materials as specified in Article 3.8 . Do not plant trees

within 3 m (10 feet) of any utility lines or buildi ng walls.

B. For newly graded subgrades, loosen subgrade to mini mum 100 mm

(4 inches) deep. Remove stones larger than 25 mm (1 inch) in any

dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other ext raneous matter and

legally dispose of them off Government's property.

1. Apply soil amendments directly to subgrade before l oosening, at

rates recommended by soils analysis.

2. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilize r on surface, and

thoroughly blend planting soil.

3. Spread planting soil 100 mm (4 inches) deep but min imum required to

meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do

not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or

excessively wet.

32 90 00 - 10




a. Spread approximately 1/2 thickness of planting soil over

loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 50 mm (2 inches) of

subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.

b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of

sod.

C. Finish grade planting areas to smooth, uniform surf ace plane with

loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 13 mm

(1/2 inch) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remo ve ridges, and fill

depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish gra ding to areas that

can be planted in immediate future.

3.4 SODDING

A. Place sod maximum 36 hours after initial harvesting according to

TPI GSS, except as modified herein.

B. For slopes 2 to 1 and greater, lay sod with long ed ge perpendicular to

contour. For V-ditches and flat bottomed ditches, l ay sod with long

edge perpendicular to water flow. On sloped areas, start sodding at

bottom of slope.

C. Finishing: After sodding, blend edges of sodded are a smoothly into

surrounding area. Eliminate air pockets and provide true and even

surface. Trim frayed areas and patch holes and miss ing areas with sod.

D. Rolling: Immediately after sodding, firm entire are a, except slopes in

excess of 3: 1, with roller maximum 134 kg (90 lbs. ) for each foot of

roller width.

E. Watering: Start watering sodded areas as required b y daily temperature

and wind conditions. Water at rate sufficient to en sure thorough

wetting of soil to minimum 150 mm (6 inches) deep. Prevent run-off,

puddling, and wilting. Do not drive watering trucks over turf areas,

unless otherwise directed. Prevent watering of othe r adjacent areas or

plant materials.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove and legally dispose of all excess soil and p lanting debris. 3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect plants from traffic and construction operat ions.

B. Provide temporary fences or enclosures and signage, at planted areas.

Maintain fences and enclosures during maintenance p eriod.

C. Remove protective materials immediately before acce ptance.

32 90 00 - 11




D. Repair damage.

- - - E N D - - -




33 10 11-1

SECTION 33 10 00

WATER UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies materials and procedures for construction of

underground water distribution for domestic and/or fire supply systems

outside the building that are complete and ready fo r operation. This

includes piping, structures, appurtenances and all other incidentals.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Excavation, Trench Widths, Pipe Bedding, Backfill, Shoring, Sheeting,

Bracing: Section 31 20 00, EARTH MOVING.

B. Concrete: Section 03 30 00, CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

C. Submittals: Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUC T DATA AND SAMPLES.

D. Erosion and Sediment Control: Section 01 57 19, TEM PORARY ENVIRONMENTAL

CONTROLS.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Water distribution system: Pipelines and appurtenan ces which are part of

the distribution system outside the building for po table water and fire

supply.

B. Water service line: Pipeline from main line to 5 fe et outside of

building.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS

A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

B. DI: Ductile iron pipe.

C. WOG: Water, Oil and Gas.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maint ain end caps through

shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to

prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt by ele vating above grade.

Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moi sture and dirt.

C. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight and support to

prevent sagging and bending.

D. Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems:




33 10 11-2

1. Care shall be exercised in the storage and handling of equipment and

piping material to be incorporated in the work. Deb ris arising from

cutting, threading and welding of piping shall be r emoved.

2. Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to

deliver clean systems.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with COR 2 week s in advance.


A. Products Criteria:

1. When two or more units of the same type or class of materials or

equipment are required, these units shall be produc ts of one

manufacturer.

2. A nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or trademar k, including model

number, shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on

equipment. In addition, the model number shall be e ither cast

integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise pe rmanently marked

on each item of equipment.

B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard produ cts of a manufacturer

regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product s for at least three

years. Digital electronic devices, software and sys tems such as

controls, instruments or computer work stations sha ll be the current

generation of technology and basic design that has a proven satisfactory

service record of at least three years.

C. Regulatory requirements:

1. Comply with the rules and regulations of the public utility company

having jurisdiction over the connection to public w ater lines and the

extension and/or modifications to public utility sy stems.

2. Comply with the rules and regulations of the Federa l, State, and/or

Local Health Departments having jurisdiction for po table water-

service.

D. Provide certification of factory hydrostatic testin g of not less than

500 psi (3.5 MPa) in accordance with AWWA C151. Pip ing materials shall

bear the label, stamp or other markings of the spec ified testing agency.

E. Before any welding is performed, contractor shall s ubmit a certificate

certifying that welders comply with the following r equirements:

33 10 11-3




1. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME

"Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Wel ding and Brazing

Qualifications".

2. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 series "Code for Pressure Piping".

3. Certify that each welder has passed American Weldin g Society (AWS)

qualification tests for the welding processes invol ved, and that

certification is current.

4. All welds shall be stamped according to the provisi ons of the

American Welding Society.

F. Where installation procedures or any part thereof a re required to be in

accordance with the recommendations of the manufact urer of the material

being installed, printed copies of these recommenda tions shall be

furnished to the Resident Engineer prior to install ation.

G. Applicable codes:

1. Plumbing Systems: IPC, International Plumbing Code.

2. Electrical components, devices and accessories shal l be listed and

labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a te sting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and m arked for intended

use.

3. Fire-service main products shall be listed in the F M Global “Approval

Guide” or Underwriters Laboratories (UL) “Fire Prot ection Equipment

Directory”.



extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the



MSS SP-123-1998(R2006)..Non-Ferrous Threaded and So lder-Joint Unions

for Use With Copper Water Tube

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

B31.....................Code for Pressure Piping St andards


A36/A36M-08.............Carbon Structural Steel

A536-84(2009)...........Ductile Iron Castings

33 10 11-4




A674-10.................Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe

for Water or Other Liquids

B62-09..................Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

C651-05.................Disinfecting Water Mains

C858-10e1...............Underground Precast Utility Structures D1785-

06................Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plast ic Pipe,

Schedules 40, 80, and 120

D2239-03................Polyethylene (PE) Plastic P ipe (SIDR-PR) Based

on Controlled Inside Diameter

D2464-06................Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chlori de) PVC Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 80

D2466-06................Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe Fittings,

Schedule 40

D2467-06................Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 80

D2609-02(2008)..........Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE)

Plastic Pipe

D3350-10a...............Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings

Materials

F714-10.................Polyethylene (PE) Plastic P ipe (SDR-PR) Based

on Outside Diameter F1267-

07................Metal, Expanded, Steel

E. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

B300-10.................Hypochlorites

B301-10.................Liquid Chlorine

C104-08.................Cement–Mortar Lining for Du ctile Iron Pipe and

Fittings

C105/A21.5-10...........Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe

Systems

C110-08.................Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings

33 10 11-5




C111/A21.11-07..........Rubber-Gasket Joints for Du ctile Iron Pressure

Pipe and Fittings

C115/A21.11-11..........Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe w ith Ductile Iron or

Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges

C151/A21.51-09..........Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifu gally Cast

C153/A21.53-11..........Ductile Iron Compact Fittin gs for Water Service

C510-07.................Double Check Valve Backflow Prevention Assembly

C512-07.................Air Release, Air/Vacuum and Combination Air

Valves

C550-05.................Protective Interior Coating s for Valves and

Hydrants

C600-10.................Installation of Ductile Iro n Mains and Their

Appurtenances

C605-11.................Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride

(PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water

C606-11.................Grooved and Shouldered Join ts

C651-05.................Disinfecting Water Mains

C700-09.................Cold-Water Meters, “Displac ement Type,” Bronze

Main Case

C800-05.................Underground Service Line Va lves and Fittings

C900-09.................Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pr essure Pipe and

Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100

mm Through 300 mm), for Water Transmission and

Distribution

C906-07.................Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4

In. (100 mm) Through 64 In. (1,600 mm), for

Water Distribution and Transmission

C907-04.................Injection-Molded PVC Pressu re Fittings, 4 Inch

through 12 Inch (100 mm through 300 mm), for

Water Distribution

M23-2nd Ed..............PVC Pipe, Design and Instal lation

33 10 11-6




M44-2nd Ed..............Distribution Valves: Select ion, Installation,

Field Testing and Maintenance

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

NFPA 24-2010 Ed.........Installation of Private Fir e Service Mains and

Their Appurtenances

NFPA 1963-2009 Ed.......Fire Hose Connections

G. NSF International (NSF):

NSF/ANSI 14 (2013)......Plastics Piping System Comp onents and Related

Materials

NSF/ANSI 61-2012........Drinking Water System Compo nents - Health

Effects

NSF/ANSI 372-2011.......Drinking Water System Compo nents – Lead Content

H. American Welding Society (AWS):

A5.8/A5.8M-2004 ........Filler Metals for Brazing a nd Braze Welding

I. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL):

246.....................Hydrants for Fire-Protectio n Service

262.....................Gate Valves for Fire-Protec tion Service

312.....................Check Valves for Fire-Prote ction Service

405.....................Fire Department Connection Devices

753.....................Alarm Accessories for Autom atic Water-Supply

Control Valves for Fire Protection Service

789.....................Indicator Posts for Fire-Pr otection Service

1091....................Butterfly Valves for Fire-P rotection Service

1285....................Pipe and Couplings, Polyvin yl Chloride (PVC),

and Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO) for

Underground Fire Service

1.9 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall remedy any defect due to fault y material or

workmanship and pay for any damage to other work re sulting therefrom

within a period of one year from final acceptance. Further, the

Contractor will furnish all manufacturers’ and supp lier's written

33 10 11-7




guarantees and warranties covering materials and eq uipment furnished

under this Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Material or equipment containing a weighted average of greater than

0.25 percent lead shall not be used in any potable water system intended

for human consumption, and shall be certified in ac cordance with

NSF/ANSI 61 or NSF 372.

B. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall me et NSF/ANSI 14 and

shall be NSF listed for the service intended.

2.2 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS

A. Standardization of components shall be maximized to reduce spare part

requirements. The contractor shall guarantee perfor mance of assemblies

of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as

required to deliver specified performance of the co mplete assembly.

2.3 SAFETY GUARDS

A. All equipment shall have moving parts protected to prevent personal

injury. Pump shafts and couplings shall be fully gu arded by a sheet

steel guard, covering coupling and shaft but not be arings. Material

shall be minimum 16-gauge sheet steel; ends shall b e braked and drilled

and attached to pump base with minimum of four 1/4 inch (6 mm) bolts.

Reinforce guard as necessary to prevent side play f orcing guard onto

couplings.

2.4 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS

A. Equipment shall be provided with suitable lifting a ttachments to enable

equipment to be lifted in its normal position. Lift ing attachments shall

withstand any handling conditions that might be enc ountered, without

bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lower ing and braking of

load.

2.5 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, wit h mechanical-joint

bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated,

350 psi (2400 kPa).

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-

iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron co mpact pattern.

33 10 11-8




2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands,

rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Cement Mortar Internal Lining: Cement mortar lining and bituminous seal

coat as per AWWA C104.

C. Exterior Pipe Coating: The exterior of pipe shall h ave the standard

asphaltic coating.

2.6 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 200, with bell end with gasket, and

with spigot end.

1. Comply with UL 1285 for fire-service mains if indic ated.

2. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900, Class 200, with bell-and-spigot

or double-bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell.

3. PVC Molded Fittings: AWWA C907, Class 150, with bel l-and-spigot or

double-bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in eac h bell.

4. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-

iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron co mpact pattern.

a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron

glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

2.7 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PE, ASTM Pipe: ASTM D2239, SIDR No. 5.3, 7, or 9; w ith PE compound

number required to give pressure rating not less th an 200 psi (1380

kPa).

1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D2609, made of PA , PP, or PVC with

serrated male insert ends matching inside of pipe. Include bands or

crimp rings.

2. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D3350, PE resin, socket- o r butt-fusion

type, made to match PE pipe dimensions and class.

B. PE, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C906, DR No. 7.3, 9, or 9.3; wi th PE compound number

required to give pressure rating not less than 200 psi (1380 kPa).

2.8 PE, AWWA FITTINGS: AWWA C906, SOCKET- OR BUTT-FUSIO N TYPE, WITH DR NUMBER

MATCHING PIPE AND PE COMPOUND NUMBER REQUIRED TO GIVE PRESSURE RATING

NOT LESS THAN 200 PSI (1380 KPA).VALVES

A. Gate Valves: AWWA C509, Non-rising Stem, Resilient Seat, 200 psi (1380

kPa).

1. Valves 3 inches (75 mm) and larger: Resilient seat valve with gray-

or ductile iron body and bonnet; cast iron or bronz e double-disc

gate; bronze gate rings; non-rising bronze stem and stem nut.

33 10 11-9




2. Interior and exterior coating: AWWA C550, thermo-se tting or fusion

epoxy.

3. Underground valve nut: Furnish valves with 2 inch ( 50 mm) nut for

socket wrench operation.

4. Aboveground and pit operation: Furnish valves with hand wheels.

5. End connections shall be mechanical.

B. Gate Valve Accessories and Specialties

1. Tapping-Sleeve Assembly: ANSI MSS SP-60; sleeve and valve to be

compatible with the drilling matching.

a. Tapping Sleeve: Cast or Ductile Iron, two-piece bol ted sleeve.

Sleeve to match the size and type of pipe material being tapped.

b. Valve shall include one raised face flange mating t apping-sleeve

flange.

2. Valve Boxes: AWWA M44 with top section, adjustable extension of

length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering

"WATER," and bottom section with base that fits ove r valve and with a

barrel.

3. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one poin ted end, stem of

length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve

operating nut. (Provide two wrenches for Project.)

4. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG approved, vertical-typ e, cast iron body

with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustabl e cast iron barrel

of length required for depth of burial of valve.

2.9 DISINFECTION CHLORINE

A. Liquid chlorine: AWWA B301.

B. Sodium Hypochlorite: AWWA B300 with 5 percent to 15 percent available

chlorine.

C. Calcium hypochlorite: AWWA B300 supplied in granula r form of 5 g.

tablets, and shall contain 65 percent chlorine by w eight.

2.10 WARNING TAPE

A. Warning tape shall be standard, 4 mil. Polyethylene , 3 inch (76 mm) wide

tape, detectable type, blue with black letters and imprinted with

“CAUTION BURIED WATER LINE BELOW”.

33 10 11-10




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to

the following applications.

1. Transition couplings and special fittings with pres sure ratings at

least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping .

3. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and sp ecial fittings may

be used, instead of joints indicated, on abovegroun d piping and

piping in vaults.

B. Underground water-service piping NPS 4 to NPS 16 (D N 100 to DN 400)

shall be any of the following:

1. Ductile iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile iron, mechanical-joint

fittings; and mechanical joints.

2. PE, AWWA pipe; PE, AWWA fittings; and heat-fusion j oints.

3. PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe: PVC, AWWA Class 200 fabri cated mechanical-

joint, ductile iron fittings; and gasketed joints.

3.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE

A. Install Ductile Iron, water-service piping accordin g to AWWA C600 and

AWWA M41-3rd Edition.

1. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement accordin g to ASTM A674 or

AWWA C105/A21.5.

B. Pipe shall be sound and clean before laying. When l aying is not in

progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by watertight plug

or other approved means.

C. When cutting pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine,

leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Bevel cut

ends of pipe to be used with push-on bell to confor m to the manufactured

spigot end. Cement lining shall be undamaged.

D. Push on joints shall be made in strict accordance w ith the

manufacturer’s instruction. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends looking

ahead.

3.3 PVC PIPE

A. PVC piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions and AWWA C605. Place se lected material and

thoroughly compacted to one foot above the top of t he pipe.

33 10 11-11




B. Install Copper Tracer Wire, No. 14 AWG solid, singl e conductor,

insulated. Install in the trench with piping to all ow location of the

pipe with electronic detectors. The wire shall not be spiraled around

the pipe nor taped to the pipe. Wire connections ar e to be made by

stripping the insulation from the wire and solderin g with rosin core

solder per ASTM 828. Solder joints shall be wrapped with rubber tape and

electrical tape. At least every 1000 feet (300 m) p rovide a 5 pound (2.3

kg) magnesium anode attached to the main tracer wir e by solder. The

solder joint shall be wrapped with rubber tape and with electrical tape.

An anode shall also be attached at the end of each line.

3.4 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Install water-distribution piping with restrained j oints. Anchorages and

restrained-joint types that may be used include: co ncrete thrust blocks.

B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and

hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the follow ing piping systems:

1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA

C600.

2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23.

3. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.

3.5 APPLY FULL COAT OF ASPHALT OR OTHER ACCEPTABLE CORROSION-RESISTANT

MATERIAL TO SURFACES OF INSTALLED FERROUS ANCHORAGE DEVICES.VALVE

INSTALLATION

A. AWWA Valves: Install each underground valve with st em pointing up and

with valve box.

B. Raise or lower existing valve and curb stop boxes a nd fire hydrants to

finish grade in areas being graded.

C.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fi ttings, and

specialties. Install water service lines to a point of connection within

approximately 5 feet (1500 mm) outside of building( s) to which service

is to be connected and make connections thereto. If building services

have not been installed provide temporary caps and mark for future

connection.

33 10 11-12





A. Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust

blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing

and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use on ly potable water.

B. Prior to final acceptance, provide a video record o f all piping from the

building to the municipal connection to show the li nes are free from

obstructions, properly sloped and joined.

C. Perform hydrostatic tests at not less than one-and- one-half times

working pressure for two hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50-psi (350-kPa) increments an d inspect each

joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease

to 0 psi (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pre ssure and hold for

1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour

per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new mate rials and repeat

test until leakage is within allowed limits.

D. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground warning tape 12 inch es (300 mm) directly

over piping.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and par ts of existing

systems that have been altered, extended, or repair ed before use.

B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed b y local utility

provider or other authorities having jurisdiction o r, if method is not

prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described

in AWWA C651 or do as follows:

1. Fill the water system with a water/chlorine solutio n containing at

least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stan d for 24 hours.

2. Drain the system of the previous solution and refil l with

water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine;

isolate and allow system to stand for 3 hours.

3. After standing time, flush system with clean, potab le water until no

chlorine remains in water coming from system.

4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorit ies having

jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examin ation shows

evidence of contamination.

C. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activit ies.

33 10 11-13




--- E N D ---




33 63 00-1

SECTION 33 63 00

STEAM ENERGY DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies materials and procedures for construction of

underground steam distribution and condensate retur n piping system,

including manholes, outside the buildings. System s hall be: pre-

engineered direct-buried drainable-dryable-testable (DDT).

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Excavation, Trench Widths, Pipe Bedding, Backfill, Shoring, Sheeting,

Bracing: Section 31 20 00, EARTH MOVING.

B. Concrete Work, Reinforcing, Placement and Finishing : Section 03 30 00,

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

C. General plumbing, protection of Materials and Equip ment, and quality

assurance: Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FO R PLUMBING.

D. Painting exposed steel and other surfaces: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

E. Steel for trench and tunnel pipe supports: Section 05 50 00, METAL

FABRICATIONS.

F. Cathodic Protection of DDT Pre-Engineered Direct-Bu ried Systems: Section

26 42 00, CATHODIC PROTECTION.

G. Submittals: Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUC T DATA AND SAMPLES.

H. Metering: SECTION 25 10 10, ADVANCED UTILITY METERI NG SYSTEM.

I. Erosion and Sediment Controls: Section 01 57 19, TE MPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL

CONTROLS.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: The complete underground steam and condensa te distribution

system including all components such as carrier pip ing, pipe supports,

insulation, protective enclosures, anchors, corrosi on protection and

accessories.

B. Pre-Engineered Direct-Buried System: The factory-fa bricated system.

C. Drainable-Dryable-Testable (DDT) Pre-Engineered Dir ect-Buried System: A

factory-fabricated system.

D. Carrier Pipe: Pipe carrying the steam or condensate .

E. Encasement Pipe: Outer protective pipe on any main line pipe. Carrier

pipe and insulation are within the casing.




33 63 00-2

F. HP Systems: High-pressure piping operating at more than 15 psi (104 kPa)

as required by ASME B31.1.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS

A. HDPE: high-density polyethylene

B. RTRP: reinforced thermosetting resin plastic

C. RTRF: reinforced thermosetting resin fittings

D. WOG: water, oil and gas

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protec tion of equipment and

material against damage. Protect piping systems aga inst the entry of

water, mud or other foreign substances by installin g watertight covers

on open ends at all times. Protect direct-buried sy stem coatings from

ultraviolet light (sunlight). Existing equipment wo rked on by the

Contractor or in the Contractor's working area shal l be considered to be

in the custody and responsibility of the Contractor .

B. All insulated piping systems exposed to water must be replaced prior to

installation.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate exterior steam lines and connections to building services up

to the actual extent of building wall.


A. Products Criteria:

1. When two or more units of the same type or class of materials or

equipment are required, these units shall be produc ts of one

manufacturer.

2. A nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or trademar k, including model

number, shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on

equipment. In addition, the model number shall be c ast integrally

with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently m arked on each item

of equipment.

B. Contractor shall restore damaged items to as-new op erating condition or

replace damaged items as directed by the Contractin g Officer’s

Representative, at no additional cost to the Govern ment.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and pers onnel according to

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31.9, Building Serv ices Piping and

ASME B31.1, Power Piping.




33 63 00-3

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualificati on tests for

welding processes involved and that certification i s current.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, Building S ervices Piping, ASME

B31.1, Power Piping, for materials, products, and i nstallation.

E. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear

appropriate ASME labels.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers’ Literature and Data shall be submitt ed, as one package,

for pipes, fittings and appurtenances, including jo inting materials,

insulation, hangars and other miscellaneous items.



extent referenced. The publications are referred in the text by basic

designation only.


A-A-60005 NOT 1.........Frames, Covers, Grating, St eps, Sump and Catch

Basin, Manhole

L-S-125.................Screening, Insect, Nonmetal lic

C. Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.):

MIL-S-901...............Shock Tests H.I. (High Impa ct) Shipboard

Machinery, Equipment and Systems


A36/A36M-08.............Carbon Structural Steel

A47/A47M-99(2009).......Ferritic Malleable Iron Cas tings

A53/A53M-10.............Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless

A105/A105M-10a..........Carbon Steel Forgings for P iping Applications

A106/A106M-10...........Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature

Service

A126-04(2009)...........Gray Iron Castings for Valv es, Flanges, and

Pipe Fittings

A139/A139M-04(2010).....Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welde d Steel Pipe (NPS 4

and Over)




33 63 00-4

A167-99(2009)...........Stainless and Heat-Resistin g Chromium-Nickel

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

A193/A193M-10a..........Alloy-Steel and Stainless S teel Bolting for

High Temperature or High Pressure Service and

Other Special Purpose Applications

A194/A194M-10a..........Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High

Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both

A197/A197M-00(2006) ....Cupola Malleable Iron

A234/A234M-10b..........Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and

Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature

Service

A240/A240M-10b..........Chromium and Chromium-Nicke l Stainless Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels

and for General Applications

A307-10.................Carbon Steel Bolts and Stud s, 60 000 PSI

Tensile Strength

A666-10.................Annealed or Cold-Worked Aus tenitic Stainless

Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar

A733-03(2009)...........Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic

Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples B61-

08..................Steam or Valve Bronze Castings

C177-10.................Steady-State Heat Flux Meas urements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the

Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus

C411-05.................Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature

Thermal Insulation

C449-07.................Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Set ting Thermal

Insulating and Finishing Cement

C450-08.................Fabrication of Thermal Insu lating Fitting

Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging

C533-09.................Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal

Insulation

33 63 00-5




C547-07.................Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulati on

C552-07.................Cellular Glass Thermal Insu lation

C585-10.................Inner and Outer Diameters o f Thermal Insulation

for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing

C591-09.................Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cel lular

Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation

C655-09.................Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm

Drain, and Sewer Pipe

C920-10.................Elastomeric Joint Sealants

C1126-10a...............Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cell ular Phenolic

Thermal Insulation

C1136-10................Flexible, Low Permeance Vap or Retarders for

Thermal Insulation

D2996-01(2007)..........Filament-Wound Fiberglass ( Glass-Fiber-

Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe

D4024-05................Machine Made Fiberglass (Gl ass-Fiber-Reinforced

Thermosetting Resin) Flanges

E84-10b.................Surface Burning Characteris tics of Building

Materials

E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

B1.20.1-2006............Pipe Threads, General Purpo se (Inch)

B16.3-2006..............Malleable Iron Threaded Fit tings: Classes 150

and 300

B16.4-2006..............Gray Iron Threaded Fittings : (Classes 125 and

250)

B16-5-2009..............Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fi ttings: NPS 1/2

through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard

B16.9-2007..............Factory-Made Wrought Buttwe lding Fittings

B16.11-2009.............Forged Fittings, Socket-Wel ding and Threaded

B16.21-2005.............Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets fo r Pipe Flanges

33 63 00-6




B18.2.1-2010............Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts

and Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and

Lag Screws (Inch Series)

B31.1-2010..............Power Piping

B31.9-2008..............Building Services Piping

B40.1000-2009...........Pressure Gauges and Gauge A ttachments

F. American Welding Society (AWS):

B2.1-B2.1M-BMG-2009.....Base Metal Grouping for Wel ding Procedures and

Performance Qualification

D10.12/D10.12M-2000.....Guide for welding Mild Stee l Pipe

G. American Association of State Highway and Transport ation Officials

(AASHTO):

M300-03.................Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer

H. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS):

MSS SP 58...............Pipe Hangers and Supports-M aterials, Design,

Manufacture, Selection, Application and

Installation

I. NACE International (NACE):

SP0169-2007.............Control of External Corrosi on on Underground or

Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

J. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA):

255-2006 Ed.............Test Burning Characteristic s of Building

Materials 1.10 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall remedy any defect due to fault y material or

workmanship and pay for any damage to other work re sulting there from

within a period of one year from final acceptance. Further, the

Contractor will provide all manufacturers and suppl ier's written

guarantees and warranties covering materials and eq uipment furnished

under this Contract.

33 63 00-7




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E, Grade A, wall thickne ss as indicated in

"Piping Application" Article; black with plain ends for high pressure

steam pipe, except pumped condensate return and hig h pressure condensate

piping shall be schedule 80.

1. Pipe shall be butt welded for sizes 2.5 inches and larger and socket

welded for 2 inches and below. Where possible, stra ight sections

shall be supplied in 40 foot random lengths with 6 inches of piping

exposed at each end for field joint fabrication.

B. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9 and ASTM A234, s eamless or welded.

1. Welding Filler Metals shall comply with AWS D10.12 for welding

materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemic al analysis of

steel pipe being welded.

C. Nipples: ASTM A733, Standard Weight, seamless, carb on-steel pipe.

D. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, suitable for chemical and

thermal conditions of piping system contents, nonme tallic, flat,

asbestos free, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or

specific material is indicated.

1. For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

2. For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel fla nges.

E. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise

indicated.

2.2 PRE-ENGINEERED, FACTORY-FABRICATED, DIRECT-BURIED, DRAINABLE-DRYABLE-

TESTABLE (DDT) SYSTEMS

A. Complete steam and condensate piping system with ca rrier pipes, carrier

pipe insulation with jackets and banding (Pre-Insul ated), air space,

0.25 inch (6.35 mm) thick steel casing, fusion-bond ed epoxy casing

coatings, insulation, HDPE jacket, and accessories. Do not locate

condensate pipes in casings (conduits) that contain steam pipes.

B. All components of system shall be suitable for carr ier pipe pressures

and temperatures as follows:

1. Steam System: 150 psi (1000 kPa); 366 deg F (185 de g C).

2. Condensate System: 50 psi (345 kPa); 310 deg F (154 deg C).

C. Steam Carrier Pipes and Condensate Carrier Pipes:

1. No piping joints are allowed in factory-fabricated straight sections

of pre-engineered direct-buried systems.

33 63 00-8




2. Factory-fabricated direct-buried piping sections th at are a portion

of an expansion loop or bend shall have all welded joints 100%

radiograph inspected.

3. Internal high pressure steam piping shall be standa rd weight carbon

steel, except pumped condensate return and condensa te piping which

shall be schedule 80. Pipe shall be butt welded for sizes 2.5 inches

and larger and socket weld for 2 inches and below. Where possible,

straight sections shall be supplied in 40 foot rand om lengths with 6

inches of piping exposed at each end for field join t fabrication.

Pipe shall be ASTM A53 Grade B Type S Seamless or T ype E ERW.

D. Carrier Pipe Insulation shall:

1. Conform to minimum thickness and type of insulation listed in Tables

1 and 2 below as required for service temperature i n carrier pipe as

listed below.

2. Section A: Steam temperature is 366 deg F (185 deg C), steam pressure

is 150 psi (kPa). Pumped condensate temperature is 300 deg F (93 deg

C). Drip return temperature is 212 deg F (100 deg C ).

3. Provide Class “A” insulation shall be mineral wool.

4. Allowable Carrier Pipe Insulation Type and Minimum Insulation

Thickness:

TABLE 1

Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness mm (inches) For Steam 16 to 408 psi (110 to 2800 kPa) gage

Nominal Pipe Diameter Inches

(mm)

Mineral Wool

4 (100) 1- 1/2

Notes: Insulation listed has passed the 96-hour boi ling water test.

Pipes smaller than 1 inch (25 mm) shall have same i nsulation thickness

as 1 inch (25 mm) pipe.

TABLE 2

Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness inches (mm) For Steam Less than 16 psi (110) gage, Condensate Return

Nominal Pipe Diameter inches

(mm)

Mineral Wool

2 (50) 1- 1/2 (40)

33 63 00-9




Notes: Insulation listed has passed the 96-hour boi ling water test

which indicates that satisfactory performance in un derground service

can be expected. Pipes smaller than 1 inch (25 mm) shall have the same

insulation thickness as required for 1 inch (25 mm) pipe.

E. Insulation Banding and Jacket: ASTM A167, stainless steel bands and

clips, at least 0.5 inches (13 mm) wide, (304 stain less steel), maximum

spacing 18 inches (460 mm). A minimum of two bands is required for each

4 foot (1300 mm) section of insulation.

F. Vinyl-coated fiberglass scrim jacket: Fed. Spec. L- S-125, Type II, Class

2, with 18 x 16 mesh (number of filaments per inch) and made of 0.013

inches (0.335 mm) diameter vinyl-coated fibrous gla ss yarn. Install

bands over the jacket to secure the insulation to t he carrier pipe.

G. Casing: ASTM A139, smooth-wall steel, electric resi stance welded.

Plastic casings are not permitted. Use eccentric co nnectors as necessary

between casing sections to provide continuous gravi ty drainage in bottom

of casing between manholes and between manholes and buildings.

Casing Diameter in. (mm) Minimum Thickness in. (mm) 6 – 46 (150 - 1170) 0.250 (6.35)

H. Casing End Seal Plates with Vents and Drains: ASTM A36, steel, minimum

thickness 0.375 inches (9.5 mm) for casings up thru 12 inches (300 mm)

diameter and 0.5 inches (13 mm) for casings over 12 inches (300 mm)

diameter. Provide 1 inch (25 mm) drain at the botto m and vent at the

top. Construct with threaded steel half couplings. Install threaded

brass plugs in drains.

I. Vent Riser Pipes: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, galvanized , extending through

top of manhole and terminate 12 inches (300 mm) abo ve grade with 180-

degree bend.

J. Gland Seals are not permitted because of the possib ility of water

entering the system thru the gland seal from a floo ded manhole.

K. Provide continuous 1 inch (25 mm) minimum air space between carrier pipe

insulation and casing.

L. Casing coating shall be dual layers of fusion-bonde d epoxy, inner green-

colored layer minimum thickness 0.020 inches (0.5 m m), outer black-

colored layer minimum thickness 0.010 inches (0.25 mm). Rated by coating

manufacturer for continuous service for at least 25 years at minimum

temperature of 230 deg F (110 deg C) and having a c oefficient of

33 63 00-10




expansion similar to that of steel. Coating shall b e applied in

accordance to recommendations of coating manufactur er including surface

preparation. Factory-inspect for holidays and make repairs as necessary.

M. Outer Conduit Insulation and Jacket

1. Conduit insulation shall be spray applied polyureth ane foam having a

minimum density of 2 lbs/cu.ft for the straight len gths and fittings.

2. Insulation thickness shall be 1 inch maximum.

3. Polyurethane foam shall have a minimum initial K va lve of 0.18,

maximum density of 2 lbs/cu.ft and a minimum closed cell content of

90%.

4. Outer jacket shall be 125 mils thick extruded seaml ess HDPE.

N. Coating of end plates and casing (conduit) sections extending in

manholes shall be zinc-rich coating that conforms t o AASHTO M300, Type

IA except that volatile organic compounds shall not exceed 2.8 pounds

per gallon (0.34 kg per liter). The zinc rich coati ng shall be applied

in accordance with the recommendations of the coati ng manufacturer

including surface preparation. No additional top co at shall be applied.

O. Primer and Paint Outer Conduit

1. Primer: Ethyl Silicate inorganic zinc-rich. Primer shall be suitable

for temperatures to at least 750 deg. F.

2. Finish Coat: Additional coat as Ethyl Silicate inor ganic zinc-rich.

P. Carrier pipe guides and supports shall be maximum s pacing 10 feet (3000

mm) on centers, no more than 5 feet (1500 mm) from pipe ends, minimum of

three guides per elbow section. Designed to permit thermal expansion

without damage, provide proper pipe guiding and sup port, and to allow

horizontal movement in two directions as necessary at expansion loops

and bends. Design of guides and supports must permi t continuous drainage

of water in bottom of casing. Pipe insulation shall extend thru the pipe

guides and supports and be protected by steel sleev es. Design of guides

and supports shall be such that no metal-to-metal c ontact exists between

the casing and the carrier pipe. Insulation or nonmetallic material

used to ensure no metal to metal contact shall be d esigned to not be

compressed by the weight of the carrier pipe when f ull of water.

Q. Expansion Loops or Z-Bends

1. Installed in conduit sized to handle indicated pipe movement.

Conduit fittings and straight sections to be large enough to allow

33 63 00-11




expansion and contraction of the system without hav ing the insulation

touch the outer conduit

a. Carrier pipe alignment guides shall be factory-inst alled to direct

movement from expansion within conduit to aforement ioned expansion

loops or z-bends.

R. Anchor plates (provided by manufacturer) shall be A STM A36 steel, welded

to carrier pipe and casing, 0.5 inches (13 mm) mini mum thickness,

passages for air flow and water drainage thru the a nnular air space in

the system. Coated with same coating material as th e casing. Locate 3 to

5 feet (900 to 1500 mm) from piping entrance to manho le or building

wall. Walls of manholes and buildings cannot be uti lized as anchor

points.

S. Field connection of casing sections shall be steel section conforming to

casing specification, welded to casing sections, co ated on all surfaces

with system manufacturer’s coating field repair com pound, and covered

with a 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) minimum thickness polyeth ylene shrink sleeve

designed for a service temperature exceeding 176 de g F (80 deg C).

T. Manhole (steam pit) and building wall penetrations shall provide steel

leak plates welded to wall sleeves or to casings. W here a wall sleeve is

utilized, allow sufficient annular space between th e sleeve and the

casing and install a watertight seal, rated for 250 deg F (121 deg C)

minimum. Manhole and building walls cannot be used as anchor points.

1. Link Seal

a. Provide link seal within building wall or pit wall penetration to

act as a moisture barrier. Pipe system manufacturer shall provide

additional outer jacket stiffing in the wall penetr ation ends of

the pipe to allow for link type seals to be effecti ve in sealing.

This stiffening shall be the same gage as the outer conduit and

extend a minimum of 4 feet from the end of the wall penetration

pipe.

U. Provide sacrificial anode type cathodic protection system with

dielectric isolation devices and test stations for all systems. Design

system for 25 years service, assume two percent bar e metal. System shall

comply with NACE SP0169.

V. Provide embossed brass or stainless steel tag hung by a brass or

stainless steel chain at each end of each conduit o r insulated piping in

the manholes and buildings. The tag shall identify system manufacturer’s

33 63 00-12




name, date of installation, government contract, an d manufacturer’s

project number.

W. All branch piping connections must be located in ma nholes.

X. Accessories for Manholes:

1. See specification section 05 50 00 Metal Fabricatio ns.

a. Steam pit entrance hatch.

b. Steam pit ladder.

c. Steam pit sump basin grating.

Y. Drainage as shown on drawings. Provide a 24 inch (6 10 mm) square by 24

inch (610 mm) deep sump pit in each manhole where i ndicated on drawings.

2.3 STEAM CARRIER PIPING

A. Pipe: ASTM A53, steel, seamless, Grade B or ASTM A1 06, Grade B, electric

resistance welded or ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40 . Standard weight

permitted for pipe sizes 12 inches (300 mm) and abo ve. Grade F, furnace

butt-welded pipe, is not permitted.

B. Joints:

1. In trenches and direct-buried systems: Butt-weld; s ocket weld for

pipe sizes 2 inches (DN 50) and below. Manufacturer ’s standard

sliding gasketed joints are permitted between secti ons of WSL pre-

engineered direct-buried systems. No joints are all owed in factory-

fabricated straight sections of pre-engineered dire ct-buried systems.

Factory-fabricated direct-buried piping sections th at are a portion

of an expansion loop or bend shall have all welded joints 100%

radiograph inspected. All radiographs shall be revi ewed and

interpreted by a American Society for Non-Destructi ve Testing (ASNT)

Certified Level III radiographer, employed by the t esting firm, who

shall sign the reading report.

2. In tunnels, manholes, steam pits and open areas: Bu tt weld pipe sizes

2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and above; thread or socket we ld pipe sized 2

inches (50 mm) and below.

C. Fittings:

1. Butt welded joints: ASTM A234 or ASME B16.9, steel, Grade B, same

schedule as adjoining pipe. All elbows shall be lon g radius unless

otherwise indicated. Tees shall be full size or red ucing as required,

having interior surfaces smoothly contoured.

33 63 00-13




2. Threaded joints: ASTM A47 or ASTM A197 or ASME B16. 3, malleable iron,

300 pound (2050 kPa) class.

3. Socket welded joints: ASME B16.11, forged steel, 20 00 psi (13,800

kPa) class.

D. Flanges and bolts: ASME B16.5, weld neck, forged st eel or ASTM A105,

pressure class 150 psi (1025 kPa). Bolts shall be h igh strength ASTM

A193, Class 2, Grade B8. Nuts shall be ASTM A194.

E. Unions: Pipe 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller shall be threaded, malleable

iron or steel, 300 psi (2050 kPa) class.

2.4 STEAM CONDENSATE CARRIER PIPING

A. Pipe: ASTM A53, seamless, Grade B or ASTM A53 elect ric resistance

welded, Grade B; Schedule 80. Grade F, furnace butt -welded, pipe is not

permitted.

B. Joints:

1. In Trenches and direct-buried systems: Butt weld jo ints. Socket weld

is required for pipe sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and bel ow. Manufacturer’s

standard sliding, gasketed joints are permitted bet ween factory-

fabricated sections of direct buried WSL system. No joints are

allowed in factory-fabricated straight sections of pre-engineered

direct-buried systems. Factory-fabricated direct-bu ried piping

systems that are a portion of expansion loops or be nds shall have all

welded joints 100% radiograph inspected. All radiog raphs shall be

reviewed and interpreted by an ASNT Certified Level III radiographer,

employed by the testing firm, who shall sign the re ading report.

2. In tunnels, manholes, steam pits and open areas: Bu tt weld pipe sizes

2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and above; thread or socket we ld pipe sizes 2

inches (50 mm) and below.

C. Fittings:

1. Welded joints: ASTM A234, steel, Grade B, or ASME B 16.9, same

schedule as adjoining pipe.

2. Threaded joints: ASTM A47 or A197, malleable iron, or ASME B16.3, 300

psi (2050 kPa) class.

3. Socket welded joints: ASME B16.11, forged steel, 20 00 psi (13,800

kPa) class.

D. Unions (Except in Trenches) are allowed on piping 2 inches (50 mm) and

under, 300 psi (2050 kPa) malleable iron or steel.

33 63 00-14




E. Flanges: Weld neck ASME B16.5 or ASTM A105, forged steel, 150 psi (1025

kPa).

2.5 EXPANSION LOOPS AND BENDS

A. Stresses: Less than the maximum allowable stress in the Power Piping

Code (ASME B31.1). Submit shop drawings and stress and anchor force

calculations for all loops and bends. Show location s of all anchors,

guides and supports. Base calculations on 150 psi ( 1000 kPa) and 366 deg

F (185 deg C) for steam line loops and bends and 50 psi (345 kPa) and

310 deg F (154 deg C) for condensate return line lo ops and bends. Base

calculations on actual pressures and temperatures i f they are higher

than those listed above.

2.6 VALVES

A. Gate Valves (ASTM A126):

1. Type 106 shall have:

a. Forged steel body, rated for 300 psi (2050 kPa) at 420 deg F (216

deg C) minimum Class 600 psi (4130 kPa) or Class 80 0 psi (5500

kPa), hardened stainless steel or satellite wedge a nd seats,

threaded ends, OS&Y, rising stem, bolted bonnet.

B. Globe Valves (ASTM A126):

1. Type 204:

a. ASTM B61, bronze body, rated for 200 psi (1375 kPa) saturated

steam, 400 psi (2750 kPa) WOG, hardened stainless s teel disc and

seat, threaded ends, rising stem, union bonnet, ren ewable seat

rings.

C. Check valves (ASTM A126):


a. Bronze body, swing-type, rated for 200 psi (1375 kP a) saturated

steam, 400 psi (2750 kPa) WOG, bronze disc, threade d ends,

regrinding disc.

D. Butterfly valves (ASTM A126):


a. Ductile iron body, wafer style, rated for 125 psi ( 850 kPa), 212

deg F (100 deg C), bronze disc, stainless steel ste m, EPDM liner,

EPDM stem seal and body seal, neck extending beyond pipe

insulation, geared handwheel operator for valves 4 inch (100 mm)

33 63 00-15




pipe size and larger, ratchet handle operator for s maller pipe

sizes.

2. Type 602:

a. Triple-offset, lug or flanged type, carbon steel bo dy, steam

service, rated for 150 psi (1025 kPa) at 500 deg F (260 deg C),

stainless steel nitrided disc, stellite seat, stain less steel

shaft, stainless steel/graphite-laminated seal ring , neck

extending beyond pipe insulation, geared handwheel operator for

valves 4 inch (100 mm) pipe size and larger, ratche t handle

operator for smaller pipe size valves.

E. Valve Applications (Steam Lines):

1. Gate valves, 2 inches (50 mm) and under: Type 106.

2. Globe valves, 2 inches (50 mm) and under: Type 204.

3. Butterfly valves, 2-1/2” and larger: Type 602.

F. Valve Applications (Condensate Lines):

1. Gate valves, 2 inches (50 mm) and under: Type 106.

2. Check valves, 2 inches (50 mm) and under: Type 404.

3. Butterfly valves, all sizes: Type 601.

2.7 STEAM TRAPS

A. Apply at steam line drip points.

B. Construct inverted bucket type with thermostatic ve nt in bucket. Each

type furnished by a single manufacturer. Select the traps for pressures

and capacities as shown or required. Fixed orifice or venturi type traps

are not permitted.

C. Traps: stainless steel bodies. Construction shall p ermit ease of removal

and servicing working parts without disturbing conn ecting piping.

Include stainless steel floats, hardened chrome ste el valves, stainless

steel mechanisms and bi-metallic air vent on invert ed bucket traps.

D. All traps shall include ports for future installati on of monitoring

devices. To facilitate future removal of plugs, rem ove plugs, install

Teflon tape on the threads, and reinstall the plugs .

E. Label each trap at the factory with an identificati on number keyed to

the contract drawings. Label shall be a metal tag p ermanently attached

to the trap.

33 63 00-16




2.8 STRAINERS, Y TYPE

A. Provide as shown on steam and condensate piping sys tems.

B. Include open end removable cylindrical screen and t hreaded blow off

connection.

C. For steam service up to 150 psi (1025 kPa) and at d rip traps, strainer

shall be rated for minimum 150 psi (1025 kPa) satur ated steam; rated for

150 psi (1025 kPa), flanged ends, cast steel, for p ipe sizes above 2

inches (50 mm). Use cast iron or bronze, rated for 250 psi (1725 kPa)

saturated steam, threaded ends, for pipe sizes 2 in ches (50 mm) and

under.

D. For condensate service, strainer shall be rated for 125 psi (850 kPa)

saturated steam, 175 psi (1200 kPa) WOG. Provide 12 5 psi (850 kPa),

flanged ends, cast iron, for pipe sizes above 2 inc hes (50 mm). Provide

cast iron or bronze, threaded ends, for pipe sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and

under.

E. Strainer screen shall be stainless steel, with a fr ee area not less than

2 1/2 times flow area of pipe. Diameter of openings shall be 0.05 inch

(1.3 mm) or less on steam service and 0.06 inch (1. 5 mm) or less on

water service.

F. Include gate type valve and quick couple hose conne ction on all blowoff

connections.

2.9 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Requirements: MSS SP 58 and ASME B31.1.

B. Applies to all piping not in factory-fabricated dir ect-buried system.

All systems shall be completely supported. Arrange supports so that all

loads due to weight, thermal expansion, seismic sho ck (if applicable),

and pressure are transferred from the support syste m to the structure.

The design and location of supports shall at all ti mes prevent excessive

forces, moments, and stresses from being imposed on the equipment,

structure, supported system, and supports. Heated s ystems generally

require resilient or roller/slide supports.

C. Manufacturer Certification: Factory built products of a manufacturer

whose principle business is pipe supports for 20 ye ars. All components

must have published load ratings. For concrete trenches, non-factory

built products that comply with details may be utilized.

33 63 00-17




D. Drawings:

1. Types, sizes, locations, and spacing of all hangers and supports.

2. Roller or slider supports for all horizontal steam and condensate

piping.

3. Special supports including anchors, guides and brac es.

4. If equipment and piping arrangement differs from th at shown on the

drawings, support locations and types shall be revi sed at no cost to

the government.

5. Supports to permit removal of valves and strainers from pipelines

without disturbing supports.

6. Roller hangers and sliding supports on all systems subject to

horizontal movement.

7. If vertical angle of hanger rod exceeds four degree s, rollers or

sliders are required.

8. Loads for all supports. On systems utilizing variab le spring

supports; show the loads at each support by calcula ting the forces

and moments throughout the system.

9. Individual drawing for each hanger assembly showing all components,

sizes, calculated loadings. Provide identification tags, on each

hanger part, keyed to the layout drawings.

E. Components:

1. Roller supports: MSS SP 58, Type 41, 43 and 46. Pro vide vertical

adjustment for Type 41 with threaded studs and nuts adjacent to the

roller.

F. Clevis supports: MSS SP 58, Type 1.

G. Wall brackets: MSS SP 58, Type 33.

H. Pipe stands: MSS SP 58, Type 38.

I. Trapeze supports: MSS SP 58, may be used where pipe s are close together

and parallel, structural steel channels or angles. Bolt roller supports

to steel to support piping subject to horizontal th ermal expansion.

Attach other piping with “U” bolts.

J. Pipe covering protection saddles: MSS SP 58, Type 3 9. Provide at all

support points on insulated pipe except where Type 3 pipe clamp is

provided.

K. Sliding supports: MSS SP 58, Type 35. Welded steel attachments to pipe

and structure with Teflon or graphite sliding surfa ces bonded to the

33 63 00-18




attachments. Provide steel guides, except at expans ion bends, to prevent

lateral movement of the pipe.

L. Pipe racks and miscellaneous supports: ASTM A36, st ructural steel

shapes. Manufactured strut systems are acceptable i f they have the

required load carrying ability.

M. Supports, including all structural steel, in trench es and manholes: Hot-

dip galvanized.

N. Fiberglass Insulation:

1. Preformed piping insulation: ASTM C547, 450 deg F ( 230 deg C).

2. Fitting insulation: ASTM C547, 450 deg F (230 deg C ), with polyvinyl

chloride, Type II Grade GU, and Type III, premolded fitted covering

0.020 inches (0.5 mm) thick.

O. Insulating and finishing cements: ASTM C449, as rec ommended by the

manufacturer for the type of insulation system and service conditions.

P. Insulation bands: ASTM A167, minimum of 1/2 inch (1 2 mm) wide by 0.015

inch (0.4 mm) thick stainless steel.

Q. Aluminum jackets: Minimum of 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) th ick aluminum, 3003

alloy, H-14 temper, with locking longitudinal joint s. Jackets for

elbows, tees and other fittings shall be factory fa bricated to match

material and construction of the straight run jacke ts. Factory

fabricated stainless steel bands shall be furnished and installed on all

circumferential joints. Bands shall be 0.75 inch (2 0 mm) wide on 18 inch

(450 mm) centers. Bands shall be applied with manuf acturers recommended

sealant. Entire system shall be watertight.

R. Service jackets: ASTM C1136, white kraft bonded to 0.001 inch (0.025 mm)

thick aluminum foil, fiberglass reinforced, pressur e sensitive adhesive

closure, beach puncture tested to 50 units, suitabl e for painting

without sizing. Jackets shall have a minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) lap on

longitudinal joints and not less than 4 inch (100 m m) butt strips on end

joints. Butt strip material shall be same as the ja cket. Lap and butt

strips may be self-sealing type with factory-applie d pressure sensitive

adhesive.

S. Pipe covering protection saddles: MSS SP 58, Type 3 9 at all hanger

points except where Type 3 pipe clamps are provided .

33 63 00-19




2.10 BURIED UTILITY WARNING TAPE

A. Tape: 0.004 inch (0.1 mm) thick, 6 inches (150 mm) wide, yellow

polyethylene with a ferrous metallic core, acid and alkali-resistant and

shall have a minimum strength of 1750 psi (12,000 k Pa) lengthwise and

1500 psi (10,300 kPa) crosswise with an elongation factor of 350

percent. Provide bold black letters on the tape ide ntifying the type of

system. Tape color and lettering shall be unaffecte d by moisture and

other substances contained in the backfill material .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. If the carrier pipe insulation has failed (disinteg rated) in an existing

buried piping system, but the system is otherwise s ound, there is an

alternative to total replacement of injecting foam insulation into the

existing system from above grade.

B. Connect new work to existing work in a neat and wor kmanlike manner.

Where an existing structure must be cut or existing utilities interfere,

such obstruction shall be bypassed, removed, replac ed or relocated,

patched and repaired. Piping connections shall be m ade only in manholes,

tunnels or buildings.

C. Coordinate the location of all items of equipment a nd work of all

trades. Maintain operability and maintainability of the equipment and

systems. The contractor at his cost shall perform a ny relocation of

equipment or systems to comply with the requirement of operability and

maintainability.

D. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, steam lines sha ll be graded downward

not less than 2 inches in 40 feet (50 mm in 12 mete rs) in direction of

the flow. Provide eccentric reducing fittings on st eam mains and

branches, (except on vertical piping). Install said fittings to maintain

continuity of grade in bottom of pipeline. Provide risers with drip

pockets and steam traps on steam lines where space restrictions prevent

continuous grading. All steam traps must be located in manholes or

tunnels.

3.2 DEMOLITION

A. Perform work in accordance with requirements for ph asing and the

Drawings.

33 63 00-20




B. Completely remove all pipe, valves, fittings, insul ation, and all

hangers including the connection to the structure a nd any fastenings.

C. Seal all openings in manhole or building walls afte r removal of piping.

D. All material and equipment removed shall become the property of the

Contractor and shall be removed from Government pro perty and shall not

be stored in operating areas.

E. All flame cutting shall be performed with adequate fire protection

facilities available as required by safety codes an d Contracting

Officer’s Representative.

3.3 PIPING APPLICATION

A. HP Steam Piping:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 40, Type S, Gra de B, steel pipe;

Class 125 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

2. NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12 (DN 65 through DN 300): Sc hedule 40, Type

E, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 150 wrought-steel fit tings, flanges,

and flange fittings; and welded and flanged joints.

B. Condensate Piping:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be the following:

a. Schedule 80, Type S, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 125 cast-iron

fittings; and threaded joints.

b. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive or flanged joints.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger shall be the following :

a. Schedule 80, Type E, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 150 wrought-steel

fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded and flanged

joints.

b. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive or flanged joints.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawings indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.

Install piping insulation as indicated.

B. Standing water in the bottom of trench: Remove all water.

C. Pipe Bedding: Minimum 6 inch (150 mm) layer of sand .

D. Clearance: Minimum 6 inch (150 mm) clearance betwee n the pipes.

E. Testing: Do not insulate piping or backfill piping trench until field

quality-control testing has been completed and resu lts approved.

F. Grade:

33 63 00-21




1. Install condensate piping at uniform grade of 0.4 p ercent downward in

direction of flow.

2. Install piping at uniform grade of 0.2 percent down ward in direction

of flow or as indicated on the Drawings.

G. Drain Valves and Air Vents: In conduits, install at low points and air

vents at high points.

H. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system

operating pressure.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branc h connections.

K. Secure anchors with concrete thrust blocks.

L. Connect to steam and condensate piping where it pas ses through the

building wall.

3.5 DRAIN VALVES AND VENT VALVES

A. Provide 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) minimum pipe size drain valves on condensate

return carrier pipes at all low points in manholes. Provide 1 inch (25

mm) minimum air vent valves in manholes at all high points in condensate

return carrier piping.

3.6 PIPE SUPPORT INSTALLATION (IN TRENCHES, TUNNELS, MA NHOLES)

A. Coordinate support locations prior to erection of p iping. Layout

drawings must be available at the site during const ruction.

B. Upper Attachments to Structure:

1. New reinforced concrete construction shall have con crete inserts.

2. For existing reinforced concrete construction, uppe r attachment shall

be welded or clamped to steel clip angles (or other construction

shown on the drawings) that are expansion bolted to the concrete.

Expansion bolting shall be located so that loads pl ace bolts in

shear.

3. For steel deck and structural framing, upper attach ments shall be

welded or clamped to structural steel members.

C. In existing concrete construction, expansion fasten ers may be used for

hanger loads up to one third the manufacturer's rat ed strength of the

expansion fastener. Power set fasteners may be used for loads up to one

fourth of rated load. When greater hanger loads are encountered,

33 63 00-22




additional fasteners may be used and interconnected with steel members

combining to support the hanger.

D. Special Supports:

1. Secure horizontal pipes where necessary to prevent vibration or

excess sway.

2. Where hangers cannot be adequately secured as speci fied, make special

provisions for hanging and supporting pipe as appro ved by the

Contracting Officer’s Representative.

3. Do not attach pipe supports, hangers, clamps or anc hors to equipment

unless specified for that equipment or unless the C ontracting

Officer’s Representative gives written permission.

E. Locate spring hangar units within 1 foot (300 mm) o f the pipe

attachment, except in locations where spring assemb lies interfere with

pipe insulation.

G. Minimum Clearances in Tunnels and Trenches:

1. Floor to bottom of pipe support beam: 2 inches (50 mm)

2. Floor to bottom of pipe insulation jacket: 6 inches (150 mm)

3. Wall to side of pipe insulation jacket: 3 inches (7 5 mm)

4. Ceiling to top of pipe insulation jacket: 1 inch (2 5 mm)

3.7 PAINTING EXPOSED STEEL SURFACES IN MANHOLES, TUNNELS AND CONCRETE SHALLOW

TRENCHES

A. For manholes and walk-through tunnels, provide surf ace cleaning and

preparation and apply prime coat of rust resistant metal primer.

B. For concrete shallow trenches, provide surface clea ning and preparation,

apply primer and finish coat of zinc-rich paint.

3.8 DIRECT-BURIED SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall oversee the deliver, store, in stall and test the

system as per manufacturer’s recommendations. All w ork shall be in

strict accordance with the requirements specified b y the manufacturer.

Printed instructions must be available on site prio r to delivery of

system components. Any changes required to the desi gn and layout of the

system due to site conditions must be approved in w riting by the

Contracting Officer’s Representative. All branch pi ping connections,

valves and drip traps must be located within manhol es.

33 63 00-23




B. Excavation, Trenching, and Backfilling: Perform all excavation,

trenching, and backfilling as required by the syste m manufacturer’s

design. Beach sand or any sand with large amounts o f chlorides is not

permitted. Place system on a 6 inch (150 mm) thick sand bed and backfill

on all sides with 6 inch (150 mm) thick sand as mea sured from outside

the carrier pipe/insulation. Foundation for system must be firm and

stable. Foundation and backfill must be free from r ocks. Concrete anchor

blocks must be installed in undisturbed earth. Back filling must not

commence until elevations have been surveyed and ac cepted and system has

been satisfactorily pressure tested including testi ng of carrier pipes

welds and air testing of casings.

C. Maintain constant slope of carrier pipes as shown o r specified. Prior to

backfilling over the top of the casing, but after r emoval of temporary

supports, Contractor shall measure and record eleva tions of top of

casing in the trench. Elevations shall be taken at every field joint,

1/3 points along each pipe section, and at tops of elbows. These

measurements shall be checked against contract draw ings and shall

confirm that the conduit system has been installed to the elevations

shown on the contract drawings unless approved by t he Contracting

Officer’s Representative. Slope shall be uniform wi thin 0.1 percent.

Measurements shall be recorded by the Contractor, i ncluded in the direct

buried system manufacturer representative’s daily r eport, and given to

the Contracting Officer’s Representative prior to c overing the top of

the casing with backfill.

D. Provide cathodic protection for all steel casing sy stems and all buried

exposed metal. Provide dielectric pipe flanges and unions and isolation

devices at all points necessary. Provide test stati ons at grade on each

section of the piping system. Isolation flanges and unions shall be

rated for the carrier pipe service temperature and pressure.

E. Remove all dirt, scale, and other foreign matter fr om inside the piping

by use of a pipe swab or pipe “pig” before connecti ng pipe sections,

valves, or fittings.

F. Sections of system that have been fully or partiall y submerged in water

must be replaced. Moisture content of insulation du ring installation

shall not exceed five percent by weight.

G. At each casing termination (end plate) in buildings and manholes, plug

the casing drain openings with brass plugs and exte nd 1 inch pipe size




33 63 00-24

galvanized vent pipes (ASTM A53) from the casing ve nts through the tops

of the manholes or 1 foot (300 mm) above the condui t in buildings.

Terminate the outside vents in 180-degree bends.

H. Provide reports to the Contracting Officer’s Repres entative that

include:

1. Daily written report: Prepared daily and signed by the Contractor.

Submit the original report to the Contracting Offic er’s

Representative on the same day it is prepared. Prov ide one set of

field pictures of work daily.

2. Report Contents: State whether or not the condition and quality of

the materials used and the delivery, storage, insta llation and

testing of the system are in accordance with the ma nufacturer’s

recommendations, changes to drawings and specificat ions, any

corrective action that was taken of the system, ide ntify any

conditions that could result in an unsatisfactory i nstallation.

3. Report Certification: Daily reports are to be revie wed, signed and

sealed by the Professional Engineer responsible for the system

installation.

4. Report Submittals and Stop Order: Daily reports sha ll be submitted

with the payment requests. All work must stop if da ily reports are

not furnished and requests for payments shall be de nied if the daily

reports are not furnished.

5. Certification of Compliance: Upon completion of the work and 30 days

prior to final acceptance, deliver to Contracting O fficer’s

Representative a notarized Certificate of Complianc e signed by

principal officers of Contractor, stating that the installation is

satisfactory and in accordance with plans, specific ations, and

manufacturer’s instructions.

6. The Contractor shall retain copies of all the daily reports and the

Certificate of Compliance for 5 years after final a cceptance of the

system by the Government.

I. Sections of system that have been fully or partiall y submerged in water

must be replaced. Moisture content of insulation du ring installation

shall not exceed five percent by weight.

J. At each casing termination (end plate) in buildings and manholes, plug

the casing drain openings with brass plugs and exte nd 1 inch pipe size

ASTM A53 galvanized vent pipes from the casing vent s through the tops of




33 63 00-25

the manholes or 1 foot (300 mm) above the conduit i n buildings.

Terminate the outside vents in 180-degree bends.

3.9 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Beve l plain ends of steel

pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside an d outside of pipe and

fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded joints: ASME B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads . Cut threads full

and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and

restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as f ollows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to extern al pipe threads

unless dry seal threading is specified. Joints made with oil and

graphite pipe joint compound shall have compound ap plied to male

threads only.

2. Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

3. Pipe threads shall be cut to give proper engagement in threaded

fittings. Clean pipe and fittings before installati on and ream pipe

after cutting threads. Threaded pipe shall have cle an-cut threads;

dull or damaged pipe dies shall not be used.

D. Construct welded joints: AWS D10.12, using qualifie d processes and

welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. Branch

connections shall be made with either welding tees or welding outlet

fittings. Welding outlet fittings shall be forged, integrally reinforced

to provide 100 percent pipe strength, beveled for f ull penetration

welding and funneled at inlet for full fluid flow.

E. Flanged joints: Select gasket material, size, type, and thickness for

service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use

suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Gaskets and bo lting shall be

applied in accordance with the recommendations of t he gasket

manufacturer and bolting standards of ASME B31.1. S trains shall be

evenly applied without overstress of bolts. Gaskets shall cover entire

area of mating faces of flanges.

F. Conduit piping joints shall be assembled in section s and finished with

pourable or split insulation, exterior jacket sleev e, and apply shrink-

wrap seals.




33 63 00-26

G. All pipe intersections and changes in direction sha ll be made with

factory-built-reinforced fittings. Field-fabricated fittings and miters

are not permitted.

3.10 INSTALLATION – VALVES

A. Do not locate valve stems below the horizontal cent erline of the pipe.

B. Locate valves to permit access for operation, maint enance, and

replacement.

C. Provide 3/4 inch (19 mm) globe-valved warm-up bypas ses at all steam gate

and butterfly valves 3 inch (80 mm) pipe size and l arger.

D. Provide 3/4 inch (19 mm) gate drains at each side o f steam gate and

butterfly valves where condensate could collect, du e to the slope of the

pipeline, when the main valve is shut.

3.11 THERMAL INSULATION

A. Steam, condensate and drip return piping, other tha n in pre-engineered

direct buried systems, shall be insulated as follow s:

1. Piping in concrete trenches and manholes: Insulated with fiberglass

and aluminum jacket.

2. Exposed piping in walk through tunnels: Insulated w ith calcium

silicate, fiberglass, or cellular glass pipe insula tion, all service

jacket. Condensate return piping may be insulated w ith rigid cellular

phenolic, all service jacket.

3. Piping in manholes: Insulated with calcium silicate or cellular glass

pipe insulation, glass cloth or aluminum jacket.

4. Minimum Insulation Thickness: Insulation thicknesse s given in Table 5

and 6 are minimum nominal thickness.

TABLE 5 Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness inches (mm)

For Steam 16 to 250 psi (110 to 1724 kPa) gage Nominal Pipe

Diameter inches (mm)

MPT-PC MPT- PF

Delta Thermo-12 Super Caltemp

Foamglas

1 (25) 2 (50) 2- 1/2 (63) 4 (100) 4- 1/2 (110) 1- 1/2 (40) 2 (50) 2- 1/2 (63) 4 (100) 4- 1/2 (110)

2 (50) 2- 1/2 (63) 3- 1/2 (85) 4- 1/2 (110) 5 (125) 2- 1/2 (65) 2- 1/2 (63) 3- 1/2 (85) 4- 1/2 (110) 5 (125)

3 (80) 3 (75) 4 (100) 5 (125) 6 (150) 4 (100) 3 (75) 4 (100) 5 (125) 6 (150)




33 63 00-27

TABLE 6

Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness inches (mm) For Steam less than 16 psi (110 kPa) gage, Condensate Return

Nominal Pipe Diameter

inch es (mm)

MPT-PC MPT- PF

Delta Foamglas Thermo-12

Super Caltemp

Insul-phen

1 (25) and under

1-1/2 (35) 2 (50) 3 (75) 1 (25)

1- 1/2 (40) 1- 1/2 (35) 2 (50) 3 (75) 1 (25) 2 (50) 1- 1/2 (35) 2 (50) 3 (75) 1 (25)

Parts not to be insulated are:

a. Threaded valves

b. Steam traps

c. Check valves

d. Unions

e. Threaded strainers

f. Strainer basket removal cover and bolting

g. Dielectric flanges and unions

h. Expansion joints

i. Flexible connectors

j. Ball joints except piping between joints

5. Installation of insulation:

a. Pressure Tests: Complete all pressure tests before installing.

b. Insulation material: New, clean, dry and stored in a clean dry

environment; jacketing materials to be clean and un marred; store

adhesives in original containers. Materials shall n ot have

exceeded the predicted shelf life as set by manufac turer.

c. Identify all materials incorporated in the job on m anufacturer’s

container by name, type and description.

d. Apply materials on clean, dry surfaces from which a ll dirt, loose

scale, construction debris has been removed by wire brushing.

e. The installation shall be neat, thermally and struc turally tight

without sag, neatly finished at all hanger or other penetrations

and shall provide a smooth finished surface primed as required to

receive specified painting.

f. Do not use scrap insulation. Repair any work damage d by welding,

burning, compressing due to concentrated constructi on loads.

g. Apply pipe covering protection saddles, MSS SP 58, Type 39, at all

hanger points. Fill space between saddle and piping with high




33 63 00-28

density insulation, thoroughly packed. Terminate ja cket clear of

saddle bearing area.

h. Insulation and jacket shall terminate hard and tigh t at all anchor

points.

i. Insulation termination at piping facilities not to be insulated

shall stop short, and be finished with 45 degree ch amfered section

of insulating and finishing cement, and covered wit h jacket.

j. Flanged fittings and valves shall be insulated with sections of

pipe insulation cut, fitted and arranged neatly, an d firmly wired

in place. Insulating cement shall fill all cracks, voids and outer

surface for covering with glass cloth. Insulation o f valve bonnet

shall terminate on valve side of bonnet flange to p ermit valve

repair.

k. Fiberglass insulated piping systems fittings over 2 inches (50 mm)

shall be insulated with specified molded pipe fitti ng insulation

or compressed blanket, finished with specified insu lating and

finishing cements and covered with specified PVC fi tting jacket.

On sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and under apply insulatin g and finishing

cements and cover with PVC fitting jacket.

3.12 WELDING (ASME B31.1 AND AWA B2.1-B)

A. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the qual ity of the welding

and shall:

1. Conduct tests of the welding procedures used on the project, verify

the suitability of the procedures used, verify that the welds made

will meet the required tests, and also verify that the welding

operators have the ability to make sound welds unde r standard

conditions.

2. Perform all welding operations required for constru ction and

installation of the distribution system.

B. Welder Qualifications: All welders shall be qualifi ed as per ASME B31.1

and AWS B2.1-B2.1M-BMG.

C. Field bevels and shop bevels: Done by mechanical me ans or by flame

cutting. Where beveling is done by flame cutting, s urfaces shall be

thoroughly cleaned of scale and oxidation just prio r to welding. Conform

to specified standards.




33 63 00-29

D. Utilize split welding rings or approved alternate m ethod for field

joints on all carrier pipes above 2 inches (50 mm) to assure proper

alignment, complete weld penetration, and preventio n of weld spatter

reaching the interior of the pipe. Make field joint s 2 inches (50 mm)

and smaller with welding sockets.

E. Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or othe rwise damaged either

before, during, or after installation. Where the pi pe temperature falls

to 32 deg F (0 deg C) or lower, the pipe shall be h eated to

approximately 100 deg F (38 deg C) for a distance o f 1 foot (300 mm) on

each side of the weld before welding, and the weld shall be finished

before the pipe cools to 32 deg F (0 deg C).

F. Replace and reinspect defective welds. Repairing de fective welds by

adding weld material over the defect or by peening will not be

permitted. Welders responsible for defective welds must be requalified.

G. Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, an d be kept free of

moisture and dampness during fabrication operations . Discard electrodes

that have lost part of their coating.

H. An approved independent testing firm regularly enga ged in radiographic

testing shall perform radiographic examination of a ll field welds in

steam pits, buildings and in walk-through tunnels, in accordance with

ASME B31.1. Furnish a set of films or pictures show ing each weld

inspected, a report evaluating the quality of each weld, and a location

plan showing the physical location where each weld is to be found in the

completed project, prior to installing conduit fiel d joints, trench

covers, backfilling and testing. All radiographs sh all be reviewed and

interpreted by an ASNT Certified Level III radiogra pher, employed by the

testing firm, who shall sign the reading report. Th e Contracting

Officer’s Representative reserves the right to revi ew all inspection

records, and if any welds inspected are found unacc eptable they shall be

removed, re-weld, and radiographically reexamined a t no cost to the

Government.

I. Retain a certified manufacturer field technician to observe and

supervise all field joints, conduit joints and pipe welded within direct

buried piping system. Submit manufacturer’s field t echnician

qualification to Owner for approval prior to test j oint work.




33 63 00-30

3.13 CLEANING OF PIPING:

A. Clean pipe and fittings inside and outside before a nd after assembly.

Remove all dirt, scale, and other foreign matter fr om inside the piping

by use of a pipe swab or pipe “pig” before connecti ng pipe sections,

valves, equipment or fittings.

3.14 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape s during back filling

of trenches for underground steam and condensate di stribution piping.

Locate tapes 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grad e, directly over

piping.

3.15 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Valves: Provide laminated plastic signs, with engra ved lettering not

less than 3/16 inch (5 mm) high, on all isolating v alves on steam and

condensate return system, identifying building or a rea served. Attach to

the valves with corrosion-resistant chains.

B. Pipes: Label service of all pipes in manholes and w alk-thru tunnels.


A. Demonstrate leak-tightness of all piping systems by performing

operational tests. All labor, material and test ins truments must be

furnished by the Contractor. All instruments must b e approved by the

Contracting Officer’s Representative.

B. Provide a test field joint section. Field joint is intended to be a

learning joint. Joint shall be joined, completely t ested and jacketed

in the field with a certified manufacturer’s field technician observing

and instructing the process. Permanent field joints shall not be

attempted until the manufacturer’s technician appro ves the test joint.

C. Retain a certified manufacturer field technician to observe and

supervise all field joints. Submit manufacturer’s f ield technician

qualification to Owner for approval prior to test j oint work.

D. No field joint shall be made without the factory te chnician present.

Field joints that do not meet the manufacturer’s te chnician’s approval

shall be remade until they are satisfactory. Additi onal labor,

materials and manufacturer’s technician time requir ed for additional




33 63 00-31

attempts to make a satisfactory joint shall be prov ided with no

additional cost to Owner.

E. Pressure test direct-buried systems (outer conduit sleeve and inner

sleeve field joint) in conformance with requirement s stated in this

specification and in printed instructions for the s ystem supplied by the

manufacturer.

F. Holiday testing of direct-buried system steel casin gs: Test entire

surface of casings for faults in coating after inst allation in trench

prior to backfilling. Use test method and voltage r ecommended by coating

manufacturer. Repair any holidays found and retest. System shall not be

backfilled until all holidays are eliminated.

G. Before conducting steam system operating test, remo ve steam trap

elements or use bypass connections around traps; th en flush lines with

high pressure water until discharge shows no foreig n matter to the

satisfaction of Contracting Officer’s Representativ e.

H. Steam and condensate carrier piping shall be tested as follows:

1. Use Phased Array Ultrasonic (UT) test to each carri er (service) pipe

weld proceeding with direct-buried insulation and j acketing joint

closure work once test has been approved.

2. Weld test criteria shall be in accordance to ASME B 31.1 current

version.

3. 100% test of all welded joints shall be non-destruc tive tested.

4. Failed welds shall be ground out, re-welded and tes ted welds are

expected. The repair and re-testing shall have no a dditional cost to

the project.

5. After completion of satisfactory test, replace all elements that have

been removed prior to testing.

I. NACE-accredited corrosion specialist shall test cat hodic protection

systems and demonstrate proper operation and protec tion in accordance

with the recommendations and criteria in NACE SP016 9.

J. Steam and condensate conduit shall be tested as fol lows:

1. Following insulation install of carrier pipe, insta ll outer conduit

sleeve. This sleeve shall be welded in place and pr essure tested

with 15 lb compressed air and soap solution bubble check for leaks.

2. Once sleeve is tested and passed the sleeve and wel d shall be cleaned

and painted with two coats of high zinc content pai nt.

K. Field joint shall be tested as follows:

33 63 00-32




1. No test required.

L. Deficiencies discovered shall be corrected at the C ontractor's expense,

to satisfaction of Contracting Officer’s Representa tive. Major

deficiencies or failure to correct deficiencies, to the satisfaction of

the Contracting Officer’s Representative, may be co nsidered cause for

rejecting the entire installation.

M. Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency t o perform tests and

inspections of all pipe welds within steam pit and buildings.

N. Prepare test and inspection reports.

---- E N D ---

Date post:	16-Mar-2022
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	4 times
Download:	0 times